SMC ECOLOGY PNEUMATICS SYSTEM

Transcription

EUROPE
AUSTRIA
SMC Pneumatik GmbH
BELGIUM
SMC Pneumatics N.V./S.A.
BULGARIA
SMC Industrial Automation Bulgaria EOOD
CROATIA
SMC Industrijska automatika d.o.o.
CZECH REPUBLIC
SMC Industrial Automation CZ s.r.o.
DENMARK
SMC Pneumatik A/S
ESTONIA
SMC Pneumatics Estonia OÜ
FINLAND
SMC Pneumatics Finland OY
FRANCE
SMC Pneumatique SA
GERMANY
SMC Pneumatik GmbH
HUNGARY
SMC Hungary Ipari Automatizálási Kft.
IRELAND
SMC Pneumatics (Ireland) Ltd.
ITALY
SMC Italia S.p.A.
LATVIA
SMC Pnuematics Latvia SIA
NETHERLANDS
SMC Pneumatics BV.
NORWAY
SMC Pneumatics Norway A/S
POLAND
SMC Industrial Automation Polska Sp.z.o.o.
ROMANIA
SMC Romania s.r.l.
RUSSIA
SMC Pneumatik LLC.
SLOVAKIA
SMC Priemyselná automatizáciá, s.r.o.
SLOVENIA
SMC INDUSTRIJSKA AVTOMATIKA d.o.o.
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
SMC España, S.A.
SWEDEN
SMC Pneumatics Sweden AB
SWITZERLAND
SMC Pneumatik AG.
UK
SMC Pneumatics (U.K.) Ltd.
ASIA
CHINA
SMC (China) Co., Ltd.
HONG KONG
SMC Pneumatics (Hong Kong) Ltd.
INDIA
SMC Pneumatics (India) Pvt. Ltd.
INDONESIA
PT. SMC Pneumatics Indonesia
MALAYSIA
SMC Pneumatics (S.E.A.) Sdn. Bhd.
PHILIPPINES
SHOKETSU-SMC Corporation
SINGAPORE
SMC Pneumatics (S.E.A.) Pte. Ltd.
SOUTH KOREA
SMC Pneumatics Korea Co., Ltd.
TAIWAN
SMC Pneumatics (Taiwan) Co., Ltd.
THAILAND
SMC Thailand Ltd.
NORTH AMERICA
CANADA
SMC Pneumatics (Canada) Ltd.
MEXICO
SMC Corporation (Mexico) S.A. de C.V.
USA
SMC Corporation of America
SOUTH AMERICA
ARGENTINA
SMC Argentina S.A.
BOLIVIA
SMC Pneumatics Bolivia S.R.L.
BRAZIL
SMC Pneumaticos Do Brazil Ltda.
CHILE
SMC Pneumatics (Chile) S.A.
VENEZUELA
SMC Neumatica Venezuela S.A.
OCEANIA
AUSTRALIA
SMC Pneumatics (Australia) Pty. Ltd.
NEW ZEALAND
SMC Pneumatics (N.Z.) Ltd.
1-16-4 Shimbashi, Minato-ku, Tokyo 105-8659 JAPAN
Tel: 03-3502-2740 Fax: 03-3508-2480
URL http://www.smcworld.com
SMC supports innovations in energy saving
production systems.
As countermeasures for global
warming are coming into effect,
"energy savings" has become a key
theme for corporate reforms.
At the Kyoto Conference on Climate
Change (December 1997), a 6%
reduction of CO2 emissions from the
1990 emission rate was set as a
target to be achieved by 2010. Also,
as amendment of the energy saving
law in Japan suggests, it is predicted
that the trend for energy savings
involving corporations will become
increasingly demanding.
In this climate, SMC will strive for
innovations of production systems
with energy savings in mind. With
cooperation from customers, we will
promote energy saving programs for
pneumatic systems.
© 2005 SMC Corporation All Rights Reserved
Specifications are subject to change without prior notice
and any obligation on the part of the manufacturer.
Proposals for Energy Saving
Pneumatic Systems
SMC'S GLOBAL MANUFACTURING, DISTRIBUTION AND SERVICE NETWORK
Proposals for Energy Saving Pneumatic Systems
CAT.E02-21 B
D-DN
1st printing FR printing JV 120DN Printed in Japan.
This catalog is printed on recycled paper with concern for the global environment.
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 1
Energy Saving Equipment
Actuators
Series MGZ
Series MGF
PFC/QFC valves
Series ASR/ASQ
(Made to Order)
Series ZCUK
Pilot operated 2 port solenoid valve
Direct operated 2 port solenoid valve
Zero differential pressure operated 2 port solenoid valve
Direct air operated 2 port valve
Large 3 port solenoid valve
3 port mechanical valve
Coolant valve
Flow switching 2 port air operated valve
Booster valve
Air blow, Air tool, Non-operation
Air blow, Air tool
Air blow, Air tool
Cooling water
Air purge
Air purge, Paint stirring
Air purge, Non-operation
Air purge
Coolant
Paint stirring
Hydraulic clamp
Page 48
51
53
55
57
58
60
62
64
68
70
71
Air blow
Air blow, Air tool, Coolant
Air blow, Air tool, Air leakage
Air leakage
Air leakage
Air leakage
Air blow, Air tool
Air leakage
Air blow, Air tool
Air blow, Air tool
Actuator
Air blow, Air tool
Actuator
Air line maintenance
Page 74
80
83
104
105
106
107
107
108
109
110
111
113
114
115
116
Auxiliary Pneumatic Equipment/Air Preparation Equipment
Blow gun
Nozzles for blowing/Sensing heads
S couplers
FR double layer tubing
FR double layer polyurethane tubing
Double layer tubing stripper
Polyurethane coil tubing
Tube cutter
Modular type regulator
Pilot operated regulator
Regulator with back flow mechanism
Filter regulator
Filter regulator with back flow mechanism
Air filter element part number list
Differential pressure gauge
Filter with element service indicator
Series VMG
Series KN
Series KK
Series TRB
Series TRBU
Series TKS
Series TCU
Series TK
Series AR10 to 60
Series AR425 to 935
Series AR20K to 60K
Series AW10 to 40
Series AW20K to 40K
GD40-2-01
Sensors/Measuring Instruments
Air line maintenance, Air blow, Air tool, Air leakage, Cooling water
Air line maintenance, Air blow, Air tool, Vacuum
Air line maintenance, Liquid removal, Coolant
Air blow, Air tool
Air line maintenance, Air blow, Air leakage
Air purge
Air purge
Liquid removal
Page 118
154
162
171
173
182
189
Series ZH
Series ZU
Series ZL112/ 212
(Special order product)
Liquid removal
Liquid removal
Vacuum
Vacuum
Vacuum
Liquid removal
Page 226
228
229
234
235
236
Series FG
Series FN1
Coolant
Air line maintenance, Coolant
Page 238
240
Actuator
Actuator
Page 252
257
259
197
203
205
222
224
Vacuum Equipment
Vacuum ejector
In-line vacuum ejector
Multistage ejector
Vacuum ejector with check valve
Pad with check valve
Vacuum ejector for water soluble coolant removal
Industrial Filters
Industrial filter
Refresh filter
Other (CD-ROM)
Model Selection Software Ver. 3.00
Energy Saving Program Ver. 2
SMC Pneumatics CAD System Ver. 2.6
Table of Contents 2
Other
(CD-ROM)
Series PF2A/PF2W
Series ZSE30/ISE30
Series ZSE40/ISE40
Series ZSE3/ISE3
Series ZSE50F/ISE50
Series ISE70/75/75H
Series ZSE5B/ISE5B
Series PPA
(Made to Order)
Series ISA2
Series ISA
Industrial Filters
Digital flow switch
High precision 2-color display digital pressure switch
High precision digital pressure switch
Digital pressure switch
High precision digital pressure switch for general fluids
2-color display digital pressure switch
Digital pressure switch with backlight
Compact manometer
Air leakage tester
Air catch sensor
Air catch sensor
Negative pressure detection valve
Sensors
Vacuum Equipment
Measuring Instruments
Series VXD21/22/23
Series VCA
Series VQ20/30
Series VXZ
Series VXA21/22
Series VP300/500/700
Series VG342
Series VP3145/3165/3185
Series VM1000 VM100/200/400
Series VNC
Series VBA1110 to 4200
Directional Control Equipment
Auxiliary Pneumatic
Equipment
Air Preparation Equipment
Page 2
19
21
23
34
35
36
40
41
42
45
Directional Control
Equipment
(Made to Order)
(Made to Order)
(Made to Order)
Series CCT
Actuator
Actuator
Actuator
Actuator
Air blow
Air blow
Air leakage
Air leakage
Air leakage
Hydraulic clamp
Hydraulic clamp
Actuators
Non-rotating double power cylinder
Guide table
PFC/QFC valves
Air saving valves
Hollow rod cylinders
Free mount cylinder for vacuum
Water resistant air cylinders
Cylinder with heavy duty scraper
Cylinder with coil scraper
Air-hydro booster
Air-hydro converter
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page FM1
Energy Saving Proposals & Energy Saving Equipment List
Proposal 1
Pressure/Flow Control
Flow rate and pressure controls
SMC FLOW SWITCH
SMC FLOW SWITCH
UNIT
UNIT
RESET
RESET
SET
SET
SMC FLOW SWITCH
UNIT
RESET
SET
Proposal 2
Idling
Reduction of air
leakage and air for
purging when
equipment is not
operated.
Master
Air Blow
Reduction of air for blowing
Air blow
Proposal 4
Air gun
Air Tools
Reduction of air for air tools
Impact wrench
(air motor)
Proposal 5
Proposal
6
Air Leakage
Stop air leakage from piping equipment
Air Purging (Air Micro)
Reduction of air for purging
Workpiece
Proposal
7
Page 48
Series VXD21/22/23
60
Series VG342
62
Series VP3145/3165/3185
Blow gun
S couplers
Modular type regulator
Filter regulator
Digital flow switch for air
Compact manometer
Air leakage tester
Series VXD21/22/23
Series VCA
Series VQ20/30
Series VMG
Series KN
Series KK
Series TCU
Series AR10 to 60
Series AR20K to 60K
Series AR425 to 935
Series AW10 to 40
Series AW20K to 40K
Series PF2A
Series ZSE30/ISE30
Series ISE40
Series PPA
(Made to Order)
S couplers
Tube cutter
Air leakage tester
Air cylinder with heavy duty scraper
Air cylinder with coil scraper
Series KK
Series TRB/TRBU
Series TKS
Series TK
(Made to Order)
Series PF2A
Air catch sensor
Air catch sensor
Page 57
Series VXA21/22
64
Series VM1000 VM100/200/400
205
Series ISA2
222
Series ISA
Paint Stirring
Reduction of air consumption for paint stirrer
Stirrer
Paint pump
Paint tank
Front matter 1
Series PF2A/PF2W
(Made to Order)
Series PPA
Series KN
GD40-2-01
Series ZSE30/ISE30
Series ISE40
Series ISE3
Series ZSE50F/ISE50
Series ISE70/75/75H
Series ISE5B
Series FN1
M/C
solenoid valve
Proposal 3
Page 118
203
197
80
115
116
154
162
171
173
182
189
240
114
Digital flow switch
Air leakage tester
Compact manometer
LED display digital pressure switch
Low maintenance filter
(Made to Order)
Series ZCUK
(Made to Order)
(Made to Order)
Page 48
51
53
74
80
83
107
108
110
109
111
113
118
154
162
197
203
256
34
35
Page 83
104
106
107
203
118
36
40
41
Page 58
70
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page FM2
Guide table
PFC/QFC valves
Air saving valves
Model Selection Program Ver. 3.00
Series MGZ
Series MGF
Multistage ejector
Series ZSE30/ISE30 Page 154
162
Series ZSE40
234
235
229
Series ZL112, 212
Vacuum ejector
Linear vacuum ejector
(Special order product) Page 236
Series ZH
226
Series ZU
228
224
Series ZSE50F/ISE50
173
Series ZSE5B/ISE5B
189
coolant pumps
Coolant valve
Industrial filter
Series VNC
Page 68
Series KN
80
Series ZSE50F/ISE50
173
Series ISE70/75/75H
182
Series ISE5B
189
257
Series FG
238
Series FN1
240
Cooling Water
Zero differential pressure operated 2 port solenoid valve
Digital flow switch for water
Series VXZ
Series PF2W
Page 55
118
Air-hydro booster
Air-hydro converter
(Made to Order)
Series CCT
Page 42
45
5 port solenoid valve
Series SY
Front matter 26
Series VQ
Front matter 26
Series VQ20/30
Page 53
Actuators
Proposal 8 Air reduction for
actuators
Series ASR/ASQ
Series AR20K to 60K
Page 2
19
21
23
110
252
259
Lifter
Vacuum
Proposal 9 Air reduction for vacuum ejectors
Suction transfer
Liquid Removal
Proposal 10 Air reduction for
P
liquid removal pumps
Air type liquid
removal pump
Machine
Oil pan
Oil waste
Coolant (Cleaning) Blow
Proposal 11 Power reduction for
Proposal
12
Power reduction for
cooling water pump
Welding gun
Proposal
13
Hydraulic Clamp
Power
reduction for
hydraulic
pump
M
Hydraulic cylinder
Work piece
Hydraulic pump
P
Hydraulic
control valve
Low Power Consumption/Long Service Life
Proposal 14 Reduction of power used for solenoid valve energization
and service life improvement
Low power
consumption
Long
service
life
Front matter 2
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page FM3
Recognizing the current state... First step toward energy savings and improving awareness
To promote energy savings in pneumatic systems, it is necessary to recognize and control the existing system's air consumption and to improve the awareness of energy saving (cost awareness) in the work place.
Based on usage, electric power consumption for
air (compressor) is thought to be 20% of the entire
consumption (Figure 1).
Furthermore, air consumption based on usage is
as shown in Figure 2. It is necessary to understand and control the air consumption for these
usages.
Actuators
10%
Air 20%
Coolant
30%
Air leakage
20%
Other
50%
(Figure 1)
Electric power consumption
Air blow
70%
(Figure 2)
Air consumption
It is said that energy saving measures begin with measurement and end with measurement.
Find out where, how much, and for what purpose the energy is being used.
Then, find out how much can be reduced as a result of improvements.
Effective energy saving improvements can be implemented by recognizing and controlling the current state
of energy consumption and the result of the improvements, entirely with numerical values.
Reason for
improvement
Measurement
Recognize
the potential of
improvement
Recognize
current
consumption
Improvement
Air line maintenance equipment
to recognize the current state
Digital flow switch
Series PF2A
Separately measures air consumption
by facility and by line.
• Measured flow rate: 12000 l (max.)
Measurement
Energy savings
Verify the enegy
consumption
after the improvement
Educational panels to improve
energy saving awareness
Air leakage tester
(Made to Order)
Measures leakage flow rate.
• Measured flow rate: 9999 l (max.)
Air blow
demonstration panel
Air leakage
demonstration panel
Guides the approach to and
improvement methods for air blow.
Air leakage can be heard and felt.
Coolant blow
demonstration panel
Vacuum ejector
demonstration panel
Large fluctuations of energy in the
discharge, caused by the relationship
between the nozzle and upstream
piping system, can actually be
confirmed.
The point where the difference occurs
between a good system and a bad
system can actually be measured.
Demonstrates how suction is
maintained by using an ejector
with check valve.
Air consumption can be
compared with a general
vacuum suction system.
Compact manometer
Series PPA
Measures the workpiece collision pressure.
Calculates air blow rate with flow rate formula.
Front matter 3
Refer to Proposal 1 "Air Line Maintenance" on Front matter 5 for details.
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page FM4
What are energy saving measures?
After improvement
Before improvement
A
B
C
A
B
C
Time
Time
Compressor operation capacity
Peak consumption of A
Consumption of B
+ Consumption of C
Continuous operation of compressor
Compressors
Compressors
Consumption of A: Consumption from equipment operation
1) Cylinder operation
2) Air blow
3) Suction by ejector, etc.
Reduction of consumption by optimizing.
Reduce the peak flow rate for more even
consumption by considering the cycle time and
operating time.
Consumption of B: Consumption from line operation
1) Purge air to prevent intrusion of coolant, etc.
2) Air blow to prevent foreign matter adhesion
3) Down blow inside the painting booth
Reduce consumption in connection with equipment
operation.
Or, hold consumption to the minimum required.
Consumption of C
1) Air leakage
2) Air curtain, etc.
3) Liquid stirring system operation, etc.
Fix air leakage.
Fix the cause of air leakage.
Consider other methods for consumption such as air
curtains that has purpose.
Front matter 4
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Proposal
Page FM5
1
Air Line Maintenance
Purpose
Flow maintenance
Before Improvement
Since the current flow rate based on the usage is not recognized,
the target for improvement and its effect are not expressed in
numerical values and remain unclear.
After Improvement
Effective use of measuring instruments.
Flow rate is maintained with numerical values, and the target for improvement and its effect are clarified.
Equipment
q
Digital flow switch
for air
w
e
Air leakage tester
Compact manometer
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
q
w
Air leakage tester
Main Points
Measure main line and branch line
flow rates.
Measure air leakage rate and air
blow rate
Series PF2A Page 118
Air leakage tester.
(Made to Order)
Page 203
Measure air blow rate.
Compact manometer
Series PPA Page 197
Measures workpiece
collision pressure to
calculate flow rate by
using flow formula.
Related Equipment
Front matter 5
Series KN
P. 80
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page FM6
Purpose
Pressure maintenance
Before Improvement
The importance of regular maintenance for the pressure loss caused by
clogged elements is not recognized. Therefore, a large burden is placed on
the compressor and pump, etc.
After Improvement
Regular maintenance of clogged elements is implemented by mounting pressure
and flow monitoring equipment on each type of filter used on each line.
Sub line
Main line
Main line filter
Series AFF
Reciprocating
air compressor
Aftercooler
(air cooled)
Series HAA
Aftercooler
(water cooled)
Series HAW
Refrigerated air dryer
Series IDF
Air tank
Series AT
Operating line
q Differential pressure gauge
q Differential
pressure gauge
→
IN
Upstream side
→
OUT
Downsteam side
Main Points
q Check clogged elements by using
a differential pressure gauge.
w Element service
indicator
GD40-2-02
Page 115
w Confirm clogged condition visually.
Element service indicator filter
Page 116
e Verify pressure loss.
e Pressure switch
Series ISE40
Page 162
Related Equipment
LED display digital pressure switch
High precision digital pressure switch with backlight
Digital pressure switch for general purpose fluid
Industrial filter
Air filter element list
Series ZSE30/ISE30 P. 154
Series ISE3
171
Series ZSE50F/ISE50
173
Series ISE70/75/75H
182
Series ISE5B
189
Series PF2W
118
Series FN1
240
Series FG
238
114
Front matter 6
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Proposal
Page FM7
2
Non-operation
Purpose
Reduction of air for purging and air leakage when equipment is non-operation.
Before Improvement
Since the compressor is in continuous operation even when the equipment is non-operation,
air is constantly consumed due to air leakage and purging, etc.
Air purge
Air leakage
M/C
After Improvement
Air supply to the equipment is stopped when it is non-operation.
Master solenoid valve
M/C
Main Points
Mount a master solenoid valve to each line and component.
Pilot operated 2 port
solenoid valve
Series VXD21/22/23
Page 48
Effect of Energy Saving Improvement
Air consumption
100%
100%
Reduction
Pilot operated 3 port
solenoid valve
Series VG342
Page 60
Pilot operated
Series VP3145/3165/3185
Page 62
Before
Front matter 7
After
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page FM8
3
Proposal Air Blow
Purpose
Reduction of air consumption for air blow
Before Improvement
Air blow is performed without any attachment at the air outlet.
S2
S1
Effective area ratio
0.5 : 1
Without nozzles
ø4
Pressure loss: Large
ø4
Workpiece
P2
P3
Upstream side S1: 22.6
Nozzle side S2: 45.2
S1 : S2 = 0.5 : 1
Nozzle size (mm)
ø4
Number of nozzles
4
Regulator pressure (P1)
0.4 MPa
Outlet pressure (P2)
0.08 MPa
Collision pressure (P3) ∗
0.002 MPa
∗ The pressure that the work piece receives is called collision pressure.
Effective area (mm2)
P1
S1
S2
After Improvement
Nozzles are attached
S1
S2
Nozzle
ø1.5
3.5 : 1
Pressure loss: Small
ø1.5
Workpiece
P2
P3
Upstream side S1: 22.6
Nozzle side S2: 6.4
S1 : S2 = 3.5 : 1
Nozzle size (mm)
ø1.5
Number of nozzles
4
Regulator pressure (P1)
0.25 MPa
Outlet pressure (P2)
0.225 MPa
Collision pressure (P3)∗
0.002 MPa
∗ The pressure that the work piece receives is called collision pressure.
P1
S1
S2
Air consumption
100%
75%
Reduction
Before
After
Front matter 8
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page FM9
Blowing with Air Gun
Before Improvement
In the case of air guns, energy saving measures are not considered
and the factory line pressure is used directly in most cases.
S1
S2
Pressure Large
loss:
2.3 : 1
ø3
Without nozzle
ø3
Pressure Loss of Air Gun Only
Upstream side S1: 15
Nozzle side S2: 6.4
Nozzle size (mm)
Number of nozzles
Supply pressure
Regulator pressure
Outlet pressure
Pressure loss
S1 : S2 = 2.3 : 1
ø3
1
0.700 MPa
0.300 MPa
0.260 MPa
0.040 MPa
After Improvement
A nozzle is attached to the tip of the air gun.
A regulator is added and pressure control is improved.
Fittings and tubing are changed to those with large effective areas.
S1
S2
Filter
regulator
10.7 : 1
S coupler
Pressure
Small
loss:
Coil
tube
Nozzle
ø2
ø2
Pressure loss
Min.
Reduction
Before
Front matter 9
After
Nozzle size (mm)
Number of nozzles
Supply pressure
Regulator pressure
Outlet pressure
Pressure loss
Nozzle side S2: 2.8
S1 : S2 = 10.7 : 1
ø2
1
0.700 MPa
0.300 MPa
0.297 MPa
0.003 MPa
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page FM10
Main Points
Pressure loss improvement
q The pressure loss has been improved by the straight air flow direction.
Blow gun
Series VMG
Page 74
w Use small size nozzles to improve the effective area ratio with the upstream side.
Nozzles for blowing
Series KN Page 80
e Reduce pressure for optional usage.
Regulator
Series AR
Page 108
Filter regulator
Series AW Page 111
r Improve effective area by changing fittings.
S couplers
Series KK Page 83
Large effective area
Related Equipment
Compact manometer
Air leakage tester
Series VXD21/22/23 P. 48
Series AR425 to 935 109
Series PF2A
118
Series ZSE30/ISE30 154
Series ISE40
162
Series PPA
197
Series TCU
107
256
(Made to Order)
34
Series ZCUK
35
(Made to Order)
203
Front matter 10
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Proposal
Page FM11
4
Air Tools
Purpose
Reduction of air consumption for air tools
Before Improvement
As in the case of air guns, energy saving measures are not considered and the factory line pressure is used directly.
Change in immediate pressure
Pressure (MPa)
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
Time
1 cycle (6 sec)
Impact
wrench
Since the torque for impact wrenches, etc., is determined by the
immediate pressure, a large pressure loss will cause problems such
as torque instability and long cycle time.
After Improvement
Fittings and tubing are changed to those with large effective areas. A regulator is added and pressure control is improved.
Change in immediate pressure
Filter
regulator
Coil
tube
Pressure (MPa)
0.6
S coupler
0.5
0.4
0.3
Before
improvement
0.2
0.1
0
1 cycle (4 sec)
Torque stability
Shortened cycle time
Air consumption
Pressure loss improvement
100%
25%
Reduction
Before
Front matter 11
Main Points
After
Methods and related equipment are the
same as Proposal 3 "Air Blow" on Front
matter 10.
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Proposal
Page FM12
5
Air Leakage
Purpose
Stop air leakage from piping components
Before Improvement
20 to 50% of air consumption is accounted to air leakage.
Since the compressor is in continuous operation regardless of whether equipment is in
operation or at rest, a fixed amount of air is constantly consumed due to leakage from piping.
Air consumption status
Compressor operation status
Tubing, fittings
Couplers
Rubber hoses
Other
Flow rate
ECOPS.qxd
Air leakage is
equivalent to 20 to 50%.
Air
leakage
Air leakage, purging
1
20%
25%
30%
25%
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
Other
Non-operation time
Operating time
Time
Air leakage examples
• Air leakage from One-touch fittings
due to bad cutting surface of tubing
• Air leakage from couplers due
to bad sealing
• Air leakage from tubing due to
chips, wear-out and spatter, etc.
Leakage
Leakage
Leakage
Front matter 12
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page FM13
Main Points
q Select leakage resistant equipment.
S couplers
Series KK Page 83
w Use double layer tubing to prevent
damage to tubing by chips, spatter and
wear-out.
Double layer tubing
Series TRB/TRBU Page 104
Sealed construction
for reduced leakage
Inner tube
Soft nylon
polyurethane
Exterior layer
FR double layer tubing cross section
e Correct tube cutting surface by using
special tools.
Double layer tube stripper
Tube cutter
Series TK Page 107
Series TKS
Air consumption
100%
100%
Reduction
Before
Front matter 13
After
Page 106
Related Equipment
Air leakage tester
(Made to Order) P. 203
Series PF2A
118
36
(Made to Order)
40
(Made to Order)
41
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Proposal
Page FM14
6
Air Purge (Air Micro)
Purpose
Reduction of air consumption for air micro
Before Improvement
An air micro is used on machining equipment to confirm precision after machining.
Air is constantly released regardless of the presence of a workpiece.
Workpiece
After Improvement
The circuit is changed to supply air only when measuring workpieces.
Workpiece
2 port
air operated valve
3 port
mechanical valve
Main Points
Stop the air supply depending on the presence of workpieces.
Series VM Page 64
Series VXA21/22 Page 57
Air consumption
100%
95%
Reduction
Related Equipment
Before
After
Air catch sensor
Air catch sensor
Series ISA2
Series ISA
P. 205
222
Front matter 14
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Proposal
Page FM15
7
Paint Stirring
Purpose
Reduction of air consumption for paint stirrer
Before Improvement
In a painting booth, it is necessary to have the stirrer in operation at all times to prevent paint from coagulating.
Even when the line is not in operation, air is supplied in the same manner as when it is in operation.
Stirrer
Paint pump
Paint tank
After Improvement
The circuit is changed to operate the stirrer with a minimal air supply when the line is not in operation.
Stirrer
Paint pump
Paint tank
Pilot operated
Flow switching
2 port air operated valve
Main Points
Air consumption
Series VKFA332-X1 Page 70
100%
50%
Reduction
Before
Front matter 15
Switch the line flow rate depending on the operating time and non-operating time. After
Series VP300/500/700 Page 58
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Proposal
Page FM16
8
Actuators
Purpose
Reduction of air consumption by actuators
Before Improvement
Cylinder output uses the same pressure for lifting or lowering.
Use of an exterior guide adds extra weight.
After Improvement
By using a double power extension cylinder, a reduction in operating pressure or use of a smaller size
cylinder is made possible.
Use of a large bore tube rod and non-rotating mechanism makes the guide unnecessary.
Main Points
Air consumption
100%
35%
Change to a non-rotating double power cylinder.
Series MGZ Page 2
Reduction
Before
After
Front matter 16
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page FM17
After Improvement
q To reduce the non-working side output for a lifter when the jig weight is heavy and
the workpiece is light
Pressure is reduced in the direction that is influenced by the jig and workpiece load.
When a large load effects both lifting and lowering
Regulator with
check valve
w To reduce the non-workting side output for horizontal transfer or a clamp
A PFC valve is used to reduce pressure in the direction that is not affected by a smaller
cylinder output, such as the transfer retraction side or unclamping side.
PFC valve
Only output to one side is necessary.
QFC valve
Main Points
Reduce pressure on the nonworking side.
(Change to a one side regulated circuit.)
Regulator with check valve
Series AR Page 110
PFC/QFC valves
Air saving valves
Series ASR/ASQ Page 23
Page 21
Related Equipment
Guide table
Model Selection Program Ver. 3.00
Front mater 17
Series MGF
P. 19
252
259
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Proposal
Page FM18
9
Vacuum Ejectors
Purpose
Reduction of air consumption for vacuum ejectors
Before Improvement
Normally, in the case of vacuum ejector suction, air needs to be constantly supplied to maintain the suction of a workpiece.
Standard ejector
Vacuum generation
Assumed to be 2 sec.
After Improvement
Use of an ejector with vacuum holding specification enables stopping air supply to maintain the suction at a workpiece.
Air consumption is reduced by shortening the vacuum generation ti me.
Ejector with
check valve
Ejector unit circuit
Vacuum
generation
Vacuum holding
0.5 sec
–80 kpa
Workpiece
1.5 sec
Note) Since vacuum pressure may drop
due to leakage, etc., use a pressure
switch to maintain the vacuum pressure necessary for the suction of a
work piece.
Main Points
Change to an ejector with built-in check valve.
Air consumption
100%
50 to 75%
Reduction
Before
Vacuum ejector with check valve (Special
order product) Page 234
Related Equipment
Series ZSE30/ISE30
P. 154
Series ZSE40/ISE40
162
INO-3769 (Special order product) 235
After
Front matter 18
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page FM19
Before Improvement
For suction of a workpiece with leakage, a large suction flow is necessary, which in turn necessitates the
use of a larger nozzle size and increased air consumption.
SUP.
EXH.
Leakage
Vacuum pressure (kpa)
Single stage ejector ZH18
Nozzle size
ø1.8
Air consumption
150 l/min
–14
VAC.
55
Suction flow (l/min)
After Improvement
Use of an ejector with 3-stage diffuser construction enables a reduction of the air consumption even with
the same suction flow and vacuum pressure.
Vacuum pressure (kpa)
Multistage ejector ZL112
Leakage
Nozzle size
ø1.2
Air consumption
63 l/min
–14
55
Suction flow (l/min)
Main Points
Air consumption
Multistage ejector
Series ZL112/212
100%
58%
Reduction
Before
Front matter 19
Change to an ejector with
3-stage diffuser construction.
After
Page 229
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Proposal
Page FM20
10
Liquid Removal
Purpose
Reduction of air for a liquid removal pump
Before Improvement
Removal of oil waste accumulated in the oil pan under a machine or conveyor.
The pump is in operation regardless of the amount of liquid and this causes a great energy loss.
P
Air operated
liquid removal pump
• Damage to the diaphragm due to operating
without accumulated liquid
• Clogged check valve due to foreign matter
(chips, etc.)
Machine
Oil pan
Oil waste
After Improvement
Suction method is changed to an ejector operated type and an automatic stop circuit is installed to stop
operation when there is no liquid.
Removal of water soluble coolant
Ejector
Machine
Water soluble coolants are directly
suctioned for removal by the
ejector.
Removal of oil based coolant
Ejector
Tank
Machine
Since oil based coolants are easily
vaporized, they are temporarily
stored in a tank.
Air consumption
100%
70 to 95%
Reduction
Before
After
Front matter 20
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page FM21
Main Points
Start or stop the pump depending on the presence of liquid (waste).
q Suction by an ejector prevents clogging (without check valve mechanism)
Vacuum ejector (for oil based coolant removal)
ZH Page 226
w An automatic shut off circuit prevents operation when there is no liquid.
Circuit example
Discharge
side
Negative pressure
detection valve
Removal side
Related Equipment
Front matter 21
P. 228
Series ZU
Series ZSE50F/ISE50 173
Series ZSE5B/ISE5B
189
05.9.5 11:27 AM
11
Coolant (Cleaning) Pump
Purpose
Reduction of electric power consumption for coolant pump
Before Improvement
Coolant is blown without any attachment at the coolant outlet.
Small diameter piping
Without nozzle
S2
For cutting
(Blade cooling)
S1
For jig
(Reference
surface cleaning)
Washing bed
(Washing chips)
Large diameter nozzle
Effective area
ratio 0.2 : 1
Workpiece
ø20
Pump capacity
P
Pressure
Pressure
Pump head
(electric power)
Proposal
Page FM22
Pressure loss:
Large
Discharge Pump
rate
outlet
Nozzle
outlet
After Improvement
Pressure loss is reduced by attaching nozzles.
Large diameter piping
Small diameter nozzle
S1
With nozzle
S2
Effective area
ratio 2:1
ø6
Pump head (electric power)
ECOPS.qxd
P
Pump capacity
Previous rate
Pressure
Pressure loss:
Small
Discharge Pump
rate
outlet
Nozzle
outlet
Main Points
Improve pressure loss.
Electric power
consumption
Improve the effective area ratio with
the upstream side by using a small
diameter nozzle.
Nozzles for blowing Series KN
100%
Page 80
75%
Reduction
Before
After
Related Equipment
Industrial filter
Series ZSE50F/ISE50 P. 173
Series ISE70/75/75H
182
Series ZSE5B/ISE5B
189
256
Series FG
238
Series FN1
240
Front matter 22
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page FM23
Before Improvement
For bed washing (chip washing), coolant is discharged constantly without any restraint.
For cutting
For jig (Blade cooling)
Nozzle
KN
(Reference
surface cleaning)
Bed washing
(Washing chips)
Coolant flow/cycle
For cutting
Flow rate
For cutting
For jig
For cutting
For jig
Bed washing
P
Bed washing
1 cycle
After Improvement
Bed washing is stopped when blowing for cutting or jig.
Coolant flow/cycle
For jig
P
Bed washing
Flow rate
For cutting
For cutting
Bed washing
For cutting
For jig
The amount
of reduction
is shown by
the shaded
area.
Bed washing
1 cycle
Coolant valve
Main Points
Improve pressure loss.
Supply and stop coolant for bed washing.
Coolant valve
Series VNC Page 68
Electric power
consumption
100%
20 to 50%
Reduction
Before
Front matter 23
After
Related Equipment
Industrial filter
Series ZSE50F/ISE50 P. 173
Series ISE70/75/75H
182
Series ZSE5B/ISE5B
189
256
Series FG
238
Series FN1
240
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page FM24
12
Proposal Cooling Water
Purpose
Reduction of electric power consumption for cooling water pump
Before Improvement
Regardless of operating or non-operating state of a welding gun, cooling water is constantly discharged.
Header
IN
P
P
Pump
OUT
Cooling water tank
Welder
After Improvement
Stop cooling water supply when not welding.
Header
2 port
solenoid valve
IN
P
P
Pump
OUT
Cooling water tank
Welder
Main Points
Electric power
consumption
100%
30 to 50%
Stop the supply of cooling water when not welding.
Zero differential pressure operated 2 port
solenoid valve
Series VXZ Page 55
Reduction
Before
After
Related Equipment
Series PF2W
P. 118
Front matter 24
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page FM25
13
Proposal Hydraulic Clamp
Purpose
Reduction of electric power consumption for hydraulic clamp
Before Improvement
Hydraulic
cylinder
Hydraulic
control valve
A hydraulic unit is used for workpiece clamping when cutting is performed.
M
Hydraulic
cylinder
Workpiece
Hydraulic
control valve
Hydraulic pump P
After Improvement
By performing air-hydro conversion for the clamping process, the use of the hydraulic unit is eliminated.
Cutting feed is electrically driven.
Air-hydro converter
Air-hydro booster
M
M
Workpiece
Hydraulic cylinder
Main Points
Electric power
consumption
Convert to high output hydraulic drive.
Air-hydro booster
(Made to Order)
100%
30 to 50%
Page 42
Reduction
Before
After
Air-hydro converter
Series CCT
Page 45
Front matter 25
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Proposal
Page FM26
14
Purpose
Reduction of power used for solenoid valve energization, and service life improvement
After Improvement
Electric power used for solenoid valve energization is reduced by using low power consumption
solenoid valves.
Also, the use of a metal seal construction improves the service life.
Main Points
Series SY
0.35 W/0.1 W
(with energy saving circuit)
Series VQ/Metal seal
0.5 W(21 mA, 24 VDC)
200 million cycles ∗
Series VQ20/30
2.5 W
(104 mA, 24 VDC)
20 million cycles ∗
∗ These values are based on SMC life test conditions.
For more details refer to Best Pneumatics 2004 catalog Vol. 1/2/17.
Front matter 26
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Front matter 27
Page FM27
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 1
Actuators
Actuators
Guide table
PFC/QFC valves
Air saving valves
Air-hydro booster
Air-hydro converter
Series
Application
MGZ
MGF
PFC/QFC valves
ASR/ASQ
(Made to Order)
ZCUK
Actuator
Actuator
Actuator
Actuator
Air blow
Air blow
Air leakage
(Made to Order)
(Made to Order)
(Made to Order)
CCT
Air leakage
Air leakage
Hydraulic clamp
Hydraulic clamp
Page
2
19
21
23
34
35
36
40
41
42
45
1
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 2
Non-rotating Double
Power Cylinder
Series MGZ
Actuator
ø40, ø50, ø63
Front end lock type and mounting brackets
now available
• End lock holds the rod when extended
• Transaxial foot style, front flange style and rear flange style
New
Non-rotation guide
is unnecessary !
Slide key x 2
Long stroke capability with space savings
Employs a large bore tube rod up
to 80% of the cylinder's external
square dimension plus slide
bearings. In addition, a built-in
non-rotation mechanism using
slide keys allows direct mounting
of loads.
Strokes up to 1000 mm are possible.
The overall cylinder length is not two or more times the stroke length,
as is the case with conventional double output cylinders (tandem type).
Tube rod
diameter
External square
dimension
(Approx. 30%
reduction)
Double output power for extension!
Air pressure supplied from A operates on surfaces q and w. (extension)
q
w
A B
Clean external appearance
Auto switches are contained in grooves on four sides
Air pressure supplied from B operates on surface e. (retraction)
e
A B
Piping is centralized on the head cover.
Mounting accuracy improved
Positioning holes are provided on the workpiece mounting surface for
easy alignment.
Regulator with check valve is unnecessary
A regulator with check valve normally required for a lifting circuit
becomes unnecessary.
Applications
Pressing
High strength with space savings
Gripping
Pusher
Moment resistance is equal to that of a guide cylinder (cylinder + two guide shafts).
Furthermore, the mounting cross section is reduced by approximately 40%.
Shooter
Lifter
2
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 3
Non-rotating Double Power Cylinder
MGZ
Series
How to Order
MGZ
Standard Type
40 Z
100
Y7BW
Number of auto switches
Mounting
Nil
2 pcs.
1 pc.
Nil
S
Actuators
L
F
G
Basic style
Transaxial foot style
Front flange style
Rear flange style
Auto switch type
Bore size
40
50
63
Nil
40 mm
50 mm
63 mm
∗ Select applicable auto switch
models from the table below.
∗ Auto switches are shipped together,
(but not assembled).
Coil scraper
Nil
Z
Without auto switch
(Built-in magnet cylinder)
Stroke (mm)
Refer to the standard stroke table.
None
Yes
Applicable Auto Switches: Direct Mount Type
Auto switch model
Load voltage
Reed
switch
Type
Special
function
—
Electrical
entry
Wiring
(output)
Indicator
light
Grommet
DC
In-line
0.5
(Nil)
3
(L)
5
(Z)
Applicable load
—
5V
—
—
Z76
—
IC circuit
2-wire
24 V
12 V
100 V
—
Z73
—
Y69A
Y59A
Y7PV
Y7P
5 V, 12 V
3-wire (PNP)
2-wire
3-wire (NPN) 24 V
Yes
Diagnostic
indication
(2 color indicator)
3-wire (PNP)
2-wire
Water resistant
(2 color indicator)
Note 1) Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ......... Nil
3 m ......... L
5 m ......... Z
Perpendicular
—
Yes
—
Grommet
Lead wire length (m)∗
3-wire (NPN)
3-wire (NPN)
Solid state switch
AC
Electrical entry direction
12 V
—
5 V, 12 V
12 V
Y69B
Y59B
Y7NWV
Y7NW
Y7PWV
Y7PW
Y7BWV
Y7BW
—
Y7BA
—
Relay, PLC
IC circuit
—
Relay,
PLC
IC circuit
—
(Example) Y59B
Y59BL
Y59BZ
Note 2) Solid state switches marked with a "" symbol are produced upon receipt of order.
Note 3) When later installing auto switches on a cylinder ordered without auto switches,
the switch spacers in the table below are necessary.
Switch spacer
Switch Spacer
Applicable bore size (mm)
Switch spacer
40, 50, 63
BMP1-032
Mounting Bracket Part No.
Bore size (mm)
40
50
60
Foot
MGZ-L04
MGZ-L05
MGZ-L06
Flange
MGZ-F04
MGZ-F05
MGZ-F06
3
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Series
Page 4
MGZ
Specifications
40
Bore size (mm)
Action
50
63
Double acting, Single rod
Fluid
Air
1.5 MPa
Proof pressure
1.0 MPa
Maximum operating pressure
Standard stroke: 0.08 MPa
Minimum operating pressure
Long stroke: 0.12 MPa
Without auto switch: –10 to 70°C (with no freezing)
Ambient and fluid temperature
With auto switch: –10 to 60°C (with no freezing)
Lubrication
Non-lube
Extending: 50 to 700 mm/s
Piston speed
Retracting: 50 to 450 mm/s
+1.4
to 250 +1.0
0 , 251 to 1000 0
Stroke length tolerance
Cushion
Rubber bumper
Thread tolerance
JIS class 2
Port size
Rc 1/4
Mounting
Basic style, Transaxial foot style, Front flange style, Rear flange style
Standard Stroke
Bore size (mm)
40, 50, 63
Standard stroke (mm)
Long stroke (mm)
75, 100, 125, 150, 175
350, 400, 450, 500, 600
200, 250, 300
700, 800, 900,1000
Intermediate strokes and strokes of less than 75 mm can also be manufactured.
Weight
(kg)
Bore size (mm)
Standard weight
Additional weight per 50 mm of stroke
Basic style
Foot style
Flange style
All brackets
40
50
63
1.90
2.39
2.34
0.39
3.03
3.92
3.79
0.59
4.83
6.08
5.83
0.78
Theoretical Output
Model
MGZ40
MGZ50
MGZ63
4
Bore size
(mm)
45 x 40
40
55 x 50
50
68 x 63
63
(N)
Rod size Operating Piston area
(mm)
direction
(mm2)
20
25
32
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
2533
942
3848
1473
5945
2313
0.2
507
188
770
295
1189
463
0.3
760
283
1154
442
1784
694
0.4
1013
377
1539
589
2378
925
Operating pressure (MPa)
0.7
0.6
0.5
1773
1520
1267
659
565
471
2694
2309
1924
1031
884
737
4162
3567
2973
1619
1388
1157
0.8
2026
754
3078
1178
4756
1850
0.9
2280
848
3463
1326
5351
2082
1.0
2533
942
3848
1473
5945
2313
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 5
MGZ
Series
Dimensions
Basic style
GA
2-RcP
Y
Y
GB
Actuators
øXAH7 depth XL
4-MM depth M
+0.2
0
øD
øI
2 x 4-J
E
MB
KA
MC
C
K
B
MA
N
N
S + Stroke
H
ZZ + Stroke
Allowable angle displacement of E to B is ±1.5°.
(mm)
Bore size
(mm)
Stroke range
B
C
D
E
KA
GA
GB
H
I
J
K
M
40
50
63
to 1000
to 1000
to 1000
59
71
82
46
55
66
45
55
68
21
26
32
36
46
53
34.5
40
46.5
23.5
28
34.5
40
45
50
78
92
110
M6 x 1.0
M8 x 1.25
M8 x 1.25
25
25
25
10
14
14
Bore size
(mm)
Stroke range
MA
MB
MC
MM
N
P
S
XA
XL
Y
ZZ
40
50
63
to 1000
to 1000
to 1000
16
16
16
4
5
5
12
15
15
M6 x 1.0
M8 x 1.25
M8 x 1.25
44
50
56
1/4
1/4
1/4
138
150
171
12
16
16
6
6
6
9.5
12.5
15
178
195
221
5
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Series
Page 6
MGZ
Dimensions: With Mounting Bracket
Transaxial foot style: (L)
LH
LT
LY
4-øLD through
X/2
X
X
Y
LX
LS + Stroke
LZ
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size
(mm)
Stroke range
X
Y
z
LH
LT
LX
LY
LZ
LS
ZZ
40
50
63
to 1000
to 1000
to 1000
24
32
36
0
1
3
9
11
13
34
40
47
19
22
24
80
96
110
63.5
75.5
88
100
120
140
138
148
165
190
210
236
Front flange style: (F)
B
FY
4-øFD
FX
FT
(mm)
FZ
Rear flange style: (G)
Bore size
(mm)
Stroke range
B
FD
FT
FX
FY
FZ
40
50
63
to 1000
to 1000
to 1000
74
78
100
9
9
12
12
16
16
80
100
112
58
61
75
100
125
138
B
FY
4-øFD
FT
FX
FZ
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
6
Bore size
(mm)
Stroke range
B
FD
FT
FX
FY
FZ
ZZ
40
50
63
to 1000
to 1000
to 1000
74
78
100
9
9
12
12
16
16
80
100
112
58
61
75
100
125
138
190
211
237
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 7
Series
MGZ
Construction
y
@0 q o @2 i
r t !7 @4 @1 e u !9 !8 @5
@3 w !6 !5
!1 !2 !0
Actuators
@6
!3 !4
With coil scraper
Component Parts
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Description
Rod cover
Head cover
Cylinder tube
Piston rod
Tube rod
Tube rod cover
Piston
Stationary piston
Bushing
Thrust plate
Holder
Pin
Tie-rod
Material
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Carbon steel pipe
Carbon steel
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Lead bronze casting
Lead bronze casting
Aluminum alloy
Carbon steel
Carbon steel
Note
Clear anodized
Clear anodized
Hard anodized
Hard anodized
Hard chrome plated
Electroless nickel plated
Chromated
Chromated
Chromated
Zinc chromated
Corrosion resistant chromated
No.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20∗
21
22
23
24
25∗
26
Material
Description
Note
Tie-rod nut
Nickel plated
Carbon steel
Hexagon socket head cap screw Chrome molybdenum steel Nickel plated
Spring washer
Nickel plated
Steel wire
Bumper
Urethane
Wear ring
Resin
Magnet
Magnetic material
Rod seal A
NBR
Rod seal B
NBR
Piston seal
NBR
Piston gasket
NBR
Tube rod gasket
NBR
Cylinder tube gasket
NBR
Coil scraper
Metal
Replacement Parts: Seal Kit
Bore size (mm)
40
50
63
Kit no.
MGZ40-PS
MGZ50-PS
MGZ63-PS
Content
A set of above
nos. 20 and 25.
∗ Seal kits consist of a set of items 20 and 25, which can be ordered using the
seal kit number for each bore size.
7
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Series
Page 8
MGZ
How to Order
MGZ
With End Lock
40
100 R
Y7BW
Mounting
Nil
L
F
G
S
Auto switch type
Nil
Without auto switch
Bore size
40
50
63
2 pcs.
1 pc.
Nil
Basic style
Front flange style
Rear flange style
40 mm
50 mm
63 mm
With front end lock
Stroke (mm)
Refer to the standard stroke table.
Applicable Auto Switches: Direct Mount Type
Auto switch model
Load voltage
Reed
switch
Type
Special
function
—
Electrical
entry
Wiring
(output)
Indicator
light
Grommet
DC
In-line
0.5
(Nil)
3
(L)
5
(Z)
—
—
Z76
—
IC circuit
2-wire
24 V
12 V
100 V
—
Z73
—
Y69A
Y59A
Y7PV
Y7P
Yes
2-wire
3-wire (NPN) 24 V
3-wire (PNP)
2-wire
Water resistant
(2-color indicator)
5 V, 12 V
12 V
—
5 V, 12 V
12 V
Y69B
Y59B
Y7NWV
Y7NW
Y7PWV
Y7PW
Y7BWV
Y7BW
—
Y7BA
—
(Example) Y59B
Y59BL
Y59BZ
Note 2) Solid state switches marked with a "" symbol are produced upon receipt of order.
Note 3) When later installing auto switches on a cylinder ordered without auto switches,
the switch spacers in the table below are necessary.
Switch Spacer
40, 50, 63
BMP1-032
Bore size (mm)
8
—
Yes
Diagnostic
indication
(2-color indicator)
Switch spacer
Applicable load
5V
3-wire (PNP)
Note 1) Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ......... Nil
3 m ......... L
5 m ......... Z
Perpendicular
—
—
Grommet
3-wire (NPN)
3-wire (NPN)
Solid state switch
AC
Electrical entry direction
40
50
63
Foot
MGZ-L04
MGZ-L05
MGZ-L06
Flange
MGZ-F04
MGZ-F05
MGZ-F06
Switch spacer
Relay, PLC
IC circuit
—
IC circuit
—
Relay,
PLC
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 9
Series
MGZ
Cylinder Specifications
40
Bore size (mm)
Action
50
63
Fluid
Air
1.5 MPa
Proof pressure
1.0 MPa
0.2 MPa∗
Without auto switch: –10 to 70°C (with no freezing)
With auto switch: –10 to 60°C (with no freezing)
Lubrication
Actuators
Non-lube
Extending: 50 to 700 mm/s
Piston speed
Retracting: 50 to 450 mm/s
+1.4
to 250 +1.0
0 , 251 to 1000 0
Cushion
Rubber bumper
Thread tolerance
JIS class 2
Port size
Rc 1/4
Mounting
Basic style, Transaxial foot style, Front flange style, Rear flange style
∗ Except for the lock section, the minimum operating pressure is 0.08 MPa (0.12 MPa for long strokes).
Lock Specifications
End lock position
ø40
1770
Holding force (maximum)
N
Backlash
Manual release
Front only
ø50
2690
2mm or less
Non-locking type
ø63
4160
Adjust an auto switch's position so that it operates for movement to both the stroke end and backlash (2 mm) positions.
Standard Stroke
Bore size (mm)
40, 50, 63
Long stroke (mm)
75, 100, 125, 150, 175
350, 400, 450, 500, 600
200, 250, 300
700, 800, 900, 1000
Intermediate strokes and strokes of less than 75 mm can also be manufactured.
Weight
(kg)
Bore size (mm)
Standard weight
Additional weight per 50 mm of stroke
Basic style
Foot style
Flange style
All brackets
40
50
63
2.80
3.29
3.24
0.41
4.08
4.97
4.84
0.61
6.13
7.39
7.13
0.80
Theoretical Output
Model
MGZ40
MGZ50
MGZ63
Bore size
(mm)
45 x 40
40
55 x 50
50
68 x 63
63
direction
(mm)
(mm2)
OUT
2533
20
IN
942
OUT
3848
25
IN
1473
OUT
5945
32
IN
2313
(N)
0.2
507
188
770
295
1189
463
0.3
760
283
1154
442
1784
694
0.4
1013
377
1539
589
2378
925
0.5
0.6
0.7
1267
1520
1773
471
565
659
1924
2309
2694
737
884
1031
2973
3567
4162
1157
1388
1619
0.8
2026
754
3078
1178
4756
1850
0.9
2280
848
3463
1326
5351
2082
1.0
2533
942
3848
1473
5945
2313
9
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Series
Page 10
MGZ
Construction
y@9 qo #1i rt
@4 !7 #3 #0 @3 ue@6 !9!8#4$0#9 @5 #2w!6!5
!3
!1 !2 !0
!4
#7@1#5@2 @8@#
7 @
6 #
0 8
End lock
Component Parts
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Description
Rod cover
Head cover
Cylinder tube
Piston rod
Tube rod
Tube rod cover
Piston
Stationary piston
Bushing
Thrust plate
Holder
Pin
Tie-rod
Tie-rod nut
Material
Note
Aluminum alloy
Clear anodized
Aluminum alloy
Clear anodized
Aluminum alloy
Hard anodized
Aluminum alloy
Hard anodized
Carbon steel pipe
Hard chrome plated
Carbon steel
Aluminum alloy
Chromated
Aluminum alloy
Chromated
Lead-bronze casting
Lead-bronze casting
Aluminum alloy
Chromated
Carbon steel
Zinc chromated
Carbon steel
Carbon steel
Nickel plated
Hexagon socket head cap screw Chrome molybdenum steel
Nickel plated
Spring washer
Steel wire
Nickel plated
Bumper
Urethane
Wear ring
Resin
Magnet
Magnetic material
Cap
Bronze alloy
Bore size (mm)
Kit no.
Content
40
MGZ40R-PS
A set of above nos.
29, 34, 35, 36,
50
MGZ50R-PS
37, 38, 39 and 40.
63
MGZ63R-PS
∗ Seal kits consist of a set of items 29 and 34 through 40, which can be ordered
using the seal kit number for each bore size.
10
No.
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29 ∗
30
31
32
33
34 ∗
35 ∗
36 ∗
37 ∗
38 ∗
39 ∗
40 ∗
Description
Lock holder
Lock piston
Stopper
Collar
Port block
Pipe
Lock spring
Rubber cap
Rod seal A
Rod seal B
Piston seal
Piston gasket
Tube rod gasket
Lock piston seal A
Lock piston seal B
Lock piston seal C
Lock holder gasket
Port block gasket
Pipe gasket
Material
Note
Stainless steel
Quenched, Hard chrome plated
Carbon steel
Quenched
Carbon steel
Lead-bronze casting
Bronze alloy
Bronze alloy
Steel wire
Synthetic rubber
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 11
Series
MGZ
Dimensions
Basic style
DL
GA
2-Rc P
Y
Y
WL
LM
øI
øD
HR
LL
2 x 4-J
E
MB
KA
MA
MC
C
NB
K
B
N
S + Stroke
H
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size
(mm)
Stroke
range
B
C
D
DL
E
GA
GB
H
HR
I
J
K
KA
LL
LM
40
50
63
to 1000
to 1000
to 1000
59
71
82
46
55
66
45
55
68
58
67
73
21
26
32
34.5
40
46.5
23.5
28
34.5
40
45
50
57.5
63.5
69
78
92
110
M6 x 1.0
M8 x 1.25
M8 x 1.25
25
25
25
36
46
53
30
30
30
30
30
30
Bore size
(mm)
Stroke
range
M
MA
MB
MC
MM
N
NB
P
S
XA
XL
Y
WL
WM
ZZ
to 1000
to 1000
to 1000
10
14
14
16
16
16
4
5
5
12
15
15
M6 x 1.0
M8 x 1.25
M8 x 1.25
44
50
56
74
83
89
1/4
1/4
1/4
168
183
204
12
16
16
6
6
6
9.5
12.5
15
42
42
52
39
42
52
208
228
254
40
50
63
11
Actuators
øXAH7 depth XL+0.2
0
4-MM depth M
WM
GB
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Series
Page 12
MGZ
LT
LH
LY
4-øLD through
X/2
X
X
Y
LX
LZ
LS + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size
(mm)
Stroke range
X
Y
LD
LH
LT
LX
LY
LZ
LS
ZZ
40
50
63
to 1000
to 1000
to 1000
24
32
36
0
1
3
9
11
13
34
40
47
19
22
24
80
96
110
63.5
75.5
88
100
120
140
168
181
198
220
243
269
FY
B
4-øFD
FX
FZ
FT
(mm)
Bore size
(mm)
Stroke range
B
FD
FT
FX
FY
FZ
40
50
63
to 1000
to 1000
to 1000
74
78
100
9
9
12
12
16
16
80
100
112
58
61
75
100
125
138
FY
B
4-øFD
FX
FZ
FT
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
12
Bore size
(mm)
Stroke range
B
FD
FT
FX
FY
FZ
ZZ
40
50
63
to 1000
to 1000
to 1000
74
78
100
9
9
12
12
16
16
80
100
112
58
61
75
100
125
138
220
244
270
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 13
Double Power Cylinder (Without
non-rotating mechanism)
Series MGZR ø40, ø50, ø63
Actuator
How to Order
MGZ R
Standard Type
40
100
Y7BW
Without non-rotating mechanism
Nil
Nil
L
F
G
D
Auto switch type
Basic style
Front flange style
Rear flange style
Double clevis style
Nil
Without auto switch
∗ For the applicable auto switch model,
refer to the table below.
Bore size
40
50
63
2 pcs.
1 pc.
Actuators
S
Mounting
40 mm
50 mm
63 mm
Stroke (mm)
Refer to “Standard Stroke” on the next page.
Solid state switch
Reed
switch
Type
Special function
Electrical
entry
Indicator
light
Applicable Auto Switches
Load voltage
Wiring
(Output)
DC
AC
3-wire
5V
—
—
Grommet Yes (NPN equiv)
100 V
24 V 12 V
2-wire
3-wire (NPN)
5 V,12 V
3-wire (PNP)
—
12 V
2-wire
—
Grommet Yes 3-wire (NPN) 24 V
5
V,12
V
Diagnostic indication
3-wire (PNP)
(2-color indication)
12 V
2-wire
Improved water resistance
—
(2-color indication)
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ···············Nil (Example) Y59A
3 m ··············· L (Example) Y59AL
5 m ··············· Z (Example) Y59AZ
Auto switch model
Pre-wired
0.5
3 5
(Nil)
(L) (Z) connector
Perpendicular
In-line
—
Z76
—
—
—
Y69A
Y7PV
Y69B
Y7NWV
Y7PWV
Y7BWV
Z73
Y59A
Y7P
Y59B
Y7NW
Y7PW
Y7BW
—
—
Y7BA
—
Applicable load
IC
—
circuit
— Relay, PLC
IC
circuit
—
IC
circuit
Relay
PLC
—
∗ Solid state switches marked “” are produced upon receipt of order.
• Retrofitting of an auto switch on a clinder that is originally ordered without one requires a switch spacer per the table below.
Switch spacer
Switch Spacer
40, 50, 63
Switch spacer
BMP1-032
Bore size(mm)
Foot
40
50
63
MGZ-L04
MGZ-L05
MGZ-L06
Flange
MGZ-F04
MGZ-F05
MGZ-F06
Double clevis Note 1)
MGZ-D04
MGZ-D05
MGZ-D06
Note 1) Double clevis bracket is provided with clevis pins and cotter pins.
13
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Series
Page 14
MGZR
Specifications
40
Bore size (mm)
50
Action
63
Fluid
Air
Proof pressure
1.5 MPa
Max. operating pressure
1.0 MPa
Standard stroke: 0.08 MPa
Min. operating pressure
Long stroke: 0.12 MPa
Without auto switch: –10° to 70°C (With no freezing)
With auto switch: –10° to 60°C (With no freezing)
Lubrication
Non-lube
OUT: 50 to 700 mm/s
Piston speed
IN: 50 to 450 mm/s
+1.4
Up to 250 +1.0
0 , 251 to 1000 0
Cushion
Rubber bumper
Screw tolerance
JIS class 2
Port size
Rc 1/4
Mounting
Basic style, Transaxial foot style, Front flange style
Rear flange style, Double clevis style
Standard Stroke
Bore sizes (mm)
40, 50, 63
Long stroke (mm)
75, 100, 125, 150, 175
350, 400, 450, 500, 600
200, 250, 300
700, 800, 900,1000
Intermediate strokes and strokes shorter than 75 mm are also available.
Weight
(kg)
Bore size (mm)
Standard weight
Weight per each
50 mm of stroke
Basic style
Foot style
Flange style
Double clevis style
All mounting
brackets
40
50
63
1.91
2.39
2.34
2.19
3.03
3.92
3.79
3.47
4.83
6.08
5.83
5.62
0.39
0.59
0.78
Theoretical Output
Model
MGZR40
MGZR50
MGZR63
14
Bore size
(mm)
45 x 40
40
55 x 50
50
68 x 63
63
(N)
(mm)
direction
(mm2)
20
25
32
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
2533
942
3848
1473
5945
2313
0.2
507
188
770
295
1189
463
0.3
760
283
1154
442
1784
694
0.4
1013
377
1539
589
2378
925
0.7
0.6
0.5
1773
1520
1267
659
565
471
2694
2309
1924
1031
884
737
4162
3567
2973
1619
1388
1157
0.8
2026
754
3078
1178
4756
1850
0.9
2280
848
3463
1326
5351
2082
1.0
2533
942
3848
1473
5945
2313
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 15
Double Power Cylinder
(Without non-rotating mechanism)
Series
MGZR
Dimensions
Basic style
GA
2-Rc P
Y
GB
Y
Actuators
MM depth M
øD
øI
2 x 4-J
MB
KA
MC
C
K
B
MA
N
N
S + Stroke
H
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size
(mm)
Stroke
range
40
50
63
to 1000
to 1000
to 1000
B C
59
71
82
46
55
66
D
KA
GA GB
H
I
J
K
M
45
55
68
36
46
53
34.5 23.5
40 28
46.5 34.5
40
45
50
78
92
110
M6 x 1.0
M8 x 1.25
M8 x 1.25
25
25
25
30
35
35
MA MB MC
16
16
16
4
5
5
12
15
15
MM
N
P
M16 x 2
M20 x 2.5
M20 x 2.5
44
50
56
1/4
1/4
1/4
S
Y
ZZ
138 9.5 178
150 12.5 195
171 15
221
15
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Series
Page 16
MGZR
LH
LT
LY
4-øLD through
X
2
X
X
Y
LX
LS + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
LZ
(mm)
Bore size
(mm)
Stroke
range
X
Y
LD
LH
LT
LX
LY
LZ
LS
ZZ
40
50
63
to 1000
to 1000
to 1000
24
32
36
0
1
3
9
11
13
34
40
47
19
22
24
80
96
110
63.5
75.5
88
100
120
140
138
148
165
190
210
236
B
FY
FT
(mm)
4-øFD
FX
FZ
Bore size
(mm)
Stroke
range
B
FD
FT
FX
FY
FZ
40
50
63
to 1000
to 1000
to 1000
74
78
100
9
9
12
12
16
16
80
100
112
58
61
75
100
125
138
B
FY
FT
ZZ + Stroke
4-øFD
(mm)
FX
FZ
Bore size
(mm)
Stroke
range
B
FD
FT
FX
FY
FZ
ZZ
40
50
63
to 1000
to 1000
to 1000
74
78
100
9
9
12
12
16
16
80
100
112
58
61
75
100
125
138
190
211
237
Double clevis style: (D)
∗ Clevis pins and cotter pins
are included.
U
øCDH10
L
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
16
CX
CZ
RR
(mm)
Bore size
(mm)
Stroke
range
L
RR
U
40
50
63
to 600
to 700
to 900
30
42
42
15
18
23
17
26
26
CDH10
CX+0.3
+0.1
CZ
Z
ZZ
14
22
22
20
30
30
40
60
60
208
237
263
223
255
286
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 17
Double Power Cylinder
(Without non-rotating mechanism)
MGZR
Series
Double Clevis Bracket
Z + Stroke
B
DX
DB
øDD
DH
B
4-øDT
Bore size
(mm)
Model
MB-B05
B
40
50
63
MB-B08
DA
59
71
82
DB
53
73
73
DC
60
86
86
43
64
64
DL
DA
DS
4-øDR
DU
Actuators
DU
DO
DO
DC
DE
DDH10
DE
DH
DL
DO
DR
DS
DT
DU
DX
Z
+0.070
0
+0.084
0
+0.084
0
81
111
111
45
65
65
30
45
45
10.5
12.5
12.5
9
11
11
8
10
10
18
22
22
11.5
14
14
20
30
30
208
237
263
A°
Bˆ
14
22
22
90
°
B°
Rotation
A°
Bore size
(mm)
40
50, 63
30
35
50
50
A°+B°+90°
170
175
Clevis Pin
øDd9
2-ød
l
m
L
d
Model
Bore size
(mm)
Dd9
L
l
m
CD-M05
CD-M08
40
50, 63
14–0.050
–0.093
22–0.065
–0.117
60
82
51
72
4.5
5
(Drill
Cotter pin Note)
through)
4
4
ø4 x 25
ø4 x 35
l
l
Note) When using cotter pins, flat washers are used together.
ø
Floating Joint
(mm)
Applicable
bore size
Model
40
50, 63
JB80-16-200
JB100-20-250
M
Nominal
size
16
20
B
C
2
80.5 16
21
2.5 101
20
26
Pitch
A
D
E
50
9.5
59.5 11.5
F
G
H
19
24
16
20
32
41
Max.
Allowable Max. operating tension and compression N
screw-in eccentricity
Compression
Tension
depth P
U
18
1.25
18000
5000
24
2
28000
7900
Weight
(kg)
0.56
1.04
17
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Series
Page 18
MGZR
Construction: MGZR
y
!6 q o !8 i
r t !4 @0 !7 e u @2 !5 @1
!9 w !3 !2
!0 !1
Component Parts
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Description
Rod cover
Head cover
Cylinder tube
Piston rod
Tube rod
Tube rod cover
Piston
Stationary piston
Bushing
Tie-rod
Tie-rod nut
Material
Note
Aluminum alloy
Clear anodized
Aluminum alloy
Clear anodized
Aluminum alloy
Hard anodized
Aluminum alloy
Hard anodized
Carbon steel
Hard chromium electroplated
Carbon steel
Aluminum alloy
Chromated
Aluminum alloy
Chromated
Lead bronze casted
Carbon steel
Carbon steel
Nickel plated
Bore size (mm)
40
50
63
Kit no.
MGZ40-PS
MGZ50-PS
MGZ63-PS
Contents
Items 16 and 21 from
the above chart
∗ Seal kits consist of items 16 and 21, and can be ordered by using the seal kit
number corresponding to each bore size.
18
No.
12
13
14
15
16∗
17
18
19
20∗
21
22
Description
Hexagon socket head screw
Spring washer
Bumper
Wear ring
Rod seal A
Rod seal B
Piston seal
Piston gasket
Tube rod gasket
Magnet
Material
Chrome molybdenum steel
Steel wire
Urethane rubber
Resin
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
Magnet
Note
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 19
Guide Table
Series MGF
Actuator
ø40, ø63, ø100
Compact type with reduced height.
A large bore guide cylinder with superior eccentric load resistance and low profile.
Dramatically reduced
Actuators
mounting height
The compact design of the cylinder makes it possile to
reduce the overall size of equipment.
Mounting height
15 to 20% reduction
(compared to SMC series MGQ)
Built-in non-rotating mechanism
Internal guide pin prevents the top plate
from rotating.
With T-slots
T-slots are provided on three sides (except the port
side), allow mounting of various brackets, etc.
(The slots cannot be used for securing the cylinder
body.)
Non-rotating accuracy
Bore size (mm)
40
63
100
Non-rotating accuracy θ
±0.08°
±0.06°
±0.05°
Series Variations
Model
Bore size
(mm)
MGF 40
40
MGF 63
63
MGF100
100
30
50
75
100
Auto switches
Reed switches: D-Z7/Z8
Solid state switches: D-Y5/Y6/Y7
2-color indication solid state switch: D-Y7
Water resistant 2-color indication
solid state switch: D-Y7BA
19
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Series
Page 20
MGZR
How to Order
MGF 63
30
Z73
Guide table
Nil
2 pcs.
S
1 pc.
Auto switch type
Nil
Without auto switch
∗ Refer to the table below for auto switch models.
Cylinder bore size/Standard stroke (mm)
40
30, 50, 75, 100
63
30, 50, 75, 100
100
30, 50, 75, 100
Special
function
Reed switch
Type
Electrical
entry
Indicator
light
Load voltage
Wiring
(output)
DC
3-wire
—
2-wire
24 V
AC
0.5
(Nil)
3
(L)
5
(Z)
Applicable load
5V
—
—
Z76
—
IC
circuit
12 V
100 V
—
Z73
—
5V
12 V
100 V
or less
—
Z80
—
IC
circuit
Y69A
Y59A
Y7PV
Y7P
Y69B
Y59B
Y7NWV
Y7NW
Y7PWV
Y7PW
Y7BWV
Y7BW
—
Y7BAL
—
Yes
—
Grommet
No
3-wire
(NPN)
Solid state switch
5V
12 V
3-wire
(PNP)
—
2-wire
Grommet
Yes
Diagnostic
indication
(2-color
indicator)
12 V
3-wire
(NPN)
24 V
—
5V
12 V
3-wire
(PNP)
12 V
2-wire
Water resistant
(2-color indicator)
∗ Lead wire length symbols
0.5 m .......... Nil
3 m ............. LY
5 m ............. ZY
Action
Fluid
Double acting
Air
1.5 MPa
1.0 MPa
0.1 MPa
Operating piston speed
Cushion
Lubrication
IC
circuit
—
IC
circuit
Relay,
PLC
PLC: Programmable Logic Controller
Standard Stroke
Proof pressure
Relay,
PLC
—
(Example) Y59A
Y59AL
Y59AZ
Specifications
20
Auto switch model
Lead wire entry direction
Perpendicular
In-line
–10 to 60°C
20 to 200 mm/s
Rubber bumper on both ends
Non-lube
+1.0
0
mm
Model
MGF 40
MGF 63
MGF100
30, 50, 75, 100
Intermediate stroke
A spacer with a width of 5, 10, 15, 20 or 25
mm is installed to manufacture intermediate
strokes (5 mm increments) other than
standard strokes.
Example) For MGF63 with 15 mm stroke
A spacer of 15 mm width is
installed inside MGF63 with a 30
mm stroke. Therefore, the overall
length will be the same as the
model with a 30 mm stroke.
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 21
Air Consumption Reduction System
PFC/QFC Valves
Actuator
Model
Description
PFC valve
QFC valve
Model
Port size
ASR100
ASR300
ASR500
ASR600
ASQ100
ASQ300
ASQ500
ASQ600
Regulated flow
Free flow
Weight
g
2.4
––
97
1/4, 3/8
14.5
––
220
1/2, 3/4
52.0
––
580
3/4, 1
80.0
––
950
1/8
2.4
5.4
97
1/4, 3/8
14.5
22.0
220
1/2, 3/4
52.0
68.0
580
3/4, 1
80.0
106.0
950
1/8
Specifications
Air
Fluid
0.7 MPa
PFC valve
0 to 60°C
Set pressure
PFC valve
0.2 to 0.5 MPa
QFC valve
0.1 to 0.5 MPa
How to Order
ASR 100 ––
01 B
Product type
ASR
ASQ
QFC valve
Accessory
Nil
B
PFC valve
QFC valve
Patent pending
1/8
3/8
3/4
1
Thread type
Nil
N
F
Symbol
PFC valve
Port size
Body size
100
300
500
600
Without bracket
With bracket
Rc
NPT
G
01
02
03
04
06
10
Port size
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
Applicable series
ASR100, ASQ100
ASR300, ASQ300
ASR300, ASQ300
ASR500, ASQ500
ASR500, 600, ASQ500, 600
ASR600, ASQ600
QFC valve
21
Actuators
PFC valve: A control valve
with pressure adjustment
and cylinder speed control
functions
QFC valve: A control valve
with quick exhaust and
cylinder speed control
functions
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 22
PFC/QFC valves
System Circuit
25% reduction of air consumption
Work stroke
It is not necessary to supply high
pressure to both the extension and
retraction sides of a piston. On the nonworking side, it is sufficient to supply
just enough pressure (0.2 MPa) for the
piston to operate smoothly within the set
time. A reduction system using PFC and
QFC valves reduces air consumption by
25%, which translates into reduced
running cost and dramatic reduction of
equipment cost.
Return stroke
QFC valve
PFC valve
Effect of Reduction
Rod side set pressure: 0.2 MPa
500
200
3
ø6
ø5
0
400
0
ø10
0
ø8
Bo
re
siz
e
Cylinder stroke (mm)
600
100
0
2,000
3
6
8,000
6,000
10,000
12,000
Air consumption reduction [m3/year (ANR) (Nm3/year)]
9
12
21 24
15 18
27 30 33
36 39
Annual air consumption cost reduction (Thousand yen)
16,000
14,000
42
45
48
Conditions — Cylinder operating frequency: 10 cycles/min
Operating time: 8 hrs/day
Number of operating days: 250 days/year
Cylinder pressure: Head side pressure of 0.5 MPa
Pressure and Time Line Charts
Return stroke
Work stroke
Time difference of cylinder at stop
Time
22
Pressure
Stroke
Pressure
Stroke
During the work stroke, the cylinder moves quickly
from A to B due to the difference between the head
side pressure (PH) and rod side pressure (PR).
Cylinder speed is then controlled by a PFC valve
from B to C. Therefore, the cylinder speed remains
the same for a shorter length of time than it did
previously.
D
a
g
sin
tu
en e
v
em al
ov ol v
lve
r m tr
n
va
de co
FC
lin ed
aQ
Cy e
ing
sp
us
nt
me
ve
mo
A
PH PR
PH PR
er
lind
Cy
tC
en
PH
m
e
ov
g
PR er m
d
sin
lin
tue
y
n
C
e lv
em va
ov trol
B
m
r on
de c
lin eed
y
C sp
a
PR
E PH
F
Time
To prevent time lag, air is quickly exhausted from D
to E, after which the piston moves at a constant
speed. When a speed controller is used instead of a
QFC valve, the time required for exhaust becomes
longer as shown by the D to F line of the head side
pressure (PH). This causes a longer stopping time for
the cylinder and time loss.
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 23
Air Saving Valves
Series ASR/ASQ
Actuator
Cuts air consumption by operating
the return stroke at a reduced pressure.
Conventional Valve
Working and return strokes
operated at the same pressure
Air Saving Valve
Return stroke operated
at a reduced pressure
Working stroke
Working stroke
Return stroke
Return stroke
Actuators
Flow
valve
Pressure
valve
Working stroke
Return stroke
Pressure Valve
Regulator with check valve
+
Speed controller
Series
ASR
Flow Valve
Quick supply and exhaust valve
+
Speed controller
(Meter-in, Meter-out)
Series
ASQ
23
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 24
Smooth operation of working and return strokes possible.
Consistent speed control achieved by preventing jerky movement of working strokes.
Improved response time
Operation delay in a return stroke is reduced by the use of a quick supply and exhaust valve.
Cylinder operation by conventional 2 pressure control
Cylinder operation by air saving valve
Cylinder operation by speed controller
Delay in return
operation
Return stroke pressure
0.1 MPa
1.4
Pressure valve
1.2
Flow valve
Delay time (sec)
0.2 MPa
1.0
0.3 MPa
0.8
0.6
0.1 MPa
0.4
0.2 MPa
0.3 MPa
0.5 MPa
0.2
0.0
40
50
63
80
Cylinder bore size (mm)
Quick supply and
exhaust valve
Working stroke
Return stroke
Cylinder operating pressure (MPa) Air consumption
Working stroke Return stroke reduction ratio (%)
0.5
100
0
17
25
33
0.5
0.3
0.2
0.1
Cylinder speed: 200 mm/sec
Cylinder stroke: 200 mm
Easy piping
The set pressure can be either fixed or variable.
The body and one-touch fitting allow 360°
rotation. The sealant on the male thread is
standardized.
Fixed set pressure type Variable set pressure type
(Fixed at 0.2 MPa)
(Variable between
0.1 and 0.3 MPa)
Graduated knob
2
3
Body
Pressure valve
One-touch fittings
Flow valve
Pressure valve
Flow valve
A knob cap is
attached to
the variable
set pressure
type.
Other applications
Jerk prevention in
vertical operation of
the cylinder
Quick air charge at the
end of stroke for press
applications
Model
Pressure valve
Flow valve
Balancing pressure
Pressure valve
Flow valve
Speed controller
24
Series Variations
Speed controller
ASR430F-02
ASR530F-02
ASR530F-03
ASR630F-03
ASR630F-04
ASQ430F-02
ASQ530F-02
ASQ530F-03
ASQ630F-03
ASQ630F-04
Port
size
R 1/4
R 1/4
R 3/8
R 3/8
R 1/2
Applicable tubing O.D. (mm)
6
8
10
12
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 25
Air Saving Valves
Pressure Valve
Series
ASR / Flow Valve
Series
ASQ
How to Order
Pressure valve: Series ASR
ASR 4 3 0 F
02
06 S
F20
With seal
Model
ASR Pressure valve
ASQ Flow valve
Body size
1/4 standard
4
5
6
3/8 standard
Nil
F20
Fixed set pressure type
(0.2 MPa)
1/2 standard
Applicable tubing O.D.
6 mm
06
08
10
12
Type
3
Universal
With One-touch fitting
8 mm
10 mm
12 mm
Port size
R 1/4
02
03
04
R 3/8
R 1/2
Flow valve: Series ASQ
Model
Model
Pilot valve and two-way flow control valve
integrated into a single construction
Pressure valve
Flow valve
ASR430F-02
ASR530F-02
ASR530F-03
ASR630F-03
ASR630F-04
ASQ430F-02
ASQ530F-02
ASQ530F-03
ASQ630F-03
ASQ630F-04
Port size
Applicable tubing O.D. (mm)
6
8
10
12
R 1/4
R 1/4
R 3/8
R 3/8
R 1/2
Specifications
Proof pressure
1.5 MPa
1.0 MPa
Set pressure Variable
range
Fixed (option)
0.1 to 0.3 MPa
0.2 MPa
–5 to 60°C (with no freezing)
Number of needle rotations
10 rotations
Applicable tubing material
Nylon, Soft nylon, Polyurethane
25
Actuators
Regulator with check valve and flow control
valve integrated into a single construction
Option
Variable set pressure type
(0.1 to 0.3 MPa)
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Pressure Valve
Page 26
Series
ASR / Flow Valve
Series
ASQ
Effective Area
Pressure Valve: Series ASR
Flow Valve: Series ASQ
Controlled flow
(mm2)
5.9
6.7
6.7
8.1
11.8
13.3
13.7
8.1
11.8
13.3
13.7
17.8
19.1
17.8
19.1
Free flow
(mm2)
5.4
5.9
5.9
7.3
8.9
9.2
9.5
7.3
8.9
9.2
9.5
15.3
16.0
15.3
16.0
Type
ASR430F-02-06S(-F20)
ASR430F-02-08S(-F20)
ASR430F-02-10S(-F20)
ASR530F-02-06S(-F20)
ASR530F-02-08S(-F20)
ASR530F-02-10S(-F20)
ASR530F-02-12S(-F20)
ASR530F-03-06S(-F20)
ASR530F-03-08S(-F20)
ASR530F-03-10S(-F20)
ASR530F-03-12S(-F20)
ASR630F-03-10S(-F20)
ASR630F-03-12S(-F20)
ASR630F-04-10S(-F20)
ASR630F-04-12S(-F20)
Type
ASQ430F-02-06S(-F20)
ASQ430F-02-08S(-F20)
ASQ430F-02-10S(-F20)
ASQ530F-02-06S(-F20)
ASQ530F-02-08S(-F20)
ASQ530F-02-10S(-F20)
ASQ530F-02-12S(-F20)
ASQ530F-03-06S(-F20)
ASQ530F-03-08S(-F20)
ASQ530F-03-10S(-F20)
ASQ530F-03-12S(-F20)
ASQ630F-03-10S(-F20)
ASQ630F-03-12S(-F20)
ASQ630F-04-10S(-F20)
ASQ630F-04-12S(-F20)
Meter-in
(mm2)
4.9
5.5
5.5
7.8
10.1
10.8
11.6
7.8
10.1
10.8
11.6
17.1
18.0
17.1
18.0
Meter-out
(mm2)
4.1
4.6
4.6
6.6
9.2
9.8
10.8
6.6
9.2
9.8
10.8
15.3
16.2
15.3
16.2
Operating Principle
PH
B
D
C
A
PH
PR
PR
Pressure, Stroke
C
m ylind
ov e
em r
en
t
Return Stroke
y
tb
en
em lve
ov l va
r m ro
t
de n
t
lin co
en
Cy eed
em
sp
ov
r m ve
de al
lin w v
Cy flo
by
Pressure, Stroke
Working Stroke
PH
PR
E
PR
F
PH
Time
Time
1. The cylinder starts smoothly because jerks are prevented by
meter-in control.
Jerk
prevention
3. To prevent delay due to the pressure gap, air is rapidly
exhausted to decrease the pressure from D to E, after which
the piston moves at a constant speed. If a speed controller is
used instead of the flow valve, exhausting air will take more
time as illustrated by line D-F, resulting in longer stop time of
the cylinder and a consequent time loss.
Quick exhaust
Working stroke
Return stroke
2. When the cylinder reaches the stroke end, the quick air charge
by the flow valve rapidly increases the rear side pressure (PH)
from A to B. If a speed controller is used instead of the flow
valve, charging air will take more time as illustrated by line AC, causing delay in the pressure rise.
Quick supply
26
4. The cylinder operates at a low pressure required for a return.
Low pressure
operation
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 27
Air Saving Valves
Pressure Valve
Series
ASR / Flow Valve
Series
ASQ
Flow Characteristics
Pressure Valve: Series ASR (Inlet pressure: 0.5 MPa)
200
2
100
0
4
0
5
10
8
500
10
5
20
1000
15
10
500
5
0
4
12
Flow rate l/min (ANR)
300
ASR630F
6
400
ASR530F
5
10
Meter-out Type (Inlet pressure: 0.3 MPa)
100
0
2
300
100
0
5
10
5
200
10
5
20
15
500
10
5
0
4
10
400
200
ASQ630F
6
ASQ530F
ASQ430F
5
10
Meter-in Type (Inlet pressure: 0.5 MPa)
4
200
2
100
0
5
10
8
500
4
0
20
1000
10
5
15
10
500
5
0
300
12
6
ASQ630F
400
ASQ530F
ASQ430F
5
10
Pressure Characteristics (ASR)
ASR430F/530F
ASR630F
0.4
0.4
Set pressure 0.3 MPa
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
0
0.1
0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
P1: Inlet pressure
P2: Outlet pressure
P2: Outlet pressure
0.2
0.1
0
0
0.1
0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
P1: Inlet pressure
27
Actuators
ASR430F
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Pressure Valve
Page 28
Series
ASR / Flow Valve
Series
ASQ
Selection and Adjustment
Install a flow valve on the working side which requires the cylinder output and a pressure valve on the return side. The product cannot be
used in cases where the same pressure is necessary for both working and return strokes.
In such cases use a speed controller.
Horizontal mounting
Low pressure side: Pressure valve
High pressure side: Flow valve
Low pressure side
Pressure valve
Series
ASR
High pressure side
Flow valve
Series
ASQ
Working stroke
Refer to
Adjustment Procedure 1
for pressure and speed adjustment.
Return stroke
Vertical mounting
Working stroke
Return stroke
High pressure side: Flow valve
Pressure valve
Low pressure side
Series
ASR
In case the load ratio is 50% or lower
at the set pressure of the flow valve:
Refer to
Flow valve
Series
High pressure side
ASQ
If the load ratio at the set pressure of the flow valve exceeds
50%, install a dual speed controller (meter-in and meter out
control) on the high pressure side.
Working stroke
Return stroke
High pressure side: Dual speed controller
Pressure valve
Low pressure side
Series
ASR
Refer to
Dual speed controller
(Meter-in • Meter-out)
Series
ASQ
28
High pressure side
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 29
Air Saving Valves
Pressure Valve
Series
ASR / Flow Valve
Series
ASQ
Speed Control
1. The fixed set pressure type (-F20) does not require adjustment
because the pressure is fixed at 0.2 MPa for both the pressure
valve and the flow valve.
2. The set pressures of the variable set pressure type pressure
valve and flow valve are adjusted with knob A and knob B
respectively. Turn the knob clockwise to increase the pressure
and counterclockwise to decrease the pressure.
3. The graduations 1, 2 and 3 correspond to 0.1, 0.2 and 0.3
MPa respectively. Align the bottom end of the knob with the
graduated line for adjustment.
1. The cylinder speed is adjusted with knobs C , D and E . First
have all the knobs fully closed and then open them gradually
for adjustment. Turn the knob clockwise to close (decrease the
speed of the piston rod) and counterclockwise to open
(increase the speed of the piston rod).
2. Speed adjustment for the working stroke
The speed is adjusted with the pressure valve and the flow
valve.
Open knobs C and E gradually until the required speed is
achieved. Make sure that knobs C and E are opened by the
same number of rotations.
Note 1) If the piston rod jerks, close knob E until the smooth
operation is achieved.
3. Speed adjustment for return stroke
The speed is adjusted with the flow valve.
Open knob D gradually until the required speed is achieved.
4. Be sure to tighten the lock nut after adjustment.
Knob
Align the bottom end of the
knob with the graduated line.
The figure illustrates the case
in which the pressure is set at
0.2 MPa.
2
3
4. Set the same pressure for the pressure valve and the flow
valve (0.2 MPa as the recommended value).
5. The inlet side should be supplied with a pressure which is
higher than the set pressure by 0.1 MPa or more.
6. Cap the valve after adjustment.
Knob
B
Knob
C
Knob
D
Knob
A
E
Knob
Pressure Adjustment
Speed Control
1. The fixed set pressure type (-F20) does not require adjustment
because the pressure is fixed at 0.2 MPa.
2. The pressure at the low pressure side (return stroke side) is
adjusted by the pressure valve.
3. The set pressure is adjusted with knob A . Turn the knob
clockwise to increase the pressure and counterclockwise to
decrease the pressure.
4. The graduations 1, 2 and 3 correspond to 0.1, 0.2 and 0.3
MPa respectively. Align the bottom end of the knob with the
graduated line for adjustment.
5. Keep the set pressure as low as possible in order to achieve
good air saving effect.
6. Cap the valve after adjustment.
1. The cylinder speed is adjusted with knobs C , F and G . First
have all the knobs fully closed and then open them gradually
for adjustment. Turn the knob clockwise to close (decrease the
speed of the pistoin rod) and counterclockwise to open
(increase the speed of the piston rod).
2. Speed adjustment for the working stroke
The speed is adjusted with the pressure valve and the dual
speed controller.
Open knobs C and G gradually until the required speed is
achieved. Make sure that knobs C and G are opened by the
same number of rotations.
Note 1) If the piston rod jerks, close knob G until the smooth
operation is achieved.
3. Speed adjustment for return stroke
The speed is adjusted with the dual speed controller.
Open knob F gradually until the required speed is achieved.
4. Be sure to tighten the lock nut after adjustment.
Dual Speed Controller: Series ASD
Knob
Knob
F
C
Knob
Knob
G
A
29
Actuators
Pressure Adjustment
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Pressure Valve
Page 30
Series
ASR / Flow Valve
Series
ASQ
Construction
Variable type
@1
@2 @5 @4 @3
ASR430F-02 type
ASR530F-03 type
ASR630F-04 type
u
Fixed type
@2 @5 @4 @3
ASR430F-02 type
ASR530F-03 type
ASR630F-04 type
o !3
u
o !3
!8
!8
!9
!7
!9
!7
w
w
q
@0
e
q
@0
!4
ASR530F-02 type
ASR630F-03 type
@1
!8
e
i y !0 !1 !2
u
ASR530F-02 type
ASR630F-03 type
o !3
!7
!7
!9
!9
t
t
q
@0
q
@0
r
r
!4
!8
i !5 !6
u
o !3
!4 i !5 !6
!4 i y !0 !1 !2
Component Parts
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
30
Description
Material
Note
Body A
PBT
Body B
Brass
Seat ring
Brass
Body B1
Brass
Body B2
Brass
Body C
Brass
Stopper
Stainless steel
Valve
HNBR/Brass
Piston
Brass
Adjustment screw
Brass
Knob
Brass
Polypropylene
Cap
Steel wire
Adjustment spring
Zinc chromated
No.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Description
Material
Note
U seal
HNBR
Body C
Brass
Adjustment plug
Brass
Needle
Brass
Knob
PBT
Lock nut Note 1)
Steel
U seal
HNBR
Elbow body
Spacer Note 2)
Cassette
PBT
PBT
Stainless steel/POM
Seal
NBR
Drive body Note 3)
Brass
Note 1) Brass is used for the material ASR530F and ASR630F.
Note 2) Not used for ø6 and ø8.
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 31
Air Saving Valves
Pressure Valve
Series
ASR / Flow Valve
Series
ASQ
Variable type
@2 @3 @6 @5
Fixed type
@4
!7
!6
!8
w
q
@0
e
@4
Actuators
i
u
y
!5
!2
!4
!1
ASQ430F-02 type
ASQ530F-03 type
ASQ630F-04 type
@2 @3 @6 @5
ASQ430F-02 type
ASQ530F-03 type
ASQ630F-04 type
o
!5
!3
!7
!4
!1
!6
!8
w
q
@0
e
@1 !0 !9 !6 !7
@1 !0 !9 !6 !7
i
ASQ530F-02 type
ASQ630F-03 type
ASQ530F-02 type
ASQ630F-03 type
u
y
!5
!7
!7
!2
!4
!1
!8
!6
t
q
@0
r
y
!5
!3
!4
!1
!8
!6
t
q
@0
r
@1 !0 !9 !6 !7
@1 !0 !9 !6 !7
Component Parts
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Description
Material
Note
Body A
PBT
Body B
Brass
Seat ring
Brass
Body B1
Brass
Body B2
Brass
Adjustment screw
Brass
Knob
Brass
Cap
Polypropylene
Adjustment plug
Brass
Body C
Brass
Body D1
Brass
Body D2
Body D3
Brass
Brass
No.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Description
Piston valve
Adjustment spring
Needle
Material
Note
HNBR/Brass
Steel wire
Zinc chromated
Brass
Knob
PBT
Lock nut Note 1)
Steel
Lock nut Note 1)
Steel
Black zinc chromated
U seal
HNBR
U seal
HNBR
Elbow body
Spacer Note 2)
Cassette
Seal
Drive body Note 3)
PBT
PBT
Stainless steel/POM
NBR
Brass
Note 1) Brass is used for the material ASQ530F and ASQ630F.
31
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 32
Series
Pressure Valve
ASR / Flow Valve
Series
ASQ
Dimensions
Fixed set pressure type (-F20)
L1
L1
L2
d
L2
d
M
øD1
øD1
M
øD
øD
L6
2
L6
2
L3
L4
A1
A2
L5
A1
A2
L5
øD3
H
(Width across
flats)
øD3
H
(Width across
flats)
T
Model
ASR430F-02-06S,-F20
ASR430F-02-08S,-F20
ASR430F-02-10S,-F20
ASR530F-02-06S,-F20
ASR530F-02-08S,-F20
ASR530F-02-10S,-F20
ASR530F-02-12S,-F20
ASR530F-03-06S,-F20
ASR530F-03-08S,-F20
ASR530F-03-10S,-F20
ASR530F-03-12S,-F20
ASR630F-03-10S,-F20
ASR630F-03-12S,-F20
ASR630F-04-10S,-F20
ASR630F-04-12S,-F20
Note 1)
Note 2)
Note 3)
Note 4)
Note 5)
32
Note 1)
H
D1
D2
D3
17
18.5
20
21.5
L5
L4 MAX. MIN.
Note 2) Note 3)
57.7
34.9
58.7
35.9
10
53.8
31
21
105
82
6
62.9
36.5
17
150
127
63.9
37.5
18.5
153
130
59
32.6
21
143
120
60.8
34.4
22
146
122
62.9
36.5
17
160
137
63.9
37.5
18.5
163
140
59
32.6
21
153
130
6
8 R 1/4
8
10
R 1/4
21
18.5
24.3
25.3
20.9
12
6
8
10
R 3/8
21
18.5
24.3
25.3
A2
M
Weight (g) Note 5)
∗1
∗2
L2
L3
L6
A1
MAX. MIN.
L1
d
T
T
17
63.7
67.3
67.3
45.6
49.2
49.2
50.6
55.8
57.4
45.6
50.8
52.4
23
25.9
25.9
44.6
49.8
51
39.6
44.8
46
16.8 18.5
18.8
20
111
89
114
93
12
20.9
60.8
34.4
22
156
133
10
18.5
62.8
32.6
21
237
219
64.6
34.4
22
239
221
62.8
32.6
21
257
239
64.6
34.4
22
259
239
12
10
12
R 3/8
R1/2
25
25
20.9
18.5
20.9
29.7
29.7
30
30
86.3
86.3
65.5
65.5
67.6
71.1
“d” indicates the applicable tubing O.D.
L3 is the dimension for the variable set pressure type.
L4 is the dimension for the fixed set pressure type.
A1 and A2 are reference dimensions after installation.
∗1 is the weight for the variable set pressure type and ∗2 is that for the fixed set pressure type.
60.1
63.6
27.7
27.7
61.2
62.9
53.7
55.4
20.6
24.1
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 33
Air Saving Valves
Pressure Valve
Series
ASR / Flow Valve
Series
ASQ
Fixed set pressure type
L1
L1
L2
d
L2
M
d
M
øD
L8
2
L8
2
Actuators
øD
L3
L3
L4
L4
H
H
(Width across
flats)
(Width across
flats)
øD4
øD1
A2
T
Model
ASQ430F-02-06S,-F20
ASQ430F-02-08S,-F20
ASQ430F-02-10S,-F20
ASQ530F-02-06S,-F20
ASQ530F-02-08S,-F20
ASQ530F-02-10S,-F20
ASQ530F-02-12S,-F20
ASQ530F-03-06S,-F20
ASQ530F-03-08S,-F20
ASQ530F-03-10S,-F20
ASQ530F-03-12S,-F20
ASQ630F-03-10S,-F20
ASQ630F-03-12S,-F20
ASQ630F-04-10S,-F20
ASQ630F-04-12S,-F20
Note 1)
Note 2)
Note 3)
Note 4)
Note 5)
øD3
A1
L7
øD3
øD1
A1
A2
L7
L6
L5
øD4
Note 1)
d
T
T
H
D1
D2
D3
D4
6
18.5 20
6
R 1/4 21
12
18.5
24.3 24.8 20.4
20.9
6
8
10
L3
L4
L7
A1 Note 4) Note 4)
Note 2) Note3)
L8
M
MAX. MIN. L5 L6 MAX. MIN.
MAX. MIN. A2
R 3/8 21
18.5
17
21.5 19.5 62.6 35.9 20.3 49.4 44.4
10
10
L2
61.6 34.9
8 R 1/4 17
8
L1
24.3 24.8 20.4
88.8 68.7 50.6 45.6 23
Weight (g) Note 5)
∗1 ∗2
136 114
44.6 39.6 17.9 18.5 139 117
57.7 31
21
130 108
65.6 36.5
17
178 155
66.6 37.5
18.5 181 158
61.7 32.6
23.4 53.5 48.5
92.2 72
55.8 50.8 25.6 49.8 44.8 19
21
172 149
63.5 34.4
22
174 151
65.6 36.5
17
188 165
66.6 37.5
18.5 191 168
61.7 32.6
23.4 53.5 48.5
93.8 73.6 57.4 52.4 25.6 51
46
20.2
21
182 159
12
20.9
63.5 34.4
22
184 161
10
18.5
74.8 32.6
21
310 292
22
312 294
21
330 312
22
332 314
12
10
12
R 3/8 25
R 1/2 25
20.9
18.5
20.9
29.7 30.7 30
29.7 30.7 30
76.6 34.4
74.8 32.6
76.6 34.4
30.8 74.3 66.8 107.9 86.9 67.6 60.1 28
30.8 74.3 66.8 111.4 90.4 71.1 63.6 28
61.2 53.7 20.8
62.9 55.4 24.1
“d” indicates the applicable tubing O.D..
L5 is the dimension for the variable set pressure type.
L6 is the dimension for the fixed set pressure type.
A1 and A2 are reference dimensions after installation.
∗1 is the weight for the variable set pressure type and ∗2 is that for the fixed set pressure type.
33
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 34
Hollow Rod Cylinders
Made to Order
(Rod Through Hole Type)
Air Blow
A hollow rod for vacuum piping is utilized for air flow.
The nozzle position can be moved.
Nozzle
Air Cylinder: CM2W-XC38
Specifications
Model
Pneumatic type
ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
Action
Double acting, Double rod
1.0 MPa
0.08 MPa
Cushion
Rubber bumper (standard)
Mounting
Basic style, Axial foot style, Flange style,
Trunnion style
Auto switch
Specifications are the same as series CM2W.
ød
Specifications other than above
Capable
HA + Stroke
ZZ + 2 x Stroke
Bore size (mm)
d
J
HA
ZZ
20
25
32
40
3
M5 x 0.8
32
135
3
M5 x 0.8
32
139
3
M5 x 0.8
32
141
4
Rc 1/8
36
174
Precision Cylinder: MTS8-XC38
Bore size (mm)
Port direction
Rod end configuration
8
Standard type, Top ported type
Female thread
Dimensions
7 + Stroke
60 + 2 x Stroke
34
ø1
ø4
Use ø4 or ø2.5 urethane tubing (TU0425), or
soft nylon tubing (TS0425).
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 35
Free Mount Cylinder for Vacuum
Series ZCUK
Air Blow
How to Order
Basic Type
ZCUK C 16
20 D
With Auto Switch
ZC D UK C 16
20 D
M9B S
Action
D –– Double acting
Auto switch type
Nil
Bore size
10 –– 10 mm
16 –– 16 mm
20 –– 20 mm
25 –– 25 mm
32 –– 32 mm
Without auto switch
∗ Auto switches are shipped together
Port thread type
Bore size
Symbol Type
ø10, ø16, ø20, ø25
M5 x 0.8
Nil
ø32
Rc 1/8
ø32
NPT 1/8
TN
ø32
TF Note) G 1/8
10, 16 ––––– 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30
20, 25, 32 –– 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50
Note) In the case of rod piping (Q, R),
TF (G 1/8) is not available.
Grommet
—
Diagnostic
indication
2 color
indicator
Note 1) Lead wire length symbols
Piping type
Grommet
Yes
Solid state
switch
No
—
Electrical
entry
Yes
Special function
Reed
switch
Type
Indicator light
Load voltage
Wiring
(output)
Auto switch
model
AC
DC
Perpendicular
In-line
—
5V
—
A96V
A96
—
—
2-wire
24 V
12 V
5 V, 12 V
100 V
A93V
A90V
M9NV
M9PV
M9BV
F9NWV
F9PWV
F9BWV
A93
A90
M9N
M9P
M9B
F9NW
F9PW
F9BW
—
—
—
100 V or less
—
—
IC circuit
3-wire (NPN)
5 V, 12 V
3-wire (PNP)
2-wire
12 V
24 V
3-wire (NPN)
5 V, 12 V
3-wire (PNP)
2-wire
12 V
0.5 m .......... Nil
3 m ............. L
5 m ............. Z
—
(Example) M9N
(Example) M9NL
(Example) M9NZ
IC
circuit
—
Relay,
PLC
IC circuit
—
IC circuit
Relay,
PLC
—
Note 2) Solid state switches marked with a "" symbol are produced upon
receipt of order.
Rod end configuration
Applicable pad type
For detailed specifications,
refer to the next page.
Male thread
Vacuum
Series ZPT
ZCUKD
Cap piping
Applicable
load
3-wire
(NPN equiv.)
ZCUKC
Cap piping
Lead wire length (m) Note 1)
Pre-wired
0.5
3
5
conector
(Nil)
(L)
(Z)
Direct pad mount
Vacuum
(Perpendicular vacuum
entry female thread)
Vacuum
ZCUKQ
Rod piping
Male thread
Vacuum
Series ZP
(With pad single unit
lock ring)
ZCUKR
Rod piping
Vacuum
Vacuum
Direct pad mount
35
Actuators
Nil –– 2 pcs.
S ––– 1 pc.
Built-in magnet
Type (Vacuum side piping)/(Rod end configuration)
C –– Cap piping/Male thread
D –– Cap piping/Direct pad mount
Q –– Rod piping/Male thread
R –– Rod piping/Direct pad mount
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 36
Water Resistant Air Cylinders
Series CM2
Series CG1
ø20 to ø40
How to Order
Air Leakage
ø32 to ø100
How to Order
CDM2 Mounting Bore size Port thread type R
Stroke
H7BAL -XC6
CDG1 Mounting Type Bore size Port thread type R
Stroke
H7BAL -XC6
With auto switch
(Built-in magnet)
With auto switch
(Built-in magnet)
Water resistant cylinder
R Seal, NBR (Nitrile rubber)
V Seal, FKM (Fluoro rubber)
solid state switch
Water resistant
2-color indication
solid state switch
H7BAL ø32 to ø63
G5BAL ø80, ø100
Made to order
specification
Made to order specification
Specifications
Action
Caution
ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63, ø80, ø100
Rod seal and scraper is not replaceable.
• Scraper is press-fit into the rod cover, thus cannot be replaced.
Rubber bumper, Air cushion
Cushion
Band mount type
Auto switch mounting
Stainless steel piston rod and rod end nut (-XC6)
Made to order
Specifications
Note) Specifications other than above are the same as the standard basic type.
ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
Rubber cushion
GA
Rubber bumper
Cushion
Band mount type
(øE1)
Note) Specifications other than above are the same as the standard basic type.
(F1) TA
ZZ + Stroke
NN2
WA
0
(øE1)
øE1h8
(mm)
20
E1
0
22 –0.033
E2∗
0
20 –0.033
NN1
M22 x 1.5
GA
Air cushion
øE2h8
NN1
Bore size (mm)
F
S + Stroke
Dimensions
øE–0.05
Made to order
Dimensions
0
øE-0.05
Action
NN2∗
M20 x 1.5
Note) Dimensions other than the above are the same as the standard double
acting single rod type. [An asterisk (∗) indicates those that are the same as
standard.]
Please contact SMC for part numbers of the foot, the flange and the
mounting nut for ø20.
(F1) TA
S + Stroke
F
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size (mm) (E1)
32
40
50
63
80
100
17
21
26
26
32
37
E∗
18
25
30
32
40
50
(F1)
2
2
2
2
3
3
F∗
2
2
2
2
3
3
S
GA
77 (85)
18
84 (93)
19
97 (109)
21
97 (109)
21
28 116 (130)
29 117 (131)
TA WA
ZZ
17 22 119 (127)
18 22 136 (145)
20 25 157 (169)
20 25 157 (169)
30 190 (204)
—
31 191 (205)
—
Note 1) Dimensions other than the above are the same as the standard double
acting single rod type. [An asterisk (∗) indicates those that are the same
as standard.]
Note 2) Dimensions inside ( ) are for long strokes.
36
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 37
Compact Cylinder
Series CQ2
ø20 to ø100
How to Order
Specifications
Stroke D Option
Action
F9BAL -XC6
ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40, ø50, ø60, ø80, ø100
With auto switch
(Built-in magnet)
Mounting
ø20 to ø32 ... B (Through-hole only)
ø40 to ø100 ... B (Through-hole)
F (Front flange style)
A (Both end tapped) G (Rear flange style)
L (Foot style)
D (Double clevis style)
Cushion
None
solid state switch
F7BA(V)L ø20 to ø100
F9BAL
ø32 to ø100
Rail mount type (D-F7BAL, F7BAVL)/Direct mount type (D-F9BAL)
Made to order
Stainless steel snap ring, piston rod and rod end nut (-XC6)
Note) Specifications other than the above are the same as the standard basic type.
Dimensions
2-øN through
232-øO counter bore
2-øN through
(same on the bottom side)
Q
Q
øT
2-øN through
ø20, ø25
ø20, ø25
(without switch)
(with switch)
ø32
L1
L1
L
A + Stroke
Rod end male thread
Rod end male thread
H
H
Rod end nut
ø40, ø50
ø63 to ø100
C
X
L2
Bore size
(mm)
20
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
50
75, 100
50
75, 100
stroke
—
—
stroke or less
stroke
—
—
39(51)
42.5(52.5)
45(55)
46.5(56.5)
48.5(58.5)
54(64)
63.5(73.5)
75(85)
55
56.5
58.5
64
73.5
85
29.5(41.5)
32.5(42.5)
33(43)
29.5(39.5)∗
30.5(40.5)∗
36(46)∗
43.5(53.5)∗
53(63)∗
43
39.5∗
40.5∗
46∗
53.5∗
63∗
G1
L∗
L1
N∗
O∗
L3
L2
ø20 to ø32
B
stroke or less
C
X
Rod end nut
L3
(mm)
A
G1
B + Stroke
L
A + Stroke
4-øN through
4-øN through
B + Stroke
Q
— 9.5 4.5 5.5 9 depth 7 19(20.5)
5.5 9 depth 7
5
21
— 10
6.5 5.5 9 depth 7 20.5Note)
— 12
5.5 9 depth 7
7
5 17
11∗
6.6 11 depth 8 10.5∗
8
5 18
9 14 depth 10.5 15∗
8
5 18
5 20 10 11 17.5 depth 13.5 16∗
5 22 12 11 17.5 depth 13.5 23∗
Th9
—
—
—
28
35
35
43
59
Note 1) Dimensions other than above are the same as the standard double acting single rod type. [An asterisk (∗) indicates
those that are the same as standard.]
Note 2) Dimensions inside ( ) are for cylinders with auto switch.
Note 3) For a cylinder with ø32 bore size and 5 mm stroke, without switch, dimension Q will be 21.5.
Note 4) The dimensions with a mounting bracket for ø40 to ø100 are the same as above dimensions. (No dimensional
changes in L1 and L2 dimensions.)
ø40 to ø100
With Rod End Male Thread
Bore size
(mm)
C
20
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
12
15
20.5
20.5
26
26
32.5
32.5
X
H
L
(mm)
L1
M831.25 23.5 4.5
14
17.5 M1031.25 27.5 5
23.5 M1431.5 33.5 5
23.5 M1431.5 38.5 5
28.5 M1831.5 43.5 5
28.5 M1831.5 43.5 5
35.5 M2231.5 53.5 8
35.5 M2631.5 53.5 8
37
Actuators
CDQ2 Mounting Bore size Port thread type R
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 38
Compact Guide Cylinder
Series CA2
Series MGP
ø40 to ø100
How to Order
CDA2
Mounting
How to Order
Type Bore size Port thread type R
Stroke
Suffix
Y7BAL -XC6
MGPM Bore size Port thread type R
solid state switch
Specifications
Action
ø40, ø50, ø63, ø80, ø100
Made to order
Y7BAL
Stroke
Slide bearing
With auto switch
(Built-in magnet)
Cushion
ø20 to ø100
Air cushion
Tie-rod mount style
∗ Specifications other than above are the same as the standard basic type.
Note 1) Air-hydro type, rod boot specifications of the CA2 series are excluded.
Note 2) Combination of auto switches and steel tube is not available.
Dimensions
solid state switch
∗ The piston rod and guide rod are made of stainless steel.
∗ Stainless steel piston rods are available as a special order.
Specifications
Action
Double acting
Bearing type
Slide bearing
Cushion
MGPMR
MGPMV
ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63, ø80, ø100
Rubber bumper
Without cushion
Direct mount type
Dimensions
∗ Dimensions are the same as the standard double acting
single rod type.
FB
B + Stroke
A + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size
(mm)
20
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
(A)
A
50
50 stroke or more
200
B
stroke or less 200 stroke or less stroke or more
66
66
97.5
135
67.5
67.5
99
136
71.5
109
114
152
78
109
114
152
83
117.5
129
172
88
117.5
129
172
102.5
121
148
199
120
141
166
207
FB
19
20
22
22
23
23
24
29
∗ Dimensions other than above are the same as the standard double acting
single rod type.
38
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 39
Guide Cylinder
Series MGG
ø32 to ø100
How to Order
Stroke
Actuators
MGGM Mounting Bore size Port thread type R
H7BAL -XC6
Slide bearing
solid state switch
H7BAL ø32 to ø63
G5BAL ø80, ø100
Specifications
Action
Double acting
ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63, ø80, ø100
Bearing type
Slide bearing
Cushion
Rubber bumper, Built-in shock absorber
Band mount type
-XC6
Made to order
specification
Stainless steel piston rod and rod end nut
-XC6A
Stainless steel used on all standard iron parts
-XC6B
Stainless steel rod end moving parts
-XC6C
Stainless steel rod parts
∗ Specifications other than the above are the same as the standard basic type.
Note 1) RBL (coolant resistant) shock absorbers are used.
Dimensions
ø32 to ø50
ø63 to ø100
Front mounting flange style
Front mounting flange style
Q
Q
X
Y + Stroke
X
Y + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size (mm)
32
40
50
63
80
100
Q
25
29
31
34
46
47
X
39
46
57
56
68
68
Y
86 (94)
96 (105)
109 (121)
112 (124)
137 (151)
138 (152)
∗ Dimensions inside ( ) are for long strokes.
∗ Dimensions other than the above are the same as the standard basic type.
39
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 40
Air Cylinder
with Heavy Duty Scraper
Made to Order
Air Leakage
Symbol
-XC4
With heavy duty scraper
CM2 Mounting
Bore size
Stroke
Cushion
CB
XC4
Follow the standard ordering procedures.
XC4
(With rear lock only)
CG1 Follow the standard ordering procedures.
XC4
CQ2 Follow the standard ordering procedures.
XC4
CA2 Follow the standard ordering procedures.
XC4
CV
XC4
CS1 Follow the standard ordering procedures.
XC4
MGG Follow the standard ordering procedures.
XC4
MB
XC4
MGC Follow the standard ordering procedures.
XC4
The heavy duty scraper feature is ideal for cylinders used in a dusty
environment, or in environments where there is contact with earth and
sand, such as molding machines, construction equipment, and industrial
vehicles, etc.
Specifications
Applicable
cylinder
Air cylinder/Standard type
Series
End lock cylinder
(with rear
lock only)
Cylinder
with valve
Compact
cylinder
CM2
CG1
MB
CA2
CS1
CB
CV
CQ2
MGG
MGC
CM2,
CM2W
CG1
MB,
MBW
CA2,
CA2W
CS1,
CS1W
CBM2,
CBA1
CV3,
CVM5,
CVS1
CQ2
MGG
MGC
Double acting, Single rod, Double rod (Not applicable for CG1)
Action
Bore size
(mm)
20, 25, 32,
40
32, 40, 50,
63, 80, 100
32, 40, 50,
63
40, 50, 63,
80, 100
Wiper ring
Cushion
Double acting
125, 140, 160, 180, 20, 25, 32, 40, 20, 25, 32, 40, 20, 25, 32, 40,
200, 250, 300 50, 63, 80, 100 50, 63, 80, 100 50, 63, 80, 100
32, 40, 50
SCB scraper
Rubber
bumper
Air cushion
Rubber
bumper
Air cushion
CBM2:
CVM5:
Rubber bumper Rubber bumper
CBA1:
CV3, CVS1:
Air cushion
Air cushion
Air cushion
None
Rubber
bumper
Rubber bumper Air cushion
(base cylinder (base cylinder
unit)
unit)
Mountable (Bores sizes 200mm or less.)
Auto switch
Specifications
and
dimensions
other than
above
Guide cylinder
Specifications
are the same
as the
standard type.
Specifications
are the same
as the
standard type.
Specifications
are the same
as the
standard type.
Specifications
are the same
as the
standard type.
Specifications are
the same as the
standard type
except dimension
K has been
changed.
Specifications
are the same
as the
standard type.
Specifications
are the same
as the
standard type.
Specifications
are the same
as the
standard type.
Specifications
are the same
as the
standard type.
Specifications
are the same
as the
standard type.
Refer to Best Pneumatics 2004 catalog Vol. 6/7/8/10 for the pages listed in the table above for details.
Caution
Do not replace the heavy duty scraper.
• Since the heavy duty scraper is press fit, replace the rod
cover assembly instead of the cover only.
(In the case of the CM2 series, it cannot be replaced.)
(For the CS1 series, replace the retaining plate
assembly.)
M
MGP L
Bore size
Stroke
XC4
Scraper specification
Nil
W
40
Single side scraper
Double side scraper
Specifications
Applicable series
Bearing type
Single side
Minimum
operating pressure Double side
MGPM, MGPL
Slide bearing, Ball bushing
20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100
0.12 MPa
0.14 MPa
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 41
Air Cylinder
with Coil Scraper
Air Leakage
Made to Order
Symbol
With coil scraper
Mounting
CM2
-XC35
Bore size
Stroke
XC35
MB
XC35
XC35
CA2
XC35
CG1
XC35
CS1
XC35
CBA1 Follow the standard ordering procedures.
XC35
With coil scraper
Removes frost, welding spatter, and machining chips from the piston rod,
and protects the seals.
With coil scraper
Specifications
Applicable series
Air cylinder/Series CM2
Air cylinder/Series CG1
Compact air cylinder/Series CQ2
Air cylinder/Series CA2
Action
Double acting, Single rod, Double rod
20, 25, 32, 40
20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63
32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100
40, 50, 63, 80, 100
1.0 MPa
1.0 MPa
1.0 MPa
1.0 MPa
Cushion
0.05 MPa
0.05 MPa
0.05 MPa
Single rod: 0.05 MPa, Double rod: 0.08 MPa
Rubber bumper
Rubber bumper, Air cushion
None, Rubber bumper
Air cushion
Scraper
Coil scraper (Metal)
Auto switch
Mountable
Mounting
Basic, Axial foot, Front flange,
Rear flange, Single clevis,
Double clevis, Front trunnion,
Rear trunnion, Integral clevis,
Boss cut
Basic, Axial foot, Front flange,
Rear flange, Front trunnion,
Rear trunnion, Clevis (used
when the port location is
moved 90°)
Specifications are the same as
the standard type.
the standard type.
Basic, Foot, Front flange, Rear
flange, Single clevis, Double
clevis, Center trunnion
Through holes,
Double end tapped
the standard type.
the standard type.
Refer to Best Pneumatics 2004 catalog Vol. 6/7 for the pages listed in the table above.
Specifications
Applicable series
Air cylinder/Series MB
Air cylinder/Series CS1
End lock cylinder/Series CBA2
Double acting, Single rod, Double rod
32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100
125, 140, 160, 180, 200, 250, 300
40, 50, 63, 80, 100
1.0 MPa
0.97 MPa
1.0 MPa
0.05 MPa
0.05 MPa
0.15 MPa
Air cushion
Air cushion
Action
Cushion
Air cushion, Rubber bumper
Coil scraper (Metal)
Scraper
Capable (Bores sizes 200mm or less.)
Auto switch
clevis, Shaft type trunnion
Mounting
the standard type.
Refer to Best Pneumatics 2004 catalog Vol. 6 for the pages listed
in the table above.
clevis, Center trunnion (For
double rod, only Basic, Foot,
Front flange, Center trunnion
are available.)
Specifications are the same as the
standard type.
Basic, Foot, Front flange,
Single clevis, Double clevis,
Center trunnion
the standard type.
Specifications
Applicable series
MGPM
Bore size
Stroke
XC35
With coil scraper
Scraper specification
Nil
W
Single side scraper
Double side scraper
Bearing type
Single side
Minimum
operating pressure
Double side
MGPM
Slide bearing
20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100
0.12 MPa
0.14 MPa
41
Actuators
CQ2
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 42
Air-hydro Booster
Made to Order
Hydraulic Clamp
Converts air pressure to hydraulic pressure for high pressure hydraulic cylinder actuation.
CA1B H63
50
1
XB4
Type of pressurization
Mounting
B
Basic style
L
Axial foot style
G
Rear flange style
Nil
Pressurized when energized
B
Not pressurized when energized
Electrical entry
Oil discharge volume
25
25 cm3
40
40 cm3
50
50 cm3
75
75 cm3
100
100 cm3
Nil
Molded type
D
DIN terminal
Voltage
1
2
5
9
100 VAC
200 VAC
24 VDC
Other
Oil pot specification
JIS symbol
Nil
Without oil pot
P
With oil pot
Specifications
Operating fluid
Compressed air
Driving fluid
ISO VG32
Operating pressure (air)
0.3 to 0.7 MPa
Withstand pressure (air)
1.6 MPa
5 to 60°C
Intensified pressure ratio
Specifications other than -XB4 are available by
special order. Select according to the usage.
(Refer to the following two pages for the list of
special order products.)
1:6
110 cm3
Reservoir capacity (oil pot capacity)
Dimensions
CA1BH63(XB4)/Basic style
30.4
View A (Oil port position)
30°
Supply port
O.D. ø6 tubing
12
2-Rc 1/8
Exhaust port
Oil supply
plug
ø73
90
≈161
15
12
≈ 153
77
ø50
Rc 1/4
Oil port
13
Rc 1/4
Oil port
6.5
11
42.5
40
View A
4-M8 x 1.25
Thread depth 15 18
18
L
S
10
22 11
H
Z
Amount of Stroke range
(mm)
oil discharge
25
40
50
75
100
42
64
98
115
170
220
S
163
197
214
269
319
L
H
Z
143 37 200
177 62 270
194 80 305
249 135 415
299 185 515
4-M10 x 1.25
4-M8 x 1.25
2
60
85
18
L
S
Z
H
For oil discharge
volume of 25 cm3
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 43
Air-hydro Booster
Special Order Product
CQ2L100-P2866-60
Intensified pressure ratio 1 : 12.8
Oil discharge volume: 60 cm3
243
65.5
71
2-Rc 3/8
23
(air port)
≈154
Actuators
Air release
Rc 1/2
18
162
137
65
(oil port)
23
Air release
4-ø13
72
117
6
35
77
42.5
23
209
112
1
7
380
CS1LH160-Q5731-160
Intensified pressure ratio 1 : 16
ø73
4-M16 x 1.5
2-Rc 3/4
18.5
15
140
≈211
12
18.5
197
Rc 1
9
106
4-Long hole
View A
8.5
8.5
10.5
243
25
50
39
39
283
383
144
50
25
R9
611.5
182
R9
.5
.5
19
54
72
118
View A
CS1LH200-Q3496-130
18.5
4-M20 x 1.5
2-Rc 3/4
18.5
4-M12 x 1.5
132
≈272.5
245
Rc 1/2
10
4-ø24
63
85
150
182
226
30
14
60
39
229
39
60
30
241
361
574
43
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 44
Air-hydro Booster
CS1LH200-Q8405-350
4-M12 x 1.5
4-M20 x 1.5
98.5
Rc 11/4
(oil supply port)
2-Rc 3/4
18.5
18.5
31.5
11/4
245
Rc
(discharge port)
10
132
4-ø24
63
85
150
182
226
30
14
646
60
39
39
60
30
656
776
1406
For dimensions and other information etc.,
of special order products in the table on the
right, contact SMC.
Intensified
pressure range
CDS1BH140-Q5902
1 to 9.9
10 to 19.9
20 to 29.9
30 or more
44
Part no.
Intensified
Oil discharge
pressure ratio volume (cm3)
CA1LH63-Q0717-25
1 : 1.96
1:6
CA1LH63-Q5857-40
CA1LH63-Q7045-100
1000
Note
Without tank
25
With tank, Foot style
1:6
40
1:6
100
CA1BH63-Q5856-125
CA1BH140-Q7055-200
1:6
1:6
125
200
Without tank, Basic style
CDS1LH160-K5457-100
CQ2LH100-P6978-160
1:6
1 : 9.76
315
160
Without tank, Foot style
HC03-80-Q4602-25
1 : 10
25
CA1LH63-Q7886-50
TMS80-A2484-178
1 : 10
1 : 10
50
87
CA1LH63-Q8409-100
1 : 10
100
CS1LN160-Q3930-147
CA1BH100-Q5896-60
CDQ2LH140-P6024-90
1 : 10
1 : 11
1 : 12.25
147
60
90
CDQ2LH140-P4578-180
1 : 12.25
180
CS1LN160-Q3931-57
1 : 16
57
CQ2LH100-P6517-64
1 : 16
64
CQ2L100-P0987-238
CQ2L160-P3270-150
1 : 16
1 : 16
100
150
CDS1L160-01-27928
1 : 16
160
CDQ2L140-P1009-116
1 : 21.7
116
CS1LH200-Q3495-77
1 : 25
77
CS1L200-Q3932-151
1 : 25
151
CS1LH200-Q64100-165
1 : 25
165
CS1LH200-Q6411-325
CS1LH300-L9421-180
1 : 25
1 : 25
325
420
CS1FH160-K4133-175
1 : 28
CS1LH300-Q1382-250
CS1LH160-Q6528-80
1 : 29
1 : 32.7
99
With tank, Flange type
250
80
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 45
Air-hydro Converter
Series CCT
Hydraulic Clamp
How to Order
CCT 63
100
Effective oil level stroke (mm)
Air-hydro converter
Actuators
Nominal converter size/Stroke (mm)
63
100
160
50, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500
100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600
200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800
Specifications
0 to 0.7 MPa
Operating pressure
1.05 MPa
Proof pressure
5 to 50°C
Turbine oil (40 to 100 cSt)
Fluid
Converter Standard Effective Oil Level Stroke/Effective Volume (cm3)
Nominal size
of converter
(mm)
63
100
160
600
700
800
Maximum flow∗
(l/min)
1480
—
—
—
36
3770
4520
—
—
9150
10980 12810 14640
Standard effective oil level stroke (mm)
50
100
200
300
400
500
150
300
—
750
600
890
1190
1510
2260
3010
—
—
3660
5490
7320
88
217
∗ Maximum flow indicates the converter oil speed (0.2m/s) limit, which can maintain converter oil level stability,
expressed as a flow rate.
CCT40 – Effective oil level stroke
CCT40 cannot be used as
an air-hydro unit since it is
a converter for small
capacity actuators. Use an
individual CC valve unit or
a speed controller (AS2000,
AS3000 or AS4000, etc.)
through a piping connection
instead.
Specifications
0 to 0.7 MPa
Operating pressure
1.05 MPa
Proof pressure
5 to 50°C
Turbine oil (40 to 100 cSt )
Fluid
40 mm
Nominal size of converter
Converter Standard Effective Oil Level Sroke/Effective Volume
Standard effective oil level stroke (mm)
50
100
150
200
300
Effective volume (cm3)
60
120
180
250
370
Maximum flow (l/min)
15
∗ Maximum flow indicates the converter oil speed (0.2m/s) limit, which can maintain converter oil level stability,
expressed as a flow rate.
45
ECOPS.qxd
46
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 46
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 47
Directional Control Equipment
Application
VXD21/22/23
VCA
VQ20/30
Air blow, Air tool, Non-operation
Air blow, Air tool
48
51
53
VXZ
Cooling water
55
VXA21/22
VP300/500/700
VG342
VP3145/3165/3185
VM1000 VM100/200/400
VNC
VBA1110 to 4200
Air purge
57
58
60
62
64
68
70
71
Air blow, Air tool
Air purge, Paint stirring
Air purge
Coolant
Paint stirring
Hydraulic clamp
Page
47
Directional Control
Equipment
Zero differential pressure operated
Coolant valve
Booster valve
Series
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 48
Pilot Operated 2 Port Solenoid Valve
For air, gas, water, oil
The updated individual
catalog (CAT.ES70-29A) will
be available shortly.
Non-operation
Air Blow
Series VXD21/22/23
Normally Closed (N.C.)
Air Tool
Models/Valve specifications
Flow coefficient
Connection
Orifice
Effective
Thread Flange (ømm) Cv area
(mm2)
14
—
—
38
—
—
12
—
34 —
1 —
— 32A
— 40A
— 50A
10
10
15
10
15
20
25
35
40
50
1.9
2.4
4.5
2.4
5.5
9.5
12.5
23
31
49
34
43
80
43
100
170
225
415
560
880
Model
VXD2130-02
VXD2130-03
VXD2140-03
VXD2130-04
VXD2140-04
VXD2150-06
VXD2260-10
VXD2270-32
VXD2380-40
VXD2390-50
Min. operating
pressure
differential
(MPa)
0.02
0.02
0.02
0.02
0.02
0.02
0.02
0.03
0.03
0.03
Max.
Max. operating pressure differential (MPa)
system Weight∗
Water
Air
Oil
pressure (g)
AC
DC
AC
DC
AC
DC
0.7
0.7
1.0
0.7
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.5
0.5
1.0
0.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.9
0.9
1.0
0.9
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.7
0.7
1.0
0.7
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.5
0.5
0.7
0.5
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.4
0.4
0.7
0.4
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
(MPa)
1.5
420
420
670
500
670
1150
1650
5400
6800
8400
∗ Weight for grommet type. Add 10 g for conduit type, 30 g for DIN terminal type, and 60 g for terminal type.
Solenoid specifications
Symbol
Model
OUT
VXD21
Power
supply
AC
DC
IN
VXD22
AC
DC
VXD23
AC
DC
Frequency
(Hz)
50
60
—
50
60
—
50
60
—
Apparent power (VA) Power consumption Temperature increase (°C)
(W) (energized)
(rated voltage)
Inrush
Energized
4.5
45
20 (32)
11
3.2
35
17 (28)
7
6
55
—
—
7.5
60
40
18
6
50
35
12
8
60
—
—
11
65
50
21
9.5
60
45
17
11.5
65
—
—
Note 1) Reset voltage is 20% or more of rated voltage for AC, and 2% or more of rated voltage for DC.
Note 2) Allowable voltage fluctuation is ±10% of rated value for both AC and DC.
Note 3) The values are for ambient temperature of 20°C ±5°C and rated voltage.
Note 4) For VXD2130, AC to DC or DC to AC coil exchange is not possible due to different armature
configuration.
For VXD21540, 22760, 23980, AC to DC coil exchange is possible, but not DC to AC exchange.
(DC will generate humming sound since it does not have a shading coil.)
Note 5) Values for apparent power inside ( ) are for VXD2130.
Normally Open (N.O.)
Min. operating Max. operating pressure
Max.
pressure
system Weight∗
differential (MPa)
pressure
differential
(g)
(MPa)
Water, Air
Oil
(MPa)
0.6
0.02
0.7
—
15
4.5
80
VXD2142-03
690
0.02
0.6
0.7
—
15
5.5 100
VXD2142-04
690
0.02
0.6
0.7
—
20
9.5 170
VXD2152-06
1170
0.02
0.6
0.7
—
25 12.5 225
VXD2262-10
1.5
1690
0.03
0.6
0.7
32A
35 23
415
VXD2272-32
5400
0.03
0.6
0.7
40A
560
40 31
VXD2382-40
6800
0.03
0.6
0.7
50A
50 49
880
VXD2392-50
8400
Flow coefficient
Orifice
Effective
area
Thread Flange (ømm) Cv
(mm2)
Connection
38
12
34
1
—
—
—
Model
Symbol
Model
OUT
VXD21
Power
supply
AC
DC
IN
VXD22
AC
DC
VXD23
AC
DC
Frequency
(Hz)
50
60
—
50
60
—
50
60
—
(rated voltage)
(W) (energized)
Inrush
Energized
5
50
25
12
3.5
35
20
8
6
50
—
—
8
55
45
20
6.5
45
40
15
8
50
—
—
10.5
60
60
25
9.5
50
50
20
11.5
55
—
—
Note 2) When in operation, AC to DC or DC to AC exchange is not possible due to different armature
configuration.
48
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 49
Pilot Operated
2 Port Solenoid Valve
Series
VXD21/22/23
The updated individual catalog
(CAT.ES70-29A) will be available shortly.
How to Order (Normally Closed)
VXD21
VXD22
VXD23
0
Bracket
Nil –––– None
B ––––– With bracket
Thread connection for 02 to
10 is possible.
Type of actuation/Body type
0 ––– Normally closed/Single
Connection
Thread
Flange
32 ––– For 32A
40 ––– For 40A
50 ––– For 50A
Electrical entry
G –– Grommet
C –– Conduit
D –– DIN terminal
T –– Conduit terminal
∗ Refer to “Table 2” below for applicability.
Solenoid valve option
Nil ––– Standard specification
02 ––– 1/4
03 ––– 3/8
04 ––– 1/2
06 ––– 3/4
10 ––– 1
Thread type
Nil –– Rc
T ––– NPTF
F ––– G
N ––– NPT
Rated voltage
1 –– 100VAC, 50/60Hz
2 –– 200VAC, 50/60Hz
3 –– 110VAC, 50/60Hz
4 –– 220VAC, 50/60Hz
5 –– 24VDC
6 –– 12VDC
7 –– 240VAC, 50/60Hz
8 –– 48VAC, 50/60Hz
9 –– Other (Consult with SMC)
Table 1. Connection size/Applicable models
Connection
Thread
Flange
Size
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
32A
40A
50A
Applicable model
VXD2130-02
VXD2130-03, VXD2140-03
VXD2130-04, VXD2140-04
VXD2150-06
VXD2260-10
VXD2270-32
VXD2380-40
VXD2390-50
Table 2. Rated voltage/Electrical entry/Electrical options
Insulation classification
Electrical entry
Electrical option
1 (100V)
2 (200V)
3 (110V)
AC
4 (220V)
7 (240V)
8 (48V)
5 (24V)
DC
6 (12V)
G
S
Class B
C
D, T
—
S
L, Z
—
—
—
G, C
—
—
—
—
Class H
T
S
L, Z
—
—
—
—
—
—
Note) Surge voltage suppressor is attached to the lead wire.
How to Order (example)
For series VXD21, Rc 3/4, 200VAC,
DIN terminal, with surge voltage suppressor
(Model number) VXD2150-06-2DS
Made to Order Specification
to JIS-C-0920
Splash Proof Specification ( Conforming
Conforming to IEC529IP-X4 )
VXD Type – Bore size – Electrical specification -X36
DIN terminal and class H coil are not available.
49
Directional Control
Equipment
Body size
10A
3
15A
4
20A
5
25A
6
32A
7
40A
8
50A
9
Electrical option
Nil –– None
S ––– With surge voltage suppressor
L ––– With indicator light
Z ––– With surge voltage suppressor/indicator light
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Series
Page 50
VXD21/22/23
How to Order (Normally Open)
VXD21
VXD22
VXD23
2
Bracket
Nil ––– None
B –––– With bracket
Thread connection for 03 to
10 is possible.
Electrical option
Nil –– None
S ––– With surge voltage suppressor
L ––– With indicator light
Z ––– With surge voltage suppressor/
indicator light
Body size
4 ––– 15A
5 ––– 20A
6 ––– 25A
7 ––– 32A
8 ––– 40A
9 ––– 50A
Electrical entry
G ––– Grommet
C ––– Conduit
D ––– DIN terminal
T ––– Conduit terminal
2 –– Normally open/Single
Nil –– Standard specification
Rated voltage
1 ––– 100VAC, 50/60Hz
2 ––– 200VAC, 50/60Hz
3 ––– 110VAC, 50/60Hz
4 ––– 220VAC, 50/60Hz
5 ––– 24VDC
6 ––– 12VDC
7 ––– 240VAC, 50/60Hz
8 ––– 48VAC, 50/60Hz
9 ––– Other (Consult with SMC)
Connection
Thread
03 –– 3/8
04 –– 1/2
06 –– 3/4
10 –– 1
Flange
32 –– For 32A
40 –– For 40A
50 –– For 50A
Table 1. Connection size/Applicable models
Connection
Thread
Flange
Size
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
32A
40A
50A
Applicable model
VXD2142-03
VXD2142-04
VXD2152-06
VXD2262-10
VXD2272-32
VXD2382-40
VXD2392-50
Thread type
Nil –– Rc
T ––– NPTF
F ––– G
N ––– NPT
Table 2. Rated voltage/Electrical entry/Electrical options
Insulation classification
Electrical entry
G
S Note)
Electrical option
1 (100V)
2 (200V)
3 (110V)
AC
4 (220V)
7 (240V)
8 (48V)
5 (24V)
DC
6 (12V)
Class B
C
D, T
—
S
L, Z
—
—
—
G, C
—
—
—
—
Class H
T
S
L, Z
—
—
—
—
—
—
Note) Surge voltage suppressor is attached to the lead wire.
How to Order (example)
For series VXD21, Rc 1/2, 200VAC,
DIN terminal, with surge voltage suppressor
(Model number) VXD2142-04-1TZ
Made to Order Specification
to JIS-C-0920
Splash Proof Specification ( Conforming
Conforming to IEC529IP-X4 )
VXD Type – Bore size – Electrical specification -X36
DIN terminal and class H coil are not available.
50
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 51
Direct Operated 2 Port Solenoid Valve for Air
Air Blow
Series VCA
Air Tool
How to Order Valves (Single Type)
VC A 2 1
1 G
3
02
For air
Option
Series
2
3
4
Nil
Class 2
Class 3
Class 4
F
None
Foot type bracket
∗ When only brackets are required,
refer to “Table 2” below.
Type of actuation
Rc
G
NPT
NPTF
Nil
F
N
T
1
IN(1)
Port size
Fluid
Nil
A
Symbol
General air
Dry air
02
03
04
06
Class 3
—
—
Class 2
—
—
—
Port size
1/4 (8 A)
3/8 (10 A)
1/2 (15 A)
3/4 (20 A)
Voltage
1
2
3
4
5
6
100 VAC
200 VAC
110 VAC
220 VAC
24 VDC
12 VDC
Electrical entry
Class 4
—
Orifice size
∗ Consult with SMC
regarding other
voltages.
G – Grommet
Directional Control
Equipment
Thread type (single type)
N.C.
OUT(2)
Symbol
Orifice size (mmø)
3
4
5
7
10
3
4
5
7
10
Class 2
—
—
—
Class 3
—
—
—
Class 4
—
—
∗ Refer to the table below for orifice and port size combinations.
Manual override
C – Conduit
Nil
B
None
Slotted locking type
Table 1. Orifice and port size combinations
T – With conduit terminal
TL– With conduit terminal
and light
D – DIN
DL – DIN with light
DO – DIN (without connector)
Orifice size (mmø)
Class
Port size
3
4
5
7
10
2
1/4 ( 8A)
—
—
—
1/4 ( 8A)
—
—
—
3/8 (10A)
—
—
—
3/8 (10A)
—
—
1/2 (15A)
—
—
3/4 (20A)
—
—
—
—
3
4
Table 2. Bracket assembly part nos.
Valve model
Connector
VCA21
VCA31
VCA41
Bracket assembly part no.
VCA20-12-1A
VCA30-12-1A
VCA40-12-1A
∗ All types equipped with surge voltage suppressor.
51
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Series
Page 52
VCA
Standard Specifications
Valve construction
Direct operated poppet
Fluid
Air/Inert gas
2.0
Valve specifications
Withstand pressure (MPa)
Body material
Al
Seal material
HNBR
Ambient temperature (°C)
–20 to 60
Fluid temperature (°C)
–10 to 60 (with no freezing)
Enclosure
Dust proof, Splash proof (equivalent to IP65)
Environment
Location without corrosive or explosive gases
Valve leakage cm3/ min (ANR)
0.2 or less
Mounting orientation
Free
Vibration/Impact resistance (m/s2) Note 2)
Coil
specifications
Rated voltage
30/150 or less
24 VDC, 12 VDC, 100 VAC, 110 VAC, 200 VAC, 220 VAC (50/60 Hz)
±10% of rated voltage
Allowable voltage fluctuation
Coil insulation type
Class B
Power consumption DC
Apparent power
VCA2: 6.5 W, VCA3: 8 W, VCA4: 11.5 W
AC Note 1)
50 Hz
VCA2: 7.5 VA, VCA3: 10 VA, VCA4: 13 VA
60 Hz
Note 1) Since AC coil specifications include a rectifying device, there is no difference in apparent power for inrush and
energized conditions.
Note 2) Vibration resistance … Conditions when tested with one sweep of 10 to 300 Hz in the axial direction and at a right
angle to the armature, in both energized and deenergized states
Impact resistance …… Conditions when tested with a drop tester in the axial direction and at a right angle to the
armature, one time each in energized and deenergized states
Characteristic Specifications
Model Class Port size
VCA
(for air)
2 port
solenoid
valve
Orifice
size
ø mm
Maximum
operating
pressure
differential MPa
3
1.0
6 (0.33)
5
0.15
15 (0.83)
2
1/4 (8A)
1/4 (8A)
3/8 (10A)
4
1.0
3
10 (0.55)
7
0.15
27 (1.5)
3/8 (10A)
1/2 (15A)
3/4 (20A)
5
1.0
15 (0.83)
4
7
0.3
27 (1.5)
10
0.15
38 (2.11)
Note) Weight values are for the grommet type.
52
Effective area
mm2
(Cv factor)
Note)
Max. operating
pressure
MPa
Weight
kg
1.0
0.21
1.0
0.30
1.0
0.50
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 53
For dry air, pilot operated
Air Blow
Series VQ20/30
Air Tool
How to Order Valves
VQ 2 1 A 1
1 G
C6
Series/Orifice size
Symbol Series
2
VQ20
3
VQ30
Option
Nil: None
Effective orifice
ø3.4 mm
ø4.8 mm
F: With bracket
Type of actuation
N.C.
(A)
2
L: L type
(VQ20 only)
1
(P)
Note) Consult with SMC
for N.O. type.
Note) Specify “LF” for L type with
bracket.
Port size
Body type
Symbol
C6
C8
C10
C12
A: Single valve
Port size
VQ20 VQ30
ø6 One-touch fitting
Manual override
Nil
M: For manifold
B Note)
None
(Tool type)
Note) Available only for normally
closed DIN terminal in-line type.
Coil voltage
1
2
3
5
6
9 Note)
100 VAC (50/60 Hz)
200 VAC
110 VAC
24 VDC
12 VDC
Other, Special voltage
Note) Consult with SMC for
a special voltage.
Indicator light/Surge voltage suppressor
Nil
S
Z
None
With surge voltage suppressor
With indicator light/surge voltage suppressor
Note 1) For a coil voltage of 100 VAC, the unit will be
with surge voltage suppressor.
Note 2) “YOZ” is not available.
Electrical entry
G: Grommet
Y: DIN terminal
YO: DIN terminal
without connector
53
Directional Control
Equipment
1
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Series
Page 54
VQ20/30
VQ20
Series
Valve construction
VQ30
Pilot operated 2 port poppet type
Fluid
Air, Inert gas
0.01 MPa
0.6 MPa
VQ20
Effective area
(Cv factor/Effective orifice)
Body orifice size
Response time Note 1)
Maximum operating frequency
C6
C8
7.2
9
mm2
mm2
ø13.8
100 cps
54
Electrical specifications
30 cps
–10 to 50°C Note 2)
Not required
Lubrication
Slotted locking type Note 3)
150/30 m/s2 Note 4)
Dust proof Note 5)
Free
46 g
Weight
N.C.
17.5 mm2 (Cv1/ø4.8)
20 ms or less
1
(P)
C12
ø6
Enclosure
(A)
2
C10 14.4 mm2 (Cv0.8/ø4.3)
5 ms or less
Impact resistance/Vibration resistance
Symbol
(Cv0.4/ø3)
(Cv0.5/ø3.4)
Manual override
VQ30
0.5 MPa
80 g
12 VDC, 24 VDC, 100 VAC, 110 VAC, 200 VAC
Rated coil voltage
±10% of rated voltage
Coil insulation
Equivalent to class B
24 VDC
Power consumption
(current value)
Electrical entry
2.5 W DC (104 mA)
12 VDC
2.5 W DC (208 mA)
100 VAC
Inrush: 2 VA (20 mA), Energized: 2 VA (20 mA)
Grommet, DIN terminal
Note 1) Based on JISB8375-1981 (Values for supply pressure of 0.5 MPa, without indicator light/surge
voltage suppressor)
Note 2) Use dry air without condensation when operating at low temperatures.
Note 3) Manual override is available for DIN terminal type only.
Note 4) Vibration resistance: No malfunction resulted in a one sweep test between 8.3 and 2000 Hz.
Test was performed in the axial and right angle directions of the main
valve and armature for both energized and de-energized states. (The
value is for the initial stage.)
Impact resistance: No malfunction resulted from the impact test using a drop impact
tester. The test was performed one time each in the axial and right angle
directions of the main valve and armature for both energized and deenergized states. (The value is for the initial stage.)
Note 5) DIN terminal type is dust and splash proof (IP65) compatible.
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 55
Pilot Operated Zero Differential Pressure Operated
Series VXZ
For air, gas, vacuum, water, oil
Normally Closed (N.C.)
Cooling Water
Flow coefficient
Port Orifice
Effective
area
size (ømm) Cv
(mm2)
Max.
Min. operating Max. operating pressure differential (MPa)
system Weight∗
pressure
Water
Air
Oil
pressure
differential
(g)
AC DC AC DC AC DC (MPa)
(MPa)
Model
14
10
1.9
34
VXZ2230-02
1.0 0.7 1.0 0.7 0.7 0.7
550
38
10
2.4
43
VXZ2230-03
1.0 0.7 1.0 0.7 0.7 0.7
550
12
15
5.3
95
VXZ2240-04
34
20
9.2
165
VXZ2350-06
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.7 0.7
1,300
1
25
12
215
VXZ2360-10
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.7 0.7
1,480
0
1.0 0.7 1.0 0.7 0.7 0.7
1.5
760
Power
supply
Model
OUT
AC
VXZ22
DC
IN
AC
VXZ23
DC
Frequency
(Hz)
50
60
—
50
60
—
(rated voltage)
Inrush
Energized (W) (energized)
7.5
60
60(53)
18
6
50
51(44)
12
8
60
—
—
11
65
80
21
9.5
60
67
17
11.5
65
—
—
Note 4) AC to DC or DC to AC coil exchange is not possible due to different armature
configuration.
Note 5) Values for apparent power inside ( ) are for VXZ2230.
Normally Open (N.O.)
Flow coefficient
Port Orifice
Effective
area
size (ømm) Cv
(mm2)
Max.
Min. operating Max. operating pressure differential (MPa)
system Weight∗
pressure
Water
Air
Oil
pressure
differential
(g)
AC DC AC DC AC DC (MPa)
(MPa)
Model
14
10
1.9
34
VXZ2232-02
0.7 0.6 0.7 0.6 0.7 0.6
600
38
10
2.4
43
VXZ2232-03
0.7 0.6 0.7 0.6 0.7 0.6
600
12
15
5.3
95
VXZ2242-04
34
20
9.2
165
VXZ2352-06
0.7 0.6 0.7 0.6 0.7 0.6
1,370
1
25
215
VXZ2362-10
0.7 0.6 0.7 0.6 0.7 0.6
1,550
12
0
0.7 0.6 0.7 0.6 0.7 0.6
1.5
850
Symbol
OUT
Model
VXZ22
Power
supply
AC
DC
IN
VXZ23
AC
DC
Frequency
(Hz)
50
60
—
50
60
—
(rated voltage)
Inrush
Energized (W) (energized)
8
55
66(60)
20
6.5
45
57(51)
15
8
50
—
—
11
60
93
25
9.5
50
79
20
11.5
55
—
—
Note 4) AC to DC or DC to AC coil exchange is not possible due to different armature
configuration.
Note 5) Values for apparent power inside ( ) are for VXZ2232.
55
Directional Control
Equipment
Symbol
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Series
VXZ
Page 56
How to Order
Model
2230
2230
2240
2350
2360
Port size
02 (Rc 1/4)
03 (Rc 3/8)
04 (Rc 1/2)
06 (Rc 3/4)
10 (Rc 1)
Electrical option
Thread type
Nil
T
F
N
Nil
S
L
Rc
NPTF
G
NPT
None
With indicator light
With surge voltage suppressor/
indicator light
Z
Normally
VXZ 2230
02
1
G
Normally
VXZ 2232
02
1
G
N.C. Closed
N.O. Open
Bracket
Nil
B
Electrical entry
G
C
D
T
Nil Standard specification
Model
2232
2232
2242
2352
2362
Grommet
Conduit
DIN terminal
Conduit terminal
Port size
02 (Rc 1/4)
03 (Rc 3/8)
04 (Rc 1/2)
06 (Rc 3/4)
10 (Rc 1)
Rated voltage
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
100 VAC, 50/60 Hz
200 VAC, 50/60 Hz
110 VAC, 50/60 Hz
220 VAC, 50/60 Hz
24 VDC
12 VDC
240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
48 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Other (Consult with SMC.)
Table 1
Rated voltage/Electrical entry/Electrical options
Fluid
Standard specifications
Air (general, dry)
Vacuum (up to 1 Torr)
Turbine oil, Carbon dioxide (CO2),
Gaseous nitrogen (N2)
Freon 11, 113, 114
Option Note)
Air (dry)
High temperature water
Argon, Helium
(T)
(D, E)
(F)
(Other)
Fluid and ambient temperature
Temperature
condition
Maximum
Minimum
Power
supply
Water
(standard)
AC
DC
AC·DC
60
40
1
Air
(standard)
Note 3)
Oil
High temp.
water
(standard)
80
60
–10 Note 2)
Note 1) Dew point is –10°C or below.
Note 2) 50 cSt or less
Note 3) D.E.N.P., etc., inside ( ) indicate option codes.
56
None
With bracket
(D.E.N.P.)
60
40
–5 Note 3)
99
—
—
Note 3)
Ambient
High temp. temperature
(°C)
oil (D.N.)
100
—
—
60
40
–10
Insulation
classification
Electrical
entry
Electrical
option
1 (100 V)
2 (200 V)
3 (110 V)
AC
4 (220 V)
7 (240 V)
8 (48 V)
5 (24 V)
DC
6 (12 V)
Class H
Class B
G
C
D, T
G, C
T
Note)
S
—
S L, Z —
S L, Z
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Note) Surge voltage suppressor is attached
to the lead wire.
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 57
Direct Air Operated 2 Port Valve
Series VXA21/22
For air, gas, vacuum, water, oil
Normally Closed (N.C.)/Normally Open (N.O.)
N.C.
Port
size
(Rc)
Orifice
(ømm)
18
(6A)
14
(8A)
N.O.
38
(10A)
1 2 (15A)
N.C.
Flow coefficient
Effective
area
Cv
Max. operating Max. system
pressure
pressure
differential (MPa)
(MPa)
Model
(mm )
2
3
4.5
3
0.33
0.61
0.33
6
11
6
4.5
0.61
11
6
8
10
4.5
6
8
10
10
1.05
1.7
1.9
0.61
1.05
1.7
2.4
2.4
19
31
34
11
19
31
43
43
VXA212 20
VXA213 20
VXA212 20
VXA213 20
VXA223 20
VXA224 20
VXA225 20
VXA226 20
VXA223 20
VXA224 20
VXA225 20
VXA226 20
VXA226 20
1.0
0.5
1.0
0.5
1.0
0.6
0.2
0.1
1.0
0.6
0.2
0.1
0.1
Proof
pressure
(MPa)
Weight
(g)
170
1.0
250
0.4
1.0
0.4
1.5
340
250
340
420
Directional Control
Equipment
Symbols
Air Purge
Pilot pressure
N.O.
OUT
OUT
IN
Pressure (MPa)
Model
VXA21
VXA22
0.25 to 0.7
IN
How to Order
VXA21
VXA22
Bracket
Nil –– None
B ––– With bracket
∗ Refer to “Table 2” below when only
brackets are required.
Thread type
Nil –– Rc
T ––– NPTF
F ––– G
N ––– NPT
Orifice size
2 –– ø3mm
3 –– ø4.5mm
4 –– ø6mm
5 –– ø8mm
6 –– ø10mm
0 –– Normally closed (N.C.)/Single
2 –– Normally open (N.O.)/Single
Port size
01 –– 1/8
02 –– 1/4
03 –– 3/8
04 –– 1/2
Valve option
Nil –– Standard specification
V –– Vacuum, non-leak
Table 1. Model/Port size/Orifice
Model
VXA21
VXA22
01 (1 8)
02 (1 4)
—
—
—
—
—
02 (1 4)
03 (3 8)
04 (1 2)
Orifice (symbol)
2
3
4
5
6
(3 mmø) (4.5 mmø) (6 mmø) (8 mmø) (10 mmø)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Table 2. Bracket part numbers
Model
VXA212
VXA213
VXA223
VXA224
VXA225
VXA226
Part no.
VX070-020
VX070-022
VX070-029
Ordering example:
For series VXA21, orifice of ø4.5 mm, normally open, Rc 1/4
(Model number) VXA2130-02
57
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 58
Rubber Seal Pilot Operated Poppet Type
Air Purge
Large flow capacity:
Paint Stirring
Models
Cv1.0 (VP300), Cv2.3 (VP500), Cv4.0 (VP700)
Series
Body ported
Base mounted
Low power consumption: 1.8 W(DC)
Model
Can be used as a selector valve or
divider valve
Port size (Rc)
Can be changed from N.C. to N.O.
Weight kg (Body ported/Base mounted) Note)
Series VP300
VP342
VP344
18
Effective area
(mm2)
(Cv factor)
14
16.2
18
(0.9)
(1.0)
0.19/0.25
Series VP500
VP542
VP544
14
38
36
41.4
(2)
(2.3)
0.33/0.43
Series VP700
VP742
VP744
38
12
62
72
(3.4)
(4)
0.64/0.75
Note) Values for grommet type. Values for body ported type do not include brackets.
Vacuum operation is possible.
Up to –101.2 kPa (1 Torr)
Specifications
Air
N.C. or N.O. (changeable)
Internal pilot type
External pilot type
Fluid
Type of actuation
Pilot type
Supply pressure –101.2 kPa to 0.8
Operating pressure range MPa
0.2 to 0.8
Ambient and fluid temperature °C
Response time ms Note 1)
Maximum operating frequency Hz
Lubrication
Manual override
Impact resistance/Vibration resistance m/s2 Note 2)
Series VP300
VP344-G
VP342-D
VP544-G
Rated coil voltage (V)
Series VP700
VP744-E
Maximum 50
30 or less (at 0.5 MPa)
5
Not required (If lubricated, use turbine oil class 1, ISOVG32)
Non-locking push type
Slotted locking type∗, Locking type∗
Free
300/50
Vibration resistance: No malfunction resulted in a one sweep test between 8.3 and 2000Hz.
Electrical entry
VP742-T
Equivalent to
supply pressure,
Minimum 0.2
Note 1) Based on dynamic performance test JIS B8374-1981 (at coil temperature of 20°C, rated
voltage, without surge voltage suppressor)
Note 2) Impact resistance: No malfunction resulted from the impact test using a drop impact
tester. The test was performed one time each in the axial and right
angle directions of the main valve and armature for both energized
and de-energized states. (The value is for the initial stage.)
Series VP500
VP542-D
External pilot
pressure
Apparent power (VA) Note 2)
Power consumption (W) Note 2)
Grommet (G), Grommet terminal (E),
Conduit terminal (T), DIN terminal (D)
AC(50/60Hz) 100, 200, 12∗, 24∗, 48∗, 110 to 120∗, 220∗, 240∗ Note 1)
DC
24, 6∗, 12∗, 48∗, 100∗, 110∗ Note 1)
–15% to +10% of rated voltage
5.6 (50 Hz), 5.0 (60 Hz)
Inrush
AC
Energized
3.4 (50 Hz), 2.3 (60 Hz)
DC
1.8 or 2 (with indicator light)
Note 1) Values indicated by an asterisk (∗) are optional.
Note 2) At rated voltage
JIS symbols
Options
Description
Bracket
(screws included)
Series
VP342
VP542
VP742
Part no.
Type
VP300-27-1A
VP500-27-1A
VP700-27-1A
N.C.
Body
ported
N.O.
External Pilot Type (Optional)
Use the external pilot type for the following
cases.
Standard
• Vacuum or low pressure of 0.2 MPa or less
Base
mounted
• Consult with SMC for holding vacuum.
• When P port is largely restricted
Universal
External pilot
• When using A port for atmospheric release
while blowing, etc.
• When using on a manifold, the external pilot
piping can be centralized on the manifold
base.
58
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 59
Rubber Seal
Pilot Operated Poppet Type 3 Port Solenoid Valve
Series
VP300/500/700
How to Order
VP 3 4 2
1 E
B
01 A
Option
VP solenoid
valve
F
Flow passage
Body size
3
5
7
14
38
12
With bracket
(For VP342, 542, 742 only)
A
B
standard
standard
standard
Normally closed
Normally open
Port size
Type of actuation
4
Symbol
N.C./N.O. common (pilot type)
Body ported
Base mounted
VP342
VP344
VP542
VP544
VP742
VP744
Directional Control
Equipment
Nil∗ Without sub-plate
18
01
14
02
38
03
12
04
Body type
2
4
Port size
Rc
∗ For VP344, VP544, VP744 only
Manual override
Valve option
Nil
B∗
C∗
Nil Standard (Internal pilot type)
R∗
External pilot type
∗ Optional
Push type
Locking type
∗ Optional
Rated voltage
∗ Optional
Nil
Z∗
S∗
None
With indicator light/surge voltage
suppressor (for “E”, “T”, “D” only)
With surge voltage suppressor (for “G” only)
∗ Optional
Electrical entry
G
E
T
D
Grommet
Grommet terminal
Conduit terminal
DIN terminal
How to Order Pilot Valve Assemblies
Pilot valve assemblies/Electrical entry
SF4
1 E Z B
50
Rated voltage
Manual override
1 100 VAC, 50/60 Hz
2 200 VAC, 50/60 Hz
3∗ 110 to 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz
4∗ 220 VAC, 50/60 Hz
5
24 VDC
6∗
12 VDC
7∗ 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
9∗
Other
Nil
B∗
C∗
∗ Optional
Electrical entry
G
E
T
D
Grommet
Grommet terminal
Conduit terminal
DIN terminal
G
Push type
Locking type
∗ Optional
Approx. 300
(Lead wire length)
Symbol Electrical entry Symbol
Electrical entry
Surge voltage suppressor
GS
Approx. 300
1
100 VAC, 50/60 Hz
2
200 VAC, 50/60 Hz
3∗ 110 to 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz
4∗
220 VAC, 50/60 Hz
5
24 VDC
6∗
12 VDC
7∗
240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
9∗
Other
Indicator light
E
EZ
Nil
Z∗
S∗
None
With indicator light/surge voltage
suppressor (for “E”, “T”, “D” only)
With surge voltage suppressor (for “G” only)
∗ Optional
Indicator light
T
TZ
Indicator light
D
DZ
59
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 60
Rubber Seal Pilot Operated Poppet Type
Non-operation
Series VG342
Light weight: 1.1kg
Valve capacity: Rc 1/Cv13.1
Low power consumption:
4.8W DC (standard)
2W DC (low power consumption type)
Specifications
N.C., N.O. common
Internal pilot type
External pilot type
Type of actuation
Operation
Operating pressure range
Can be used in vacuum or with low
pressure
Changeable actuation: N.C., N.O.,
external pilot
Can be used as a selector or
divider valve (external pilot)
0.2 to 0.9 MPa
–101.2 kPa to 0.9 MPa
—
Equivalent to operating
pressure, Minimum 0.2 MPa
External pilot pressure
No lubrication required
External pilot type — Vacuum: up to 101.2 kPa
Low pressure: 0 to 0.2 MPa
Air Purge
30 ms or less (at 0.5 MPa)
5 cycles/sec (min. operating frequency of
1 cycle/30 days based on JlS B8374-1981)
Maximum 50°C
Not required (If lubricated, use turbine oil class 1, lSO VG32.)
Lubrication
Push type (non-locking type)
Manual override
Free
150/50
Impact resistance/Vibration resistance (m/s2) Note 2)
1.1 kg Note 3)
Weight
Note 2) Impact resistance: No malfunction resulted from the impact test using a drop impact
tester. The test was performed one time each in the axial and right
angle directions of the main valve and armature for both energized
and de-energized states. (The value is for the initial stage.)
Vibration resistance: No malfunction resulted in a one sweep test between 45 and 1000Hz.
Note 3) For grommet type
Effective area/Cv factor
Port size
P→A
A→R
P→A
A→R
Effective area mm2
Cv factor
Rc 1 2
140
145
7.8
8.1
Rc 3 4
185
195
10.3
10.8
Rc 1
210
235
11.7
13.1
Pilot valve assembly specifications
Electrical entry
Lead wire color
Enclosure
Rated coil voltage (V)
AC (50/60 Hz)
DC
Grommet (G), Grommet terminal (E)
Conduit terminal (T), DlN terminal (D)
100 VAC: Blue, 200 VAC: Red, 24 VDC: Red/Black
Dust proof
100, 200, 24∗, 48∗, 110∗, 220∗, 240∗ Note 1)
24, 6∗, 12∗, 48∗, 100∗ Note 1)
12.7 (50), 10.7 (60)
7.6 (50), 5.4 (60)
4.8 W or 5 W (with indicator light)
Apparent power (VA) (Hz) Note 2)
JIS symbols
N.C.
Power consumption Note 2)
N.O.
Inrush
AC
Energized
DC
Option specification
External pilot
Low power consumption type: VG342–––Y
Consider this specification when an electronic control, etc., requires low power consumption.
The following specification is different from the standard.
2W DC or 2.2 W (with indicator light)∗
Power consumption
∗ 100 VDC is 2.4 W, with indicator light 2.6 W.
Continuous energization type: VG342–––E
Consider this specification when operating valves in a continuously energized state for a long period of time.
The following specification is different from the standard.
Apparent power (VA) (Hz) Note)
Power consumption Note)
Note) At rated voltage
60
AC
Inrush
Energized
DC
7.9 (50), 6.2 (60)
5.8 (50), 3.5 (60)
2 W or 2.2 W (with indicator light)
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 61
Rubber Seal
Pilot Operated Poppet Type 3 Port Solenoid Valve
Series
VG342
Caution
How to Order
VG342
Indicator Light/
Surge Voltage Suppressor
04
1 G
A
100 VAC/DC or more
For indicator light assembly
Terminal No. 1 (+)
Pilot valve option
Valve type
Nil
R
Nil
Y∗
E∗
Internal pilot
External pilot
∗ Optional
Rated voltage
100 VAC, 50/60 Hz
200 VAC, 50/60 Hz
110 VAC, 50/60 Hz
220 VAC, 50/60 Hz
24 VDC
12 VDC
240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Other
Nil
A
B
External pilot
N.C. (Normally closed)
N.O. (Normally open)
48 VDC or less
For indicator light assembly
Terminal No. 1 (+)
(+)
Thread type
Nil
F∗
N∗
T∗
∗ Optional
(–)
Rc
G
NPT
NPTF
Terminal No. 2 (–)
Electrical Connection
∗ Optional
Electrical entry
G
D
E
T
Terminal No. 2 (–)
Flow passage
Grommet
DIN terminal
Grommet terminal
Conduit terminal
Port size
04
06
10
Rc 1 2
Rc 3 4
Rc 1
The internal connections for DlN terminal and
terminal (with indicator light/surge voltage
suppressor circuit) are as shown below.
Connect each to the power supply side.
With DlN terminal block
With terminal block
Nil
S
Z
None
(For grommet type only)
(Except grommet type)
VO307
X84
1 G
Pilot valve assembly for VG342
Valve option
Nil
∗ Optional
Rated voltage
5
6∗
7∗
9∗
∗ Optional
100 VAC, 50/60 Hz
200 VAC, 50/60 Hz
110 VAC, 50/60 Hz
220 VAC, 50/60 Hz
24 VDC
12 VDC
240 V, 50/60 Hz
Other
1
+
+
2
–
–
Changing the Flow Passage
Nil
Standard
Y∗ Low power consumption
E∗ Continuous energization
1
2
3∗
4∗
Ground
Terminal no.
DlN terminal
Terminal
S
None
(For grommet type only)
Z
(Except grommet type)
Electrical entry
G
D
E
T
Grommet
DIN terminal
Grommet terminal
Conduit terminal
N.C.
N.O.
External pilot
When changing the flow passage, confirm
that pressure has been removed from the
valve.
Loosen the hexagon socket head cap screw
M4 x 0.7 in the switching plate and match the
mark on the adapter plate with a character
symbol on the switching plate. Perform piping
as shown in the table below.
Piping
Flow passage
NC
NO
Port
P
Primary
R
Exhaust side
Secondary (Plug for
2 port valve)
A
Exhaust side
(Plug for Secondary
2 port valve)
Primary
Universal porting
External (Piping of primary side is possible anywhere.)
Note 1) When operating with internal pilot, confirm
that the X port is plugged. If it is not plugged,
use an R 1/8 plug.
Note 2) When operating with external pilot,
pressurize from the X port.
61
Directional Control
Equipment
1
2
3∗
4∗
5
6∗
7∗
9∗
Standard
Low power consumption
Continuous energization
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 62
Rubber Seal Large 3 Port Solenoid Valve
Non-operation
Series VP3145/3165/3185
Large flow capacity, small exhaust
resistance
Models
Port size
Rc
The switching plate enables conversion to N.C. or
N.O. without changing ports.
Cv factor
Can be used in vacuum or with low
pressure
Effective area
mm2
Weight kg Note)
External pilot type — Vacuum: up to 101.2 kPa
Low pressure: 0 to 0.2 MPa
VP3145
VPA3145
Model
(Refer to Cv factor values in “Models” table.)
Easy conversion to N.C. or N.O.
Air Purge
IN, OUT
EXT
IN → OUT
OUT → EXT
IN → OUT
OUT → EXT
38
12
34
34
5.0
7.2
90
130
5.6
8.9
100
160
1.5
6.1
11.7
110
210
VP3165
VPA3165
34
1
11 4
11 4
12.8 15.6 17.2
15.6 17.2 18.3
230 280 310
280 310 330
2.0
VP3185
VPA3185
2
11 4 11 2
2
31.7 36.1 36.1
36.1 37.2 37.2
570 650 650
650 670 670
2.8
Note) For grommet type.
Add 0.2 kg for conduit terminal type.
Subtract 0.5kg for air operated type.
Unrestricted mounting orientation
Specifications
Air
N.C. or N.O. (changeable)
External pilot type
Internal pilot type
Vacuum/Low pressure
General
General
Fluid
Type of actuation
Pilot type
Main pressure
Operating pressure range MPa
Pilot pressure
Ambient and fluid temperature (°C)
Response time (ms) (at 0.5 MPa)
JIS symbols
Internal pilot type
<Standard>
External pilot type
<For pressurizing>
-101.2kPa to 0.2
0.2 to 0.8
0.2 to 0.3
See the graph
on next page.
0.2 to 0.8
Note 1)
Maximum operating frequency (Hz)
Lubrication Note 2)
Manual override
Impact resistance/Vibration resistance (m/s2) Note 3)
0 (no freezing) to 60
30 or less
AC 30 or less
ON
OFF
40 or less
DC 30 or less
3
Required (equivalent to turbine oil class 1, ISO VG32)
Non-locking type
Free
150/50
AC
DC
Note 2) Since this solenoid valve is a lubricating type, use a lubricant equivalent to turbine oil class 1
(ISO VG32).
Note 3) Impact resistance: No malfunction resulted from the impact test using a drop impact tester.
The test was performed one time each in the axial and right angle
directions of the main valve and armature for both energized and deenergized states. (The value is for the initial stage.)
Vibration resistance: No malfunction resulted in a one sweep test between 45 and 1000 Hz.
Grommet (G), Conduit terminal (T),
DIN terminal (D)
Conduit terminal with indicator light (TL),
Conduit terminal with surge voltage suppressor (TS),
Electrical entry
Conduit terminal with indicator light/surge voltage suppressor (TZ),
Options
DlN terminal with indicator light (DL),
DlN terminal with surge voltage suppressor (DS),
DlN terminal with indicator light/surge voltage suppressor (DZ)
AC (50/60 Hz) 100 V, 200 V, 110 V ∗, 220 V ∗, 240 V ∗ Note 1)
Rated coil voltage
12 V ∗, 24 V, 48 V ∗, 100 V ∗ Note 1)
DC
Inrush
73 VA (50 Hz), 58 VA (60 Hz)
Note
2)
Apparent power
AC
Energized 28 VA (50 Hz), 17 VA (60 Hz)
Power consumption Note 2)
DC
12 W
Standard
<For vacuum>
Note) In the case of the N.O. specification, it
operates as a normally open valve only
when the proper pressure is applied to
the pilot chamber.
62
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 63
Rubber Seal
Large 3 Port Solenoid Valve
External Pilot Type
Use an external pilot model in the following
cases:
• Vacuum or low pressure of 0.2 MPa or less:
External pilot for vacuum/low pressure
• Operation with restricted supply port:
External pilot for general purpose
• Slow build up of supply port air pressure:
External pilot for general purpose
• Low resistance in the secondary side as in
the case of air blowing or filling an air tank,
etc.: External pilot for general purpose
Note 1) Use external pilot pressure within the
range shown in the graph below.
Note 2) Changing from an internal pilot to an
external pilot or vice versa is not
possible.
How to Order
VP3 1 4 5
04 1 G A
Pilot option
VP 3 port
solenoid valve
Nil
1
Type of actuation
No. of solenoids
1
A
B
Single
Body size
12
4
6
8
G
Grommet
T
Conduit terminal
D
DIN terminal
TL∗ Conduit terminal with indicator light
Conduit terminal with
TS∗
surge voltage suppressor
Conduit terminal with indicator light/
TZ∗
DL∗ DIN terminal with indicator light
DIN terminal with
DS∗
DIN terminal with indicator light/
DZ∗
112
Body ported
Valve option
General purpose
Nil
V
General
Vacuum/Low pressure
Pilot pressure (MPa)
Port size (IN/OUT port)
Port size Rc
Symbol (Nominal size) VP3145 VP3165 VP3185
03
04
06
10
12
14
20
N.C. (Normally closed)
N.O. (Normally open)
Electrical entry
1
Body type
5
Standard (Internal pilot)
External pilot
∗ Optional
38
12
(10 A)
(15 A)
3 4 (20 A)
1 (25 A)
1 1 4 (32 A)
1 1 2 (40 A)
2 (50 A)
Rated coil voltage
11
22
3∗
4∗
55
6∗
7∗
9∗
Main pressure (MPa)
100 VAC, 50/60 Hz
200 VAC, 50/60 Hz
110 VAC, 50/60 Hz
220 VAC, 50/60 Hz
24 VDC
12 VDC
240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Other
∗ Optional
VT3113
00 1 G
Rated coil voltage
11
22
3∗
4∗
55
6∗
7∗
9∗
100 VAC, 50/60 Hz
200 VAC, 50/60 Hz
110 VAC, 50/60 Hz
220 VAC, 50/60 Hz
24 VDC
12 VDC
240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Other
∗ Optional
Electrical entry
TL∗
TS∗
TZ∗
DL∗
DS∗
DZ∗
Grommet
Conduit terminal
DIN terminal
Conduit terminal with indicator light
Conduit terminal with surge voltage suppressor
Conduit terminal with indicator light/
DIN terminal with indicator light
DIN terminal with surge voltage suppressor
DIN terminal with indicator light/surge voltage suppressor
∗ Optional
63
Directional Control
Equipment
Vacuum/
Low pressure
VP3145/3165/3185
Series
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 64
3 Port Micro Mechanical Valve
Series VM1000
Miniature construction requires
minimal mounting space.
Easy tubing connection with builtin hose nipple.
Port options: Side ported
Bottom ported
Large over travel after actuation
(mechanically operated type)
Air Purge
Valve type
Number of ports
Total travel (T.T.)
Piping
Fluid
Operating pressure
Ambient and operating air temperature
Effective area (Cv factor)
Lubrication
Fitting
Weight (Basic type)
N.C. poppet type
3 port
4.8 mm (Basic type)
Side ported or Bottom ported
Air
5 to 0.8 MPa
1 mm2 (0.055)
Not required (If lubricated, use turbine oil class 1, ISO VG32.)
With hose nipple
6g
Option specifications
Total travel (T.T.)
2.5 mm (Basic type)
• A commercially available actuator for the V micro switch can be installed.
• However, be aware that there are different types of micro switch such as P.T., O.T. or F.O.F.
• Total travel of 2.5 mm is only available for the basic type.
Models
Mechanical operation
Actuator
Basic type
Roller lever
One way
roller lever
Manual operation
Toggle lever
64
Push button
Port type
Side ported
Bottom ported
Side ported
Bottom ported
Side ported
Bottom ported
Side ported
Bottom ported
Side ported
Bottom ported
Side ported
Bottom ported
Side ported
Bottom ported
No. of
ports
3 port
3 port
3 port
3 port
3 port
3 port
3 port
3 port
3 port
3 port
3 port
3 port
3 port
3 port
Applicable tube
T0425
TU0425/T0403
VM1000-4N-00
VM1000-4NU-00
VM1010-4N-00
VM1010-4NU-00
VM1000-4N-01
VM1000-4NU-01
VM1010-4N-01
VM1010-4NU-01
VM1000-4N-02
VM1000-4NU-02
VM1010-4N-02
VM1010-4NU-02
VM1000-4N-08
VM1000-4NU-08
VM1010-4N-08
VM1010-4NU-08
VM1000-4N-32R
VM1000-4NU-32R
VM1010-4N-32R
VM1010-4NU-32R
VM1000-4N-32B
VM1000-4NU-32B
VM1010-4N-32B
VM1010-4NU-32B
VM1000-4N-32G
VM1000-4NU-32G
VM1010-4N-32G
VM1010-4NU-32G
Note
Red
Red
Black
Black
Green
Green
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 65
3 Port Mechanical Valve
Series VM100
Air Purge
Compact size equivalent to micro Specifications
Piping
switch
Models
Piping
Actuator
No. o
f port
s
Basic type
Roller lever
One way
roller lever
Straight plunger
Roller plunger
Cross roller plunger
Toggle lever
Push button
(Mushroom)
Push button
(Extended)
Push button (Flush)
Side ported
3 port
VM130-01-00
VM131-01-00
VM130-01-01
VM131-01-01S
VM131-01-02
VM131-01-02S
VM130-01-05
VM130-01-06
VM130-01-06S
VM130-01-07
VM130-01-07S
VM130-01-08
VM130-01-30R
VM130-01-30B
VM130-01-30G
VM130-01-30Y
VM130-01-32R
VM130-01-32B
VM130-01-32G
VM130-01-32Y
Bottom ported
3 port
VM132-M5-00
VM133-M5-00
VM133-M5-01
VM133-M5-01S
VM133-M5-02
VM133-M5-02S
VM132-M5-05
VM132-M5-06
VM132-M5-06S
VM132-M5-07
VM132-M5-07S
VM132-M5-08
VM132-M5-30R
VM132-M5-30B
VM132-M5-30G
VM132-M5-30Y
VM132-M5-32R
VM132-M5-32B
VM132-M5-32G
VM132-M5-32Y
—
—
—
—
VM-05B
VM-06B
VM-06BS
VM-07B
VM-07BS
VM-08B
VM-30AR
VM-30AB
VM-30AG
VM-30AY
VM-32AR
VM-32AB
VM-32AG
VM-32AY
VM130-01-33
VM132-M5-33
VM-33A
VM132-M5-34R
VM132-M5-34B
VM132-M5-34G
VM132-M5-34Y
VM132-M5-36
VM153-M5-35R
VM153-M5-35B
VM153-M5-35G
VM153-M5-35Y
(5 port)
VM-34AR
VM-34AB
VM-34AG
VM-34AY
VM-36A
—
—
—
—
VM130-01-34R
VM130-01-34B
Selector (2 position)
VM130-01-34G
VM130-01-34Y
Key selector (2 position) VM130-01-36
VM151-01-35R
VM151-01-35B
VM151-01-35G
VM151-01-35Y
(5 port)
Actuator
part no.
Application
—
Polyacetal roller
Hard steel roller
Polyacetal roller
Hard steel roller
—
Polyacetal roller
Hard steel roller
Polyacetal roller
Hard steel roller
Red
Black
Green
Yellow
Red
Black
Green
Yellow
A set of Red, Black,
Green, and Yellow
included.
Red
Black
Green
Yellow
Red
Black
Green
Yellow
Note) Actuator replacement is available except for roller lever, one way roller lever, and 3 position
selector types.
65
Directional Control
Equipment
A variety of actuators available
Manual operation
Port options: Side ported
Bottom ported
Side ported
Bottom ported
Air
Fluid
Operating pressure
–100 kPa to 1.0 MPa
2.5 mm2 (0.14)
Lubrication
Port size (Nominal size)
Rc 1/8 (6 A)
M5 x 0.8
95 g
110 g
Weight (Basic type)
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 66
Series VM200
Large flow capacity
A variety of actuators available
Air Purge
Specifications
Fluid
Air
Operating pressure
0 to 1.0MPa
-5 to 60°C (with no freezing)
19 mm2 (1.0)
Lubrication
Rc 1/4 (8 A)
Weight (Basic type)
111 g
Models
No. of ports
Actuator
Basic type
Roller lever
One way roller lever
Straight plunger
Roller plunger
Toggle lever
Push button (Mushroom)
Manual operation
Push button (Extended)
Push button (Flush)
Key selector (2 position)
Foot pedal
3 port
Actuator
part no.
VM230-02-00
VM230-02-01
VM230-02-01S
VM230-02-02
VM230-02-02S
VM230-02-05
VM230-02-06
VM230-02-06S
VM230-02-07
VM230-02-07S
VM230-02-08
VM230-02-30R
VM230-02-30B
VM230-02-30G
VM230-02-30Y
VM230-02-32R
VM230-02-32B
VM230-02-32G
VM230-02-32Y
—
VM-01A
VM-01AS
VM-02A
VM-02AS
VM-05A
VM-06A
VM-06AS
VM-07A
VM-07AS
VM-08A
VM-30AR
VM-30AB
VM-30AG
VM-30AY
VM-32AR
VM-32AB
VM-32AG
VM-32AY
VM230-02-33
VM-33A
VM230-02-34R
VM230-02-34B
VM230-02-34G
VM230-02-34Y
VM230-02-36
VM230-02-35R
VM230-02-35B
VM230-02-35G
VM230-02-35Y
VM230-02-40
VM-34AR
VM-34AB
VM-34AG
VM-34AY
VM-36A
—
—
—
—
—
Application
—
Polyacetal roller
Hard steel roller
Polyacetal roller
Hard steel roller
—
Polyacetal roller
Hard steel roller
Polyacetal roller
Hard steel roller
—
Red
Black
Green
Yellow
Red
Black
Green
Yellow
Green, and Yellow
included.
Red
Black
Green
Yellow
—
Red
Black
Green
Yellow
—
Note) Actuator replacement is available except for 3 position selector and foot pedal types.
66
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 67
Series VM400
(Proper countermeasures can be taken for
applications in which noise or dirt from
exhaust could cause a problem to the
environment.)
Air
Fluid
Operating pressure
7 mm2 (0.38)
Lubrication
Rc 1/8 (6 A)
110 g
Weight (Basic type)
Models
Actuator
Basic type
Roller lever
One way roller lever
Straight plunger
Roller plunger
Toggle lever
Push button (Mushroom)
Push button (Extended)
Push button (Flush)
Key selector (2 position)
Model
Actuator
part no.
VM430-01-00
VM430-01-01
VM430-01-01S
VM430-01-02
VM430-01-02S
VM430-01-05
VM430-01-06
VM430-01-06S
VM430-01-07
VM430-01-07S
VM430-01-08
VM430-01-30R
VM430-01-30B
VM430-01-30G
VM430-01-30Y
VM430-01-32R
VM430-01-32B
VM430-01-32G
VM430-01-32Y
—
VM-01A
VM-01AS
VM-02A
VM-02AS
VM-05A
VM-06A
VM-06AS
VM-07A
VM-07AS
VM-08A
VM-30AR
VM-30AB
VM-30AG
VM-30AY
VM-32AR
VM-32AB
VM-32AG
VM-32AY
VM430-01-33
VM-33A
VM430-01-34R
VM430-01-34B
VM430-01-34G
VM430-01-34Y
VM430-01-36
VM-34AR
VM-34AB
VM-34AG
VM-34AY
VM-36A
Application
—
Polyacetal roller
Hard steel roller
Polyacetal roller
Hard steel roller
—
Polyacetal roller
Hard steel roller
Polyacetal roller
Hard steel roller
—
Red
Black
Green
Yellow
Red
Black
Green
Yellow
Green, and Yellow
included.
Red
Black
Green
Yellow
—
Directional Control
Equipment
Piping connection to any port
Specifications
Manual operation
N.C. or N.O. models available
Air Purge
Note) Actuator replacement is available.
67
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 68
Coolant Valve
Solenoid/Air Operated Type
Series VNC
Coolant
Models
Piping port
Model
Symbols
Valve type
Operation
N.C.
N.O.
1
VNC
VNC
04
P1
02
P2
Air operated
VNC1 4
VNC1 4
VNC1 4
VNC2 4
VNC2 4
VNC2 4
VNC2 4
VNC3 4
VNC3 4
VNC4 4
VNC4 4
VNC5 4
VNC5 4
VNC5 4
VNC5 4
VNC6 4
VNC6 4
VNC6 4
VNC6 4
VNC7 4
VNC7 4
VNC7 4
VNC7 4
VNC814
VNC811
VNC914
VNC911
-6A
-8A
-10A
-10A
-10A
-15A
-15A
-20A
-20A
-25A
-25A
-32A
-32A
-32F
-32F
-40A
-40A
-40F
-40F
-50A
-50A
-50F
-50F
-65F
-65F
-80F
-80F
Note)
Rc
Flange
18
14
—
—
38
—
12
—
34
—
1
—
11 4
—
—
32
11 2
—
—
40
2
—
—
50
—
65
—
80
Orifice
(ømm)
7
11
15
11
15
14
20
16
25
22
32
22
32
28
40
28
40
33
50
33
50
45
65
56
80
Weight (kg)
Flow coefficient
Effective area Air operated Solenoid
Cv
type
type
(mm2)
0.7
1
1.3
2.5
3.8
3
5
5
8
7
12
11
18
11
18
19
28
19
28
29
43
29
43
49
70
73
100
13
18
23
45
70
55
90
90
140
130
220
210
320
210
320
330
500
330
500
520
770
520
770
880
1260
1400
1800
0.2
0.3
0.5
0.7
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.4
2.2
2.4
5.0
5.2
3.6
3.8
6.8
7.0
5.5
5.7
10.2
10.4
—
15.7
—
21.2
Note) The flange is equivalent to JIS B 2210 10K (regular type).
014
VNC
VNC
P1
12
P1
External pilot
solenoid type
Fluid
VNC
Fluid
temperature VNC
Coolant
–5 to 60°C∗
–5 to 99°C∗
(air operated type only)
–5 to 50°C∗ (60°C for air operated type)
A
B
Ambient temperature
Proof pressure
Operating
VNC
1
2
pressure range VNC
4
Pressure VNC
VNC
External
pilot air
Lubrication
Temperature
1
4
2
1.5 MPa
0 to 0.5 MPa
0 to 1 MPa
0.25 to 0.7 MPa
0.1 to 0.7 MPa (Refer to Table 1.)
Not required (If lubricated,
use turbine oil class 1, ISO VG32.)
–5 to 50°C∗ (60°C for air operated type)
∗ With no freezing
Use pilot pressure that
is within range A with
respect to the operating
pressure.
Pilot pressure (MPa)
68
Model
Pilot solenoid valve
Electrical entry
AC
(50/60 Hz)
DC
Allowable pressure fluctuation
Coil insulation type
Rated coil
voltage V
Temperature increase
Apparent
power
Table 1
Operating pressure/Pilot Pressure
Pilot solenoid valve specifications
Inrush
AC
Power
DC
consumption
Manual override
Energized
VNC1
SF4--23
Grommet
Grommet terminal
Conduit terminal
DIN terminal
VNC2 to 9
VO301-00T-X302
Conduit terminal
100 V, 200 V, other (option)
24 V, other (option)
Equivalent to class B (130°C)
35°C or less
70°C or less
(at rated voltage)
(at rated voltage)
5.6 VA (50 Hz)
5.0 VA (60 Hz)
3.4 VA (50 Hz)
2.3 VA (60 Hz)
12 VA (50 Hz)
10.5 VA (60 Hz)
7.5 VA (50 Hz)
6 VA (60 Hz)
1.8 W
4.8 W
Push type, other (option)
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 69
Coolant Valve
Solenoid/Air Operated Type
Series
VNC
How to Order
Seal material
A
B
Bracket
NBR seal
FPM seal
Nil
B
None
With bracket
For valve sizes 1, 2, 3, and 4 only
Air Operated Type
VNC 2 0 1 A
15A
External Pilot
Solenoid Type
VNC 2 1 1 A
15A
(Except valve sizes 8 and 9)
1
T
Nil: Push type
Valve size
Symbol
Orifice
size
(mm)
1
ø7
2
ø15 (ø11)
3
4
ø20 (ø14)
ø25 (ø16)
5
ø32 (ø22)
6
ø40 (ø28)
Valve type
Port size
Symbol
Port
1
2
4
Symbol size
N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
(Rc)
0.5 MPa 1 MPa 1 MPa
6A
1/8
8A
1/4
10A
3/8
10A
3/8
15A
1/2
20A
3/4
1
25A
32A 1 1/4
1 1/4B
32F Flange
40A
40F
50A
7
ø50 (ø33)
50F
8
ø65 (ø45)
65F
9
ø80 (ø56)
80F
Values inside ( ) are for N.C. at 1 MPa.
A: Projecting style
push type
Rated voltage
Nil
1
2
3∗
4∗
5
6∗
7∗
9∗
Air operated type
100 VAC, 50/60 Hz
200 VAC, 50/60 Hz
110 VAC, 50/60 Hz
220 VAC, 50/60 Hz
24 VDC
12 VDC
240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Other
B: Slotted
locking
type
Valve
size
1
Nil: Push type
∗ Optional
Valve
sizes
2 to 9
1 1/2
1 1/2B
Flange
2
2B
Flange
2 1/2B
Flange
2B
Flange
Electrical entry and indicator light/surge voltage suppressor
Air operated type
Nil
Grommet
G
Grommet with surge voltage suppressor
GS
Grommet terminal
E
Grommet terminal with indicator light/surge voltage suppressor
EZ
Conduit terminal
T
Conduit terminal with indicator light/surge voltage suppressor
TZ
DIN terminal
D
DIN terminal with indicator light/surge voltage suppressor
DZ
Conduit terminal
T
Conduit terminal with surge voltage suppressor
TS
Conduit terminal with indicator light/surge voltage suppressor
TZ∗
Conduit terminal with indicator light
TL∗
Valve
size
1
Valve
sizes
2 to 9
69
Directional Control
Equipment
Manual override
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 70
Flow Switching 2 Port
Air Operated Valve
Paint Stirring
Air operated 2 port valve with compact
metering valve
Metering valve construction with
reproducibility (adjustable between 0 to
300° )
10.5 (fully closed)
34.5
M5 x 0.8
Pilot port
Effective area for single valve can be
detected with calibration mark.
Needle (M8 x 1.25)
VKFA332-1-01-X1
18
25
PA
Calibration mark position
11.5
17.5
Direct manual override
2-ø3.5 mounting hole
Width across flats 3 mm
Rc 1/8 (OUT port)
Rc 1/8 (IN port)
57.5
50
5
28.5
100
P
11
2.3
21
A
Specifications
Valve type
Fluid
Pilot pressure
OFF
Effective area
ON
70
Poppet
Air, Inert gas
0 to 0.7 MPa
0.15 to 0.7 MPa
4 mm2 (Cv factor: 0.22)
Adjustable type: 0 to 4 mm2
(at 5/6 rotation from fully closed state)
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 71
Booster Valve
Series VBA1110
Specifications
Intensified
pressure ratio
Maximum 2
VBA1111
Maximum 4
Compressed air
VBA1110
VBA1111
Proof pressure
VBA2 00
VBA4 00
Maximum supply pressure
Hydraulic Clamp
Models
VBA1110
VBA2 00
VBA4 00
Fluid
to 4200
Air operated type
Handle operated type
VBA1110-02 VBA1111-02 VBA2100-03 VBA4100-04 VBA2200-03 VBA4200-04
Model
Max. flow rate l/min (ANR) Note)
400
Port size Rc
Exhaust port size Rc
3.0 MPa
Pilot port size Rc
1.5 MPa
Pilot pressure range
VBA1110
0.2 to 2.0 MPa
VBA1111
VBA2 00
0.2 to 1.0 MPa
VBA4 00
Ambient and fluid temperature 2 to 50°C (with no freezing)
Set pressure
range
None
Horizontal
1900
1000
1900
3/8
1/2
1/2
3/8
1/8
0.1 to 0.5 MPa
0.85
0.98
3.8
7.5
3.8
7.5
Note) Flow conditions — IN/OUT: 1.0MPa for VBA1110, IN/OUT: 0.5MPa for VBA1111, VBA22100, 42100
Refer to flow characteristics graphs on page 14-9-3 of “Best Pneumatics Vol. 14” when selecting a model.
Accessory (option) part nos.
Part no.
Model
Description
Pressure gauge
VBA2100
VBA1110-1111
VBA4100
VBA4200
VBA2200
G27-20-R1 … 2 pcs. G27-10-R1-X209 … 2 pcs. G46-10-01 … 2 pcs. G27-10-R1-X209 … 2 pcs. G46-10-01 … 2 pcs.
AN200-02
Silencer
AN300-03
AN400-04
AN300-03
AN400-04
Pressure adjustment mechanism Relieving type
How to Order
1
Pressure
2.0 MPa
Intensified pressure ratio
0
1
Pressure adjustment
1 Handle operated type
Port size
Symbol Port size
02
Rc 1/4
VBA1110-02
VBA1111-02
VBA4100-04
VBA2100-03
Body size
1/4 standard
1
Double
Quadruple
Series VBA1000
VBA 1 1 1 0
02
GN
Series VBA2000/4000
VBA 2 1 0 0
03
GN
2
4
Body size
3/8 standard
1/2 standard
Option
Pressure gauge
Silencer
G
N
Pressure adjustment
1
2
Air operated type
Pressure
0 1.0 MPa
VBA4200-04
Port size
Symbol Port size
03
Rc 3/8
04
Rc 1/2
Applicable series
VBA2100, 2200
VBA4100, 4200
Related products
Air operated type
VBA2200-03
Description
Model
Mist separator
Exhaust cleaner
Symbol
Air tank
Knob operated type
VBA1110/1111
VBA2100/2200
VBA4100/4200
AM250-02
AM450-04, 06
AM550-06, 10
AMC310-03
AMC510-06
AMC610-10
Note
35 dB or more noise reduction
VBAT05
VBAT20 (20 l, Directly connected to booster valve)
(5 l, Directly connected
to booster valve)
Air operated type
71
Directional Control
Equipment
Lubrication
1000
3/8 (IN, OUT) 1/2 (IN, OUT) 3/8 (IN, OUT) 1/2 (IN, OUT)
1/4
Weight kg
1.0 MPa
60
1/4 (IN, OUT)
ECOPS.qxd
72
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 72
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 73
Auxiliary Pneumatic Equipment
Application
VMG
KN
KK
TRB
TRBU
TKS
TCU
TK
AR10 to 60
AR425 to 935
AR20K to 60K
AW10 to 40
AW20K to 40K
Air blow
Air blow, Air tool, Air leakage
Air leakage
Air leakage
Air leakage
Air blow, Air tool
Air leakage
Air blow, Air tool
Air blow, Air tool
Actuator
Air blow, Air tool
Actuator
GD40-01
Page
74
80
83
104
105
106
107
107
108
109
110
111
113
114
115
116
73
Auxiliary Pneumatic
Equipment
Blow gun
S couplers
FR double layer polyurethane tubing
Tube cutter
Regulator
Filter regulator
Series
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 74
Blow Gun
Series VMG
Air Blow
Top piping
Bottom piping
With S coupler plug
Piping type
Piping direction
Body color
Nozzle type
Bottom
Male thread nozzle
Rc, NPT, G
1/4, 3/8
White
With S coupler plug
Top
Dark blue
High efficiency nozzle
Air blow thrust has been increased by 10%.
(comparison done the same nozzle diameter)
Low noise nozzle
45
40
Sample
Thrust (g)
35
30
100 mm
Male thread
nozzle
25
20
15
10
5
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
Internal pressure (MPa)
Scale: Accuracy
Measurement value ±0.2% or less
Temperature: 20°C
Distance between a sample and the scale: 100 mm
Long copper pipe nozzle
∗ Male thread nozzle ø2.5
Pressure loss (MPa)
Large
0.05
Conventional product
Blow Gun
0
74
Pressure loss
Small
Operational force
Provides constant operational force
irrespective of the supply pressure
Supply pressure (MPa)
1.0
0.04
0.03
0.005 MPa pressure loss at 0.5 MPa
0.02
0.01
0
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
Supply pressure (MPa)
1
1.2
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 75
Example of Improvement
Before Improvement
In the case of air guns, energy saving measures are not considered.
S1
S2
2.3 : 1
ø3
Without nozzle
ø3
Effective area
(mm2)
Nozzle size (mm)
Number of nozzles
Supply pressure
Regulator pressure
Outlet pressure
Pressure loss
Nozzle side
S2: 6.4
S1 : S2 = 2.3 : 1
ø3
1
0.700 MPa
0.300 MPa
0.260 MPa
0.040 MPa
Auxiliary Pneumatic
Equipment
After Improvement
Change to fittings, tubing and Blow Gun with large effective areas.
S1
S2
Filter
regulator
S coupler
10.7 : 1
Coil
tube
Nozzle
ø2
ø2
Pressure Loss of Blow Gun Only
Air consumption
100%
Min. 90%
Reduction
Before
After
Effective area
(mm2)
Nozzle size (mm)
Number of nozzles
Supply pressure
Regulator pressure
Outlet pressure
Pressure loss
Nozzle side
S2: 2.8
S1 : S2 = 10.7 : 1
ø2
1
0.700 MPa
0.300 MPa
0.297 MPa
0.003 MPa
75
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Series
Page 76
VMG
How to Order
VMG 1 1 W
03
01
Nozzle
Blow gun
Type
Standard type
Nil
01
02
03
04
11
12
13
21
22
23
24
31
32
33
34
Series
1
Resin body lever type
Piping entry
Bottom
Top
1
2
Body color
White
Dark blue
W
BU
Low noise nozzle
with male thread
Note 1)
Copper
extension
nozzle
Length
300 mm
Length
600 mm
Nozzle size
ø1
ø1.5
ø2
ø2.5
ø1
ø1.5
ø2
ø0.75 x 4
ø0.9 x 8
ø1 x 4
ø1.1 x 8
ø1.5
ø2
ø1.5
ø2
Note 1) One piece of H06-02 self-align fitting is attached.
When a copper extension nozzle is ordered separately, a self-align fitting will also
be required for connection. Order one with the above part number in addition to
the nozzle.
Piping connection type
Nil
N
F
Male thread nozzle
Nozzle model
Without nozzle
KN-R02-100
KN-R02-150
KN-R02-200
KN-R02-250
KNH-R02-100
KNH-R02-150
KNH-R02-200
KNS-R02-075-4
KNS-R02-090-8
KNS-R02-100-4
KNS-R02-110-8
KNL3-06-150
KNL3-06-200
KNL6-06-150
KNL6-06-200
Rc
NPT
G
Connection size
Piping connection system
02
03
11
Screw-in type
With S coupler plug
Size and part no.
1/4
3/8
KK4P-02MS
Plug part no.
Port size
Note1)
Note 1) In case of a type with an S coupler plug, specify no symbol (Rc) for the piping connection type.
The size is Rc 1/4.
Specifications
Air
Fluid
0 to 1.0 MPa
1.5 MPa
Proof pressure
Effective area
5 to 60°C (With no condensation)
30 mm2 (without nozzle)
Rc, NPT, G, 1/4, 3/8
Port size
Piping entry
Top
Bottom
Nozzle port size
Rc 1/4
Weight
180 g
Operational force (when the valve is fully open)
76
7N
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 77
Blow Gun
Series
VMG
Construction
!2
qw
!8 e
!3
r
u
i
Component Parts
o
t
!4
!6
!1 !0
!7
!9
y
@1 @0
!5
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Description
Body L
Body R
Main valve
Valve guide
Nozzle holder
Port
Elbow
Cover
Ring
Arm L
Arm R
Spring
Main valve seal
Guide cover
Lever
Tube
O-ring
O-ring
Parallel pin
Round head Phillips screw
Hexagon nut
600
400
KN-R02-250
500
400
Flow rate [l/min (ANR)]
∗ Only for VMG11
Note) Values when the main valve is fully open.
Male thread nozzle
KN-R02-200
300
KN-R02-150
200
KN-R02-100
100
KNH-R02-200
350
300
250
KNH-R02-150
200
150
KNH-R02-100
100
50
0
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1
0.1
0.2
Supply pressure [MPa]
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
400
700
600
KNS-R02-090-8
400
KNS-R02-100-4
300
200
KNS-R02-075-4
KNS-R02-110-8
500
0.8
0.9
1
Copper extension nozzle
900
800
0.7
Low noise nozzle with male thread
Chromated
Anodized
Anodized
KNL3-06-200
KNL6-06-200
350
300
250
KNL3-06-150
KNL6-06-150
200
150
100
50
100
0
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1
77
Auxiliary Pneumatic
Equipment
Note
Material
PBT
PBT
PBT
Aluminium alloy
Aluminium alloy
Aluminium alloy
PBT
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
HNBR
Stainless steel
PBT
PBT
NBR
NBR
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Series
Page 78
VMG
Dimensions
VMG11/Piping entry: Bottom
Rc 1/4
156
Nozzle
Note 1)
Width across flats22
30
102
34.2
23
117.5
A
Rc, NPT, G 1/4, 3/8
1)
S coupler plug mounting
.2
No
te
VMG12/Piping entry: Top
34
Width across flats 22
Rc, NPT, G 1/4, 3/8
Rc 1/4
147
S coupler plug mounting
172.5
Nozzle
23
102
30
A
117.5
(mm)
Type
Male thread nozzle
Nozzle model
KN-R02-100
KN-R02-150
KN-R02-200
KN-R02-250
KNH-R02-100
KNH-R02-150
KNH-R02-200
Nozzle size
ø1
ø1.5
ø2
ø2.5
ø1
ø1.5
ø2
A Note 1)
23.4
23
22.5
22.1
44
44
44
(mm)
Type
Low noise nozzle
with male thread
Copper extension nozzle
(with self-align fitting
H06-02)
Nozzle model
KNS-R02-075-4
KNS-R02-090-8
KNS-R02-100-4
KNS-R02-110-8
KNL3-06-150
KNL3-06-200
KNL6-06-150
KNL6-06-200
Note 1) Reference dimensions after installation
78
Nozzle size
ø0.75 x 4
ø0.9 x 8
ø1 x 4
ø1.1 x 8
ø1.5
ø2
ø1.5
ø2
A Note 1)
12
12
12
12
305.3
305.3
605.3
605.3
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 79
Blow Gun
Series
VMG
Dimensions: Nozzle/Series KN
Male thread nozzle: KN
(mm)
Model
D
KN-R02-100
KN-R02-150
KN-R02-200
KN-R02-250
Connection Width across flats
thread
H1
ø1
ø1.5
ø2
ø2.5
R 1/4
R 1/4
R 1/4
R 1/4
14
14
14
14
L1
A
31.4
31
30.5
30.1
25.4
25
24.5
24.1
Connection thread
øD
Nozzle size
H1
A
L1
High efficiency nozzle: KNH
(mm)
D
KNH-R02-100
KNH-R02-150
KNH-R02-200
ø1
ø1.5
ø2
R 1/4
R 1/4
R 1/4
14
14
14
L1
A
52
52
52
46
46
46
Connection thread
H1
A
L1
The air blow thrust is
improved by 10%.
Model
D
KNS-R02-075-4
KNS-R02-090-8
KNS-R02-100-4
KNS-R02-110-8
thread
H1
ø0.75 x 4
ø0.9 x 8
ø1 x 4
ø1.1 x 8
R 1/4
R 1/4
R 1/4
R 1/4
14
14
14
14
L1
A
20
20
20
20
14
14
14
14
øD
(mm)
Nozzle size
2
H1
Connection
thread
A
L1
Copper extension nozzle: KNL
Outside diameter
L1
KNL3-06-150
KNL3-06-200
KNL6-06-150
KNL6-06-200
ø1.5
ø6
300
ø2
ø6
300
ø1.5
ø6
600
ø2
ø6
600
Note) When a copper extension nozzle is ordered separately, a self-align fitting will also be
required for connection with the blow gun. Order one with the following part number in
addition to the nozzle.
Outside
diameter
D
øD
Model
(mm)
Nozzle size
L1
Self-align fittings (For copper extension nozzle connection)
Half union
H06-02
79
Auxiliary Pneumatic
Equipment
Low noise nozzle with male thread: KNS
øD
Nozzle size
Model
thread
H1
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 80
Air Blow
Nozzles for Blowing
Air Tool
Series KN
Coolant
Nozzle with self-align fitting/KN
KN-04-100
KN-04-150
KN-06-100
KN-06-150
KN-06-200
KN-08-150
KN-08-200
KN-10-250
KN-10-300
KN-10-350
KN-10-400
KN-10-600
KN-12-350
KN-12-400
KN-12-600
KN-16-400
KN-16-600
KN-20-400
KN-20-600
ø1
ø1.5
ø1
ø1.5
ø2
ø1.5
ø2
ø2.5
ø3
ø3.5
ø4
ø6
ø3.5
ø4
ø6
ø4
ø6
ø4
ø6
ø4
ø4
ø6
ø6
ø6
ø8
ø8
ø10
ø10
ø10
ø10
ø10
ø12
ø12
ø12
ø16
ø16
ø20
ø20
Width across flats
H1
H2
10
10
12
12
12
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
17
17
17
22
22
26
26
10
10
12
12
12
14
14
17
17
17
17
17
19
19
19
24
24
27
27
L1
L2
27
27.7
30.1
30.8
31.5
33.8
34.6
35.6
36.3
37.1
29.5
27.7
40.4
41.3
31.2
40.1
38.4
45.6
43.9
15
15
16
16
16
16
16
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
øD
Model
(mm)
Nozzle size Connection
D
size
H1
H2
L2
L1
Nozzle with male thread/KN
(mm)
Connection
size
Width across flats
H1
KN-R01-100
KN-R01-150
KN-R02-100
KN-R02-150
KN-R02-200
KN-R02-250
KN-R02-600
KN-R03-400
KN-R03-600
KN-R04-400
KN-R04-600
KN-R06-600
KN-R06-800
KN-R10-800
ø1
ø1.5
ø1
ø1.5
ø2
ø2.5
ø6
ø4
ø6
ø4
ø6
ø6
ø8
ø8
R1/8
R1/8
R1/4
R1/4
R1/4
R1/4
R1/4
R3/8
R3/8
R1/2
R1/2
R3/4
R3/4
R1
10
10
14
14
14
14
14
17
17
22
22
27
27
36
L1
A
Connection thread
17.4
17
25.4
25
24.5
24.1
21.1
25.4
23.7
33.6
31.8
40.1
38
52.4
21.4
21
31.4
31
30.5
30.1
27.1
31.8
30.1
41.8
40.1
49.6
47.8
62.8
øD
Model
Nozzle size
D
H1
L1
Copper extension nozzle/KNL
80
A
Outside diameter
L1
KNL3-06-150
KNL3-06-200
KNL3-08-200
KNL3-08-250
KNL3-10-250
KNL3-10-300
KNL6-06-150
KNL6-06-200
KNL6-08-200
KNL6-08-250
KNL6-10-250
KNL6-10-300
ø1.5
ø2
ø2
ø2.5
ø2.5
ø3
ø1.5
ø2
ø2
ø2.5
ø2.5
ø3
ø6
ø6
ø8
ø8
ø10
ø10
ø6
ø6
ø8
ø8
ø10
ø10
300
300
300
300
300
300
600
600
600
600
600
600
øD
Model
O.D.
(mm)
Nozzle size
D
L1
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Page 81
Series
Nozzles for Blowing
KN
Nozzle for One-touch fitting/KN
Note) Not applicable to the
connection threads
(M5, M6) of the KJ
and the KQ series.
Model
Connection
size
L1
A
KN-Q06-100
KN-Q06-150
KN-Q06-200
KN-Q08-150
KN-Q08-200
KN-Q10-200
KN-Q10-250
KN-Q12-250
KN-Q12-300
ø1
ø1.5
ø2
ø1.5
ø2
ø2
ø2.5
ø2.5
ø3
ø6
ø6
ø6
ø8
ø8
ø10
ø10
ø12
ø12
35
35
35
39
39
43
43
45.5
45.5
18
18
18
20.5
20.5
22
22
24
24
øD
(mm)
Nozzle size
D
10
A
L1
Pivoting nozzle with self-align fitting/KNK
KNK-10-400
KNK-10-600
KNK-12-400
KNK-12-600
KNK-16-400
KNK-16-600
KNK-20-400
KNK-20-600
ø4
ø6
ø4
ø6
ø4
ø6
ø4
ø6
ø10
ø10
ø12
ø12
ø16
ø16
ø20
ø20
Width across flats
H1
H2
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
19
19
24
24
27
27
L1
L2
41.7
41.7
41.2
41.2
41.8
41.8
43.8
43.8
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
35°
øD
Model
(mm)
D
size
H2
L2
8.5
L1
Pivoting nozzle with male thread/KNK
ø4
ø6
ø4
ø6
ø4
ø6
R1/4
R1/4
R3/8
R3/8
R1/2
R1/2
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
22
22
L1
A
38
38
39
39
42.2
42.2
31.9
31.9
32.4
32.4
34.1
34.1
Connection thread
35°
øD
H2
H1
8.5
A
L1
High efficiency nozzle/KNH
(mm)
Model
Nozzle size
D
KNH-R02-100
KNH-R02-150
KNH-R02-200
ø1
ø1.5
ø2
size
H1
14
14
14
R1/4
R1/4
R1/4
L1
A
52
52
52
46
46
46
Connection thread
A
The air blow thrust is
improved by 10%.
øD
KNK-R02-400
KNK-R02-600
KNK-R03-400
KNK-R03-600
KNK-R04-400
KNK-R04-600
Width across flats
H1
H2
Auxiliary Pneumatic
Equipment
Model
(mm)
D
size
H1
L1
Low noise nozzle with self-align fitting/KNS
Width across flats
H2
H1
L2
24.3
24.3
24
24
24
16
16
17
17
17
ø8
ø8
ø10
ø10
ø10
12
12
14
14
14
Model
Nozzle size
D
Connection
size
Width across flats
H1
L1
A
KNS-R01-075-4
KNS-R01-100-4
KNS-R01-090-8
KNS-R02-075-4
KNS-R02-090-8
KNS-R02-100-4
KNS-R02-110-8
ø0.75 x 4
ø1 x 4
ø0.9 x 8
ø0.75 x 4
ø0.9 x 8
ø1 x 4
ø1.1 x 8
R1/8
R1/8
R1/8
R1/4
R1/4
R1/4
R1/4
12
12
12
14
14
14
14
18
18
18
20
20
20
20
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
KNS-08-075-4
KNS-08-100-4
KNS-10-075-4
KNS-10-090-8
KNS-10-100-4
ø0.75 x 4
ø1 x 4
ø0.75 x 4
ø0.9 x 8
ø1 x 4
14
14
17
17
17
L1
L2
øD
Model
(mm)
D
size
H1
H2
2
L1
Low noise nozzle with male thread/KNS
øD
(mm)
2
H1
A
L1
Connection thread
81
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:27 AM
Series
Page 82
KN
Sensing Heads
Standard sensing head
(mm)
KNP-1
ø2.5
H1
H2
size
ø4
5
8
L1
L2
63.7
1000
L1
L2
øD
Model
Nozzle size
D
∗ A 1 m polyurethane tube is included.
H1
H2
Polyurethane tubing
Needle sensing head
(mm)
ø0.7
ø4
5
A
L1
L2
L3
12.7
41
1000
23
A
L2
∗ A 1 m polyurethane tube is included.
L3
L1
Polyurethane tubing
Cassette size
KNP-2
Connection Cassette size
H1
size
øD
Model
Nozzle size
D
Use to measure workpiece collision pressure.
Needle sensing head
Specifications
Nozzle (KN, KNK, KNH, KNS, KNL)
Applicable tubing material
Nylon, Soft nylon, Flexible copper pipe (C1220T-O), OST pipe
Applicable piping O.D. mm
ø4, ø6, ø8, ø10, ø12, ø16, ø20
Fluid
Air, Coolant
1.0 MPa (0.3 MPa with SGP pipe)
Threads
Mounting
Nut
Seal for R threads
JISB0203 (taper threads for piping)
JISB0211, class 2 (taper threads for piping)
None
Sensing head (KNP)
Applicable fitting size
Fluid
82
ø4
Air
Maximum operating pressure (at 20°C)
0.8 MPa
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 83
Air Blow
S Couplers
Air Tool
Series KK
Air Leakage
Variations
Series KK
KK
Male thread type
Series
Connection thread size R
M5
R 1/8
R 1/4
R 3/8
R 1/2
R 3/4
KK2
KK3
KK4
KK6
Female thread type
Series
Connection thread size Rc
M5
Rc 1/8
Rc 1/4
Rc 3/8
Rc 1/2
KK2
KK3
KK4
KK6
Nut fitting type (for fiber reinforced urethane hose)
Series
Applicable hose I.D./O.D. mm
5/8
6/9
6.5/10
8/12
8.5/12.5
11/16
Series KK3, 4, 6
KK3
KK4
KK6
One-touch fitting type (Straight, Elbow, Bulkhead)
Series
Applicable tubing O.D. mm
ø3.2
ø4
ø6
ø8
ø10
ø12
ø16
Auxiliary Pneumatic
Equipment
KK2
KK3
KK4
KK6
Series KK2
Series KKH
Male thread type
Series
Connection thread size R
R 1/8
R 1/4
R 3/8
R 1/2
KKH3
KKH4
Female thread type
Series
Connection thread size Rc
Rc 1/8
Rc 1/4
Rc 3/8
KKH3
KKH4
Series
Applicable hose I.D./O.D. mm
5/8
6/9
6.5/10
8/12
8.5/12.5
KKH3
KKH4
Series KKA
Stainless type
Male/Female thread type
Series
Connection thread size
R, Rc 1/8 R, Rc 1/4 R, Rc 3/8 R, Rc 1/2 R, Rc 3/4 R, Rc 1 R, Rc 1 1/4 R, Rc 1 1/2
KKA3
KKA4
KKA6
KKA7
KKA8
KKA9
83
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 84
KK
The pulling strength for the plugs and
sockets has been improved.
Twice
as strong as the conventional models
We standardized the product with a sleeve cover. Changing the lock
ring material to a shock absorbent PBT further improved the shock
absorbent performance.
Lock ring
Shock absorbent PBT
Employs a unique connection
method
No spring located in the flow path
Loss of effective area is minimized because there is
no valve spring to block the flow path.
Check valve end configuration
facilitates rectifying effect
A slim body design and large effective area are
achieved with a construction that does not use
steel balls and therefore does not restrict
the flow path.
Allows smooth flow of fluids.
Low leakage seal construction
Sleeve cover (Except for Series KK2)
Reliable sealing is achieved by surface contact.
Lightweight
Together with a reduction of the body size, pressing parts and resin
parts are used to achieve an overall weight reduction.
Series
Series KK2
Series KK3
Series KK4
Series KK6
Plug no.
KK2P-M5M
KK3P-01MS
KK4P-02MS
KK6P-04MS
Socket no. Effective area mm2 Note 1) Body O.D. mm Weight g Note 2)
KK2S-M5M
3.8
ø10.0
6.1
KK3S-01MS
20
ø20.2
20.1
KK4S-02MS
39
ø28.0
44.1
KK6S-04MS
82
ø31.6
90.1
Note 1) Values when plug and socket are connected.
Note 2) Values for socket only.
One-touch fitting type now standard
Three types from ø4 to ø16 added to series.
Flow is possible from the plug side or socket side.
Fluids: Air and Water
One-touch connection
Elbow type
Simple connection with one hand simplifies work.
Bulkhead type
q
w
Click
Straight type
Sleeve lock mechanism
Prevents accidents caused by unexpected separation.
Lock
84
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 85
S Couplers
Series
KK
Socket (S)
Plug (P)
Male thread type
Male thread type
Body size
M5
1/8
1/4
1/2
Port size
M5 x 0.8
R 1/8
R 1/8
R 1/4
R 3/8
R 1/8
R 1/4
R 3/8
R 1/2
R 3/8
R 1/2
R 3/4
Body size
Part no.
KK2P-M5M
-01MS
KK3P-01MS
-02MS
-03MS
KK4P-01MS
-02MS
-03MS
-04MS
KK6P-03MS
-04MS
-06MS
Female thread type
M5
1/8
1/4
1/2
Port size
M5 x 0.8
R 1/8
R 1/8
R 1/4
R 3/8
R 1/8
R 1/4
R 3/8
R 1/2
R 3/8
R 1/2
R 3/4
KK2S-M5M
-01MS
KK3S-01MS
-02MS
-03MS
KK4S-01MS
-02MS
-03MS
-04MS
KK6S-03MS
-04MS
-06MS
Part no.
Port size
M5 x 0.8
Rc 1/8
Rc 1/4
Rc 3/8
Rc 1/4
Rc 3/8
Rc 3/8
Rc 1/2
KK2S-M5F
KK3S-01F
-02F
-03F
KK4S-02F
-03F
KK6S-03F
-04F
Female thread type
Body size
M5
1/8
1/4
1/2
Port size
M5 x 0.8
Rc 1/8
Rc 1/4
Rc 3/8
Rc 1/4
Rc 3/8
Rc 3/8
Rc 1/2
KK2P-M5F
KK3P-01F
-02F
-03F
KK4P-02F
-03F
KK6P-03F
-04F
Part no.
KK3P-50N
-60N
-65N
KK4P-50N
-60N
-65N
-80N
-85N
KK6P-80N
-85N
-110N
Part no.
KK2P-23H
-04H
-06H
KK3P-04H
-06H
-08H
-10H
KK4P-06H
-08H
-10H
-12H
KK6P-12H
-16H
Part no.
KK2P-23L
-04L
-06L
KK3P-04L
-06L
-08L
-10L
KK4P-06L
-08L
-10L
-12L
KK6P-12L
-16L
Part no.
KK2P-23E
-04E
-06E
KK3P-04E
-06E
-08E
-10E
KK4P-06E
-08E
-10E
-12E
KK6P-12E
-16E
Body size
M5
1/8
1/4
1/2
Applicable hose
I.D./O.D. mm
Body size
5/8
6/9
1/8
6.5/10
5/8
6/9
6.5/10
1/4
8/12
8.5/12.5
8/12
8.5/12.5
1/2
11/16
Straight type with One-touch fitting
Applicable
tubing O.D. mm
Body size
3.2
M5
4
6
4
6
1/8
8
10
6
8
1/4
10
12
12
1/2
16
Elbow type with One-touch fitting
Applicable
tubing O.D. mm
Body size
3.2
M5
4
6
4
6
1/8
8
10
6
8
1/4
10
12
12
1/2
16
Bulkhead type with One-touch fitting
Applicable
tubing O.D. mm
Body size
3.2
4
M5
6
4
6
1/8
8
10
6
8
1/4
10
12
12
1/2
16
Part no.
Part no.
KK3S-50N
-60N
-65N
KK4S-50N
-60N
-65N
-80N
-85N
KK6S-80N
-85N
-110N
Part no.
KK2S-23H
-04H
-06H
KK3S-04H
-06H
-08H
-10H
KK4S-06H
-08H
-10H
-12H
KK6S-12H
-16H
Part no.
KK2S-23L
-04L
-06L
KK3S-04L
-06L
-08L
-10L
KK4S-06L
-08L
-10L
-12L
KK6S-12L
-16L
Part no.
KK2S-23E
-04E
-06E
KK3S-04E
-06E
-08E
-10E
KK4S-06E
-08E
-10E
-12E
KK6S-12E
-16E
85
Auxiliary Pneumatic
Equipment
Applicable hose
Body size
I.D./O.D. mm
5/8
6/9
1/8
6.5/10
5/8
6/9
6.5/10
1/4
8/12
8.5/12.5
8/12
8.5/12.5
1/2
11/16
Applicable
tubing O.D. mm
Body size
3.2
M5
4
6
4
6
1/8
8
10
6
8
1/4
10
12
12
1/2
16
Applicable
Body size
tubing O.D. mm
3.2
M5
4
6
4
6
1/8
8
10
6
8
1/4
10
12
12
1/2
16
Applicable
Body size
tubing O.D. mm
3.2
4
M5
6
4
6
1/8
8
10
6
8
1/4
10
12
12
1/2
16
Part no.
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 86
KK
Specifications
Fluid
Air, Water (standard industrial water)
KK2: –100 kPa to 1.0 MPa
KK3: –90 kPa to 1.0 MPa
KK4, 6:
0 to 1.0 MPa
Note)
Proof pressure
Series KK2
1.5 MPa
Air:
–5 to 60°C
Water: 5 to 40°C
(with no freezing)
Electroless nickel plated (copper-free application), With male thread sealant
Ambient and fluid
temperature
Plating, Sealant
Note) Do not use the S couplers with a leakage tester or for vacuum retention because they are not guaranteed
for zero leakage.
Performance
Plug and socket connection
One-touch connection and release
Check valve
Series KK3, 4, 6
Socket: Built-in check valve (standard)
Note)
Manual locking type (standard)
Note) Series KK2 is not provided with lock mechanism.
JIS symbols
Single plug
Effective Area
Single socket
Body size
Connected plug and socket
Plug
Socket
Effective area mm2
M5
KK2P-M5M
KK2S-M5M
3.8
1/8
KK3P-01MS
KK3S-01MS
20
1/4
KK4P-02MS
KK4S-02MS
39
1/2
KK6P-04MS
KK6S-04MS
82
How to Order
KK 4 S
02 M S
Body size
2
3
4
6
M5
1/8
1/4
1/2
Connection type
Symbol
Socket/Plug designation
S
P
With sealant (male thread)
Socket
Plug
Type
Male thread
M
Female thread
F
With nut fitting
N
H Straight with One-touch fitting
Elbow with One-touch fitting
L
E Bulkhead with One-touch fitting
Piping port size variation
Thread size
Symbol
M5 x 0.8
M5
R,Rc 1/8
01
R,Rc 1/4
02
R,Rc 3/8
03
R,Rc 1/2
04
R,Rc 3/4
06
86
One-touch fitting type
Symbol Tubing O.D. mm
ø3.2
23
ø4
04
ø6
06
ø8
08
ø10
10
ø12
12
ø16
16
Nut fitting type
Symbol Hose O.D./I.D. mm
5/8
50
6/9
60
6.5/10
65
8/12
80
8.5/12.5
85
11/16
110
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 87
S Couplers
Series
KK
Air (0 to 1 MPa)
Water (0 to 0.4MPa)
KK2
KK2
0.007
0.50
Series KK2
(KK2S-M5M + KK2P-M5M)
0.45
Series KK2
(KK2S-M5M + KK2P-M5M)
0.006
0.40
0.005
Flow rate (l /min [ANR])
0.35
0.30
0.25
0.20
0.15
0.004
0.003
0.002
0.10
0.001
0.05
0.00
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
0.000
1
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
Auxiliary Pneumatic
Equipment
Pressure (MPa)
Pressure (MPa)
KK3, 4, 6
KK3, 4, 6
0.14
11
0.13
10
Series KK6
(KK6S-04MS + KK6P-04MS)
9
Series KK6
0.12
0.11
0.10
8
7
6
5
Series KK4
4
0.09
0.08
Series KK4
0.07
0.06
0.05
0.04
3
0.03
2
0.02
1
0
Series KK3
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
Pressure (MPa)
0.7
0.8
0.9
Series KK3
0.01
1
0.00
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
Pressure (MPa)
87
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 88
KK
Construction
KK2
q
w
q w e r t y u i o !0 !1 !3 !2
Plug
Socket
Plug
No.
1
2
Socket
Description
Plug body
Gasket
Material
Brass
Stainless steel, NBR
Note
KK3, 4, 6
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Description
Spacer
Chuck
Sleeve
Collar
Sleeve spring
Plug O-ring
Valve seat
Valve spring
Valve seat O-ring
Valve O-ring
Valve
Socket body
Gasket
Material
PBT
PBT
Brass
Brass
Stainless steel
NBR
PBT
Stainless steel
NBR
FKM
PBT
Brass
Stainless steel, NBR
<With One-touch fitting>
q
i u !7 !3 r !6 !1 t y !2 e !0 o w q
Plug
Plug
88
<With One-touch fitting>
!4 !5
No.
1
14
15
Note
!5 !4
Socket
Socket
Description
Plug body
Cassette
Seal
Material
Brass
—
NBR
Note
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Description
Socket body
Valve
Valve seat
Collar
Spacer
Lock ring
Sleeve
Chuck
Valve O-ring
Valve seat O-ring
Plug O-ring
Valve spring
Sleeve spring
Cassette
Seal
Collar 2
Sleeve cover
Material
Brass
PBT
PBT
PBT
PBT
Shock absorbent PBT
Cold rolled carbon steel sheet
Stainless steel
FKM
NBR
NBR
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
—
NBR
Stainless steel
Weather resistant NBR
Note
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 89
S Couplers
Series
KK
Dimensions/Plug (P)
Male thread type
(mm)
Body
size
KK2
M5
1/8
T
H
Model
Connection
L1
Width
male thread across flats
M5 x 0.8
7
KK2P-M5M
18.8
R 1/8
-01MS
23.2
10
R 1/8
KK3P-01MS
30.4
R 1/4
14
-02MS
33.4
12.3
R 3/8
19.9
-03MS
KK3·4·6
1/4
1/2
17
36.9
KK4P-01MS
R 1/8
-02MS
R 1/4
-03MS
R 3/8
17
42.2
-04MS
R 1/2
22
46.2
KK6P-03MS
R 3/8
19
48.0
-04MS
R 1/2
22
52.0
-06MS
R 3/4
27
55.0
14
L2
18.4
Minimum Effective Weight
area
A∗
bore
(g)
(mm2)
15.8
2.5
4.4
2.6
19.2
8.1
8.4
27.4
14.2
6.0
30.4
33.0
40.2
34.2
22.6
44.0
45.5
L2
L1
20.2
35.7
41.5
H
28.1
17.0
9.0
50.9
38.2
31.0
A
T
3.0
26.4
37.0
25.2
3.4
KK2
32.5
57.4
11.0
76.0
13.0
106.2
KK3·4·6
A
T
44.7
53.7
94.4
∗ Reference dimension for R threads after installation.
L2
H
L1
Female thread type
(mm)
Model
M5
KK2P-M5F
M5 x 0.8
KK3P-01F
Rc 1/8
-02F
Rc 1/4
17
35.0
-03F
Rc 3/8
19
36.8
KK4P-02F
Rc 1/4
17
37.2
Rc 3/8
19
Rc 1/2
24
1/8
1/4
1/2
-03F
KK6P-03F
-04F
L1
L2
8
17.6
12.3
14
28.3
18.4
39.8
43.3
50.2
Minimum Effective Weight
area
bore
(g)
(mm2)
8.1
3.4
2.6
Auxiliary Pneumatic
Equipment
T
H
Connection
Width
male thread across flats
Body
size
T
10.4
22.6
6.0
19.0
20.8
23.2
50.9
9.0
25.2
106.2
13.0
31.0
23.9
24.6
L2
H
L1
28.6
43.9
Nut fitting type (for urethane hose with fiber reinforcement)
Body
size
Model
KK3P-50N
1/8
1/4
1/2
Applicable
H1
H2
hose
Width
Width
I.D./O.D. (mm) across flats across flats
5/8
-60N
6/9
-65N
6.5/10
KK4P-50N
5/8
-60N
6/9
-65N
6.5/10
-80N
8/12
-85N
8.5/12.5
KK6P-80N
8/12
-85N
8.5/12.5
-110N
11/16
14
17
(mm)
L1
14
36.1
17
39.9
14
43.9
17
46.7
L2
M
13.7
18.4
16.5
13.7
25.2
16.5
47.6
19
19
17.4
53.4
24
24
57.2
31.0
20.1
Weight
Minimum Effective
area
bore
(g)
(mm2)
4.5
12.7
21.4
5.4
18.3
38.8
5.9
21.9
35.9
4.5
12.7
34.7
5.4
18.3
48.4
5.9
21.9
45.1
7.4
34.4
53.2
7.8
38.2
55.6
7.4
34.4
60.5
7.8
38.2
62.8
10.2
65.4
96.5
Applicable hose
H1
H2
M
L2
L1
89
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 90
KK
Dimensions/Plug (P)
Applicable
tubing
O.D. (mm)
KK2P-23H
ø3.2
øD1
øD2
L1
M
L2
tubing
M5
-04H
10.0
20.5
8.0
-06H
ø6
ø4
12.0
10.0
-06H
ø6
14.0
12.0
-08H
ø8
16.0
14.0
38.6
-10H
ø10
19.0
17.0
39.7
KK4P-06H
ø6
14.0
12.0
-08H
ø8
16.0
14.0
-10H
ø10
19.0
17.0
1/4
-12H
KK6P-12H
-16H
10.0
ø12
21.0
19.0
ø16
26.0
25.7
3.7
4.4
3.4
8.1
8.1
16.0
3.2
3.9
5.6
17.0
4.7
10.1
12.8
13.5
35.4
18.4
18.5
25.2
47.5
31.0
22.6
22.6
3.3
3.4
9.1
13.2
17.6
10.1
12.8
22.3
18.5
6.2
19.8
22.6
23.0
21.0
7.7
27.6
35.3
27.1
9.0
40.2
9.2
41.2
13.0
—
25.0
106.2
M
7.9
4.7
50.9
Applicable tubing
4.0
17.0
22.0
56.1
15.7
6.0
21.0
46.2
tubing
2.5
12.7
12.3
23.5
KK3P-04H
1/8
1/2
ø4
7.0
øD1
Model
øD2
Body
size
(mm)
Effective area
(mm2)
Minimum
Weight
bore Urethane Nylon
(g)
L2
L1
30.0
44.4
50.7
1/8
Applicable
tubing
O.D. (mm)
KK2P-23L
ø3.2
-04L
ø4
-06L
ø6
ø4
-06L
ø6
-08L
ø8
-10L
ø10 17.0
ø6
14.0
ø8
-08L
-10L
-12L
1/2
KK6P-12L
-16L
øD2
L1
10.0
12.0
ø10 17.0
ø12 19.0
ø16 21.0
L3
L2
M
tubing
tubing
16.5 12.7
2.5
3.6
4.3
5.8
16.6 13.5
18.0 16.0
3.4
7.8
7.8
6.4
3.0
3.7
5.3
7.2
20.0 17.0
12.8 32.8
18.4
23.0 18.5
15.2 34.0
26.5 21.0
18.5 36.0
4.5
10.1 11.4
8.0
15.0 16.8
9.7
20.0 17.0
12.8 40.2
15.2 41.4 25.2 23.0 18.5
26.5 21.0
18.5 42.8
4.5
10.1 11.4 19.6
6.0
17.5 19.8 21.3
7.5
24.7 27.5 25.7
9.3 24.0
KK3P-04L
KK4P-06L
1/4
øD1
12.3
11.6 25.1
10.4 31.6
44.0
28.5 22.0
49.9 31.0
34.0 25.0
26.5 53.5
20.9
6.0
9.0
13.0
øD2
Applicable tubing
øD1
M5
Model
L3
M
Body
size
(mm)
Effective area
(mm2)
Minimum
Weight
bore Urethane Nylon
(g)
18.0 18.5 23.0
L2
L1
29.0 29.6 28.0
38.1 39.7 40.3
—
58.7 48.7
Body
size
Model
KK2P-23E
M5
1/8
1/4
90
Applicable
tubing
O.D. (mm)
ø3.2 M8 x 0.75
ø4
M9 x 0.75
-06E
ø6
M11 x 0.75
KK3P-04E
ø4
M12 x 1
-06E
ø6
M14 x 1
-08E
ø8
M16 x 1
-10E
ø10 M20 x 1
KK4P-06E
ø6
M14 x 1
-08E
ø8
M16 x 1
-10E
ø10 M20 x 1
KK6P-12E
-16E
H1
H2
flats
flats
T Width Width
Thread across across
-04E
-12E
1/2
(mm)
10
14
17
22
17
22
10
11
14
L1
28.3
43.4
24
46.4
17
47.0
19
50.2
24
53.2
ø16 M28 x 1.5
30
32
M
18.4
25.2
54.2
60.1
62.6
12.5 12.7
3.7
4.4
6.0
8.1
3.2
3.9
5.6
16.6
16.8 17.0
20.0 18.5
4.7 10.1 12.8
22.3
15.7
30.2
22.0 21.0
16.8 17.0
22.6
20.0 18.5
22.0 21.0
6.0
22.6
9.7
54.7
4.7 10.1 12.8
6.2 19.8 22.6
7.7 27.6 35.3
30.6
9.0 40.2
50.9
9.2 41.2
75.2
24.5 25.0 13.0 —
Applicable tubing
6.6
8.1
23.0 22.0
31.0
2.5
3.4
12.7 13.5
16.9 16.0
39.3
40.2
27
12.3
28.6
19
24
L3
tubing tubing
17
ø12 M22 x 1
L2
Effective area
(mm2)
Minimum
Weight
bore Urethane Nylon (g)
38.2
61.4
86.1
106.2 125.0
H2
T
Mounting plate thickness
7mm or less
H1
M
L3
L2
L1
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 91
S Couplers
Series
KK
Dimensions/Socket (S)
Male thread type
M5
1/8
KK3·4·6
1/4
1/2
Model
KK2S-M5M
M5 x 0.8
8
10
-01MS
R 1/8
KK3S-01MS
R 1/8
-02MS
R 1/4
-03MS
R 3/8
KK4S-01MS
R 1/8
-02MS
R 1/4
-03MS
R 3/8
-04MS
R 1/2
KK6S-03MS
R 3/8
-04MS
R 1/2
-06MS
R 3/4
14
17
19
22
24
27
10.0
20.2
2.5
24.7 26.2
23.7
21.7
25.3 26.8
22.8
37.5 40.0
3.8
KK2
A2
A1
T
6.1
4.7
5.8 9.1
6.0 20.4 20.1
33.5 36.0
31.5 34.0
38.7 41.2 32.2 34.5
50.4 54.1 46.4 50.1
51.0 54.7 45.0 48.7
9.0 21.1
øD
Body
size
L2
19.2
29.0
6.0 22.9 47.5
9.0 38.9 44.1
28.0
50.0 53.7 43.5 47.2 11.0 40.4 50.9
49.7 53.4 41.7 45.4 13.0 42.7 61.2
53.7 59.0 11.0 71.7 87.9
31.6 60.2 65.5 52.2 57.5 13.0 82.3 90.1
50.7 56.0 15.0 83.8 113.3
L1
L2
H
KK3·4·6
A2
A1
T
øD
KK2
(mm)
Effective
A2∗
L1 When A1 ∗ When Minimum area Weight
bore
(mm2) (g)
connected
connected
H
T
Width
øD
Connection across
male thread flats
L1
L2
H
M5
1/8
KK3·4·6
1/4
1/2
Model
øD
L1
10.0
25.3
26.8
36.0
38.5
40.1
42.6
41.9
44.4
50.4
54.1
51.1
54.8
58.6
63.9
61.0
66.3
KK2S-M5F
M5 x 0.8
8
KK3S-01F
Rc 1/8
14
-02F
Rc 1/4
17
-03F
Rc 3/8
KK4S-02F
Rc 1/4
-03F
KK6S-03F
-04F
20.2
19
28.0
Rc 3/8
Rc 1/2
24
31.6
L2
Effective
Weight
When Minimum area
(g)
bore
connected
(mm2)
4.2
8.2
10.9
14.4
18.0
5.4
6.4
20.6
23.6
21.1
34.4
L1
L2
38.8
39.6
56.9
42.7
46.2
83.1
93.6
83.8
87.4
T
KK2
øD
Body
size
H
Width
across
flats
H
T
KK3·4·6
øD
KK2
T
Connection
male thread
L1
L2
H
Nut fitting type (for urethane hose with fiber reinforcement)
1/8
1/4
1/2
Model
KK3S-50N
5/8
-60N
6/9
-65N
6.5/10
KK4S-50N
5/8
-60N
6/9
-65N
6.5/10
-80N
8/12
-85N
8.5/12.5
KK6S-80N
8/12
-85N
8.5/12.5
-110N 11/16
14
17
øD
14
17
20.2
14
19
17
28.0
(mm)
L1
L2
When
connected
M
42.6
45.1
13.7
44.4
46.9
16.5
54.1
57.8
13.7
56.8
60.5
55.4
59.1
66.0
71.3
64.4
69.7
19
17.4
31.6
24
24
16.5
20.1
Minimum Effective
Weight
area
bore
(mm2)
(g)
4.5
12.2
32.1
5.4
18.3
48.7
5.9
19.2
46.4
4.5
12.2
55.8
5.4
20.4
69.3
5.9
24.1
66.8
7.4
35.1
68.5
7.8
7.4
36.6
71.1
107.5
7.8
41.2 110.2
10.2
68.4 119.8
Applicable hose
H1
H2
øD
Body
size
H1
H2
Applicable
Width Width
hose
across across
I.D./O.D. (mm) flats
flats
M
L1
L2
91
Auxiliary Pneumatic
Equipment
(mm)
Female thread type
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 92
KK
Dimensions/Socket (S)
ø3.2
2
When
connected
7.0
33.8
35.3
8.0
33.6
35.1
2.5
3.8
4.6
6.4
3.4
4.0
4.8
6.5
13.5
4.7
5.8
5.8
7.9
49.1
16.0
3.2
3.8
5.8
22.5
47.1
49.6
17.0
4.7
10.4
13.4
24.4
48.9
51.4
18.5
6.2
16.8
18.9
27.3
17.0
49.9
52.4
21.0
7.7
19.1
19.1
37.1
ø6
12.0
58.2
61.9
17.0
4.7
10.4
13.4
51.4
-08H
ø8
14.0
60.1
63.8
18.5
6.2
18.3
21.8
51.3
-10H
ø10
17.0
61.5
65.2
21.0
7.7
27.0
29.4
54.8
62.5
66.2
30.5
32.0
59.4
70.1
75.4
42.7
48.8
84.1
72.3
77.6
53.4
62.5
99.9
10.0
ø4
-06H
ø6
10.0
33.9
35.4
KK3S-04H
ø4
10.0
46.6
-06H
ø6
12.0
-08H
ø8
14.0
-10H
ø10
KK4S-06H
KK3·4·6
1/4
(mm )
Minimum
Weight
(g)
bore Urethane Nylon
tubing tubing
M
-12H
KK6S-12H
-16H
20.2
28.0
ø12
ø16
19.0
31.6
25.7
12.7
22.0
25.0
9.2
13.2
KK2
Applicable tubing
M
L1
L2
KK3·4·6
Applicable tubing
M
L1
L2
(mm)
1/8
KK3·4·6
1/4
1/2
ø4
-06L
ø6
KK3S-04L
ø4
-06L
ø6
-08L
ø8
-10L
ø10
KK4S-06L
ø6
-08L
ø8
-10L
ø10
KK6S-12L
-16L
28.0
ø12
ø16
31.6
When
connected
2
L3
M
(mm )
Minimum
Weight
tubing tubing
9.3 26.0 27.5 16.5 12.7
2.5
3.7
4.4
11.6 27.2 28.3 16.6 13.5
10.4 41.7 44.2 18.0 16.0
12.8 42.9 45.4 20.0 17.0
4.5
5.6
5.6
7.2
3.0
3.7
5.3
23.2
4.5
10.1 11.4
24.0
15.2 43.1 45.6 23.0 18.5
18.5 42.9 45.4 26.5 21.0
12.8 54.3 58.0 20.0 17.0
6.0
15.0 16.8
25.0
7.5
18.0 18.5
34.4
4.5
10.1 11.4
53.5
15.2 55.5 59.2 23.0 18.5
18.5 54.2 57.9 26.5 21.0
6.0
17.5 19.8
53.1
7.5
24.7 27.5
54.7
55.4 59.1
28.5 22.0
20.9
66.3 71.6
26.5 66.9 72.2 34.0 25.0
9.0
29.0 29.6
57.0
38.1 39.7
91.4
50.3 58.7
93.5
10.0
20.2
L1
13.0
øD2
KK2
Applicable tubing
M
L3
ø3.2
-04L
-12L
L2
øD2
6.7
L1
L2
KK3·4·6
øD2
Applicable tubing
M
L3
KK2S-23L
M5
Applicable
tubing øD1
O.D. (mm)
øD1
Model
Effective area
øD1
KK2
Body
size
L1
L2
(mm)
M5
1/8
KK3·4·6
KK2S-23E ø3.2 M8 x 0.75
-04E ø4 M9 x 0.75
-06E
ø6
M11 x 0.75
KK3S-04E
ø4
M12 x 1
-06E
ø6
M14 x 1
-08E
ø8
M16 x 1
-10E
ø10 M20 x 1
ø6 M14 x 1
KK4S-06E
1/4
-08E
-10E
-12E
1/2
H1
Applicable
T
Width
tubing Thread
across
O.D. (mm)
flats
KK6S-12E
-16E
ø8 M16 x 1
ø10 M20 x 1
10
14
17
22
19
H2
Width
across øD
flats
L2
L1
When
connected
10
33.8 35.3
11
10.0 33.5 35.0
L3
M
13.0 12.7
2.5
3.8
4.6
3.4
4.0
4.8
9.1
33.9 35.4 13.1 13.5
4.7
5.8
5.8
12.6
14
46.6 49.1 16.9 16.0
3.2
3.8
5.8
29.0
17
47.1 49.6 16.8 17.0
4.7 10.4 13.4
39.4
49.0 51.5 20.0 18.5
6.2 16.8 18.9
43.4
24
49.9 52.4 22.0 21.0
7.7 19.1 19.1
68.3
17
58.2 61.9 16.8 17.0
4.7 10.4 13.4
57.2
60.1 63.8 20.0 18.5
6.2 18.3 21.8
60.6
61.7 65.4 22.0 21.0
7.7 27.0 29.4
86.8
19
19
22
24
ø12 M22 x 1
24
27
ø16 M28 x 1.5
30
32
20.2
28.0
62.7 66.4 23.0 22.0
31.6
70.1 75.4
72.5 77.8
24.5 25.0
9.2
7mm or less
9.6
14
42.7 48.8 116.0
H2
T
H1
M
L3
L1
L2
KK3·4·6
Applicable tubing
H2
T
7 mm or less
H1
30.5 32.0 105.7
13.2 53.4 62.5 183.2
Applicable tubing
KK2
(mm2)
Minimum
Weight
tubing tubing
øD
KK2
Model
Effective area
øD
Body
size
M
L3
92
øD2
L1
-04H
1/8
1/2
L2
øD2
øD2
KK2S-23H
M5
Applicable
tubing
øD1
O.D. (mm)
øD1
KK2
Model
øD1
Body
size
(mm)
Effective area
L1
L2
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 93
S Couplers
Series
KKH
Able to absorb drop impact (equivalent to impact energy of 0.5 J).
The pulling strength for the plugs and sockets has been
improved. Twice as strong as the conventional models.
Spacer (High impact PBT)
Cover ring
(Super high impact PBT)
(Rubber)
Plug (P)
Auxiliary Pneumatic
Equipment
Same effective sectional area
as that of Series KK.
Sleeve cover
Socket (S)
Male thread type
Male thread type
Body size
1/8
1/4
Connection
port size
Part no.
R 1/8
KK3P-01MS
R 1/4
-02MS
R 3/8
-03MS
R 3/8
-03MS
R 1/8
KK4P-01MS
R 1/8
KKH4S-01MS
R 1/4
-02MS
R 1/4
-02MS
R 3/8
-03MS
R 3/8
-03MS
R 1/2
-04MS
R 1/2
-04MS
Female thread type
Body size
1/8
1/4
1/8
1/4
1/8
1/4
Connection
port size
Part no.
R 1/8
KKH3S-01MS
R 1/4
-02MS
Female thread type
Connection
port size
Part no.
Body size
Connection
port size
Part no.
Rc 1/8
KKH3S-01F
Rc 1/4
-02F
Rc 1/8
KK3P-01F
Rc 1/4
-02F
Rc 3/8
-03F
Rc 3/8
-03F
Rc 1/4
KK4P-02F
Rc 1/4
KKH4S-02F
Rc 3/8
-03F
Rc 3/8
-03F
Body size
Body size
Applicable hose
I.D./O.D. mm
Part no.
5/8
KK3P-50N
6/9
-60N
6.5/10
-65N
5/8
KK4P-50N
1/8
1/4
Body size
1/8
Applicable hose
I.D./O.D. mm
Part no.
5/8
KKH3S-50N
6/9
-60N
6.5/10
-65N
5/8
KKH4S-50N
6/9
-60N
6.5/10
-65N
-80N
8/12
-80N
-85N
8.5/12.5
-85N
6/9
-60N
6.5/10
-65N
8/12
8.5/12.5
1/4
Series KKH are only available as sockets.
Series KK should be used as plugs.
93
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 94
KKH
Specifications
Fluid
Air/Water (Standard industrial water)
Note)
Operating
pressure range
KKH3: –90 kPa to 1.0 MPa
KKH4: 0 to 1.0 MPa
Proof pressure
1.5 MPa
Air: –5 to 60°C
Water: 5 to 40°C
(with no freezing)
Ambient and
fluid temperature
Electroless nickel plated (Copper-free application), With male thread sealant
Plating, Seal
Connection plug
Series KK plug
Note) Do not use the S couplers with a leak tester or for vacuum retention because they are not guaranteed for zero leakage.
Performance
JIS symbol
Single plug
Single socket
Check valve
Socket: Built-in check valve (Standard)
———
Effective Area
Body size
Plug
Socket
1/8
KK3P-01MS
KK4P-02MS
KKH3S-01MS
KKH4S-02MS
20
1/4
The flow characteristics are the same as those of Series KK.
Please refer to page 87.
How to Order
KKH 4 S
02 M S
Body size
3
4
With seal (male thread)
1/8
1/4
Connection type
Symbol
S
Socket
M
F
N
Type
Male thread
Female thread
With nut fitting
Piping port size variations
94
Nut fitting type
Symbol Connection port size
R, Rc 1/8
01
R, Rc 1/4
02
R, Rc 3/8
03
R, Rc 1/2
04
Symbol Hose I.D./O.D. (mm)
5/8
50
6/9
60
6.5/10
65
8/12
80
8.5/12.5
85
39
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 95
S Couplers
KKH
Series
Dimensions: Socket (S)
Male thread type
(mm)
1/8
1/4
H
Connection Width
port size across flats
Model
KKH3S-01MS
R 1/8
-02MS
R 1/4
-03MS
R 3/8
KKH4S-01MS
R 1/8
-02MS
R 1/4
-03MS
R 3/8
-04MS
R 1/2
14
D
20.2
17
19
28.0
22
L1
L2
When
connected
A2∗
When
connected
Min.
bore
size
33.5
36.0
6.0
A1∗
Effective Weight
area
(g)
(mm2)
20.4
T
20.3
37.5
40.0
31.5
34.0
9.0
38.7
41.2
32.2
34.5
9.0
50.4
54.1
46.4
50.1
6.0
22.9
48.7
51.0
54.7
45.0
48.7
9.0
38.9
45.3
50.0
53.7
43.5
47.2
11.0
40.4
52.1
49.7
53.4
41.7
45.4
13.0
42.7
62.4
21.1
A2
A1
øD
Body
size
T
19.4
27.7
L1
L2
H
Female thread type
1/4
H
Connection Width
port size across flats
D
L1
L2
When
connected
Min.
bore
size
Effective Weight
area
(g)
(mm2)
KKH3S-01F
Rc 1/8
14
36.0
38.5
-02F
Rc 1/4
17
20.2 40.1
42.4
-03F
Rc 3/8
19
41.9
44.3
KKH4S-02F
Rc 1/4
50.4
54.1
10.9
39.6
58.1
-03F
Rc 3/8
51.1
54.8
14.4
42.7
47.4
19
28.0
20.6
8.2
21.1
T
23.8
øD
1/8
T
Model
33.1
37.1
L1
L2
Body
size
1/8
1/4
Model
Applicable
H1
H2
hose
Width
Width
I.D./O.D. mm across flats across flats
KKH3S-50N
5/8
-60N
6/9
-65N
6.5/10
KKH4S-50N
5/8
-60N
6/9
-65N
6.5/10
-80N
8/12
-85N 8.5/12.5
14
17
(mm)
D
14
17
20.2
14
19
17
19
Auxiliary Pneumatic
Equipment
H
28.0
L2
L1
When
connected
M
Min.
bore
size
42.6
45.1
13.7
4.5
12.2
32.3
5.4
18.3
48.9
5.9
19.2
46.6
4.5
12.2
57.0
5.4
20.4
70.5
L1
5.9
24.1
68.0
L2
7.4
35.1
69.7
7.8
36.6
72.3
44.4
46.9
16.5
54.1
57.8
13.7
56.8
60.5
16.5
55.4
59.1
17.4
Effective
Weight
area
(g)
(mm2)
Applicable hose
H1
H2
øD
Body
size
(mm)
M
Series KKH are only available as sockets. Series KK should be used as plugs. For dimensions, please refer to page 89.
95
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 96
KKA
Stainless steel type
NEW
Port sizes 1 to 1 1/2 are added.
Body material: Stainless steel 304
Seal material: Fluoro rubber (FKM)
Both plug and socket have an integral check valve.
Available with and without check valves depending on the operating conditions.
Series KKA7, 8, 9
Reduces liquid dripping when the plug and socket are uncoupled.
Liquid dripping: 0.02 to 0.77 cm3 at each removal
Aeration:
0.1 to 2.7 cm3 at each removal
Plug valve
Socket valve
Non-greased specifications (standard)
Allows smooth installation and removal even without grease.
• O-ring: Fluorine coated
• Sliding parts of plug and socket: Plated with fluorine-contained material
Fluid: Water, Air
Operating temperature range: –5 to 100°C
Note) Do not use S couplers with steam.
96
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 97
S Couplers
Male thread type
Body
size
1/8
1/4
With check valve
1/2
3/4
Without check valve
1
1 1/4
Part no.
Port size
With check valve Without check valve
R 1/8
KKA3P-01M KKA3P-01M-1
R 1/4
-02M
-02M-1
R 3/8
-03M
-03M-1
R 1/4
R 3/8
-03M
-03M-1
R 1/2
-04M
-04M-1
R 3/8
R 1/2
-04M
-04M-1
R 3/4
-06M
-06M-1
R 1/2
KKA7P-04M
—
R 3/4
-06M
—
R1
-10M
—
R 3/4
KKA8P-06M
—
R1
-10M
—
R1 1/4
-12M
—
R1
KKA9P-10M
—
R1 1/4
-12M
—
R1 1/2
-14M
—
Female thread type
1/8
1/4
1/2
3/4
1
Without check valve
1 1/4
Body
size
1/8
1/4
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
Port size
R 1/8
R 1/4
R 3/8
R 1/4
R 3/8
R 1/2
R 3/8
R 1/2
R 3/4
R 1/2
R 3/4
R1
R 3/4
R1
R 1 1/4
R1
R 1 1/4
R 1 1/2
Part no.
KKA3S-01M
-02M
-03M
KKA4S-02M
-03M
-04M
KKA6S-03M
-04M
-06M
KKA7S-04M
-06M
-10M
KKA8S-06M
-10M
-12M
KKA9S-10M
-12M
-14M
KKA3S-01M-1
-02M-1
-03M-1
KKA4S-02M-1
-03M-1
-04M-1
KKA6S-03M-1
-04M-1
-06M-1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Female thread type
Part no.
Port size
Rc 1/8
KKA3P-01F KKA3P-01F-1
-02F
-02F-1
Rc 1/4
-03F
-03F-1
Rc 3/8
Rc 1/4
-03F
-03F-1
Rc 3/8
-04F
-04F-1
Rc 1/2
Rc 3/8
-04F
-04F-1
Rc 1/2
-06F
-06F-1
Rc 3/4
—
KKA7P-04F
Rc 1/2
—
-06F
Rc 3/4
—
-10F
Rc 1
—
KKA8P-06F
Rc 3/4
—
Rc 1
-10F
—
Rc 1 1/4
-12F
—
Rc 1
KKA9P-10F
—
Rc 1 1/4
-12F
—
Rc 1 1/2
-14F
Body
size
1/8
1/4
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
Port size
Rc 1/8
Rc 1/4
Rc 3/8
Rc 1/4
Rc 3/8
Rc 1/2
Rc 3/8
Rc 1/2
Rc 3/4
Rc 1/2
Rc 3/4
Rc 1
Rc 3/4
Rc 1
Rc 1 1/4
Rc 1
Rc 1 1/4
Rc 1 1/2
Part no.
KKA3S-01F
-02F
-03F
KKA4S-02F
-03F
-04F
KKA6S-03F
-04F
-06F
KKA7S-04F
-06F
-10F
KKA8S-06F
-10F
-12F
KKA9S-10F
-12F
-14F
KKA3S-01F-1
-02F-1
-03F-1
KKA4S-02F-1
-03F-1
-04F-1
KKA6S-03F-1
-04F-1
-06F-1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
97
Auxiliary Pneumatic
Equipment
Body
size
With check valve
KKA
Socket (S)
Plug (P)
Male thread type
Series
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 98
KKA
Series
Stainless Steel Type
Specifications
Fluid
Water/Air
Operating
Note)
pressure range
KKA3: –100 kPa to 1.0 MPa
KKA4, 6, 7, 8, 9: 0 to 1.0 MPa
Proof pressure
10 MPa
Ambient and
fluid temperature
Non-greased
specification
JIS symbol
Single plug
Single socket
Material
With
check valve
–5 to 150°C (No freezing)
Note) Do not use with steam.
No grease is used.
Rubber: Fluorine coated,
Metal sliding parts: Plated with fluorine-contained material
Metal part: Stainless steel 304, Rubber material: Fluoro rubber (FKM)
With male thread seal
Seal
Note) Do not use the S couplers with a leak tester or for vacuum retention because they are not guaranteed for zero leakage.
Without
check valve
Performance
Check valve
on both sides:
Plug and socket are available with and without check valves.
Check valve
Note) Series KKA cannot be connected with Series KK or Series KKH.
Check valve
on single side:
Effective Area
No check valve
on either side:
Built-in check valve
Characteristics with Check Valve on Both Sides
Body size
Liquid dripping
Aeration
cm3 at each removal cm3 at each removal
KKA3
0.02
Plug:
With check valve
Socket: With check valve
0.1
Plug
Socket
KKA3P-01F
KKA3S-01F
17.4
KKA4P-02F
KKA4S-02F
26.4
KKA6P-04F
KKA6S-04F
54.2
KKA7P-06F
KKA7S-06F
99.6
KKA8S-10F
168.3
KKA4
0.04
0.1
KKA8P-10F
KKA6
0.06
0.2
KKA9P-12F
KKA9S-12F
332.1
KKA7
0.14
0.5
KKA3P-01M-1
KKA3S-01M
18.5
KKA8
0.27
0.9
KKA4P-02M-1
KKA4S-02M
31.8
KKA9
0.77
2.7
KKA6P-04M-1
KKA6S-04M
55.3
KKA3P-01M-1
KKA3S-01M-1
22.6
KKA4P-02M-1
KKA4S-02M-1
40.2
KKA6P-04M-1
KKA6S-04M-1
76.0
Without check valve
Plug:
Socket: With check valve
Liquid dripping:
Without check valve
Plug:
Socket: Without check valve
Volume of water leakage at the time when the plug and
socket are uncoupled.
Aeration:
Volume of external air entrained when the plug and
socket are connected.
How to Order
KKA 4 P
02 M -1
Body size
3
4
6
7
8
9
Built-in
check valve
Built-in check valve
1/8
1/4
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
P
S
Port size
Symbol
Plug
Yes
No
No
Yes
Socket
Yes
Yes
No
No
Availability
With check valve
-1 Without check valve Note)
Plug
Socket
Note) A plug with check valve should be used in combination
with a socket with check valve.
If a socket without check valve is used, the check
valve of the plug will not open.
98
Nil
01
02
03
04
06
10
12
14
Thread size
R, Rc 1/8
R, Rc 1/4
R, Rc 3/8
R, Rc 1/2
R, Rc 3/4
R, Rc 1
R, Rc 1 1/4
R, Rc 1 1/2
Note) KKA7/8/9 is not available without a
check valve.
Contact us when such a type is
needed.
Connection type
Symbol
M
F
Type
Mail thread (with seal)
Female thread
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 99
S Couplers
KKA
Series
Air
Plug: With check valve Socket: With check valve
50
10
Series KKA6
(KKA6P-04F+KKA6S-04F)
40
7
6
5
Series KKA4
4
3
Flow rate m3/min (ANR)
8
Series KKA9
45
9
35
30
Series KKA8
25
20
15
10
2
1
5
Series KKA3
Series KKA7
0
0
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
0
1.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
Pressure (MPa)
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
Plug: Without check valve Socket: Without check valve
10
9
9
8
Series KKA6
(KKA6P-04M-1+KKA6S-04M-1)
6
Series KKA4
(KKA4P-02M-1+KKA4S-02M)
5
4
3
8
Series KKA6
2
7
Series KKA4
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
Series KKA3
0
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
Series KKA3
0
1.0
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
Pressure (MPa)
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
Pressure (MPa)
Pressure Loss
Water
0.2
0.2
Series KKA3
0.175 (KKA3P-01F+KKA3S-01F)
0.15
Series KKA4
0.125
0.1
0.075
0.05
Pressure loss (MPa)
0.15
Pressure loss (MPa)
Series KKA8
0.175
Series KKA7
0.125
0.1
0.075
Series KKA9
0.05
Series KKA6
0.025
0
0.025
0
0
0.01
0.02
0.03
3
Flow rate (m /min)
0.04
0.05
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
3
Flow rate (m /min)
99
Auxiliary Pneumatic
Equipment
10
0.5
Pressure (MPa)
Plug: Without check valve Socket: With check valve
7
0.4
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 100
KKA
Construction
t
w
q
y
e r
u
!3 !2 y r !0 !1 t o q
Plug
1
2
3
4
5
6
100
e w
Socket
Plug
No.
i
Socket
Description
Stem
Rear stem
Plug valve
Valve O-ring
Stem O-ring
Plug valve spring
Material
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
FKM
FKM
Stainless steel
Note
Plated with fluorine-contained material
Fluorine coated
Fluorine coated
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Description
Body
Rear body
Socket valve
Collar
Sleeve
Valve O-ring
Plug O-ring
Body O-ring
Collar seal
Collar spring
Sleeve spring
Steel ball
Stopper ring
Material
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
FKM
FKM
FKM
FKM
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
Note
Fluorine coated
Fluorine coated
Fluorine coated
Fluorine coated
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 101
S Couplers
Series
KKA
Dimensions: Plug (P)
With check valve
Male thread type
(mm)
Body
size
Model
KKA3P-01M
1/8
1/4
1/2
3/4
-02M
R 1/4
-03M
R 3/8
KKA4P-02M
R 1/4
-03M
R 3/8
-04M
R 1/2
KKA6P-03M
R 3/8
-04M
R 1/2
-06M
R 3/4
KKA7P-04M
R 1/2
-06M
R 3/4
-10M
R1
KKA8P-06M
1
R 3/4
-10M
R1
-12M
R 1 1/4
KKA9P-10M
1 1/4
T
Connection
port size
R 1/8
H
Width
across flats
14
17
22
24
30
32
36
41
46
R 1 1/4
-14M
R 1 1/2
55
A
L2
31.4
35.4
38.4
16.0
32.9
42.2
36.2
18.9
20.4
27.6
59.9
54.2
35.6
75.0
85.4
72.7
109.5
99.1
49.1
96.3
96.3
109.0
A
69.2
119.0
173.9
13.5
99.6
209.6
L2
H
275.0
73.4
82.9
T
60.3
10.0
59.5
69.9
36.6
65.9
58.1
66.3
109.0
26.4
40.4
49.9
85.4
28.3
6.9
36.7
39.9
19.8
32.9
40.6
47.1
69.4
17.4
38.2
46.2
47.9
15.4
5.6
32.4
39.4
43.2
R1
-12M
L1
Min. Effective
bore area Weight
(g)
size (mm2)
L1
362.8
17.5
168.3
22.0
264.9
24.6
332.1
403.9
538.6
824.1
861.4
936.3
(mm)
Body
size
Model
KKA3P-01F
1/8
1/4
1/2
3/4
-02F
39.6
19
40.4
KKA4P-02F
Rc 1/4
17
43.4
-03F
Rc 3/8
19
44.4
-04F
Rc 1/2
KKA6P-03F
Rc 3/8
-04F
Rc 1/2
-06F
Rc 3/4
KKA7P-04F
Rc 1/2
-06F
Rc 3/4
-10F
Rc 1
Rc 3/4
-10F
Rc 1
-12F
Rc 1 1/4
24
32
Rc 1 1/4
-14F
Rc 1 1/2
5.6
20.2
17.4
41
36.1
18.9
6.9
26.4
69.7
84.1
20.4
10.0
54.2
54.6
67.7
69.4
13.5
99.6
196.8
325.9
L2
H
L1
420.5
35.6
17.5
168.3
87.3
110.1
79.7
217.1
27.6
82.0
110.1
T
123.8
391.3
552.8
107.8
55
40.2
48.7
85.0
50
31.8
35.8
72.4
Rc 1
-12F
16.0
Effective
Weight
area
(g)
(mm2)
48.6
52.9
30
L2
Min.
bore
size
36.0
Rc 3/8
KKA9P-10F
1 1/4
L1
-03F
KKA8P-06F
1
H
T
Connection
Width
port size
across flats
Rc 1/8
14
Rc 1/4
17
986.9
49.1
24.6
332.1
925.6
848.2
101
Auxiliary Pneumatic
Equipment
Female thread type
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 102
KKA
With check valve
Male thread type
(mm)
Model
KKA3S-01M
1/8
1/4
1/2
3/4
A
38.1
34.1
41.1
35.1
R 1/4
-03M
R 3/8
42.1
35.6
KKA4S-02M
R 1/4
46.0
40.0
-03M
R 3/8
47.0
40.5
-04M
R 1/2
50.0
42.0
KKA6S-03M
R 3/8
51.4
44.9
-04M
R 1/2
54.4
46.4
-06M
R 3/4
56.4
46.9
KKA7S-04M
R 1/2
76.3
68.1
-06M
R 3/4
79.3
69.8
-10M
17
22
30
36
18.5
24.2
30.7
42.5
R1
82.8
72.4
R 3/4
94.9
85.4
98.4
88.0
100.4
87.7
125.5
115.1
127.5
114.8
127.5
114.8
-10M
R1
-12M
R 1 1/4
KKA9S-10M
1 1/4
L
-02M
KKA8S-06M
1
øD
Min. Effective Weight
bore area
(g)
size (mm2)
46
55
R1
-12M
R 1 1/4
-14M
R 1 1/2
63
69
38.5
5.9
18.5
41.8
46.3
76.8
7.7
31.8
A
78.5
T
86.6
149.1
10.2
55.3
160.4
øD
Body
size
T
H
Connection
Width
port size
across flats
R 1/8
184.8
426.1
13.6
101.5
H
457.8
L
514.0
873.5
17.6
169.9
931.1
1012.9
22.0
264.9
25.1
344.9
1680.7
1758.1
1819.4
Female thread type
(mm)
Model
KKA3S-01F
1/8
1/4
1/2
3/4
-02F
102
41.2
KKA4S-02F
Rc 1/4
-03F
Rc 3/8
-04F
Rc 1/2
KKA6S-03F
Rc 3/8
-04F
Rc 1/2
-06F
Rc 3/4
57.9
KKA7S-04F
Rc 1/2
75.1
-06F
Rc 3/4
-10F
Rc 1
Rc 3/4
-10F
Rc 1
-12F
Rc 1 1/4
Rc 1 1/4
-14F
Rc 1 1/2
18.5
24.2
46.9
97.1
7.7
31.8
52.3
24
36
30.7
42.5
76.5
189.6
10.2
55.3
93.9
101.5
935.2
17.6
169.9
69
121.8
121.8
914.7
1002.1
121.8
63
1919.1
25.1
344.9
H
457.4
550.9
99.2
50
202.0
477.2
13.6
90.9
55
T
180.6
82.3
41
46
56.2
91.1
104.3
50.5
30
47.2
52.3
46.1
Rc 1
-12F
46.9
5.9
43.1
19
22
Effective Weight
area
(g)
(mm2)
37.6
18.5
Rc 3/8
KKA9S-10F
1 1/4
L
-03F
KKA8S-06F
1
øD
Min.
bore
size
øD
Body
size
T
H
Connection
Width
port size
across flats
Rc 1/8
17
Rc 1/4
1810.0
1732.6
L
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 103
S Couplers
Series
KKA
Dimensions: Plug (P)
Without check valve
Male thread type
(mm)
Body
size
Model
H
T
Connection
Width
port size
across flats
L1
KKA3P-01M-1
R 1/8
12
28.5
-02M-1
R 1/4
14
31.5
1/8
Min. Effective
bore area Weight
(g)
size (mm2)
A
L2
24.5
16.0
9.8
6.0
25.5
22.6
-03M-1
R 3/8
KKA4P-02M-1
R 1/4
-03M-1
R 3/8
35.4
-04M-1
R 1/2
39.4
31.4
50.2
KKA6P-03M-1
R 3/8
37.9
31.4
41.9
-04M-1
R 1/2
-06M-1
R 3/4
30
Model
T
Connection
port size
H
Width
across flats
L1
KKA3P-01F-1
Rc 1/8
14
23.2
-02F-1
Rc 1/4
17
30.3
-03F-1
Rc 3/8
19
32.0
KKA4P-02F-1
Rc 1/4
17
29.7
-03F-1
Rc 3/8
19
34.0
-04F-1
Rc 1/2
24
39.4
46.1
KKA6P-03F-1
Rc 3/8
22
30.9
34.3
1/4
1/2
17
22
32.5
26.0
34.4
28.4
40.9
18.9
20.4
A
23.6
21.0
8.0
28.9
40.2
11.0
32.9
42.9
T
14.6
76.0
33.4
27.9
H
L2
L1
56.0
98.7
Female thread type
(mm)
Body
size
1/8
1/4
-04F-1
Rc 1/2
24
39.6
-06F-1
Rc 3/4
30
42.8
16.0
6.0
Effective
Weight
area
(g)
(mm2)
9.6
22.6
T
20.2
26.2
20.0
8.0
18.9
40.2
11.0
20.4
76.0
25.8
Auxiliary Pneumatic
Equipment
1/2
L2
Min.
bore
size
L2
H
L1
50.0
78.6
Without check valve
Male thread type
(mm)
1/8
1/4
1/2
Model
øD
L
A
38.1
34.1
Min. Effective
bore area Weight
(g)
size (mm2)
KKA3S-01M-1
R 1/8
-02M-1
R 1/4
41.1
35.1
-03M-1
R 3/8
42.1
35.6
KKA4S-02M-1
R 1/4
46.0
40.0
-03M-1
R 3/8
47.0
40.5
-04M-1
R 1/2
50.0
42.0
81.7
KKA6S-03M-1
R 3/8
51.4
44.9
138.3
-04M-1
R 1/2
54.4
46.4
-06M-1
R 3/4
56.4
46.9
17
22
30
18.5
24.2
30.7
A
T
36.1
6.1
23.4
39.4
43.9
øD
Body
size
H
T
Connection
Width
port size
across flats
71.9
8.1
11.4
41.2
81.6
73.6
H
L
149.6
174.0
Female thread type
(mm)
1/8
1/4
1/2
Model
H
T
Connection
Width
port size
across flats
KKA3S-01F-1
Rc 1/8
-02F-1
Rc 1/4
-03F-1
Rc 3/8
KKA4S-02F-1
Rc 1/4
-03F-1
Rc 3/8
-04F-1
Rc 1/2
KKA6S-03F-1
Rc 3/8
-04F-1
Rc 1/2
-06F-1
Rc 3/4
17
øD
41.2
44.5
6.1
23.4
43.1
24.2
30.7
46.9
92.2
8.1
41.2
86.2
52.3
99.4
50.5
178.8
56.2
57.9
T
44.8
49.9
46.1
24
30
Effective
Weight
area
(g)
(mm2)
37.6
18.5
19
22
L
Min.
bore
size
øD
Body
size
11.4
81.6
H
L
191.2
169.8
103
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 104
Flame Resistant (Equivalent to UL-94 Standard V-0)
FR Double Layer Tubing
Series TRB
Air Leakage
How to Order
For general air pressure
and water piping in
environments with sparks
from spot welding, etc.
TRB 10 75 B 100
Roll length
Inner tube O.D.
Double layer construction
using flame resistant resin
for the outer layer.
Symbol
20
100
Inner tube I.D.
(equivalent to UL-94 Standard V-0)
Length
20 m roll
100 m reel
Color
Symbol
B
W
R
BU
Y
G
Color
Black
White
Red
Blue
Yellow
Green
Inner tube
Soft nylon
Series
- 20m roll - 100m reel
Outer layer
Tube size
Metric size
Burst pressure (MPa)
Burst Pressure Characteristics
Curve and Operating Pressure
Bu
rst
pr
es
su
re
Bu
(T
rst
RB
pre
06
ssu
04
re
)
(ex
cep
tT
RB
06
04
)
(TRB0604)
(except TRB0604)
Operating temperature (°C)
Outer layer color Note 1)
Sectional view of FR double layer tube
Model
Inner tube O.D. (mm)
Inner tube I.D. (mm)
Outer layer thickness (mm)
TRBU0604
6
4
1
TRBU0805
8
5
1
TRBU1065
10
6.5
1
TRBU1208
12
8
1
Black (B)
White (W)
Red (R)
Blue (BU)
Yellow (Y)
Green (G)
Specifications
Fluid
Maximum operating Note 3)
pressure (at 20°C)
Burst pressure
Minimum bending Note 4)
radius (mm)
Operating Temperature
Inner tube
Materials
Outer layer
Air, Water Note 2)
1.0MPa
Refer to burst pressure characteristics curve.
15
28
35
45
–20 to 60°C, For water: 0 to 60°C (with no freezing)
Nylon 12
PVC (equivalent to UL-94 standard V-0)
Note 1) The color of all inner tubes is black.
Note 2) Can be used with general industrial water. Contact SMC if used with other fluids. Also keep surge
pressure at or below the maximum operating pressure.
Note 3) In the case of other temperatures, refer to the burst pressure characteristics curve. In addition,
operate so that abnormal temperature increase due to adiabatic compression does not occur.
Note 4) Indicates the bending value when the outside diameter rate of change is 10% or less at a
temperature of 20°C.
104
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 105
Flame Resistant (Equivalent to UL-94 Standard V-0)
FR Double Layer Tubing
Series TRBU
Air Leakage
How to Order
For general air pressure
and water piping in
environments with sparks
from spot welding, etc.
TRBU 10 75 B 100
Double layer construction
using flame resistant resin
for the outer layer.
Roll length
Inner tube O.D.
Symbol
20
100
Inner tube I.D.
(equivalent to UL-94 Standard V-0)
Length
20 m roll
100 m reel
Color
Symbol
B
W
R
BU
Y
G
Color
Black
White
Red
Blue
Yellow
Green
Inner tube
Polyurethane
Outer layer
Series
- 20m roll - 100m reel
Tube size
Outer layer color Note 1)
5.0
4.0
Bu
rst
3.0
Model
Inner tube O.D. (mm)
Inner tube I.D. (mm)
Outer layer thickness (mm)
pre
ssu
re
TRBU0604
6
4
1
TRBU0805
8
5
1
TRBU1065
10
6.5
1
TRBU1208
12
8
1
Black (B)
White (W)
Red (R)
Blue (BU)
Yellow (Y)
Green (G)
2.0
Burst pre
ssure
1.0
0
-20
0
20
40
Specifications
60
Fluid
Maximum operating Note 3)
pressure (at 20°C)
Burst pressure
Minimum bending Note 4)
radius (mm)
Operating Temperature
Inner tube
Materials
Outer layer
Air, Water Note 2)
0.8 MPa
Refer to burst pressure characteristics curve.
15
20
27
35
–20 to 60°C, For water: 0 to 40°C (with no freezing)
Polyurethane
PVC (equivalent to UL-94 standard V-0)
Note 1) The color of all inner tubes is black.
Note 2) Can be used with general industrial water. Contact SMC if used with other fluids. Also keep surge
pressure at or below the maximum operating pressure.
Note 3) In the case of other temperatures, refer to the burst pressure characteristics curve. In addition,
operate so that abnormal temperature increase due to adiabatic compression does not occur.
Note 4) Indicates the bending value when the outside diameter rate of change is 10% or less at a
temperature of 20°C.
105
Auxiliary Pneumatic
Equipment
Metric size
Sectional view of FR double layer tube
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 106
Double Layer Tubing Stripper
Series TKS
Air Leakage
Allows easy stripping of the outer
layer from double layer tubing.
Able to strip without damaging the inner tube
The outer layer can be stripped without damaging the inner tube
because a pawl is inserted between the inner tube and outer layer.
Tubing guide
Caution
Do not use to strip covering
materials from electrical wires, etc.
Adjustment of cutter and
stripping length is unnecessary
Cutter
Outer layer
Inner tube
A constant stripping length is always possible
due to the fixed cutter with angle that cuts until
the tubing reaches the end surface inside the
stripper.
Pawl
Removal of stripped tubing is unnecessary
Can be attached to tools
Stripping work can be automated by attaching
to an air driver, etc.
Since the stripped tubing is discharged to the
outside, no additional labor is required to remove it.
Window
Socket adapter
• Even double layer polyurethane tubing
(series TRBU) which is highly adhesive
to the outer layer can be stripped
easily.
Tip
color
Applicable tubing∗
TKS-06
Orange
TRB0604, TRBU0604
TKS-08
Yellow
TRB0806, TRBU0805
TKS-10
Blue
TRB1075, TRBU1065
TKS-12
Green
TRB1209, TRBU1208
Dimensions mm
D1
D2
16
35
18
20
22
L
Weight
g
58
45
62
50
∗ Inner tube material: TRB for Nylon, TRBU for Polyurethane
9.7
(3/8")
106
øD1
Model
øD2
Variations
L
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 107
Polyurethane Coil Tubing
Air Blow
Series TCU
Compact piping possible
Air Tool
Specifications
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
0425B-1 0425B-2 0425B-3 0604B-1 0604B-2 0604B-3 0805B-1
Model
Number of tubes
1 tube
2 tubes
3 tubes
1 tube
8
Tube I.D. mm
2.5
4
5
Air
0.8 MPa
Burst pressure
rst
1 tube
6
Max. operating pressure (at 20°C) Note 2)
Bu
3 tubes
4
Fluid
2 tubes
Tube O.D. mm
Refer to the burst pressure characteristics curve.
Operating temperature
–20 to 60°C
Material
Polyurethane
Color
Black
Note 1) Consult SMC if used with other than air fluids.
Note 2) For other temperatures, refer to the burst pressure characteristics curve. In addition, operate so that
abnormal temperature increase due to adiabatic compression does not occur.
Coil Tubing
pre
ssu
re
O.D.
4
Max. ope
rating pre
I.D.
2.5
ssure
4
8
5
No. of tubes Max. operating length m
1
2
3
1.5
1
1
2
2
1.5
3
1
1
2
Model
TCU0425B-1
TCU0425B-2
TCU0425B-3
TCU0604B-1
TCU0604B-2
TCU0604B-3
TCU0805B-1
Auxiliary Pneumatic
Equipment
6
Color
Black (B)
Black (B)
Black (B)
Black (B)
Black (B)
Black (B)
Black (B)
Tube Cutter
Series TK
TK-1
Applicable tube O.D.: 13 mm or less
TK-2
Air Leakage
TK-3 (Simplified type)
Note) Do not use the cutter to cut metal
such as electrical wires.
107
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 108
Regulator
Air Blow
Series AR10
to 60
Air Tool
How to Order
AR 30 F 03 BE 1N
Option
Regulator
Symbol
10 20 25 30 40 50 60
Thread type
AR20
Nil
N
F
Metric thread (M5)
Rc
NPT
G
Port
Symbol
size
M5
01
02
03
04
06
10
AR40
M5
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in ascending
alphanumeric order.
Note 2) The only difference from the standard specifications is the adjusting spring
for the regulator. It does not restrict the setting of 0.2 MPa or more.
Note 3) For M5 and NPT thread types.Note2) This product is for overseas use only according
to the new Measurement Law. (The SI unit type is provided for use in Japan.)
Port size
Body size
10
20
25
30
40
50
60
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Accessory Note 1)
Symbol
Nil
B
E
G
H
Combination
Symbol
Optional
specifications
Accessory
Accessory/Optional specifications
With bracket (With set nut)
Standard
Specifications
Applicable model
—
AR10 to 60
With bracket
With square embedded type pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AR20 to 60
AR10
With round pressure gauge (Without limit indicator)
AR20 to 60
With round pressure gauge (With limit indicator)
AR10 to 40
With set nut (For panel mount)
Description
—
Note 1) Optional parts are not assembled and are supplied loose at the time
of shipment (except option E).
Accessory/Optional Specifications
Combinations
JIS symbol
Description
Applicable model
0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting
AR10 to 60
Non-relieving
AR10 to 60
Flow direction: Right Left
AR10 to 60
Upward handle
AR10 to 60
Name plate and pressure gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F) AR10 to 60
1 (2)
N
R
Y
Z (3)
Body size
: Combination available
: Varies depending on the model
Accessory
B
E
G
: Combination not available
: Available only with NPT thread
Optional specifications
H
1
N
R
Y
Applicable regulator
Z
AR10
AR20~40 AR50~60
B
Square embedded type pressure gauge E
Round pressure gauge
G
With set nut (For panel mount) H
-1
-N
Non-relieving type
-R
-Y
Upward handle
Name plate and pressure gauge
-Z
in imperial units (PSI, °F)
Model
AR10
Port size
M5 x 0.8
Fluid
Proof pressure
0.05 to 0.7 MPa
Set pressure range
Pressure gauge port size (1)
1/16 (2)
Relief pressure
Construction
Weight (kg)
0.06
AR20
AR50
AR60
3/4
1/4, 3/8
1/4, 3/8, 1/2
Air
1.5 MPa
1.0 MPa
0.05 to 0.85 MPa
1/8
1/8
1/8
1/4
1/4
Set pressure + 0.05 MPa (3) (at relief flow rate of 0.1 l/min (ANR))
–5 to 60°C (With no freezing)
Relieving type
3/4, 1
1
1/4
1/4
0.26
1.17
1.22
1/8, 1/4
AR25
AR30
AR40
AR40-06
1/4, 3/8
0.21
0.29
0.44
0.47
Note 1) Pressure gauge connection threads are not required for regulator with a square embedded type pressure gauge (AR20 to AR60).
Note 2) Use a bushing (part no: 131368) when connecting the R 1/8 pressure gauge to the R 1/16 gauge port.
Note 3) Except AR10.
Accessory Part No.
Applicable model
AR10
Accessory
Bracket assembly (1)
Set nut
Pressure (2)
gauge
1 MPa
0.2 MPa
108
AR20
AR25
AR30
AR40
AR40-06
AR50
AR60
AR10P-270AS AR20P-270AS AR25P-270AS AR30P-270AS AR40P-270AS AR40P-270AS AR50P-270AS
(5)
AR50P-270AS(5)
AR10P-260S AR20P-260S AR25P-260S AR30P-260S AR40P-260S AR40P-260S
(6)
—
—
(6)
Round type
G27-10-R1
(4)
Square
embedded type
—
GC3-10AS
GC3-10AS
GC3-10AS
GC3-10AS
GC3-10AS
GC3-10AS
GC3-10AS
Round type
G27-10-R1
G36-2-01
G36-2-01
G36-2-01
G46-2-02
G46-2-02
G46-2-02
G46-2-02
Square
(4)
embedded type
—
GC3-2AS
GC3-2AS
GC3-2AS
GC3-2AS
GC3-2AS
GC3-2AS
GC3-2AS
(3)
G36-10-01 G36-10-01 G36-10-01 G46-10-02 G46-10-02 G46-10-02 G46-10-02
Note 1) Assembly includes a bracket and set nuts.
Note 2) in part numbers for a round pressure gauge indicates a type of connection thread. No indication is necessary for R; however, indicate N for NPT.
Please contact SMC regarding the connection thread NPT and pressure gauge supply for PSI unit specifications.
Note 3) For 1.0 MPa.
Note 5) Assembly includes a bracket and 2 mounting screws.
Note 4) Includes one O-ring and 2 mounting screws.
Note 6) Please contact SMC regarding the set nuts for AR50 and AR60.
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 109
Pilot Operated Regulator
Air Blow
Series AR425
to 935
Air Tool
AR425
Model
AR435
AR625
1/4, 3/8, 1/2
Port size
AR635
AR825
3/4, 1
AR835
AR925
AR935
11 4, 11 2
Fluid
2
Air
Proof pressure
1.5 MPa
Max. operating pressure
1.0 MPa
Set pressure range (MPa) (1)
Air consumption (for bleed hole) (2)
0.05 to 0.83
0.02 to 0.2
0.05 to 0.83
0.02 to 0.2
0.05 to 0.83
0.02 to 0.2
0.05 to 0.83
0.02 to 0.2
5 l/min (ANR) (at maximum pressure)
1 4
Pressure gauge port size
–5 to 60°C (No freezing)
Construction
Internal pilot relieving type (Pilot air is always bleeding.)
Weight (kg)
0.7
1.1
2.5
4.5
Note 1) Outlet pressure range: P2 is 90% of P1 or less.
Note 2) Air consumption differs depending on the set pressure.
Accessory (Option)/Part No.
Part no.
Description
Model
Bracket
Pressure gauge with limit indicator
(1)
AR45
AR65
AR85
AR95
B24P
B25P
—
—
G46-10-02 (Max. 1.0 MPa), G46-2-02 (Max. 0.2 MPa)
Auxiliary Pneumatic
Equipment
Note 1) • In the gauge part no. (e.g. G46-10-02), l indicate kind of the connecting thread. Put nothing for Rc and “N” for NPT thread.
• Please consult with SMC for NPT pressure gauge.
How to Order
Internal pilot operated
relieving type regulator
AR 4 25
02 BG
R
Option
Nil
Regulator
R
Body size
4 12
6 1
8 11 2
9 2
Accessory
0.05 to 0.83 MPa
25
35 Note) 0.02 to 0.2 MPa
Note) Compared with AR25 type,
its adjusting spring will only be
different.
AR65
1 4
3 8
Symbol Description Applicable model
Nil
With bracket AR45 to 65
B
G
Gauge
Port size
02
03
04
06
10
12
14
20
Regulating
pressure range
AR85
None
Flow direction:
Right Left
G46-10-02
G46-2-02
AR25
AR35
1 2
3 4
1
11 4
11 2
2
Thread type
Nil
JIS symbol
AR65-BG
N
F
Rc
NPT
G
AR425-BG
109
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 110
Regulator with Back Flow Mechanism
Series AR20K
to 60K
Actuator
How to Order
Regulator with a built-in mechanism that ensures a quick release
of the outlet air pressure (built-in
check valve with back flow mechanism).
AR 30 K
F 03 BE 1N
Regulator
Option
Symbol
Body size
1 (2)
N
R
Y
20 25 30 40 50 60
With back flow mechanism
Note) AR10 comes with a back flow mechanism
as a standard feature. If the set pressure
is below 0.15 MPa, back flow may not occur. When a backflow mechanism is required with a set pressure of less than
0.15 MPa, please ccontact SMC.
AR20K
Z
Port size
Nil
Rc
Example 1)
N
NPT
When the pressure in the rear and the
F
G
front of the cylinder differs:
Example 2)
Circuit diagram
When the air supply is cut off and
releasing the inlet pressure to the
atmosphere, the residual pressure
release of the outlet side can be
ensured for a safety purpose.
Body size
25 30 40 50 60
Port
Symbol
size 20
01 1/8 02 1/4 03 3/8 —
04 1/2 —
06 3/4 —
1 —
10
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Name plate and pressure
AR20K to 60K
gauge in imperial units (PSI)
(3)
Accessory (1)
Symbol
Nil
Description
Applicable model
—
B
With bracket
With square embedded
type pressure gauge (With
limit indicator)
With round pressure gauge
(With limit indicator)
With set nut (For panel
mount)
—
AR20K to 60K
E
Circuit diagram
Applicable model
AR20K to 60K
AR20K to 60K
AR20K to 60K
AR20K to 60K
∗ When more than one specification is
required, indicate in alphanumeric order.
Note 2) The only difference from the standard
specifications is the adjusting spring
for the regulator. It does not restrict
the setting of 0.2 MPa or more.
Note 3) For NPT thread type. This product is
for overseas use only according to the
new Measurement Law. (The SI unit
type is provided for use in Japan.)
Thread type
AR40K
Description
Non-relieving
Upward handle
JIS symbol
G
H
AR20K to 60K
AR20K to 60K
AR20K to 40K
Note 1) Optional parts are not assembled and
are supplied loose at the time of
shipment (except option E).
Model
Port size
AR20K
AR25K
AR30K
AR40K
AR40K-06
AR50K
AR60K
1/8, 1/4
1/4, 3/8
1/4, 3/8
1/4, 3/8, 1/2
Air
3/4
3/4, 1
1
1/4
1/4
1/4
Fluid
1.5 MPa
Proof pressure
1.0 MPa
0.05 to 0.85 MPa
Set pressure range (1)
1/8
1/8
1/8
1/4
Set pressure + 0.05 MPa (at relief flow rate of 0.1 l/min (ANR))
Relief pressure
–5° to 60°C (With no freezing)
Relieving type
Construction
Weight (kg)
0.26
∗ AR10 comes with a back flow mechanism as a standard feature.
0.21
0.30
0.45
0.48
1.17
1.22
Note 1) Set the inlet pressure 0.05 MPa or higher than the set pressure.
Note 2) Pressure gauge connection threads are not required for regulators with a square embedded
type pressure gauge (AR20K to AR60K).
Accessory Part No.
Applicable model
Accessory
Bracket assembly
Set nut
Pressure
gauge
(2)
1 MPa
0.2 MPa
AR20K
AR25K
AR30K
AR40K
AR40K-06
AR50K
AR60K
AR20P-270AS AR25P-270AS AR30P-270AS AR40P-270AS AR40P-270AS AR50P-270AS
(3)
AR20P-260S AR25P-260S
AR30P-260S
AR40P-260S
AR40P-260S
—
(5)
Round type
G36-10-01
G36-10-01
G36-10-01
G46-10-02
G46-10-02
G46-10-02
G46-10-02
(4)
Square
embedded type
GC3-10AS
GC3-10AS
GC3-10AS
GC3-10AS
GC3-10AS
GC3-10AS
GC3-10AS
Round type
G36-2-01
G36-2-01
G36-2-01
G46-2-02
G46-2-02
G46-2-02
G46-2-02
Square
(4)
embedded type
GC3-2AS
GC3-2AS
GC3-2AS
GC3-2AS
GC3-2AS
GC3-2AS
GC3-2AS
(1)
Note 2) in part numbers for a round pressure gauge indicates a type of connection thread. No indication is necessary for R; however, indicate N for NPT.
Please contact SMC regarding the connection thread NPT and pressure gauge supply for PSI unit specifications.
Note 3) Assembly includes a bracket and 2 mounting screws.
Note 5) Please contact SMC regarding the set nut for AR50K and 60K.
110
(3)
AR50P-270AS
—
(5)
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 111
Filter Regulator
Air Blow
Series AW10
to 40
Air Tool
Integrated filter and regulator units
save space and require less piping.
JIS symbol
AW20
AW40
How to Order
AW 30 F 03 BE 1N
Option
Filter regulator
10 20 30 40
Thread type
(1)
N
F (2)
Metric thread (M5)
Rc
NPT
G
Applicable model
AW10 to 40
AW10 to 40
AW10 to 40
AW30/40
AW20
AW30/40
AW10 to 40
AW10 to 40
AW30/40
AW10 to 40
∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in alphanumeric order.
Note 5) The only difference from the standard specifications is the adjusting spring for the regulator. It does not restrict the setting of 0.2 MPa or more.
Note 6) Without a valve function.
Note 7) For M5 and NPT thread types. This product is for overseas use only according to the
new Measurement Law. (The SI unit type is provided for use in Japan.)
Note 1) Drain guide is NPT 1/4 (applicable to
AW30 and 40), and the exhaust port for
auto-drain comes with ø3/8" One-touch
fitting (applicable to AW30 and AW40).
Note 2) Drain guide is G 1/4 (applicable to
AW30 and AW40).
Accessory (3)
Symbol
Nil
Port size
Symbol
Port
size
M5
01
02
03
04
06
M5
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
Body size
10
—
—
—
—
—
20
—
—
—
—
30
—
—
—
—
B
C
D
E
40
—
—
G
H
Applicable model
—
AW10 to 40
With bracket
AW10 to 40
Float type auto-drain (N.C.)
AW30/40
Float type auto-drain (N.O.)
AW20 to 40
With square embedded type pressure gauge (With limit indicator)
AW10
With round pressure gauge (Without limit indicator)
AW20 to 40
AW10 to 40
Description
—
Note 3) Optional parts are not assembled and are supplied loose at the time of shipment (except options C, D and E).
: Combination available
: Varies depending on the model
Combination
Accessory
Accessory/Optional specifications
Symbol
Accessory/Optional Specifications Combinations
Accessory
B C D
E G H
1
2
6
8
C
J
N R W Z
: Combination not available
: Available only with NPT thread
Applicable filter regulator
AW10 AW20 AW30 to 40
B
With bracket (With set nut)
C
D
E
Square embedded type pressure gauge
G
H
–1
–2
Metal bowl
–6
Nylon bowl
–8
Metal bowl with level gauge
–C
With bowl guard
–J
Drain guide 1/4
–N
Non-relieving type
–R
Drain cock with barb fitting: ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing –W
Name plate, caution plate for bowl, and pressure
gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F)
–Z
111
Auxiliary Pneumatic
Equipment
1 (5)
Metal bowl
2
Nylon bowl
6
8
With bowl guard
C
Drain guide 1/4
J (6)
Non-relieving
N
R
Drain cock with barb fitting: ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing
W
Z (7) Name plate, caution plate for bowl, and pressure gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F)
Body size
Nil
Description
Symbol
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 112
AW10 to 40
Model
Port sizes
Fluid
Proof pressure
Set pressure range
Relief pressure
Nominal filtration rating
Drain capacity (cm3)
Bowl material
Bowl guard
Construction
Weight (kg)
AW10
M5 x 0.8
AW20
1/8, 1/4
AW30
AW40
1/4, 3/8
1/4, 3/8, 1/2
Air
1.5 MPa
1.0 MPa
0.05 to 0.7 MPa
0.05 to 0.85 MPa
1/8
1/8
1/4
1/16 (2)
Set pressure + 0.05 MPa (3) (at relief flow rate of 0.1 l/min (ANR))
5 µm
8
45
2.5
25
Polycarbonate
Standard
—
Option
Relieving type
0.40
0.72
0.09
0.32
AW40-06
3/4
1/4
45
0.75
Note 1) Pressure gauge connection threads are not required for regulators with a square embedded type pressure gauge (AW20 to AW40).
Note 2) Use a bushing (part no: 131368) when connecting R 1/8 pressure gauge to R 1/16 gauge port.
Note 3) Not applicable to AW10.
Accessory Part No.
Applicable model
Accessory
Bracket assembly (1)
Set nut
(2)
1.0 MPa
Pressure
gauge
Round Type
Square embedded type
0.2 MPa
Round Type
Square embedded type
Float type
auto-drain
(5)
(4)
N.O.
N.C.
(4)
AW10
AW20
AW30
AW40
AW40-06
AR10P-270AS
AR10P-260S
G27-10-R1
—
G27-10-R1 (3)
—
—
AD17
AW20P-270AS
AR20P-260S
G36-10-01
GC3-10AS
G36-2-01
GC3-2AS
—
AD27
AR30P-270AS
AR30P-260S
G36-10-01
GC3-10AS
G36-2-01
GC3-2AS
AD38
AD37
AR40P-270AS
AR40P-260S
G46-10-02
GC3-10AS
G46-2-02
GC3-2AS
AD48
AD47
AR40P-270AS
AR40P-260S
G46-10-02
GC3-10AS
G46-2-02
GC3-2AS
AD48
AD47
Note 2) in part numbers for a round pressure gauge indicates a type of connection thread. No indication is necessary for R; however, indicate N for NPT. Please contact
SMC regarding the connection thread NPT and supply of the pressure gauge for PSI unit specifications.
Note 3) For 1 MPa.
Note 5) Minimum operating pressure: N.O. type–0.1 MPa; N.C. type–0.1 MPa (AD17/27) and 0.15 MPa (AD37/47). Please contact SMC regarding the specifications for PSI
unit and °F.
112
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 113
Filter Regulator with Back Flow Mechanism
Air Blow
Series AW20K/30K/40K
Air Tool
How to Order
AW 30 K
F 03 BE
1N
Option
Filter regulator
Symbol
1 (4)
2
6
8
C
J (5)
N
R
W
Z (6)
Body size
20 30 40
With back flow mechanism
Note) AW10 comes with a back flow mechanism as
a standard feature.
If the set pressure is not exceeding 0.15 MPa,
back flow may not occur. When a back flow
mechanism is required with a set pressure of
less than 0.15 MPa, please contact SMC.
AW40K
N (1)
F (2)
Rc
NPT
G
Note 1) Drain guide is NPT 1/4 (applicable to
AW30K and 40K), and the exhaust
port for auto-drain comes with ø3/8"
One-touch fitting (applicable to
AW30K and AW40K).
Note 2) Drain guide is G 1/4 (applicable to
AW30K and AW40K).
Accessory (3)
Symbol
Nil
Port size
Symbol
Standard
Specifications
JIS symbol
01
02
03
04
06
20
—
—
—
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
30
—
—
—
Model
Port sizes
Fluid
Proof pressure
Set pressure range (1)
Relief pressure
Nominal filtration rating
Drain capacity (cm3)
Bowl material
Bowl guard
Construction
Weight (kg)
40
—
Description
Applicable model
—
With bracket
AW20K to 40K
AW20K to 40K
AW30K/40K
With square embedded type pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AW20K to 40K
AW20K to 40K
AW20K to 40K
—
Note 3) Optional parts are not assembled and are supplied loose at the time
of shipment (except options C, D and E).
AW20K
AW30K
AW40K
AW40K-06
1/8, 1/4
1/4, 3/8
1/4, 3/8, 1/2
3/4
Air
1.5 MPa
1.0 MPa
0.05 to 0.85 MPa
1/8
1/8
1/4
1/4
Set pressure + 0.05 MPa (at relief flow rate of 0.1 l/min (ANR))
5 µm
8
25
45
45
Polycarbonate
Option
Standard
Relieving type
0.40
0.32
0.72
0.75
Note 1) Set the inlet pressure 0.05 MPa or higher than the set pressure.
Note 2) Pressure gauge connection threads are not required for regulators with a square embedded type pressure gauge (AW20K
to AW40K).
Accessory Part No.
Circuit Diagram
When the air supply is cut off and releasing the inlet pressure to the atmosphere,
the residual pressure release of the outlet
side can be ensured for a safety purpose.
JIS symbol
With back flow
mechanism
Filter
regulator
Applicable model
Accessory
(1)
AW20K
Bracket assembly
AW20P-270AS
AR20P-260S
Set nut
Round type G36-10-01
(2)
1.0 MPa Square
(3)
Pressure
GC3-10AS
embedded type
gauge
Round type G36-2-01
0.2 MPa Square
(3)
GC3-2AS
embedded type
—
N.O.
Float type
auto-drain
AD27
N.C.
AW30K
AW40K
AW40K-06
AR30P-270AS
AR30P-260S
G36-10-01
GC3-10AS
G36-2-01
GC3-2AS
AD38
AD37
AR40P-270AS
AR40P-260S
G46-10-02
GC3-10AS
G46-2-02
GC3-2AS
AD48
AD47
AR40P-270AS
AR40P-260S
G46-10-02
GC3-10AS
G46-2-02
GC3-2AS
AD48
AD47
Note 2) in part numbers for a round pressure gauge indicates a type of connection thread. No indication is necessary for R;
however, indicate N for NPT. Please contact SMC regarding the connection thread NPT and pressure gauge supply for PSI
unit specifications.
Note 4) Minimum operating pressure: N.O. type–0.1 MPa; N.C. type–0.1 MPa (AD27) and 0.15 MPa (AD37/47). Please contact SMC
regarding the specifications for PSI unit and °F.
113
Auxiliary Pneumatic
Equipment
AW20K
B
C
D
E
G
H
Body size
Port
size
Applicable model
AW20K to 40K
AW20K to 40K
AW20K to 40K
AW30K/40K
AW20K
AW30K/40K
AW20K to 40K
AW20K to 40K
AW30K/40K
Name plate, caution plate for bowl, and pressure gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F) AW20K to 40K
∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in alphanumeric order.
Note 4) The only difference from the standard specifications is the adjusting spring
for the regulator. It does not restrict the setting of 0.2 MPa or more.
Note 5) Without a valve function.
Note 6) For NPT thread type. This product is for overseas use only according to the
new Measurement Law. (The SI unit type is provided for use in Japan.)
Thread type
Nil
Description
Metal bowl
Nylon bowl
With bowl guard
Drain guide 1/4
Non-relieving type
Drain cock with barb fitting: ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 114
Air Filter Element Part Number List
Air Line
Maintenance
Air filter
Filter regulator
Air filter (large capacity)
Mist separator
Series AF
Series AW
Series AF
Series AFM
Mist separator
regulator
Series AWM
Filter model Element part no.
AF10
AF10P-060S
AW10
AF10P-060S
AF20
AF20P-060S
AW20
AF20P-060S
AF30
AF30P-060S
AW30
AF30P-060S
AF40
AF40P-060S
AW40
AF40P-060S
AF40-06
AF40P-060S
AW40-06
AF40P-060S
AF50
AF50P-060S
AF60
AF60P-060S
Micro mist separator
Series AFD
regulator
AFM20
AFM20P-060AS
AWM20
AFM20P-060AS
AF800
11345-5B
AFM30
AFM30P-060AS
AWM30
AFM30P-060AS
AF900
11352-5B
AFM40
AFM40P-060AS
AWM40
AFM40P-060AS
Main line filter
Series AFF
Series AWD
Free standing
main line filter
Mist separator
Series AM
Series AFF
Element part no.
Filter model
Filter model
Element part no.
AFF2B
AFF-EL2B
AFF75A
EC700-003N
AM150
AM-EL150
AFF4B
AFF-EL4B
AFF125A
EC700-003N
AM250
AM-EL250
AFF8B
AFF-EL8B
AFF150A
EC800-003N
AM350
AM-EL350
AFF11B
AFF-EL11B
AFF220A
EC900-003N
AM450
AM-EL450
AFD20
AFD20P-060AS
AWD20
AFD20P-060AS
AFF22B
AFF-EL22B
AM550
AM-EL550
AFD30
AFD30P-060AS
AWD30
AFD30P-060AS
AFF37B
AFF-EL37B
AM650
AM-EL650
AFD40
AFD40P-060AS
AWD40
AFD40P-060AS
AFF75B
AFF-EL75B
AM850
AM-EL850
with prefilter
Series AMD
Super mist separator
Series AME
Series AMH
(Free standing type, In-line type)
Series AMD
Filter model
Element part no.
Filter model
Element part no.
AMD150
AMD-EL150
AMD800
63174
AMH150
AMH-EL150
AME150
AME-EL150
AMD250
AMD-EL250
AMD801
63174
AMH250
AMH-EL250
AME250
AME-EL250
AMD350
AMD-EL350
AMD900
63174 (3 pcs.)
AMH350
AMH-EL350
AME350
AME-EL350
AMD450
AMD-EL450
AMD901
63174 (3 pcs.)
AMH450
AMH-EL450
AME450
AME-EL450
AMD550
AMD-EL550
AMD1000
63174 (5 pcs.)
AMH550
AMH-EL550
AME550
AME-EL550
AMD650
AMD-EL650
AMH650
AMH-EL650
AME650
AME-EL650
AMD850
AMD-EL850
AMH850
AMH-EL850
AME850
AMH-EL850
Odor removal filter
Series AMF
Odor removal filter
(Free standing type, In-line type)
Series AMF
AMF150
AMF-EL150
AMF800
AMF250
AMF-EL250
AMF801
63271
AMF350
AMF-EL350
AMF900
63271 (3 pcs.)
AMF450
AMF-EL450
AMF901
63271 (3 pcs.)
AMF550
AMF-EL550
AMF1000
63271 (5 pcs.)
AMF650
AMF-EL650
AMF850
AMF-EL850
114
63271
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 115
GD40-2-01
Differential Pressure Gauge
The difference between the inlet and Models/Specifications
Model
outlet pressures can be viewed at a
Fluid
glance on a differential pressure
gauge. It is ideal for filter
Proof pressure
maintenance.
• Compact and light weight
• Easily installed by merely
providing a bypass circuit
Air Line
Maintenance
GD40-2-01
Compressed air
1 MPa
1.5 MPa
5 to 60°C
1/8
0 to 0.2 MPa
±0.006 MPa
ø40
300
Port size (Rc)
Gauge range
Accuracy
Dial size
Weight (g)
• With protective cover for hazard
prevention
Main part materials
Case
Internal parts
Window
Gauge plate
Standard accessories
Die-cast zinc
Brass, Phosphor bronze
Chloroethylene
Stainless steel
Design Precautions
Caution
T0425 (0.5 m)
H04-01 (1 pc.)
DL04-01 (1pc.)
Nylon tubing
Male connector
Male elbow
Mounting
Caution
A differential pressure gauge cannot be used in a
location with frequent pulsation.
1) The HIGH and LOW marks on the back of the
differential pressure gauge indicate high pressure
and low pressure sides, respectively. Connect the
HIGH side to the primary side and the LOW side
to the secondary side of filters and other
equipment. Do not use a stop valve, as damage
to the differential pressure gauge may occur if the
valve is inadvertently left open or closed.
2) Install the differential pressure gauge vertically.
3) Securely connect the piping of the differential
pressure gauge, because it will be damaged if
the piping becomes detached.
Piping example
Dimensions
Bracket mounting thread
Differential
pressure gauge
Primary side
Secondary side
ø62
Low pressure side
High pressure side
Thread depth 7
115
Auxiliary Pneumatic
Equipment
JIS symbol
Mounting
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 116
Filter with Element Service Indicator
Air Line
Maintenance
This unit indicates the clogging (service life) of elements.
The element service indicator indicates the clogging of
elements in a mist separator, etc., which can be used as a
guide for the time to replace the element.
Clogging Indication
Replace an element when
the element service
indicator's red indicator
reaches to the top.
The top of the indicator
window indicates
differential pressure of
approximately 0.1 MPa.
Replace an element every
2 years even if the red
indicator does not reach
the top.
Differential pressure: 0.05 MPa or less
(The indicator's tip is visible.)
Applicable series
Main line filter: AFF2B to AFF75B
Mist separator: AM150 to AM850
Micro mist separator: AMD150 to AMD850
Micro mist separator with prefilter: AMH150 to AMH850
How to Order
2B
4B
8B
11B
22B
37B
75B
AM
AMD
AMH
Size
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/2
An element service indicator is already mounted on each series at the
factory. It cannot be mounted at a later time or used as a separate unit.
Size
Size
AFF
Differential pressure: 0.1 MPa or more
(The indicator reaches to the top.)
2B, 150
4B, 250
8B, 350
11B, 450
22B, 550
37B, 650
75B, 850
150
250
350
450
550
650
850
Thread type Bore size
Nil
N
F
Bore size
1/8
01
1/4
02
3/8
03
1/2
04
3/4
06
1
10
1 1/2
14
2
20
Thread type
Rc
Nil
NPT
N
G
F
Bore
size 01 02 03
Size
2B, 150
4B, 250
8B, 350
11B, 450
22B, 550
37B, 650
75B, 850
04 06 10 14 20
Refer to the “Air Preparation Equipment” portion of
Best Pneumatics Vol. 14 for selecting the model
number and size of a mist separator, etc.
01
02
03
04
06
10
14
20
Accessory
Option
Nil
B
C
D
BC
BD
Nil
J
M
R
T
JR
MR
JT
MT
RT
JRT
MRT
Accessory
Without accessory
With bracket
With N.C. auto drain
With N.O. auto drain
Option
Accessory
Nil
2B,
B
150
C
to
D
22B,
BC
550
BD
Nil
B
37B,
650
D
BD
Nil
75B,
B
850
D
BD
Size
Option
Drain guide with 1/4B female thread Nil
Drain cock with M5 thread
J
Flow direction: Right to left
M
With element service indicator R
T
Nil
B
C
D
J
M
R
T
JR MR JT MT RT JRT MRT
: Applicable (Combinations other than those indicated are not possible.)
116
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 117
Sensors/Measuring Instruments
SMC PRESSURE SWITCH
RESET
SET
Digital flow switch
Application
PF2A/PF2W
Air line maintenance, Air blow, Air tool,
Air leakage, Cooling water
118
ZSE30/ISE30
154
ZSE40/ISE40
ZSE3/ISE3
162
171
ZSE50F/ISE50
173
ISE70/75/75H
182
ZSE5B/ISE5B
PPA
(Made to Order)
ISA2
ISA
189
197
203
205
222
224
Air blow, Air tool
Air line maintenance, Air blow, Air leakage
Air purge
Air purge
Liquid removal
Page
117
Sensors
High precision 2-color display
digital pressure switch
LCD display type digital pressure switch
for general fluids
2-color display
digital pressure switch
Compact manometer
Air leakage tester
Air catch sensor
Air catch sensor
Series
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 118
Air Line
Maintenance
Digital Flow Switches
Series PF2A/PF2W
Air Blow
Air Leakage
Air Tool
Cooling Water
For Air
Flow rate
measurement
range l/min
1 to 10
5 to 50
10 to 100
20 to 200
50 to 500
150 to 3000
300 to 6000
600 to 12000
Remote Type
Integrated Type
Display unit
Sensor unit
PF2A710
PF2A750
PF2A711
PF2A721
PF2A751
PF2A703H
PF2A706H
PF2A712H
PF2A510
PF2A550
PF2A511
PF2A521
PF2A551
Display unit (4 ch)
PF2A30
PF2A20
PF2A31
—
—
—
For Water
Flow rate
measurement
range l/min
0.5 to 4
2 to 16
5 to 40
10 to 100
Remote Type
Integrated Type
Sensor unit
PF2W504(T)
PF2W520(T)
PF2W540(T)
PF2W511
PF2W704(T)
PF2W720(T)
PF2W740(T)
PF2W711
Display unit (4 ch)
Display unit
PF2W30
PF2W20
PF2W33
Application examples
Flow control of N2 gas to prevent
detection
Clean gas filter
camera
shimmering
and lead
frame
oxidation
Flow control of cooling water for wafer
temperature regulation and high
frequency
electric
power
supply
Flow control of
pressurized
cooling water for
welding gun
Set the clean gas
filter on the outlet side
piping of the flow switch.
The accumulated pulse output
function enables remote
monitoring of accumulated flow.
Main line flow control
M/C
Make possible the monitoring
of air flow from the main line
to each branch line.
A
COUNT
B
COM DC12V GND F.G. R.S. HOLD COM BANK1 BANK2
PRESET
FUNC.
UP
RIGHT
LEFT
DOWN
MODE SEL.
AC100~240VCOM OUT1OUT2OUT3OUT4OUT5S.STOP RD
M/C
Flow control for each branch line
118
COM
MULTI COUNTER:CEU5
M/C
SET
SD SG RS-232C
Pulse counter
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 119
Digital Flow Switch
For Air
Series PF2A
For details about certified products
conforming to international standards,
visit us at www.smcworld.com.
How to Order
Integrated
display type
PF2A7 10
01
27
M
Flow rate range
10
50
11
21
51
1 to 10 l/min
5 to 50 l/min
10 to 100 l/min
20 to 200 l/min
50 to 500 l/min
Unit specification
Thread type
Nil
N
F
Wiring specification (Refer to page 152.)
Rc
NPT
G
M12 3 m lead wire with connector
Without lead wire
Nil
N
Port size
Flow rate (l/min)
Port
Symbol size
10 50 100 200 500
1/8 01
1/4 02
3/8
03
1/2
04
Applicable model
PF2A710, PF2A750
PF2A711, PF2A721
PF2A751
Output specification
Symbol
27
NPN open collector 2 outputs
67
PNP open collector 2 outputs
Nil
M
With unit
switching function
Fixed SI unit Note)
Note) Fixed unit:
Real-time flow rate: l/min
Accumulated flow: l
Specifications
Output Note 5)
specification
Switch output
Resistance
Accumulated pulse output
Indicator light
Response time
Hysteresis
Power supply voltage
Enclosure
Operating temperature range
Withstand voltage
Insulation resistance
Vibration resistance
Impact resistance
Noise resistance
PF2A710
PF2A750
0.5 to 10.5 l/min
2.5 to 52.5 l/min
0.5 to 10.5l /min
2.5 to 52.5 l/min
1 to 10 l/min
5 to 50 l/min
0.1 l/min
0.5 l/min
0.1 l/pulse
0.5 l/pulse
l/min, CFM x 10–2
PF2A711
Air, Nitrogen
5 to 105 l/min
5 to 105 l/min
10 to 100 l/min
1 l/min
1 l/pulse
PF2A721
10 to 210 l/min
10 to 210 l/min
20 to 200 l/min
2 l/min
2 l/pulse
l/min, CFM x 10–1
PF2A751
25 to 525 l/min
25 to 525 l/min
50 to 500 l/min
5 l/min
5 l/pulse
l, ft3 x 10–1
0 to 50°C
±5% F.S. or less
±1% F.S. or less
±2% F.S. or less
±3% F.S. or less (15 to 35°C, based on 25°C), ±5% F.S. or less (0 to 50°C, based on 25°C)
150 mA or less
160 mA or less
170 mA or less
250 g
290 g
1/8, 1/4
3/8
1/2
Heater type
3-digit, 7-segment LED
1.0 MPa
0 to 999999 l
Maximum load current: 80 mA; Internal voltage drop: 1 V or less (With load current of 80 mA)
NPN open collector Maximum applied voltage: 30 V; Two outputs
Maximum load current: 80 mA
NPN open collector Internal voltage drop: 1.5 V or less (With load current of 80 mA); Two outputs
NPN or PNP open collector (same as switch output)
Illuminates when output is ON. OUT1: Green; OUT2: Red
1sec. or less
Hysteresis mode: Variable (can be set from 0), Window comparator mode: 3-digit fixed Note 6)
12 to 24 VDC (Ripple ±10% or less)
IP65
Operating: 0 to 50°C, Stored: –25 to 85°C (No condensation or freezing)
1000 VAC for 1 min. between external terminal and case
50 MΩ or more (500 VDC Mega) between external terminal and case
10 to 500 Hz at whichever is smaller: 1.5 mm amplitude or 98 m/s2 acceleration, in X, Y, Z directions for 2 hrs. each (De-energized)
490 m/s2 in X, Y, Z directions 3 times each
1000 Vp-p, Pulse width 1 µs, Rise time 1 ns
Note 1) For digital flow switch with unit switching function. (Fixed SI unit [(l/min, or l, m3 or m3 x 103)] will be set for switch type without the unit switching function.)
Note 2) Flow rate display can be switched between the basic condition of 0°C, 101.3 kPa and the standard condition (ANR) of 20°C, 101.3 kPa, and 65% RH.
Note 3) Without lead wire.
Note 4) Accumulated flow rate is reset when the power supply turns OFF.
Note 5) Switch output and accumulated pulse output can be selected during initial setting.
Note 6) Window comparator mode — Since hysteresis will reach 3 digits, keep P_1 and P_2 or n_1 and n_2 apart by 7 digits or more. (In case of output OUT2, n_1, 2 to be n_3, 4 and P_1, 2 to
be P_3, 4.)
Note 7) The flow switch is comformed to CE mark.
119
Sensors Measuring
Instruments
Model
Measured fluid
Flow rate measurement range
Set flow rate range
Flow rate measuring range
Minimum set unit
Accumulated pulse flow rate exchange value (Pulse width: 50 ms)
Note 1, 2) Real-time flow rate
Display unit
Accumulated flow
Operating fluid temperature
Linearity
Repeatability
Temperature characteristics
Current consumption (No load)
Weight Note 3)
Port size (Rc, NPT, G)
Detection type
Display
Proof pressure
Accumulated flow range Note 4)
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 120
PF2A
How to Order
Remote type
Display unit
PF2A5 10
01
C
Flow rate range
10
50
11
21
51
1 to 10 l/min
5 to 50 l/min
10 to 100 l/min
20 to 200 l/min
50 to 500 l/min
Thread type
Option (Refer to page 152.)
Rc
NPT
G
Nil
N
F
Nil
C
None
e-con connector x 1 pc.
The cable and connector are shipped
unassembled.
Port size
Flow rate (l/min)
Port
Symbol
size 10 50 100 200 500
01
1/8 02
1/4 03
3/8
04
1/2
Applicable model
Nil
PF2A510, 550
N
Without lead wire
PF2A511, 521
PF2A551
Symbol
Nil
1
2
Applicable display unit (monitor) model
Specification
Output for display unit
Series PF2A300
Output for display unit + analog output (1 to 5 V)
Series PF2A200/300
Output for display unit + analog output (4 to 20 mA)
Series PF2A300
Specifications
Model
PF2A510
PF2A550
Measured fluid
Detection type
PF2A511
5 to 50 l/min
10 to 100 l/min
1.0 MPa
0 to 50°C
±1% F.S. or less (Connected to PF2A3), ±3% F.S. or less (Connected to PF2A2)
±2% F.S. or less (15 to 35°C, based on 25°C)
Temperature
characteristics
Output Note 2)
specification
50 to 500 l/min
±5% F.S. or less
Linearity Note 1)
Analog voltage output (Non-linear) output impedance 1 kΩ output for display unit PF2A3
Voltage output 1 to 5 V within the flow rate range
Linearity: ±5% F.S. or less; allowable load resistance: 100 kΩ or more.
Analog output
Current output 4 to 20 mA within the flow rate range
Linearity: ±5% F.S. or less; allowable load resistance: 300 Ω or less with 12 VDC, 600 Ω or less with 24 VDC
110 mA or less
100 mA or less
IP65
Enclosure
Resistance
20 to 200 l/min
PF2A551
Heater type
1 to 10 l/min
Withstand pressure
Repeatability Note 1)
PF2A521
Air, Nitrogen
Withstand voltage
10 to 500 Hz at whichever is smaller: 1.5 mm amplitude or 98 m/s2 acceleration
Impact resistance
Noise resistance
Weight
Note 3)
200 g
1/8, 1/4
240 g
3/8
Note 1) The system accuracy when combined with PF2A2/PF2A3.
Note 2) Output system can be selected during initial setting.
Note 3) Without lead wire. (Add 20 g for the types of analog output whether voltage or current output selected.)
Note 4) Flow rate unit measured under the following conditions: 0°C and 101.3 kPa.
Note 5) The sensor unit is comformed to CE mark.
120
1/2
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 121
For Air
Digital Flow Switch
Series
PF2A
How to Order
Remote type
Display unit
PF2A3 0 0
A
M
Unit specification
Nil
M
Flow rate range
Mounting
Symbol Flow rate range Type for sensor unit
0
1
1 to 10 l/min
5 to 50 l/min
10 to 100 l/min
20 to 200 l/min
50 to 500 l/min
Note) Fixed unit:
Accumulated flow: l
Panel mounting
A
PF2A510
PF2A550
PF2A511
PF2A521
PF2A551
With unit switching function
Fixed SI unit Note)
Symbol
0
1
Applicable model
PF2A300/310
PF2A301/311
Specifications
Model
PF2A300/301
PF2A310/311
Flow rate measurement range Note 1)
0.5 to 10.5 l/min
2.5 to 52.5 l/min
5 to 105 l/min
10 to 210 l/min
25 to 525 l/min
Set flow rate range Note 1)
0.5 to 10.5 l/min
2.5 to 52.5 l/min
5 to 105 l/min
10 to 210 l/min
25 to 525 l/min
0.1 l/min
0.5 l/min
1 l/min
2 l/min
5 l/min
0.1 l/pulse
0.5 l/pulse
1 l/pulse
2 l/pulse
5 l/pulse
Minimum set unit Note 1)
Accumulated pulse flow rate exchange
value (Pluse width: 50 ms) Note 1)
Note 2, 3)
Display unit
Real-time flow rate
l/min, CFM x 10–2
l/min, CFM x 10–1
3
Accumulated flow
l, ft x 10
0 to 999999 l
±5% F.S. or less
Linearity Note 4)
Repeatability
±1% F.S. or less
Note 5)
±1% F.S. or less (15 to 35°C based on 25°C)
±2% F.S. or less (0 to 50°C based on 25°C)
50 mA or less
60 mA or less
Output Note 6)
specification
Weight
45 g
NPN open collector (PF2A300, PF2A310)
Internal voltage drop: 1 V or less (With load current of 80 mA)
Maximum applied voltage: 30 V
2 outputs
PNP open collector (PF2A301, PF2A311)
Internal voltage drop: 1.5 V or less (With load current of 80 mA)
2 outputs
Switch output
Display
Indicator light
Response time
Hysteresis
Enclosure
Withstand voltage
1 sec. or less
Hysteresis mode: Variable (can be set from 0), Window comparator mode: Fixed (3 digits) Note 6)
IP40
10 to 500 Hz at whichever is smaller: 1.5mm amplitude or 98 m/s2 acceleration, in X, Y, Z directions for 2 hrs. each
Impact resistance
Noise resistance
Note 1) The flow rate measurement range can be modified depending on the setting.
Note 2) For digital flow switch with unit switching function. (Fixed SI unit [l/min or l] will be set for switch types without the unit switching function.)
Note 5) The system accuracy when combined with PF2A5.
be P_3, 4.)
Note 8) The display unit is comformed to CE mark.
121
Sensors
Current consumption
Resistance
–1
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 122
PF2A
How to Order
4-channel Flow Monitor
Remote type
Display unit
PF2A20 0
M
Accessory / Power supply output cable (2 m)
0
1
Option 2 (Refer to page 152.)
NPN 4 outputs
PNP 4 outputs
None
Sensor connector (4 pc.)
Nil
4C
Unit specification
Nil
M
Fixed SI unit Note)
Nil
A
B
Note) Fixed unit:
Accumulated flow: l
None
Panel mounting
Front protective cover + Panel mounting
Connectable remote type sensor part is PF2W5--1 (with analog output 1 to 5 V).
Specifications
Model
Applicable flow rate sensor
PF2A200/201
PF2A550--1
PF2A511--1
PF2A521--1
PF2A551--1
0.5 to 10.5 l/min
2.5 to 52.5 l/min
5 to 105 l/min
10 to 210 l/min
25 to 525 l/min
Note 2, 3)
Real-time flow rate
Display unit
Accumulated flow
Current consumption
Power supply voltage for sensor
Power supply current for sensor Note 3)
Sensor input
No. of inputs
Input protection
0.5 to 10.5 l/min
2.5 to 52.5 l/min
5 to 105 l/min
10 to 210 l/min
25 to 525 l/min
0.1 l/min
0.5 l/min
1 l/min
2 l/min
5 l/min
0.1 l/pulse
0.5 l/pulse
1 l/pulse
2 l/pulse
Output Note 6)
specification
PF2A510--1
Switch output
(Real-time switch output,
Accumulated switch
output)
No. of outputs
Output protection
Hysteresis
Linearity Note 5)
Display method
Resistance
Indicator light
Enclosure
Operating humidity range
Impact resistance
Noise resistance
Connection
Material
Weight
–2
5 l/pulse
–1
l/min, CFM x 10
l, ft3 x 10–2
0 to 999999 l, 0 to 999999 ft3 x 10–2
l/min, CFM x 10
l, ft3 x 10–1
0 to 999999 l, 0 to 999999 ft3 x 10–1
50 mA or less (Not including the current consumption of the sensor)
Same as [Power supply voltage]
Max. 110 mA (However, the total current for the 4 inputs is 440 mA maximum or less.)
1 to 5 VDC (Input impedance: Approx. 800K Ω)
4 inputs
Excess voltage protection
NPN open collector (PF2A200) Internal voltage drop: 1 V or less (With load current of 80 mA)
PNP open collector (PF2A201)
4 outputs (1 output per 1 sensor input)
With short circuit protection
Hysteresis mode: Variable (can be set from 0), Window comparator mode: Fixed (3 digits) Note 6)
1 sec. or less
±5% F.S. or less
±3% F.S. or less
±2% F.S. or less (0 to 50°C, 25°C)
For measured value display: 4-digits, 7-segment LED (Orange)
For channel display: 1-digit, 7-segment LED (Red)
IP65 for the front face only, and IP40 for the remaining parts
Operating or Stored: 35 to 85% RH (No condensation)
10 to 500 Hz at whichever is smaller: 1.5mm amplitude or 98 m/s2 acceleration, in X, Y, Z directions for 2 hrs. each (de-energized)
980 m/s2 in X, Y, Z directions 3 times each (de-energized)
Power supply / Output connection: 8P connector, Sensor connection: 4P connector (e-con)
Housing: PBT, Display: PET, Backside rubber: CR
60 g (Except for any accessories that are shipped together)
Note 1) Fixed SI unit [l/min or l] will be set for switch types without the unit switching function. (“-M” is suffixed at the end of part number.) Accumulated flow rate is reset when the power supply turns OFF.
Note 3) If Vcc side on sensor input connector part is short-circuited with the 0 V side, the flow monitor inside will be damaged.
Note 5) The system accuracy when combined with an applicable flow sensor.
122
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 123
For Air
Digital Flow Switch
Series
PF2A
Flow Characteristics (Pressure Loss)
PF2A710/510
PF2A750/550
3.0
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
10
Pressure loss (kPa)
Pressure loss (kPa)
Pressure loss (kPa)
1.0
0 1
PF2A711/511
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
5
7.5
Flow rate (l/min)
0
10
PF2A721/521
6
4
2
0.5
2.5
8
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
Flow rate (l/min)
0
10
25
50
75
Flow rate (l/min)
100
PF2A751/551
50
Pressure loss (kPa)
Pressure loss (kPa)
20
15
10
5
0 20
40
30
20
10
50
100
150
Flow rate (l/min)
200
0
50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
Flow rate (l/min)
Sensors
Sensor Unit Construction
PF2A710/750
PF2A510/550
q w
e r
w t
w e
Component Parts
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Description
Attachment
Seal
Mesh
Body
Sensor
Material
ADC
NBR
Stainless steel
PBT
PBT
Flow direction
PF2A711/721/751
PF2A511/521/551
q
w
e
r
t
y
Component Parts
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Description
Attachment
Seal
Spacer
Mesh
Body
Sensor
Material
ADC
NBR
PBT
Stainless steel
PBT
PBT
Flow direction
123
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 124
PF2A
Dimensions: Integrated Display Type for Air
Internal circuit and wiring example
PF2A710/750
1 2 to 8 are terminal numbers.
98
82
60
67
58
6
17
1.6
Main circuit
FLOW SWITCH
54
44
UP
Brown
1
OUT1
OUT2
Load
4
Black Load
2
White
SET
OUT1
3
OUT2
Blue
DOWN
FOR AIR
PF2A7--27(-M)
2-Port size
4-ø4.5
+ 12 to
– 24 VDC
24
40
50
Main circuit
1
(42.2)
4
Brown
OUT1
Black Load
White
OUT2
2
+ 12 to
Load
– 24 VDC
3
Blue
4
42
PF2A7--67(-M)
2-ø3.4
43
Flow direction
PF2A711/721/751
64
23
116
88
1.6
Connector pin numbers
4
UP
SET
OUT1
OUT2
DOWN
1
FOR AIR
4– ø4.5
2-Port size
40
50
73
(42.2)
Flow direction
124
3
34
54
44
FLOW SWITCH
30
2
Pin no.
Pin description
1
DC (+)
2
OUT2
3
DC (–)
4
OUT1
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 125
For Air
Series
Digital Flow Switch
PF2A
Dimensions: Remote Type Sensor Unit for Air
98
82
60
48.2
B
23
Sensor unit
1.6
Brown
Display unit
(PF2A30/31)
54
44
34
Main circuit
1
NC
2
White
2
4
Black
4
3
6
Main circuit
PF2A510/550
8
Switch
output
+ 12 to
– 24 VDC
Switch
output
+ 12 to
– 24 VDC
7
Blue
3
1
5
PF2A5-
2-Port size
40
50
24
Display unit
(PF2A30/31)
Sensor unit
Brown
2
4
Load
2
White
4
(44.2)
Main circuit
1
Analog
output
3
Black
3
6
Main circuit
4-ø4.5
1
8
7
5
Blue
Load is an analog input equipment such as a voltmeter.
PF2A5--1 (With voltage output type)
Output specifications
A
B
Pulse output only
42
62
52
Brown
72
Main circuit
2-ø3.4
Display unit
(PF2A30/31)
1
4
Pulse output + Analog output
Sensor unit
43
Analog
output
2
White
Flow direction
4
2
4
Load
3
Black
3
1
6
Main circuit
A
(mm)
8
Switch
output
7
+ 12 to
– 24 VDC
5
Blue
B
116
Wiring
23
1.6
Main circuit
Brown (1) DC (+)
34
54
44
76.2
Black (4) OUT (Output for
display unit)
White (2) NC/Analog output
Blue (3) DC (–)
∗ Use this sensor by connecting to SMC remote type
display unit Series PF2A2/3.
4-ø4.5
40
50
2-Port size
30
1
3
4
(44.2)
2
A
(mm)
A
B
Pin no.
Pulse output only
48
62
1
DC (+)
Pulse output + Analog output
58
72
2
NC/Analog output
3
DC (–)
4
OUT
Pin description
Flow direction
125
Sensors
PF2A5--2 (With voltage output type)
PF2A511/521/551
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 126
PF2A
Dimensions: Remote Type Display Unit for Air
PF2A3-A
Panel mounting type
OUT2
40.3
40
Sensor
4.3
NC
4
Black
3
Brown
2
SMC FLOW SWITCH
8
Load
OUT1
Main circuit
41.8
7
Load
6
+
–
Blue
5
40
35.8
1
A
UNIT
RESET
12 to 24 VDC
Series
PF2A5
PF2A30-A
SET
OUT2
Panel fitting dimensions
3 x 7.2 (= 21.6)
8-M3
6.4
36
Black
3
+0.5
0
Brown
2
8
Load
OUT1
Main circuit
Sensor
NC
4
7
Load
6
+
–
Blue
5
1
2
3
12 to 24 VDC
4
Series
PF2A5
5
6
7
PF2A31-A
∗ Do not connect the white wire of the sensor to 3 .
36
19.4
+0.5
0
1
Terminal block number
8
1
View A
5
Analog output
1 to 5 VDC
4
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
6
7
8
4 to 20 mADC
Analog output [V]
20
Analog output [V]
5
1
4
Min. measured
flow rate value
Max. measured
flow rate value
Basic condition
Part no.
PF2A510--1
PF2A550--1
PF2A511--1
PF2A521--1
PF2A551--1
126
2
∗ The applicable panel thickness is 1 to 3.2 mm.
Real-time [l/min]
flow rate
Standard condition
Minimum
Maximum
Minimum
Maximum
measured
measured
measured
measured
flow rate value flow rate value flow rate value flow rate value
1
5
10
20
50
10
50
100
200
500
Min. measured
flow rate value
1.1
5.4
11
21
54
10.7
53.5
107
214
535
Max. measured
flow rate value
Basic condition
Part no.
PF2A510--2
PF2A550--2
PF2A511--2
PF2A521--2
PF2A551--2
Real-time [l/min]
flow rate
Standard condition
Minimum
Maximum
Minimum
Maximum
measured
measured
measured
measured
flow rate value flow rate value flow rate value flow rate value
1
5
10
20
50
10
50
100
200
500
1.1
5.4
11
21
54
10.7
53.5
107
214
535
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 127
For Air
Digital Flow Switch
Series
PF2A
Dimensions: Remote Type Display Unit for Air (4 Channel Flow Monitor)
PF2A200/201
40.1
40
(7.5)
2.5
6
36.8
L/min
L
OUT1
CH
FLOW
SMC
SET
Sensor connector
(option)
Front Protection Cover + Panel Mount
53
9.4
47
(2)
46.4
42.4
Sensors
Panel mounting adapter
Front protection cover
Waterproof seal
Panel
55 or more
+0.1
55 or more
37.5 -0.2
Applicable panel thickness: 0.5 to 8 mm
127
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 128
PF2A
Dimensions: Remote Type Display Unit for Air (4-channel Flow Monitor)
Sensor connector (4P x 4)
Connector (option)
Sensor connector port
r
e
w
q
Power supply /
Output connector port
Pin no.
Terminal
Connector no.
q
DC+
1
Cable wire color
Brown
w
N.C.
2
Not used
e
DC–
3
Blue
r
IN: 1 to 5 V
4
White
Power supply / Output connector (8P)
Power supply / Output connector (accessory)
q w e r t y u i
Pin no.
Terminal
q
DC (+)
w
DC (–)
e
CH1_OUT1
r
N.C.
t
CH2_OUT1
y
CH3_OUT1
u
CH4_OUT1
i
N.C.
Pin no.
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Yellow
Green
Red
Gray
White
Black
Blue
Brown
N.C.
CH4_OUT1
CH3_OUT1
CH2_OUT1
N.C.
CH1_OUT1
DC(–)
DC(+)
2000
128
+
CH1_OUT1
(Black)
–
Load
24 VDC
Load
CH2_OUT1
(Gray)
CH3_OUT1
(Red)
CH4_OUT1
(Green)
DC (–)
(Blue)
Load
4
3
NC 2
1
DC (+)
(Brown)
Load
4
3
NC 2
1
Main circuit
Sensor
Load
Load
Sensor
DC (–)
(Blue)
4
3
NC 2
1
Sensor
CH4_OUT1
(Green)
–
4
3
NC 2
1
Sensor
CH3_OUT1
(Red)
24 VDC
Load
4
3
NC 2
1
CH2_OUT1
(Gray)
+
Load
Sensor
4
3
NC 2
1
CH1_OUT1
(Black)
Main circuit
Sensor
4
3
NC 2
1
PF2A201
DC (+)
(Brown)
4
3
NC 2
1
Sensor
Sensor
PF2A200
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 129
Digital Flow Switch/Large Flow Type
For Air
Series PF2A
How to Order
Integrated
display type
PF2A7
Flow rate range
03
06
12
150 to 3000 l/min
300 to 6000 l/min
600 to 12000 l/min
H
M
Unit specification
High flow type
Port specification
Nil M12 3 m lead wire with connector
Without lead wire
N
Rc
NPT
G
Nil
N
F
Port size
Symbol
Port
size
10
14
20
1
11/2
2
Flow rate (l/min)
3000
6000 12000
Applicable
model
PF2A703H
PF2A706H
PF2A712H
Nil
M
With unit
switching function
Fixed SI unit Note)
Note) Fixed unit:
Accumulated flow: l, m3, m3 x 103
28
29
68
69
NPN open collector 1 output + Analog output (1 to 5 V)
NPN open collector 1 output + Analog output (4 to 20 mA)
PNP open collector 1 output + Analog output (1 to 5 V)
PNP open collector 1 output + Analog output (4 to 20 mA)
Switching of switch output and accumulated pulse output is possible with
NPN or PNP open collector outputs.
Specifications
Switch output Note 4)
Output
specification
Accumulated Note 4)
pulse output
Analog output Note 5)
Resistance
Response time
Hysteresis
Current consumption
Enclosure
Withstand voltage
Impact resistance
Noise resistance
Weight
PF2A703H
150 to 3000 l/min
5 l/min
PF2A706H
PF2A712H
Dry air, Nitrogen
Heater type
300 to 6000 l/min
600 to 12000 l/min
10 l/min
l/min, CFM
l, m3, m3 x 103, ft3, ft3 x 103, ft3 x 106
0.1 to 1.5 MPa
2.25 MPa
20 kPa (at maximum flow rate)
0 to 9,999,999,999 l
±1.5% F.S. or less (0.7 MPa, at 20°C)
±1.0% F.S. or less (0.7 MPa, at 20°C), ±3.0% of F.S. or less in case of analog output
±1.5% F.S. or less (0.1 to 1.5 MPa, based on 0.7 MPa)
±2.0% F.S. or less (0 to 50°C, based on 25°C)
NPN open collector Max. load current: 80 mA; Max. applied voltage: 30 V; Internal voltage drop: 1 V or less (With load current of 80 mA)
PNP open collector Max. load current: 80 mA; Internal voltage drop: 1.5 V or less (With load current of 80 mA)
NPN or PNP open collector
Flow rate per pulse: 100 l/pulse, 10.0 ft3/pulse
Pulse width: 50 msec
Output voltage: 1 to 5 V; Load impedance: 100 kΩ or more
Output current: 4 to 20 mA; Load impedance: 250 Ω or less
1 sec. or less
Hysteresis mode: Variable (can be set from 0); Window comparator mode: (can be set from 0 to 3% F.S.)
24 VDC (Ripple ±10% or less)
150 mA or less
IP65
0 to 50°C (No condensation)
50 MΩ (500 VDC) between external terminal and case
10 to 500 Hz at whichever is smaller: 1.5 mm amplitude or 98 m/s2 acceleration, in X, Y, Z directions for 2 hrs. each
1.1 kg (Without lead wire)
1
11/2
2
Note 2) For digital flow switch with unit switching function. (Fixed SI unit [(l/min, or l, m3 or m3 x 103)] will be set for switch type without the unit switching function.)
Note 3) The high flow rate type is CE marked; however, the linearity with applied noise is ±5% F.S. or less.
Note 4) Switch output and accumulated pulse output selections are made using the button controls.
Note 5) The analog output operates only for real-time flow rate, and does not operate for accumulated flow.
129
Sensors
Model
Measured fluid
Detection type
Flow rate measuring range Note 1)
Minimum setting unit Note 1)
Note 2) Real-time flow rate
Display unit
Accumulated flow
Proof pressure
Pressure loss
Accumulated flow range
Linearity Note 3)
Repeatability
Pressure characteristics
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 130
PF2A
PF2A703H
PF2A706H
20
10
600
1200
1800 2400
Flow rate (l/min)
3000
20
Pressure loss (kPa)
Pressure loss (kPa)
Pressure loss (kPa)
20
0 150
PF2A712H
10
0 300 1200
2400 3600 4800
Flow rate (l/min)
6000
10
0 600 2400
4800 7200 9600 12000
Flow rate (l/min)
Construction
q w
e
y
r
t
Component Parts
Flow direction
130
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Description
Attachment
Seal
Mesh
Body
Sensor
Spacer
Material
Aluminum alloy
HNBR
Stainless steel
Aluminum alloy
PPS
PBT
Note
Anodized
—
—
Anodized
—
—
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 131
For Air
Digital Flow Switch
Series
PF2A
Dimensions
PFA703H/706H/712H
D
E
B
1 to 4 are terminal numbers.
F
1
A
Main circuit
Load
4
2
U P SET MODE DOWN
3
C
60
2-G
ON
OFF
OUT1
Black
Analog output
White
50 msec
+
– 24 VDC
Load
Blue
Load is an analog input equipment such as a voltmeter, ammeter.
28
PF2A7H-- 29 (-M)
(42.2)
4
3
1
Main circuit
1
2
4-I thread with depth J
Accumulated
pulse output
Brown
4
OUT1
Black
2
Analog output
White Load
3
Pin no.
40
Accumulated
pulse output
Brown
ON
OFF
Load
50 msec
+
– 24 VDC
Blue
Pin description
Load is an analog input equipment such as a voltmeter, ammeter.
1
DC (+)
2
Analog output
68
PF2A7H-- 69 (-M)
3
DC (–)
4
OUT1
wiring examples
Max. 30 V
80 mA or less
H
OUT1
Load
Black
0V
Blue
or
50 msec
50 msec
A
Model
PF2A703H
PF2A706H
PF2A712H
B
C
E
F
G
92 67
55
Rc 1, NPT 1, G 1
65 180 45 104 79
65
75 220 55 114 89
75
55 160 40
D
H
I
J
36 M5 x 0.8
8
Brown
Rc 11/2, NPT 11/2, G 11/2
46
M6 x 1
9
Rc 2, NPT 2, G 2
56
M6 x 1
9
OUT1
Load
Black
80 mA
0V
or
50 msec
50 msec
PF2A7H-- 68
69 (-M)
Analog output
1 to 5 VDC
4 to 20 mADC
20
Analog output [V]
Analog output [V]
5
1
4
Min. measured
flow rate value
Part no.
PF2A703H--28
PF2A703H--68
PF2A706H--28
PF2A706H--68
PF2A712H--28
PF2A712H--68
Max. measured
flow rate value
Real-time [l/min]
flow rate
Minimum measured
flow rate value [l/min]
Maximum measured
150
3000
300
6000
600
12000
Min. measured
flow rate value
Part no.
PF2A703H--29
PF2A703H--69
PF2A706H--29
PF2A706H--69
PF2A712H--29
PF2A712H--69
Max. measured
flow rate value
Real-time [l/min]
flow rate
Minimum measured
Maximum measured
150
3000
300
6000
600
12000
131
Sensors
28
PF2A7H-- 29 (-M)
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 132
Digital Flow Switch
For Water
Series PF2W
How to Order
Integrated
display type
PF2W7 20
Flow rate range
04 0.5 to 4 l/min
20 2 to 16 l/min
40 5 to 40 l/min
11 10 to 100 l/min
Symbol
Port
size
03
04
06
10
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
03
27
M
Thread type
Nil
N
F
Flow rate (l/min)
4 16 40 100
Unit specification
Rc
NPT
G
Port size
Nil
N
Applicable model
PF2W704, PF2W720
PF2W720, PF2W740
PF2W740, PF2W711
PF2W711
Without lead wire
Nil
M
With unit
switching function
Fixed SI unit Note)
Note) Fixed unit:
Accumulated flow: l
27 NPN open collector 2 outputs
67 PNP open collector 2 outputs
Specifications
Model
Measured fluid
Set flow rate range
Minimum set unit
Note 5)
Output
specification
Switch output
Resistance
Indicator light
Response time
Hysteresis
Enclosure
Withstand voltage
Impact resistance
Noise resistance
PF2W720
PF2W740
PF2W711
Water
1.7 to 17.0 l/min
3.5 to 45 l/min
7 to 110 l/min
1.7 to 17.0 l/min
3.5 to 45 l/min
7 to 110 l/min
2 to 16 l/min
5 to 40 l/min
10 to 100 l/min
0.1 l/min
0.5 l/min
1 l/min
0.1 l/pulse
0.5 l/pulse
1 l/pulse
0 to 50°C
±5% F.S. or less
±3% F.S. or less
±3% F.S. or less
±2% F.S. or less
±5% F.S. or less (0° to 50°C, based on 25°C)
70 mA or less
80 mA or less
520 g
460 g
700 g
1150 g
3/8, 1/2
3/8
1/2, 3/4
3/4, 1
Karman vortex
l/min, gal (US)/min
l, gal (US)
0 to 1 MPa
1.5 MPa
0 to 999999 l
0.35 to 4.5 l/min
0.35 to 4.5 l/min
0.5 to 4 l/min
0.05 l/min
0.05 l/pulse
Maximum load current: 80 mA; Internal voltage drop: 1 V or less (With load current of 80 mA)
NPN open collector Maximum applied voltage: 30 V; 2 outputs
Internal voltage drop: 1.5 V or less (With load current of 80 mA); 2 outputs
1 sec. or less
Hysteresis mode: Variable (can be set from 0), Window comparator mode: 3-digit fixed Note 6)
IP65
0 to 50°C
10 to 500 Hz at whichever is smaller: 1.5 mm amplitude or 98 m/s2 acceleration in X, Y, Z directions for 2 hrs. each
PNP open collector
Note 1) In the case of PF2W711, ±3% of F.S. or less (15°C to 35°C, based on 25°C). Note 2) Without lead wire.
Note 3) For digital flow switch with unit switching function. (Fixed SI unit [l/min or l] will be set for switch type without the unit switching function.)
Note 4) Accumulated flow rate is reset when the power supply turns OFF. Note 5) Switch output and accumulated pulse output can be selected during initial setting.
be P_3, 4.)
132
Sensors Measuring
Instruments
Linearity
Repeatability
Temperature characteristics Note 1)
Weight Note 2)
Detection type
Display
Note 3)
Real-time flow rate
Display unit
Accumulated flow
Proof pressure
Ambient temperature range
PF2W704
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 133
For Water
Digital Flow Switch
PF2W
Series
How to Order
Remote type
Sensor unit
PF2W5 20
C
03
Flow rate range
04 0.5 to 4 l/min
20 2 to 16 l/min
40 5 to 40 l/min
11 10 to 100 l/min
Nil
C
Thread type
unassembled.
Rc
NPT
G
Nil
N
F
None
Port size
Port
Symbol
size
03
04
06
10
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
Flow rate (l/min)
4 16 40 100
Nil
N
Applicable model
PF2W504, PF2W520
PF2W520, PF2W540
PF2W540, PF2W511
PF2W511
Without lead wire
Symbol
Nil
1
2
Specification
Output for display unit (sensor output) only
Series PF2W300
Output for display unit + Analog output (1 to 5V)
Series PF2W200/300
Output for display unit + Analog output (4 to 20 mA)
Series PF2W300
Specifications
Model
PF2W504
PF2W520
Measured fluid
Detection type
5 to 40 l/min
10 to 100 l/min
Karman vortex
0.5 to 4 l/min
2 to 16 l/min
Withstand pressure
0 to 1 MPa
1.5 MPa
0 to 50°C
Linearity Note 1)
Repeatability
PF2W511
Note 1)
0 to 50°C
±5% F.S. or less
±3% F.S. or less
±3% F.S. or less
±1% F.S. or less (connected with PF2W33)
±3% F.S. or less (connected with PF2W2)
±2% F.S. or less (15 to 35°C based on 25°C), ±3% F.S. or less (0 to 50°C based on 25°C)
Output for
display unit
Pulse output, N channel, open drain, output for display unit PF2W3.
(Specifications: Maximum load current of 10mA; Maximum applied voltage of 30 V)
Output Note 2)
specification
Analog output
20 mA or less
Resistance
Enclosure
IP65
Withstand voltage
Impact resistance
490 m/s in X, Y, Z directions 3 times each
Noise resistance
Weight Note 3)
4.9 m/s2
2
410 g
470 g
650 g
1,100 g
3/8
3/8, 1/2
1/2, 3/4
3/4, 1
Note 1) The system accuracy when combined with PF2W2/3.
Note 4) The sensor unitis comformed to CE mark.
133
Sensors
PF2W540
Water
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 134
PF2W
Series
How to Order
Remote type
Display unit
PF2W3 0 0
A
M
Unit specification
Flow rate range
Symbol Flow rate range Type for sensor unit
0.5 to 4 l/min
2 to 16 l/min
5 to 40 l/min
10 to 100 l/mim
0
3
PF2W504
PF2W520
PF2W540
PF2W511
Panel mounting
A
Fixed SI unit Note)
Note) Fixed unit:
Accumulated flow: l
Panel mount adapter part no.
0
1
Nil
M
Mounting
Panel adapter B
ZS-22-02
Description
Part no.
Specifications
PF2W300/301
Model
PF2W330/331
0.35 to 4.5 l/min
1.7 to 17.0 l/min
3.5 to 45 l/min
7 to 110 l/min
0.35 to 4.5 l/min
1.7 to 17.0 l/min
3.5 to 45 l/min
7 to 110 l/min
0.05 l/min
0.1 l/min
0.5 l/min
1 l/min
0.05 l/pulse
0.1 l/pulse
0.5 l/pulse
1 l/pulse
Minimum setting unit Note 1)
value (Pulse width: 50 ms) Note 1)
Note 2)
Display unit
Real-time flow rate
l/min, gal (US)/min
Accumulated flow
l, gal (US)
0 to 999999 l
Linearity Note 4)
±5% F.S. or less
±3% F.S. or less
±3% F.S. or less
±1% F.S. or less
±2% F.S. or less (0 to 50°C, based on 25°C), ±1% F.S. or less (15 to 35°C, based on 25°C)
Output Note 5)
specification
Resistance
45 g
NPN open collector (PF2W300, PF2W330)
2 outputs
PNP open collector (PF2W301, PF2W331)
Internal voltage drop: 1.5 V or less (With load current of 80 mA)
2 outputs
Switch output
Enclosure
Withstand voltage
60 mA or less
50 mA or less
Weight
NPN or PNP open collector (Same as switch output)
IP40
Impact resistance
Noise resistance
Display
Indicator light
Response time
Hysteresis
1 sec. or less
Hysteresis mode: Variable (can be set from 0) Window comparator mode: 3-digit fixed Note 6)
Note 1) Values vary depending on each set flow rate range.
Note 2) For digital flow switch with unit switching function. (Fixed SI unit [l/min or l] will be set for switch types without the unit switching function.)
Note 4) The system accuracy when combined with PF2W5.
Note 6) Window comparator mode — Since hysteresis (H) will reach 3 digits, keep P_1 and P_2 or n_1 and n_2 apart by 7 digits or more. (In case of output OUT2, n_1, 2 to be n_3, 4 and P_1, 2
to be P_3, 4.)
134
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 135
For Water
Digital Flow Switch
Series
PF2W
How to Order
4-channel Flow Monitor
Remote type
Display unit
PF2W20
M
Accessory / Power supply output cable (2 m)
0
1
NPN 4 outputs
PNP 4 outputs
None
Sensor connector (4 pc.)
Nil
4C
Unit specification
Nil
M
Fixed SI unit Note)
None
Panel mounting
Front protective cover + Panel mounting
Nil
A
B
Note) Fixed unit:
Accumulated flow: l
Connectable remote type sensor part is PF2W5--1 (with analog output 1 to 5 V).
Specifications
Model
Applicable flow rate sensor
PF2W200/201
PF2W520/520T--1
PF2W540/540T--1
PF2W511--1
0.35 to 4.50 l/min
1.7 to 17.0 l/min
3.5 to 45.0 l/min
7 to 110 l/min
Note 1)
Real-time flow rate
Display unit
Accumulated flow
Current consumption
Power supply voltage for sensor
Power supply current for sensor Note 3)
Sensor input
No. of inputs
Input protection
0.35 to 4.50 l/min
1.7 to 17.0 l/min
3.5 to 45.0 l/min
7 to 110 l/min
0.05 l/min
0.1 l/min
0.5 l/min
1 l/min
0.05 l/pulse
0.1 l/pulse
0.5 l/pulse
1 l/pulse
Switch output
(Real-time switch output,
Accumulated switch
output)
No. of outputs
Output protection
Hysteresis
Linearity Note 4)
Display method
Resistance
Indicator light
Enclosure
Impact resistance
Noise resistance
Connection
Material
Weight
l/min, gal (US)/min
l, gal (US)
0 to 999999 l, 0 to 999999 gal (US)
55 mA or less (Not including the current consumption of the sensor)
Same as [Power supply voltage]
Max. 110 mA (However, the total current for the 4 inputs is 440 mA maximum or less.)
Sensors
Output Note 3)
specification
PF2W504/504T--1
1 to 5 VDC (Input impedance: Approx: 800 kΩ)
4 inputs
NPN open collector (PF2W200)
PNP open collector (PF2W201)
Excess voltage protection
4 outputs (1 output per 1 sensor input)
Hysteresis mode: Variable (can be set from 0), Window comparator mode: Fixed (3 digits)
1 sec. or less
±5% F.S. or less
±3% F.S. or less
±2% F.S. or less (0 to 50°C, 25°C)
For measured value display: 4-digits, 7-segment LED (Orange)
For channel display: 1-digit, 7-segment LED (Red)
Illuminates when output is ON. OUT1: Green
IP65 for the front face only, and IP40 for the remaining parts
Operating or Stored: 35 to 85% RH (No condensation)
10 to 500 Hz at whichever is smaller: 1.5mm amplitude or 98 m/s2 acceleration, in X, Y, Z directions for 2 hrs. each (de-energized)
980 m/s2 in X, Y, Z directions 3 times each (de-energized)
Power supply / Output connection: 8P connector, Sensor connection: 4P connector (e-con)
Housing: PBT, Display: PET, Backside rubber: CR
60 g (Except for any accessories that are shipped together)
Note 1) Fixed SI unit [l/min or l] will be set for switch types without the unit switching function. (“-M” is suffixed at the end of part number.) Accumulated flow rate is reset when the power supply turns OFF.
Note 2) If Vcc side on sensor input connector part is short-circuited with 0 V side, the flow monitor inside will be damaged.
Note 4)The system accuracy when combined with applicable flow sensor.
135
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 136
PF2W
PF2W704/504
PF2W720/520
0.030
0.05
0.020
0.015
0.010
0.07
0.04
Pressure loss (MPa)
Pressure loss (MPa)
Pressure loss (MPa)
0.025
0.03
0.02
0.06
0.05
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.01
0.005
0
PF2W740/540
0.01
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0
Flow rate (l/min)
0
2
4
6
8 10 12
Flow rate (l/min)
14
16
0
5
10
15 20 25 30
Flow rate (l/min)
35
PF2W711/511
0.035
Pressure loss (MPa)
0.030
0.025
0.020
0.015
0.010
0.005
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100110
Flow rate (l/min)
q
w
e
w
r
Component Parts
No.
1
2
3
4
Flow direction
136
Description
Attachment
Seal
Body
Sensor
Material
Stainless steel
NBR
PPS
PPS
40
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 137
For Water
Digital Flow Switch
Series
PF2W
Dimensions: Integrated Display Type for Water
PF2W704/720
67
58
L
6
1.6
17
60
Main circuit
1
FLOW SWITCH
34
54
44
UP
SET
OUT1
OUT1
Brown
Load
4
Black
OUT2
2
OUT2
DOWN
3
FOR WATER
Load
White
Blue
+
–
12 to
24 VDC
PF2W7--27(-M): NPN type
4-ø4.5
2-Port size
40
50
1
(42.2)
Brown
Main circuit
OUT1
4
Black Load
White
OUT2 +
2
Load
3
73
Blue
–
12 to
24 VDC
4
42
PF2W7--67(-M): PNP type
2-ø3.4
4
3
1
2
43
Flow direction
Model
L dimension
PF2W704
100
PF2W720
106
120
60
67
6
17
1.6
Pin description
1
DC (+)
2
OUT2
3
DC (–)
4
OUT1
Sensors
PF2W740
Pin no.
FLOW SWITCH
OUT1
34
34
55
60
50
UP
SET
OUT2
DOWN
FOR WATER
4-ø4.5
2-Port size
40
50
34
34
73
(42.2)
Flow direction
137
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 138
PF2W
PF2W711
148
80
77
79
32
UP
SET
OUT1 OUT2
4-ø5.5
DOWN
2-Port size
36
60
88
46
Flow direction
138
45
46
58
70
FLOW SWITCH
(42.2)
45
9 2
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 139
For Water
Digital Flow Switch
Series
PF2W
Dimensions: Remote Type Sensor Unit for Water
PF2W504/520-(N)-
B
L
60
48.2
23
1.6
Sensor unit
Brown
NC
Display unit
(PF2W30/31)
2
White
2
4
Black
4
3
6
Main circuit
54
44
34
Main circuit
1
8
12 to 24 VDC
Switch
output
7
+
–
Blue
3
4-ø4.5
40
50
2-Port size
1
5
PF2W5-
6
Display unit
(PF2W30/31)
Sensor unit
Brown
2
Analog
output
Load
2
White
4
Black
3
4
3
6
Main circuit
(44.2)
Main circuit
1
1
8
12 to 24 VDC
Switch
output
7
+
–
5
A
Blue
A
B
Output for display
unit only
42
62
Output for display unit +
Analog output
52
72
PF2W5--1 (With voltage output type)
4
43
Sensor unit
Brown
1
Model L dimension
PF2W504
100
PF2W520
106
2
Analog
output
Load
2
White
4
Black
3
4
3
6
1
8
12 to 24 VDC
Switch
output
7
+
–
5
Blue
PF2W5--2 (With voltage output type)
PF2W540-(N)-
B
120
60
48.2
23
1.6
Wiring
Main circuit
34
55
60
50
Brown (1) DC (+)
display unit)
Blue (3) DC (–)
4-ø4.5
40
50
2-Port size
6
display unit Series PF2W2/3.
(44.2)
Flow direction
A
B
Output for display
unit only
42
62
Analog output
52
72
2
1
3
4
Pin no.
Pin description
1
DC (+)
2
NC/Analog output
3
DC (–)
4
OUT
139
Sensors
Main circuit
Flow direction
Display unit
(PF2W30/31)
Main circuit
2-ø3.4
A
ECOPS.qxd
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 140
PF2W
PF2W511-(N)-
B
148
80
45
70
58
46
32
36
2-Port size
2
45
(44.2)
4-ø5.5
A
B
Output for display
unit only
63
77
Analog output
73
87
A
Flow direction
Analog output
1 to 5 VDC
4 to 20 mADC
Analog output [V]
20
Analog output [V]
5
1
4
0
0
Min. measured
flow rate value
Part no.
PF2W504--1
PF2W520--1
PF2W540--1
PF2W511--1
140
Max. measured
flow rate value
Real-time [l/min]
flow rate
Minimum measured Maximum measured
flow rate value [l/min] flow rate value [l/min]
0.5
2
4
16
5
40
10
100
Min. measured
flow rate value
Part no.
PF2W504--2
PF2W520--2
PF2W540--2
PF2W511--2
Max. measured
flow rate value
Real-time [l/min]
flow rate
0.5
2
4
16
5
40
10
100
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 141
For Water
Series
Digital Flow Switch
PF2W
Dimensions: Remote Type Display Unit for Water
PF2W3-A
Panel mounting type
OUT2
Sensor
40.3
4.3
Black
3
Brown
2
SMC FLOW SWITCH
8
7
35.8
40
UNIT
6
12 to 24 VDC
Series
PF2W5
SET
PF2W30-A
8-M3
36 +0.5
0
OUT2
Sensor
3
4
NC
4
Black
2
36
19.4
+0.5
0
3
Brown
8
7
6
Blue
5
1
5
6
7
Load
+
–
12 to 24 VDC
8
Series
PF2W5
View A
Load
OUT1
Main circuit
6.4
2
+
–
5
A
RESET
1
Load
Blue
1
3 x 7.2 (= 21.6)
Load
OUT1
Main circuit
41.8
40
NC
4
∗ The applicable panel thickness is 1 to 3.2 mm.
PF2W31-A
∗ Do not connect the white wire of the sensor to 3 .
Sensors
Terminal block number
1
5
2
4
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
6
7
8
141
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 142
PF2W
Dimensions: Remote Type Display Unit for Water (4-channel Flow Monitor)
PF2W200/201
40.1
40
(7.5)
2.5
6
36.8
L/min
L
OUT1
CH
FLOW
SMC
SET
Sensor connector
(option)
Front Protection Cover + Panel Mount
53
9.4
47
(2)
46.4
42.4
Waterproof seal
55 or more
+0.1
55 or more
37.5 -0.2
Applicable panel thickness: 0.5 to 8 mm
142
Panel
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 143
For Water
Digital Flow Switch
Series
PF2W
Dimensions: Remote Type Display Unit for Water (4-channel Flow Monitor)
Sensor connector (4P x 4)
Connector (option)
Sensor connector port
r
e
w
q
Power supply /
Output connector port
Pin no.
Terminal
Connector no.
q
DC+
1
Cable wire color
Brown
w
N.C.
2
Not used
e
DC–
3
Blue
r
IN: 1 to 5 V
4
White
Power supply / Output connector (8P)
Power supply / Output connector (accessory)
q w e r t y u i
Pin no.
Terminal
q
DC (+)
w
DC (–)
e
CH1_OUT1
r
N.C.
t
CH2_OUT1
y
CH3_OUT1
u
CH4_OUT1
i
N.C.
Pin no.
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Yellow
Green
Red
Gray
White
Black
Blue
Brown
N.C.
CH4_OUT1
CH3_OUT1
CH2_OUT1
N.C.
CH1_OUT1
DC(–)
DC(+)
2000
Sensors
Internal circuits and wiring example
DC (–)
(Blue)
4
3
NC 2
1
CH1_OUT1
(Black)
–
Load
24 VDC
CH2_OUT1
(Gray)
Load
4
3
NC 2
1
+
CH3_OUT1
(Red)
CH4_OUT1
(Green)
DC (–)
(Blue)
Load
Load
Load
4
3
NC 2
1
DC (+)
(Brown)
Load
CH4_OUT1
(Green)
–
4
3
NC 2
1
Main circuit
CH3_OUT1
(Red)
24 VDC
Load
4
3
NC 2
1
CH2_OUT1
(Gray)
+
Load
Sensor
4
3
NC 2
1
CH1_OUT1
(Black)
Main circuit
Sensor
4
3
NC 2
1
PF2W201
DC (+)
(Brown)
4
3
NC 2
1
Sensor
Sensor
PF2W200
143
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 144
Digital Flow Switch/High Temperature Fluid Type
For Water
Series PF2A
How to Order
Integrated
display type
PF2W7 20 T
03
27
Flow rate range
04 0.5 to 4 l/min
20 2 to 16 l/min
40 5 to 40 l/min
Temperature range
T
Thread type
Nil
N
F
Rc
NPT
G
Unit specification
0 to 90°C
Port size
Flow rate (l/min)
Symbol Port
Applicable model
size 4 16 40
03 3/8 PF2W704T, PF2W720T
04 1/2
PF2W720T, PF2W740T
06 3/4
PF2W740T
Nil
N
Without lead wire
Nil
M
With unit
switching function
Fixed SI unit Note 2)
Note) Fixed unit:
Accumulated flow: l
27 PNP open collector 2 outputs
67 NPN open collector 2 outputs
Specifications
Model
Measured fluid
Set flow rate range
Minimum setting unit
PF2W704T
PF2W720T
PF2W740T
Output Note 5)
specification
Water, Mixture of water (50%) and ethylene glycol (50%)
1.7 to 17.0 l/min
3.5 to 45 l/min
0.35 to 4.5 l/min
1.7 to 17.0 l/min
3.5 to 45 l/min
0.35 to 4.5 l/min
2 to 16 l/min
5 to 40 l/min
0.5 to 4 l/min
0.1 l/min
0.5 l/min
0.05 l/min
0.1 l/pulse
0.5 l/pulse
0.05 l/pulse
0 to 90°C (With no cavitation)
Linearity
±5% F.S. or less
Repeatability
±3% F.S. or less
Temperature characteristics Note 1)
70 mA or less
Weight Note 2)
710 g
3/8
1/2, 3/4
3/8, 1/2
Detection type
Karman vortex
Display
Note 3) Real-time flow rate
l/min, gal (US)/min
Display unit
l, gal (US)
Accumulated flow
0 to 1 MPa
Withstand pressure
1.5 MPa
0 to 999999 l
Maximum load current: 80 mA; Internal voltage drop:
NPN open collector 1 V or less (With load current of 80 mA) Maximum applied voltage: 30 V; 2 outputs
Switch output
Resistance
Indicator light
Response time
Hysteresis
Enclosure
Withstand voltage
Impact resistance
Noise resistance
PNP open collector Maximum load current: 80 mA; Internal voltage drop:
1.5 V or less (With load current of 80 mA); 2 outputs
NPN or PNP open collector (Same as switch output)
1 sec. or less
Hysteresis mode: Variable (can be set from 0); Window comparator mode: 3-digit fixed Note 6)
IP65
Note 1) ±5% F.S. or less (0 to 50°C, based on 25°C), ±3% F.S. or less (15 to 35°C, based on 25°C) Note 2) Without lead wire.
Note 3) For digital flow switch with unit switching function. (Fixed SI unit [l/min or l] will be set for switch type without the unit switching function.)
be P_3, 4.)
144
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 145
For Water
Digital Flow Switch
Series
PF2W
How to Order
Remote type
Display unit
PF2W5 20 T
C
03
Flow rate range
04 0.5 to 4 l/min
20 2 to 16 l/min Temperature range
40 5 to 40 l/min
0 to 90°C
T
Nil
Thread type
C
Rc
NPT
G
Nil
N
F
unassembled.
Port size
Symbol
03
04
06
Port Flow rate (l/min)
Applicable model
size 4 16 40
3/8 PF2W504T/520T
1/2
PF2W520T/540T
3/4
PF2W540T
Model
Nil
N
Specification
Series PF2W300
Series PF2W200/300
Output for display unit + Analog output (1 to 5 V)
Series PF2W300
Output for display unit + Analog output (4 to 20 mA)
PF2W520T
PF2W504T
Measured fluid
Karman vortex
0.5 to 4 l/min
2 to 16 l/min
Withstand pressure
1.5 MPa
0 to 90°C (With no cavitation)
±2% F.S. or less
Output Note 2)
specification
±2% F.S. or less (15 to 35°C based on 25°C), ±3% F.S. or less (0 to 50°C based on 25°C)
Pulse output, N channel, open drain, output for display unit PF2W3.
(Specifications: Maximum load current of 10 mA; Maximum applied voltage of 30 V)
Analog output
20 mA or less
Enclosure
Resistance
Sensors
±5% F.S. or less
Linearity Note 1)
5 to 40 l/min
0 to 1 MPa
PF2W540T
Water, Mixture of water (50%) and ethylene glycol (50%)
Detection type
Without lead wire
Symbol
Nil
1
2
Specifications
None
IP65
Withstand voltage
Impact resistance
Noise resistance
Weight Note 3)
660 g
3/8
3/8, 1/2
1/2, 3/4
Note 1) The system accuracy when combined with PF2W3/3.
Note 4) The sensor unitis comformed to CE mark.
Display units are the same as those of remote type digital flow switch for water (series PF2W3/
PF2W20). Refer to page 134, 135 for details.
145
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 146
PF2W
PF2W704T/504T
PF2W720T/520T
0.05
0.020
0.015
0.010
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.06
0.05
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.01
0.005
0
0.07
Pressure loss (MPa)
0.025
Pressure loss (MPa)
Pressure loss (MPa)
0.030
PF2W740T/540T
0.01
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0
Flow rate (l/min)
0
2
4
6
8 10 12
Flow rate (l/min)
14
16
0
5
10
15 20 25 30
Flow rate (l/min)
35
q w
e w r
Component Parts
No.
1
2
3
4
Flow direction
146
Description
Attachment
Seal
Body
Sensor
Material
Stainless steel
FKM
PPS
PPS
40
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 147
For Water
Digital Flow Switch
Series
PF2W
PF2W704T/720T/740T
74
120
23
1.6
FLOW SWITCH
UP
OUT1
Load
4
2
Load
White
3
+ 12 to
– 24 VDC
Blue
DOWN
PF2W7T--27(-M)
FOR WATER
1
2-Port size
40
50
(42.2)
34
Brown
OUT1
4
Black Load
White
OUT2
2
+ 12 to
Load
– 24 VDC
3
Blue
Main circuit
4-ø4.5
Brown
Black
OUT2
34
60
50
SET
OUT1 OUT2
1
Main circuit
60
PF2W7T--67-M)
3
1
2
34
77
4
Flow direction
Pin no.
Pin description
1
DC (+)
OUT2
3
DC (–)
4
OUT1
Sensors
2
147
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 148
PF2W
B
23
1.6
120
60
Sensor unit
Brown
Display unit
(PF2W30/31)
Main circuit
34
60
50
1
2
NC
2
White
4
Black
4
3
6
Main circuit
PF2W504T/520T/540T-(N)
8
12 to 24 VDC
Switch
output
7
+
–
Blue
3
1
5
PF2W5T-
4-ø4.5
34
2-Port size
40
50
Display unit
(PF2W30/31)
Sensor unit
Brown
Analog
output
2
White
4
2
4
Load
3
Black
3
6
Main circuit
(44.2)
Main circuit
1
1
8
12 to 24 VDC
Switch
output
7
+
–
5
Blue
A
B
Output for display
unit only
52
72
Analog output
62
Sensor unit
Brown
82
Display unit
(PF2W30/31)
1
Flow direction
Analog
output
2
White
4
2
Load
Black
3
4
3
6
Main circuit
Main circuit
A
PF2W5T--1 (With voltage output type)
1
8
7
12 to 24 VDC
Switch
output
+
–
5
Blue
Analog output
1 to 5 VDC
4 to 20 mADC
PF2W5T--2 (With voltage output type)
Wiring
20
Analog output [V]
Analog output [V]
5
Main circuit
Brown (1) DC (+)
1
4
0
0
display unit)
Blue (3) DC (–)
Min. measured
flow rate value
Part no.
PF2W504T--1
PF2W520T--1
PF2W540T--1
Max. measured
flow rate value
Real-time [l/min] Min. measured
flow rate
flow rate value
0.5
4
2
16
5
40
Part no.
PF2W504T--2
PF2W520T--2
PF2W540T--2
Max. measured
flow rate value
Real-time [l/min]
flow rate
0.5
4
2
16
5
40
display unit Series PF2W3.
4
3
1
2
Pin no.
148
Pin description
1
DC (+)
2
NC/Analog output
3
DC (–)
4
OUT
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 149
For Air/Water
Digital Flow Switch
Series
PF2A/PF2W
Operating Unit Description
Integrated Display Type
Remote Type Display Unit
PF2A710/750/711/721/751
PF2W704(T)/720(T)/740(T)/711
PF2A300/301/310/311
PF2W300/301/330/331
q
q
w
t
w
SMC FLOW SWITCH
r
UP
e
SET
e
OUT1
y
OUT2
SET
DOWN
u
t
u
r
UNIT
RESET
y
RESET button ( + button)
If the UP and DOWN buttons are pressed simultaneously, the RESET function will activate.
In case of an emergency, please clear the display. The display of the accumulated flow will be
reset to zero.
q LED display/Red
Displays the measured flow rate, each setting condition, and error code.
Indicator
w (PF2A7, PF2A3 for
air only)
Illuminates when the normal condition (nor) is selected.
e
r
t
y
u
Output (OUT1) display/Green Displays the output condition of OUT1. Illuminates when turned ON.
Output (OUT2) display/Red
Displays the output condition of OUT2. Illuminates when turned ON.
UP button ( button)
Use to change the mode or to increase the set value.
SET button ( button)
Use this button to set the valve or the set mode.
DOWN button ( button)
Use to change the mode or decrease the set value.
Integrated Display Type
q
r
e
i
w
q LCD display/Orange
w Output (OUT1) display/Orange Displays the output condition of OUT1. Illuminates when turned ON.
e Unit display/Orange
t
u
UP
S E T MODE DOWN
y
Flow rate confirmation
Displays the selected unit. Type without unit switching function is
fixed SI units (l/min, or l, m3, m3 x 103).
r display/Orange
The blinking intervals change depending on the flow rate value.
t
y
u
i
UP button ( button)
SET button ( button)
Use to select the function.
MODE button ( button)
Use for changing the function.
4-channel Flow Monitor (Remote Type Display Unit)
PF2A200/201
PF2W200/201
q
w
e
r
q LCD display/Orange
w Switch output display/Red
L/min
L
t
OUT1
CH
y
SET
u
i
Displays the output condition of OUT1 (CH1 to 4). Illuminates when turned ON.
Unit display of flow rate for air/ CH1 to 4 will illuminate when the normal condition (nor) is
e Red (PF2A200, 201 for air only) selected.
r Unit display/Orange
t
y
u
i
Illuminates the selected unit. Use after putting the unit label other
than l/min, l.
Channel display/Red
Displays the selected channel.
UP button ( button)
SET button
Use this button to set the value or the set mode.
149
Sensors
RESET button ( + button)
If the UP and DOWN buttons are pressed simultaneously, the RESET function will activate.
In case of an emergency, please clear the display. The display of the accumulated flow will be
reset to zero.
PF2A703H/706H/712H
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 150
PF2A/PF2W
Series
Functions
Refer to the operation manual how to set and to operate.
Flow rate measurement selection
Real-time flow rate and accumulated flow rate can be selected.
Up to 999999 of flow rate value can be accumulated.
The accumulated flow rate is reset when the power supply
turns OFF. (PF2A7H maintains the values.)
Output type
Real-time switch output, accumulated switch output,
or accumulated pulse output can be selected as an
output type.
Real-time switch output
• Hysteresis mode
Unit switching
ON
YES
For Air
Display
OFF
Real-time flow rate
P-2 P-1
High flow rate →
Accumulated flow
l/min
l
CFM x 10–2, CFM x 10–1
ft3 x 10–1
“P”
• Window comparator mode
H: Hysteresis
H
H
ON
CFM = ft3/min
High Flow Rate Type (For Air)
Display
Real-time flow rate
NO
l/min
l
CFM
gal (US)
OUT1
Output
mode
ON
YES
High Temperature Fluid Type (For Water)
Real-time flow rate
Accumulated flow
l/min
l
GPM
P-1
P-2
High flow rate →
• Hysteresis mode
∗ OUT2 is the same.
Display
OFF
Accumulated flow
OFF
n-2 n-1
High flow rate →
H: Hysteresis
H
H
ON
“n”
gal (US)
Note 2) Output mode is set
to inverted output
at the factory
before shipment.
GPM = gal (US)/min
Note) Fixed SI unit [l/min or l, m3 or m3 x 10] will be set
for the type without the unit switching function.
NO
OFF
n-1
n-2
High flow rate →
Flow rate conversion
Basic state: 0°C, 101.3 kPa
Standard state: 20°C, 101.3 kPa, 65%RH (ANR)
Switchable between these states.
Accumulated switch output
ON
“P”
Flow rate measuring unit confirmation
OFF
This function allows to confirm the accumulated flow rate
when real-time flow rate is selected and to confirm the
real-time flow rate when accumulated flow rate is selected.
OUT1
P-3
High flow rate →
Output
mode
Key lock
This function prevents incorrect operations such as
changing the set value accidentally.
ON
“n”
Accumulation clearance
This is to clear the accumulated value.
OFF
Note 2)
n-3
High flow rate →
Note 2) Output mode is set to inverted output at the
factory before shipment.
Initialization of setting (Only for series PF2A7H)
This is to restore the setting to the initial state when
dispatched from the factory.
“P”
ON
OFF
OUT1
Output
mode
50 msec
ON
“n”
OFF
Note 2)
Note 1) For digital flow switch with unit switching function. (Fixed SI unit [l/min or l, m3 or m3
x 103] will be set for switch types without unit switching function.)
Refer to the specifications of display unit for the flow rate value per pulse.
150
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 151
For Air/Water
Digital Flow Switch
Functions
Series
PF2A/PF2W
Refer to the operation manual how to set and to operate.
Copy function (PF2200, 201 only)
Channel select function (PF2200, 201 only)
Information to be copied is:
q Flow rate range
w Display mode
e Display unit (Only available when the unit specification
is nil.)
r Output method
t Output mode
y Flow rate display unit (available with PF2A20 only)
u Flow rate value
Every pushing the button, channel selection
“12341...” is available. The flow rate measurement of each selected channel is shown in the display
unit.
Channel scan function (PF2200, 201 only)
Changes displaying the channel shown every about 2
seconds and its detected flow rate.
Peak hold, Bottom hold display function
(PF2200, 201 only)
The maximum or minimum value can be held in the case
where the real-time flow rate display mode is selected
during the initial setting.
Error correction
LED display
Contents
Solution
Note 1) A current of more than
80 mA is flowing to OUT1.
Check the load and the
wiring for OUT1.
Note 2)
Check the load and the
wiring for OUT2.
The set data has
changed for some
Note 1) reason.
Perform the RESET
operation, and reset all
the data again.
The flow rate is over the
flow rate measurement
Note 2) range.
Use an adjustment valve, etc.
to reduce the flow rate until it
is within the flow rate range.
A current of more than
Note 2)
Note 1)
Sensors
Note 1) 80 mA is flowing to OUT2.
Note 1) Applicable to display integrated type and remote type except
PF2A7H series.
Note 2) Applicable to PF2A7H series only.
For PF2A/W200, 201
LED display
Contents
Solution
Over current is flowing to the
load of a switch output.
Shut off the power supply.
After eliminating the output
factor that caused the excess
current, turn the power
supply back on.
Internal data error.
Contact SMC.
Shut off the power supply
and then reset the switch.
The flow rate is over the flow
rate measurement range.
Use an adjustment valve, etc.
to reduce the flow rate until it
is within the flow rate range.
151
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 152
PF2A/PF2W
Option
When only optional parts are required, order with the part numbers listed below.
M12 lead wire with connector
e-con connector
Part no.
Qty.
Lead wire length
Part no.
Qty.
ZS-29-A
1
3m
ZS-28-CA-4
1
T1
OU
T2
OU
U
P
T
SE
DO
WN
e-con connector
M12 lead wire
with connector
PF2A7 (H)
PF2W7 (T)
PF2A20
PF2W20
M12 lead wire
with connector
PF2A5
PF2W5 (T)
In addition to the lead wire assembly shown above, those listed below (female contact) can
be connected.
However, they cannot be connected with an e-con connector because the diameter of the
core wire and its coverage diameter are different. For details, contact each manufacturer.
Connector size
M12
Pin no.
4
In addition to the connectors shown above, those listed below (e-con) can be
connected.
Manufacturer
Model
Manufacturer
Applicable series
Sumitomo 3M Limited
37104-3122-000FL
Correns Corp.
VA-4D
Tyco Electronics AMP K.K.
2-1473562-4
OMRON Corp.
XS2
OMRON Corp.
XN2A-1430
Yamatake Co.,Ltd.
PA5-4I
Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.
HR24
DKK Ltd.
CM01-8DP4S
Panel mounting
Pin no.
Description
Note
Part no.
Description
Note
ZS-22-E
Panel mounting adapter A, B
With mounting bracket
ZS-26-B
ZS-26-C
With waterproof seal, mounting screw
Panel
PF2A3
PF2W3
Front protective cover + Panel mounting adapter With waterproof seal, mounting screw
Front protective cover
Mounting screw (M3 x 8 L)
(accessory)
Panel mounting adapter A
Panel mounting adapter B
Mounting bracket
(accessory)
PF2A20
PF2W20
152
Waterproof seal
(accessory)
Panel
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 153
Related Product:
Multi Counter
Series CEU5
How to Order
CEU5
Nil
Output transistor mode
Nil
NPN open collector output
P
PNP open collector output
A
B
MULTI COUNTER:CEU5
100 to 240 VAC
D
COM
COUNT
PRESET
FUNC.
UP
RIGHT
LEFT
24 VDC
DOWN
MODE SEL.
External output
Nil
RS-232C
B
RS-232C + BCD
SET
SD SG RS-232C
Connection Method
Connection with the Digital Flow Switch (Series PF2)
COM
B
MULTI COUNTER:CEU5
COUNT
Sensors
A
PRESET
FUNC.
UP
RIGHT
LEFT
BCD
DOWN
MODE SEL.
SET
SD SG RS-232C
RS-232C
• OUT1 to OUT 5
• OUT1 to OUT20 (Bank switching)
• Binary output (31 points)
• Possible to measure accumulated pulse output of a Digital Flow Switch by an unit of 100 l (litter) and 10 ft3 (cube foot) using the
pre-scaling function* of the multi counter (When inputting to the multi counter, Up or Down is selected as input method.)
• Possible to take advantage of all CEU5 functions using preset mode and function mode.
* The set value is calculated by selecting manual mode. By multiplication by 4, then, per pulse value is set.
<Connection with other manufacturers’ encoders>
• Possible to switch multi counter side input method to 2-phase or Up/Down.
• Possible to connect to an encoder if the output method is Open Collector.
• When selecting UP or DOWN, phase A to COM input is counted toward addition direction, phase B to COM input is counted
toward subtraction direction.
Caution
When connecting the CEU5 with an encoder from another manufacturer, please thoroughly confirm the specification beforehand.
Please note that the CEU5 may not count normally depending on the output method, output frequency and connecting cable
length, etc. of the encoders.
Regarding connection with scale cylinder, refer to “Stroke reading cylinders & Counters CE series” in the Best Pneumatics Vol. 10.
153
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 154
High Precision 2-color Display
Digital Pressure Switch
Series ZSE30/ISE30
Air tool
Maintenance
Vacuum
Air blow
2-color digital display allows you to choose the setting according to your application requirements.
4 different display settings are available.
Red
Green
Green
Red
®
Red
Red
Green
Green
∗ The picture shown is an image,
which differs from the actual
display.
Abnormal conditions can be detected at a glance!
PRESSURE
OUT
PRESSURE
kPa
OUT
SET
PRESSURE
kPa
OUT
SET
PRESSURE
kPa
OUT
SET
PRESSURE
kPa
kPa
OUT
SET
SET
With one-touch fittings (ø4, ø6, ø5/32", ø1/4")
Reduced dimensions in piping direction
17.8 mm reduction∗
12.4 mm reduction∗
Straight type
Elbow type
14.4
22.4
17.8 mm
32.2
12.4 mm
34.8
KQ2H06-M5
KQ2L06-M5
∗ Comparison when One-touch fittings (KQ2H06-M5 / KQ2L06-M5) are connected to the piping ports (M5 x 0.8)
154
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 155
Series
ZSE30/ISE30
Space saving improvement
Space saving improvement
Before
Display calibration
ZSE4E
ISE4E
its own pa
Before
nel openin
g.
40
Each displa
y required
126
After
After
Just one p
anel openin
g is
required fo
r st
displays, w ackable
hic
mounted e h can be
ithe
or vertically r horizontally
.
This function allows uniformity in the numbers displayed.
More user-friendly controls
103.5
Compact p
rofile
Plug-type
connectors take the
burden out of
wiring work and
maintenance.
With analog output
Applicable panel thickness is up to 6 mm
(Panel mounting)
In addition to the conventional voltage output
type (1 to 5 V)
Current output type
(4 to 20 mA) is now available.
• Convenient when longer wiring is required
• Excellent noise resistance
Switches for vacuum and positive
pressure can be easily distinguished.
The different display panel frame colors easily tell them apart.
Vacuum/Low pressure (ZSE30)
Blue
Positive pressure (ISE30)
Gray
High precision
resolution: 1/1000
Variations
Vacuum/Low pressure Positive pressure
ZSE30
ISE30
Rated pressure
range
100 kPa
1 MPa
0
0
–100 kPa
Setting/Display resolution
Switch output
Output
0.2 kPa
0.001 MPa
NPN/PNP open collector (1 output)
Analog output Voltage output: 1 to 5 V; Current output: 4 to 20 mA
Current consumption 45 mA or less (70 mA or less for current output)
Option
Panel mount/Bracket
155
Sensors
Raised rubber
button controls are
clearly set apart,
simple to operate,
soft to the touch.
34.5
ZSE30
ISE30
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 156
ZSE30/ISE30
®
How to Order
Option 1
Without lead wire
Nil
Lead wire with connector
(Lead wire length: 2 m)
L
For positive pressure
ISE30
01
25
M
For vacuum/low pressure
ZSE30
01
25
M
Piping specification
01
R 1/8
(With M5 female thread)
T1
NPT 1/8
(With M5 female thread)
C4H
ø5/32" One-touch fiting
C6H
N7H
ø1/4" One-touch fitting
C4L
C6L
N7L
Option 2
Nil
None
Bracket
A
Straight type
Panel mount
25
NPN output
65
PNP output
26
1 to 5 V output
28 4 to 20 mA output
B
Elbow type
Panel mount adapter +
Front protective
cover
D
Option Part No.
When optional parts are required separately, use the following part
numbers to place an order.
Option
Part no.
Note
ZS-27-A
Bracket
ZS-27-B
Lead wire length: 2 m
With mounting screws
(M3 x 5 L: 2 pcs.)
With M3 x 8 L (2 pcs.)
Panel mount adapter
ZS-27-C
Panel mount adater + Front protective cover ZS-27-D
156
With M3 x 8 L (2 pcs.)
Unit specification
Nil
M
Fixed SI unit Note)
(International System of Units)
Note) Fixed unit:
For vacuum/Low pressure: kPA
For positive pressure: MPa
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 157
Series
ZSE30/ISE30
Specifications
ZSE30 (Vacuum/Low pressure)
ISE30 (Positive pressure)
Rated pressure range
–100.0 to 100.0 kPa
0.000 to 1.000 MPa
Set pressure range
–101.0 to 101.0 kPa
–0.100 to 1.000 MPa
Withstand pressure
500 kPa
1.5 MPa
Min. regulating unit
0.2 kPa
0.001 MPa
Fluid
Air, Inert gas, Non-flammable gas
12 to 24 VDC, Ripple (p-p) 10% or less (With power supply polarity protection)
Current consumption
45 mA or less (at no load)
Switch output Note 1)
NPN or PNP open collector output: 1 output
Max. load current
80 mA
Max. applied voltage
30 V (With NPN output)
Residual voltage
1 V or less (With load current of 80 mA)
Response time
2.5 ms or less (Response time selections with anti-chattering function: 20, 160, 640, 1280 ms)
Short circuit protection
Yes
Repeatability
±0.2% F.S. ±2 digit or less
Output voltage: 1 to 5 V ±2.5% F.S. or less (With rated pressure range)
Linearity: ±1% F.S. or less, Output impedance: Approx. 1 kΩ
Output current: 4 to 20 mA ±2.5% F.S. or less (With rated pressure range)
Linearity: ±1% F.S. or less
Maximum load impedance: 300 Ω with power supply voltage of 12 V;
600 Ω with power supply voltage of 24 V
Minimum load impedance: 50 Ω
Note 2)
Voltage output
Analog
output
Hysteresis
Note 3)
Current output
Hysteresis mode
Window comparator mode
Adjustable (can be set from 0)
3 1/2 digit, 7-segment indicator, 2-color display (Red and green)
Sampling cycle: 5 times/s
Display
±2% F.S. ±2 digit
±2% F.S. ±1 digit
(at 25°C ambient temperature) (at 25°C ambient temperature)
Illuminates when output is ON. (Green)
Indicator light
±2% F.S. or less (based on 25°C)
IP40
Enclosure
Operating temperature range Operating: 0 to 50°C, Stored: –10 to 60°C (No freezing or condensation)
Operating and stored: 35 to 85% RH (No condensation)
1000 VAC for 1 min. between live parts and enclosure
Withstand voltage
50 MΩ or more between live parts and enclosure (at 500 VDC)
10 to 150 Hz, 1.5 mm or 20 m/s2 amplitude in X, Y, Z directions for 2 hours each
Impact resistance
Compliant with CE Marking and UL (CSA) standards
Standard
Note 1) When switch output is selected, analog output is not available.
Note 2) When voltage output is selected, a simultaneous selection of switch output and current output is not available.
Note 3) When current output is selected, a simultaneous selection of switch output and voltage output is not available.
Piping Specifications
Part
Port
size
01
T1
C4H
C6H
N7H
C4L
C6L
N7L
R1/8
M5 x 0.8
NPT1/8
M5 x 0.8
—
—
—
—
—
—
One-touch fitting
Straight type
—
—
ø4 mm
ø5/32 inch
ø6 mm
ø1/4 inch
—
—
—
One-touch fitting
Elbow type
—
—
—
—
—
ø4 mm
ø5/32 inch
ø6 mm
ø1/4 inch
Wetted part material
Weight
With lead wire with connector (2 m)
Without lead wire with connector
Sensor pressure receiving area: Silicon, Piping port: C3602 (Electroless nickel plated), O-ring: HNBR
O-ring: NBR
O-ring: NBR, fitting: PBT
81 g
76 g
78 g
43 g
38 g
40 g
Function
Various additional functions are available for easy measurement, switch operation and check of measured values suitable for the conditions of the measured fluid.
Anti-chattering function
Key lock function
Peak hold function
Bottom hold function
Zero out function
Unit conversion (for overseas use) Note 2)
Prevents malfunction due to sudden fluctuations in the primary pressure by adjusting the response time.
The key board operation can be locked to prevent incorrect operation on the operation switch.
Can retain the maximum pressure value displayed during measurement.
Can retain the minimum pressure value displayed during measurement.
The pressure display can be set at zero when the pressure is open to the atmosphere.
Can convert the display value (for overseas use only).
157
Sensors
Environmental
resistance
Display accuracy
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 158
ZSE30/ISE30
Unit Descriptions
Indication light (Green)
LCD display
Displays the switch operation status.
MPa
UP button
OUT
SET
Use this button to change the
mode or increase the ON/OFF set
value. It also allows you to switch
to the peak value display mode.
SET button
Example of Internal Circuit and Wiring
Residual
pressure
error
Contents
Solution
Shut off the power
supply. After eliminating
Load current of switch
the output factor that
output is more than 80 mA. caused the excess
supply back on.
Pressure is applied during the
zero out operation as follows:
When the switch for positive
pressure is used: ±0.071 MPa
or more.
When the switch positive
pressure is used:
±7.1 kPa or more.
After displaying for 3 seconds,
it will return to the measuring
mode. Due to the individual
product difference, the setting
range varies ±10% F.S.
Bring the pressure
back to atmospheric
pressure and try
using the zero out
function.
-25
Maximum 30 V, 80 mA
Residual voltage:
1 V or less
Brown DC(+)
Main circuit
Take the following corrective solutions when errors occur.
-26
Analog output type
1 to 5 V (±2.5% F.S.)
Output impedance:
1 kΩ
Load
+
Black OUT
–
12
to
24 VDC
Brown DC(+)
Main circuit
Error Correction
overcurrent
error
DOWN button
Use this button to change the
mode or decrease the ON/OFF
set value. It also allows you to
switch to the bottom value display
mode.
Use this button to switch the
mode and set the set value.
Error
LCD
description display
Displays the current pressure
condition, setting mode conditions, selected display unit, and
error codes. A display color type
can be selected from either a single color display with red or green,
or 2-color display in which green
and red are switched according to
the output.
Black OUT
(Analog output)
Load
+
–
12
to
24 VDC
Blue DC(–)
Supply pressure is below
the minimum regulating
pressure.
Reduce/Increase
supply pressure to
within the regulating
pressure range.
-28
Analog output type
4 to 20 mA (±2.5% F.S.)
Maximum load impedance:
Power supply voltage 12 V: 300 Ω
Power supply voltage 24 V: 600 Ω
Minimum load impedance: 50 Ω
Internal data error
Brown DC(+)
Main circuit
Applied
pressure
error
Supply pressure exceeds
the maximum regulating
pressure.
Black OUT
(Analog output)
Load
12
to
– 24 VDC
+
Blue DC(–)
System
error
Internal data error
Internal data error
-65
PNP open collector
Maximum 80 mA
Brown DC(+)
Main circuit
Internal data error
Shut off the power
supply. Turn the
power supply back
on.
If the power should
not come back on,
please contact SMC
for an inspection.
Load
Blue DC(–)
158
12
to
– 24 VDC
+
Black OUT
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 159
Series
ZSE30/ISE30
Dimensions
30
25
8
9.5
Lead wire
with connector
3.6
20 ± 0.1
SMC
OUT
SET
Wi
dth
2-M3 x 0.5
Thread depth 4
M5 x 0.8
MPa
10
PRESSURE
20 ± 0.1
1.5
01: R1/8
T1: NPT1/8
ac
ros
sf
lat
s1
2
A
øB
C
A
øB
Straight
One-touch fitting
size
ø4, ø5/32"
ø6
ø1/4"
Straight
A
B
14.4
11.2
(mm)
Elbow
C
B
A
10.4 18
20
22.4 12.8 20
22.8 13.2 20.5
Elbow
With One-touch fitting
Sensors
15
4.2
10
42.5
With bracket
3
22
30
20
1.8
30
45
SMC
20
25
35
35
159
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 160
ZSE30/ISE30
Dimensions
Panel mount
7.2
17.8
8
9.5
34.5
R4
.5
MPa
.5
R4
21
PRESSURE
47.8
OUT
SET
MADE IN JAPAN
8.75
Panel thickness 0.5 to 6
Panel mount adapter + Front protective cover
42.4
11
17.8
8
9.5
34.5
Panel thickness 0.5 to 6
160
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 161
Series
ZSE30/ISE30
Dimensions
Panel fitting dimension
Multiple (2 pcs. or more) horizontal mounting
PRESSURE
OUT
SET
PRESSURE
MPa
MPa
OUT
SET
OUT
PRESSURE
MPa
SET
1-pc. mounting
31 x n pcs. + 3.5 x (n pcs. – 1)
24 and up
0
31 – 0.4
0
31 –0.4
MADE IN JAPAN
MADE IN JAPAN
MADE IN JAPAN
Sensors
Multiple (2 pcs. or more) vertical mounting
0
31–0.4
PRESSURE
24 and up
MPa
SET
PRESSURE
MPa
OUT
SET
PRESSURE
31 x n pcs. + 3.5 x (n pcs. – 1)
OUT
MADE IN JAPAN
MADE IN JAPAN
MPa
OUT
SET
MADE IN JAPAN
161
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 162
High Precision
Series ZSE40/ISE40
Air Tool
Air Line
Maintenance
Vacuum
Air Blow
High precision and high resolution
Vacuum pressure
Compound pressure
Positive pressure
→
High speed response: 2.5 ms or less
Pressure
Momentary change
With anti-chattering function
P1
Set value P2
Stable switch output is possible even with sudden
changes in the primary pressure (when operating large
bore cylinders, etc.).
Time →
Devices such as large bore cylinders and high-flow vacuum
ejectors consume a large volume of air when they operate, and
this may cause a momentary drop in the primary pressure. This
function prevents such momentary pressure drops from being
detected as abnormal pressures by allowing the response time
selection to be changed.
t (ms)
t (ms)
(Averaging)
(Averaging)
Switch output ON
operation
when normal OFF
Time →
[Selectable response times: t]
2.5 ms (normal), 24 ms, 192 ms or 768 ms
The normal setting is selected when shipped from the factory.
Switch output
ON
operation when
anti-chattering OFF
function is used
(Operating principle)
The pressure values measured within the user-selected response
time are averaged, and switch output (ON/OFF) is determined by
comparing this averaged pressure value with the set pressure.
Time →
Without using auto shift
When the primary pressure fluctuates, a correct determination becomes impossible.
Allows switch output unaffected by variations in
primary pressure.
→
With auto shift function
1/1000 (0.1 kPa)
11/2000 (0.1 kPa)
1/1000 (0.001 MPa)
Pressure
Auto shift function
Erroneous operation may occur if there is fluctuation in the
primary pressure.
The auto shift function compensates for pressure changes to
ensure proper ON/OFF switch response during such fluctuations.
(Operating principle)
At the point when the primary pressure fluctuates, the set
pressure value is compensated by setting the auto shift input
(external input) to low (no-voltage) input, using the pressure
measured at that point as a standard.
Set value
Primary pressure
normal
Able to detect suction pressure (vacuum pressure) and
elease pressure (positive pressure) with a single
pressure switch.
3 types of piping
Different piping methods are possible to
accommodate the installation location.
Primary pressure
ncrease
P1
P2
Time →
Switch output ON
1, 2
OFF
Does not turn OFF
Does not turn ON
Time →
→
When using auto shift
Compound pressure (ZSE40F) Primary pressure
drop
Pressure
Set value
Set value
compensation
Primary pressure
normal
Set value
compensation
Primary pressure
drop
Primary pressure
ncrease
P1
P2
Time →
Switch output ON
1, 2
OFF
Time →
5 ms or more
10 ms
or less
output response time
[Switch
when auto shift is input. ]
Hi
Auto shift
input
Lo
Time →
Repeatability
IP65 compatible
Dusttight/Splash proof type
162
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 163
High Precision
Series
ZSE40/ISE40
How to Order
Set pressure range
Nil
–0.100 to 1.000 MPa For positive pressure
ISE40
01
22
M
For vacuum/compound pressure
ZSE40
01
22
M
Option
Set pressure range
Nil
F
Nil
10.0 to –101.3 kPa For vacuum pressure
–100.0 to 100.0 kPa For compound pressure
None
Bracket A
(ZS-24-A)
Bracket B
(ZS-24-B)
Bracket D
(ZS-24-D)
A
W1 : Rc 1/8
∗ WF1: G 1/8
01: R 1/8 (With M5 female threads)
T1: NPT 1/8 (With M5 female threads)
Reverse pressure two directions
R 1/8, NPT 1/8
Rc 1/8, G 1/8
M5 x 0.8
female threads
B
Rc 1/8, G 1/8
∗ M5: M5 x 0.8 (Female threads)
∗ C4: With ø4 One-touch fitting
∗ C6: With ø6 One-touch fitting
Wall mount
D
Refer to the dimensions.
Wall mount
E
M5 x 0.8
ø4, ø6
One-touch fitting
∗ Option
Panel mount (ZS-24-C)
+ Front protective cover
Piping specification/Options
Description
Symbol 01
Bracket A
A
Bracket B
B
Bracket D
D
Panel mount
E
Panel mount + Front protective cover F
Piping specifications
T1 W1 WF1 C4
C6
M5
F
: Available
∗ When optional parts only are required,
order with the part numbers inside ( ).
: Not available
Unit specification
Input/Output specification
22
30
62∗
70∗
(ZS-22-A)
NPN open collector 2 outputs + analog output
NPN open collector 2 outputs + auto shift input
PNP open collector 2 outputs + analog output
PNP open collector 2 outputs + auto shift input
Nil
M
SI unit only Note)
Note) Fixed unit
For vacuum/compound pressure: kPa
∗ Option
Note
When equipped with auto shift function, the following ranges can be set.
Set pressure range
–100.0 to 100.0 kPa
10.0 to –101.3 kPa
–0.1 to 1.000 MPa
Setting range
–100.0 to 100.0 kPa
–101.3 to 101.3 kPa
–1.000 to 1.000 MPa
Lead wire length
Nil
L
0.6 m
3m
163
Sensors
Panel mount
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 164
ZSE40/ISE40
Specifications
ZSE40F (Compound pressure)
–100.0 to 100.0 kPa
–100.0 to 100.0 kPa
Set pressure range
Withstand pressure
Set pressure resolution
Analog output
0.000 to 1.000 MPa
–0.100 to 1.000 MPa
1.5 MPa
—
0.001
500 kPa
0.1
—
Air, Non-corrosive/Non-flammable gas
12 to 24 VDC ±10%, Ripple (p-p) 10% or less (With power supply polarity protection)
55 mA or less
NPN or PNP open collector output: 2 outputs
80 mA
1 V or less (With 80 mA load current)
2.5 ms or less (With anti-chattering function: 24 ms, 192 ms and 768 ms selections)
Yes
Variable (can be set from 0)
Fixed (3 digits)
3 1/2 digit LED display (Sampling cycle: 5 times/sec.)
±2% F.S. ±1 digit or less (at ambient temperature of 25°C)
Green LED (OUT1: Illuminates when ON), Red LED (OUT2: Illuminates when ON)
kPa
MPa
Applicable fluid
Current consumption
Switch output
Max. load current
Residual voltage
Response time
Repeatability
Hysteresis mode
Hysteresis
Display
Display accuracy
Indicator light
Note 2)
ZSE40 (Vacuum pressure)
–101.3 to 0.0 kPa
–101.3 to 10.0 kPa
Output voltage: 1 to 5 V
Output voltage: 1 to 5 V ±2.5% F.S. or less (in rated pressure range)
±5% F.S. or less (in rated pressure range)
Output impedance: Approx. 1 kΩ
Auto shift input Note 3)
Enclosure
No-voltage input (Reed or solid state), input 5 ms or more
IP65
Operating: 0 to 50˚C, Stored: –10 to 60°C (No condensation or freezing)
Operating/Stored: 35 to 85% RH (No condensation)
Ambient humidity range
Environmental
1000 VAC for 1 min. between lead wires and body
Withstand voltage
resistance Insulation resistance
50 MΩ or more (at 500 VDC) between lead wires and body
10 to 500 Hz at the smaller of amplitude 1.5 mm or acceleration 98 m/s2 in X, Y, Z directions for 2 hrs. each (De-energized)
980 m/s2 in X, Y, Z directions 3 times each (De-energized)
Impact resistance
±2% F.S. or less of pressure measured at 25°C
01: R 1/8, M5 x 0.8, T1: NPT1/8, M5 x 0.8, W1: Rc 1/8
Port size
C4: With ø4 One-touch fitting, C6: With ø6 One-touch fitting, M5: M5 female threads
5-wire oilproof heavy-duty vinyl cord (0.15 mm2)
Lead wire
01/T1 types approx. 60 g, W1 type approx. 80 g, C4/C6/M5 types approx. 92 g (Each including 0.6 m lead wires)
Weight
Note 1) For ZSE40F/ZSE40/ISE40--22
62
Note 2) ZSE40F/ZSE40/ISE40--30
70
Note)
When equipped with auto shift function, the following ranges can be set.
Model
ZSE40F-- 30
70
ZSE40-- 30
70
ISE40-- 30
70
Set pressure range
–100.0 to 100 kPa
–101.3 to 101.3 kPa
–1.0000 to 1.000 MPa
Functions
Various additional functions are available for easy measurement, switch operation and check of measured values suitable for the conditions of the measured fluid.
Auto shift function Note 1)
Key lock function
Peak hold function
Zero out function
Can correct the pressure set point value of switch output according to fluctuations in the primary pressure.
Note 1) Select and order by specifying the types and models.
164
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 165
High Precision
Series
ZSE40/ISE40
Setting
Calibration procedure
Initial
setting
Manual
pressure setting
Zero out
Key lock
mode
Enter the set value of the
pressure to perform
switch output.
Adjusts the zero point of
the atmospheric pressure.
Mode is not switched,
even if the button is
pressed during operation.
Auto preset
Manual
pressure setting
Normal
operation
Automatically sets the
pressure for the adsorption confirmation or supply pressure confirmation.
Allows fine-tuning of the
data set automatically by
auto preset.
Measured pressure is
displayed and the switch
operation begins.
Set “Output mode”,
“Response time” and
“Auto or Manual mode.”
Calibration Procedure
3 1/2-digit LED
kPa
LED (Red)
LED (Green)
Displays OUT1 output condition.
When it is ON, the LED is
illuminated.
UP button
Sensors
Displays present pressure.
Displays each mode.
Displays error mode.
OUT2
OUT1
SET
Displays OUT2 output condition.
When it is ON, the LED is
illuminated.
DOWN button
Switches the mode and set value.
Switching of the mode and set value
SET button
Switches to each mode and fixes
the set value.
165
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 166
ZSE40/ISE40
Output Method
ON
YES
OFF
P-2
• Hysteresis mode
P-1
High pressure (for positive pressure/
compound pressure)
High vacuum (for vacuum pressure)
[P]
H
H (Fix hysteresis) = 3 digits
H
ON
NO
OFF
P-1
P-2
compound pressure)
Output
mode
OUT1
ON
∗ Same with OUT2.
YES
OFF
n-2
• Hysteresis mode
n-1
compound pressure)
[n]
H
H
ON
NO
OFF
n-1
n-2
compound pressure)
1.2 kΩ
6.8 kΩ
DC (–)
(Blue)
DC (+)
(Brown)
Auto shift input
(Gray)
OUT1
(Black)
OUT2
(White)
166
6.8 kΩ
DC (–)
(Blue)
Load
Main circuit
12 VDC
to
24 VDC
1.2 kΩ
DC (+)
(Brown)
Auto shift input
(Gray)
OUT1
(Black)
OUT2
(White)
Load
DC (–)
(Blue)
Load
With auto shift input
Load
With analog output
Main circuit
ZSE40(F)/ISE40-
-70(L)-(M)
1 kΩ
12 VDC
to
24 VDC
DC (–)
(Blue)
ZSE40(F)/ISE40-
-62(L)-(M)
DC (+)
(Brown)
Analog output
(Gray)
OUT1
(Black)
OUT2
(White)
Load
12 VDC
to
24 VDC
Main circuit
1 kΩ
DC (+)
(Brown)
Analog output
(Gray)
OUT1
(Black)
OUT2
(White)
Load
Load
ZSE40(F)/ISE40-
-30(L)-(M)
With analog output
Main circuit
ZSE40(F)/ISE40-
-22(L)-(M)
Load
12 VDC
to
24 VDC
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 167
High Precision
Series
ZSE40/ISE40
Dimensions
ZSE40(F)/ISE40– 01
T1
20
30
M5 x 0.8 thread depth 5
20
30
MPa
OUT2
OUT1
Lead wire
ength
Wi
dth
ac
ro
12 ss fl
ats
6.4
2-M3 x 0.5 thread depth 4
1.5
01: R 1/8
T1: NPT 1/8
30
2.5
14
4.5
15.2
2.6
10.7
7.8
7
ø3.5
12
.4
600 (3000)
Atmospheric
release port
18.35
SET
Bracket A
Sensors
A
View A
2-M3 x 5L
15
1.6
11.5
40
4.5
55
45
30
4.5
20
6.5
(26.7)
Bracket D
A
View A
2-M3 x 5L
4.2
1.6
15
40
11.5
55
45
30
22
35
(26.7)
7.2
167
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 168
ZSE40/ISE40
Dimensions
ZSE40(F)/ISE40– W1
WF1
2-M4 x 0.7
thread depth 4
30
20
W1: Rc 1/8
WF1: G 1/8
30
20
7
MPa
OUT2
OUT1
600 (3000)
Lead wire
length
Atmospheric
release port
5
R
6.4
18.35
19
SET
6.
2.5
7
6
4
10.7
15.2
30
2.6
42
7.8
12
.4
ø3.5
W1: Rc 1/8
WF1: G 1/8
12
Bracket A
A
30
View A
4.5
(30.7)
20
6.5
Bracket B
A
30
v
6.5
168
4.5
5
4.
4.5
1.6
12.1
30
45
46.1
2-M4 x 5L
15
4.5
1.6
11.5
40
55
49
2-M4 x 5L
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 169
High Precision
Series
ZSE40/ISE40
Dimensions
Bracket D
A
30
View A
4.2
1.6
15
11.5
40
55
49
2-M4 x 5L
22
(30.7)
35
7.2
C4
ZSE40(F)/ISE40– C6
M5
32.3
30
20
4.
2-
5
12.8
Lead
wire
length
Atmospheric
release port
6.4
18.35
19
SET
25.4
OUT2
OUT1
600 (3000)
Sensors
30
MPa
44.3
22.15
28.15
8
ø3.5
For –M5
7
8.5
43
10.7
15.2
30
2.6
2.5
7
12
.4
7.8
12
One-touch fitting ø4, ø6
M5 x 0.8 thread depth 5
169
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 170
ZSE40/ISE40
Dimensions
Panel mount
Cutting dimensions for panel mounting
42
40
36
25.4
+0.5
0
43 or more
36
+0.5
0
4.3
OUT2
OUT1
70 or more
SET
The thickness of the panel is 1 to 3.2 mm.
Panel mount + Front protection cover
42.4
40
SET
47.4
OUT2
OUT1
170
25.4
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 171
LCD Display
(For vacuum)
(For positive pressure)
Series ZSE3/ISE3
The digital display allows easy pressure setting.
Air Line
Maintenance
Built-in failure detection output function
This feature senses an overall decrease in vacuum
pressure due to clogged filter elements, worn vacuum
pads or system leakage and and sends a warning
output signal before a failure occurs.
For General Pneumatics
Two independent pressure settings
This feature is ideal when a change of vacuum suction
pad size requires two different set pressures, or
switching of positive pressure lines requires confirmation
of two pressures.
Data storage function
Since a dedicated IC (EEPROM) is used, set data will be
stored for 100,000 hours (approximately 11 years) even
without power.
Vacuum unit: Can be used as a modular unit
with series ZX.
With suction filter
Self-diagnostic function
Overcurrent
detection
LCD display:
Error indication on LCD
SMC
Excess pressure
detection
Data error
mmHg
Indicator light:
Red light blinks
for error.
RESET SET
Specifications
Vacuum
ZSE3
Model
Set pressure range
Maximum pressure
Minimum display unit
Positive pressure 100 kPa
Positive pressure 1 MPa
ISE3L
ISE3
0 to 0.98 MPa
1MPa
—
1
1
0.01
—
—
Illuminates when ON. (OUT1: Green, OUT2: Red)
200 Hz
Variable (3 digits or more)
Fixed (3 digits)
Air, Non-corrosive gas
±3% F.S. or less
±1% F.S. or less
NPN open collector 30 V, 80 mA or less
25 mA or less
Indicator light: Red light blinks, Error code displayed on LCD
3 1/2 digit LCD (5mm-size numerals)
Overcurrent , Excess pressure, Data error, Pressure at zero clear
0 to 60°C (with no condensation)
1000 Vp-p, Pulse width 1 µS, Rise time 1 nS
1000 VAC 50/60 Hz for 1 min between external terminals and case
2 MΩ (500 VDC) between external terminals and case
0 to –101 kPa
0 to 98 kPa
200 kPa Note 1)
kPa
MPa
Port size
Enclosure
R 1/8, M5 x 0.8, NPTF 1/8, M5 x 0.8
ZX ejector mounted type: M5 x 0.8
R 1/8, M5 x 0.8, NPTF 1/8, M5 x 0.8
IP40
Note 1) For vacuum operation, a momentary pressure of 0.5 MPa will not be a problem.
Note 2) For ZSE3-- 23
24 , the red light will be ON for failure detection output.
Note 3) Hysteresis mode:
When the value of P1 and P2 are the same, or when P1 > P2 is within 3 digits, the hysteresis will automatically be 3 digits for the set value of P1.
Window comparator mode:
Since the hysteresis is 3 digits, separate P1 and P2 by 7 digits or more when setting.
1 digit is the minimum pressure display unit. (See the table above.)
171
Sensors
Indicator light Note 2)
Response frequency
Note 3) Hysteresis mode
Hysteresis
Fluid
Repeatability
Operating voltage
Current consumption
Error display
Pressure display
Self-diagnostic function
Noise resistance
Withstand voltage
10 to 500 Hz at whichever is smaller, amplitude 1.5 mm or acceleration 98 m/s2, in X, Y, Z directions for 2 hrs. each
Shock resistance
980 m/s2 in X,Y,Z directions 3 times each
Connector type
Heat resistant vinyl cord ø1.55, 0.31 mm2, 4-wire
Lead wire
Grommet type
Oilproof heavy-duty vinyl cord -21, –23: ø3.5, 0.14 mm2, 4 cores –22, –24: ø3.5, 0.15 mm2, 5 cores
40 g (with 0.6 m lead wire)
Weight
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 172
ZSE3/ISE3
How to Order
Set pressure range
Nil
L
0 to 0.98 MPa
0 to 98 kPa
01
T1
Single mounting R 1/8
Single mounting NPTF 1/8
Note) M5 x 0.8 female thread provided
inside piping
Positive
Pressure
ISE3
Vacuum
ZSE3
21
Without analog output
22
With analog output (1 to 5 V)
Wiring specification
Nil
Grommet type lead wire length 0.6 m
L
Grommet type lead wire length 3 m
C
Connector type lead wire length 0.6 m
CL
Connector type lead wire length 3 m
CN
Without connector
Only grommet type available for analog output.
01
Single mounting R 1/8
T1
Single mounting NPTF 1/8
0X
With suction filter M5 x 0.8
0XY
With suction filter M6 x 1 (optional)
Note) M5 x 0.8 female thread provided
inside piping for single mounting
type
172
21
Without analog output
22
With analog output (1 to 5 V)
23
NPN open collector 1 output
Failure detection function, Without analog output
24
Failure detection function, With analog output (1 to 5 V)
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 173
Air Line
Maintenance
High Precision Digital Pressure Switch
For General Fluids
Fluid
Series ZSE50F/ISE50
Coolant
Pressure detection for
a wide range of fluids
Argon
Air containing drain
Ammonia
Freon
Hydraulic fluid ( JIS-K2213 )
Carbon dioxide
Nitrogen
Silicon oil ( JIS-K2213 )
To measure low-quality air,
containing drain
Leakage test with nitrogen
Lubricating oil (JIS-K6301)
Fluoro carbon
To confirm absorption of workpiece with water
on the surface, e.g. wet LCD glass plate
To measure hydraulic pressure
Using of stainless steel diaphragm
The stainless steel diaphragm prevents direct contact between sensor and measured fluid.
Pressure sensor
Fitting
Liquid and gas contact areas Stainless steel 630
Fittings Stainless steel 304
Extremely low leakage
ZSE50F / ISE50
ZSE60F / ISE60
Enclosure
Stainless steel diaphragm
Sensors
Sensor and fittings are electron-beam welded.
Leakage is kept at the lowest level by using VCR®
and Swedgelok® fittings.
1 x 10-5 Pa⋅m3/s
1 x 10-10 Pa⋅m3/s
IP65
Panel mount
With bracket
Option
Panel mount + Front side protection cover
Application
examples
To confirm
adsorption of
workpieces
containing water
To confirm primary pressure
of cleaning line
To confirm working
pressure of
hydraulic
cylinder
173
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 174
ZSE50/ISE50
High precision and high resolution
Compound pressure 1/2000 ( 0.1 kPa )
Positive pressure
1/1000 ( 0.001MPa )
Repeatability 0.2% F.S. 1 digit or less
Variety of
functions
Auto preset function
Prevents erroneous operation due to
sudden fluctuations in primary pressure, by
allowing the response time to be changed.
Automatic pressure setting is possible.
Saves time for setting operation.
Selectable response times: 2.5 ms, 24 ms, 192 ms,
768 ms or less
Auto shift function
Pressure detection is not affected by
fluctuations in primary pressure.
Series ZSE60F/ISE60
• Key lock function
• Peak and bottom display
function
• Zero out function
Confirmation of atmospheric pressure of load lock
Special fitting types are used in semiconductor
production equipment (Metal gasket seal fittings)
Leak rate: 1 x 10 –10 Pa.m3/s
ZSE 60F/ISE60-A2
ZSE60F/ISE60-B2
URJ 1/ 4
TSJ 1 / 4
ZSE50F
Model
Variations
Port size
Leak rate
174
ZSE60F
ISE60
Special fittings for the semiconductor industry
(Metal gasket seal fittings)
Threaded type
URJ 1/4, TSJ 1/4
R 1/ 4, NPT 1/4, G 1/ 4 (With M5 male thread)
–5
1 x 1 0 Pa. m 3 / s
–1 0
1 x 10
Pa⋅ m3 / s
100 kPa
1 MPa
100 kPa
1 MPa
0
0
0
0
–100 kPa
Output
ISE50
–100 kPa
Switch output
2 outputs NPN or PNP
Analog output
Output voltage 1 to 5 V
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 175
High Precision
Digital Pressure Switch for General Fluids
Series
ZSE50F/ISE50
How to Order
ISE50
ZSE50 F
For compound pressure
02
22 L
M
02
22 L
M
02
T2
G2 ∗
Option
R 1/4 (M5 with female screw), Piping in backward direction
Nil
NPT 1/4 (M5 with female screw), Piping in backward direction
None
Bracket A
G 1/4 (M5 with female screw), Piping in backward direction
∗ Option
A
Input/Output specification
22
30
62 ∗
70 ∗
NPN open collector 2 output + Analog output
Bracket D
NPN open collector 2 output + Auto shift input
D
PNP open collector 2 output + Analog output
PNP open collector 2 output + Auto shift input
∗ Option
Note) Auto shift input is used for the auto shift function.
For more information, please refer to “Auto Shift Function” on
page 178.
Refer to the dimensions for
the difference between
brackets A and D.
Panel mount
E
Lead wire length
L
3m
Sensors
Panel mount +
Analog Output
Series ISE50
Series ZSE50F
Analog output value (V)
Analog output value (V)
Suitable model: ZSE50F/ISE50-
-22/62(L)-(M)
5
1
0
1.0 MPa
F
5
1
–100 kPa
Pressure
100 kPa
Pressure
Unit specification
Nil
M
Fixed SI unit
Note)
Note) Fixed units:
For compound pressure : KPa
Option
When option parts are required separately, use the following part numbers to
place an order.
Option
Part no. Qty.
Note
Bracket A
ZS-24-A
1
With 2 pcs. of mounting screws
Bracket D
ZS-24-D
1
With 2 pcs. of mounting screws
Panel mount
ZS-24-E
1
ZS-24-F
1
175
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 176
ZSE50F/ISE50
Specifications
ZSE50F (Compound pressure)
100 to 100 kPa
0.000 to 1.000 MPa
Set pressure range
100 to 100 kPa
0.100 to 1.000 MPa
500 kPa
1.5 MPa
Withstand pressure
kPa
MPa
Setting/Display
resolution
Fluid
0.1
—
—
0.001
Fluid that will not corrode stainless steel 630 and 304
12 to 24 VDC, Ripple (p-p) 10% or less
Current consumption
55 mA or less (With no load)
Switch output
NPN or PNP open collector: 2 outputs
Max. load current
80 mA
Residual voltage
1 V or less (With 80 mA load current)
Response time
2.5 ms or less (With anti-chattering function: 24 ms, 192 ms and 768 ms selections)
Yes
0.2% F.S. 1 digit or less
Repeatability
Hysteresis
Fix (3 digits)
3 1/2 digit LED display (Sampling frequency: 5 times/sec)
Display
2% F.S. 1 digit or less (With ambient temperature of 25°C)
Display accuracy
Green LED (OUT1: Illuminates when ON.), Red LED (OUT2: Illuminates when ON.)
Indicator light
Output voltage: 1 to 5 V
±5% F.S. or less (in rated pressure range)
Analog output Note 1)
Auto shift input Note 2)
IP65
Operating: 0 to 50C, Stored: 10 to 60C (No condensation or freezing)
Operating and stored: 35 to 85% RH (No condensation)
Ambient humidity range
250 VAC for 1 min, between all lead wires and enclosure
Withstand voltage
2 MΩ or more (at 50 VDC) between all lead wires and enclosure
10 to 500 Hz at the smaller of amplitude 1.5 mm or acceleration 98 m/s2 in X, Y, Z directions for 2 hrs. each (De-energized)
980 m/s2 in X, Y, Z directions 3 times each (Not energized)
3% F.S. or less of measured pressure at 25C in temperature
Shock resistance
02: R 1/4, M5 x 0.8
Port size
T2: NPT 1/4, M5 x 0.8
Pressure receiving area: Stainless steel 630, Fittings: Stainless steel 304
Wetted material
5-wire oilproof heavy-duty vinyl cable (0.15 mm2)
Lead wire
Approx. 120 g (Each including 3 m lead wire)
Weight
Note 1)
Note 2)
Output voltage: 1 to 5 V ±2.5% F.S. or less
(in rated pressure range)
No-voltage input (Solid state switch or reed switch), input 5 ms or more
Enclosure
Environmental
resistance
0.3% F.S. 1 digit or less
Variable (0 or above)
Hysteresis mode
For ZSE50F/ISE50--22
62
ZSE50F/ISE50--30
70
Note)
The possible set ranges for types with auto shift function are as follows:
Model
Possible set range
ZSE50F-- 30
70
–100.0 to 100.0 kPa
ISE50-- 30
70
–1.000 to 1.000 MPa
Function
Various additional functions are available for easy measurement, switch operation and check of measured values suitable for the
conditions of the measured fluid.
Auto shift function Note 1)
Key lock function
Peak hold function
Zero out function
Can correct the pressure set point value of switch output according to fluctuations in the primary pressure.
Note 1) Select and order by specifying the types and models.
176
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 177
High Precision
Series
ZSE50F/ISE50
Output Method
ON
YES
• Hysteresis mode
OFF
P-2
P-1
compound pressure)
[P]
H
H
ON
NO
OFF
P-1
P-2
compound pressure)
Output
mode
OUT1
ON
∗ Same with OUT2.
YES
• Hysteresis mode
OFF
n-2
n-1
compound pressure)
[n]
H
H
ON
NO
OFF
n-1
n-2
compound pressure)
Sensors
50
ZSE 50
60 F/ISE 60 -
-22(L)-(M)
50
ZSE 50
60 F/ISE 60 -
-30(L)-(M)
6.8 kΩ
DC (–)
(Blue)
50
ZSE 50
60 F/ISE 60 -
-70(L)-(M)
6.8 kΩ
DC (–)
(Blue)
Load
1.2 kΩ
DC (+)
(Brown)
Auto shift input
(Gray)
OUT1
(Black)
OUT2
(White)
Load
DC (–)
(Blue)
12 VDC
to
24 VDC
Main circuit
DC (+)
(Brown)
Analog output
(Gray)
OUT1
(Black)
OUT2
(White)
Load
Load
With analog output
Main circuit
12 VDC
to
24 VDC
DC (–)
(Blue)
50
ZSE 50
60 F/ISE 60 -
-62(L)-(M)
1 kΩ
Load
1.2 kΩ
DC (+)
(Brown)
Auto shift input
(Gray)
OUT1
(Black)
OUT2
(White)
Load
12 VDC
to
24 VDC
Main circuit
DC (+)
(Brown)
Analog output
(Gray)
OUT1
(Black)
OUT2
(White)
Load
1 kΩ
Load
Main circuit
With analog output
12 VDC
to
24 VDC
177
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 178
ZSE50F/ISE50
Auto Shift Function
This function uses the measured pressure at the time of auto shift
input as the reference pressure value and corrects the set point
values “
” and “
” of switch output 1 and “
” and “
” of
switch output 2. “
” to “
” correspond to “
” to “
” in
case of normally closed circuit.
Pressure
When auto shift is not used:
Fluctuations in the primary pressure interrupt correct judgement.
Normal
primary
pressure
Drop of
primary
pressure
Increase of
primary
pressure
P1
P2
Time
ON
Switch output 1, 2
OFF
Pressure
When auto shift is used:
When the primary pressure changes, set the auto shift function to
Lo. The pressure value at this point will be saved as the reference
value to correct the pressure set point values in order to make
correct judgments.
Normal
primary
pressure
Drop of
primary
pressure
Auto shift function conditions and explanation
• Keep the pressure constant at least for 5 ms after the last transition signal of auto shift input.
” for
• At the time of auto shift input, the display unit displays “
about 1 second. The pressure value at this time is saved as the
”.
correction value “
• The set point values “
” to “
” or “
” to “
” are corrected based on the saved correction values.
• The time between the auto shift input and start of switch output
is 10 ms or less.
• If the set point value corrected by auto shift input falls out of the
possible set range, the correction value is not saved. The dis” if the set point value is above the upper limplay will show “
” if it is below the lower limit.
it and “
• The correction value “
” set by auto shift input disappears
when the power is turned off.
” for the auto shift function is reset to
• The correction value “
zero (the initial value) when the power is turned on again.
∗ The correction value is not stored on the EEPROM.
Note
The possible set range for types with auto shift function is as follows:
Model
Set pressure range
ZSE50F-- 30
70
Increase of
primary
pressure
–100.0 to 100 kPa
ZSE60F-- 30
70
ISE50-- 30
70
ISE60-- 30
70
P1
P2
–1.0000 to 1.000 MPa
Time
ON
Switch output 1, 2
OFF
5 ms
or more
Auto shift input
10 ms
or less
time
[ Switchwhenoutputauto response
shift inputs. ]
Hi
Lo
Anti-chattering Function
A large bore cylinder or ejector consumes a large amount
of air in operation and may experience a temporary drop in
the primary pressure. This function prevents detection of
such temporary drops in primary pressure as abnormal
pressure.
<Principle>
This function averages pressure values measured during
the response time set by the user and then compares the
average pressure value with the pressure set point value
to output the result on the switch.
Pressure Temporary fluctuation
P1
Set point value P2
Switch output
operation in
normal conditions
Time t (ms)
t (ms)
<Averaging process>
<Averaging process>
ON
OFF
Time Switch output
ON
operation when
chattering prevention
OFF
function is on
Time 178
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 179
High Precision
Series
ZSE50F/ISE50
Error Correction
Take the following measures when an error occurs.
Error description
LCD display
Contents
Solution
Load current of switch output is more than 80 mA.
Shut off the power supply. After eliminating
the output factor that caused the excess
current, turn the power supply back on.
Pressure is applied during the zero out operation
as follows:
0.071 MPa or more with ISE50/60
7.1 kPa or more with ZSE50F/60F
∗ After displaying for 3 seconds, it will return to the
measuring mode.
Bring
the
pressure
back
to
atmospheric pressure and try using
the zero out function.
OUT1
Over current error
OUT2
Residual pressure error
Supply pressure exceeds the maximum regulating
pressure.
Applied pressure error
Supply pressure is below the minimum regulating
pressure.
The value is above the upper limit of the set pressure
∗ After displaying this message for about 1 seconds,
the switch returns to the measurement mode.
Auto shift error
The value is below the lower limit of the set pressure
∗ After displaying this message for about 1 seconds,
the switch returns to the measurement mode.
Reduce/Increase supply pressure to
within the regulating pressure range.
Set the pressure again so that the sum
of the applied pressure and pressure
set point value at the time of auto shift
input will not fall out of the set pressure
range.
Internal data error
Internal data error
System error
Internal data error
Shut off the power supply. Turn the
power supply back on. If the power
should not come back on, please
contact SMC for an inspection.
Sensors
Internal data error
∗ The upper limits and lower limits are shown in the table below.
Compound pressure
Positive pressure
Upper limit
Set pressure range
Lower limit
100.0 to 100.0 kPa
–100.0 kPa
100.0 kPa
–0.100 to 1.000 MPa
–0.100 MPa
1.000 MPa
With auto shift function
Compound pressure
3Positive pressure
Upper limit
Set pressure range
Lower limit
–100.0 to 100.0 kPa
–100.0 kPa
100.0 kPa
–1.000 to 1.000 MPa
–1.000 MPa
1.000 MPa
179
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 180
ZSE50F/ISE50
Dimensions
02
ZSE50F/ISE50- T2
G2
30
30
23.4
(In case of NPT 23.9)
20
2-M3 x 0.5 depth 4
18.35
6.4
20
8.45
Piping port
M5 x 0.8 depth 5
Piping port
R, NPT 1/4
7
30
2.5
25.1
8.45
12.4
10.1
ø22
ø14.5
15.2
2.6
10.7
12
7.8
.4
ø3.5
Piping port
G 1/4
Piping port G
180
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 181
High Precision
Series
ZSE50F/ISE50
Dimensions
Bracket A
A
4.5
ø4
.5
15
11.5
40
55
45
20
30
20
1.6
6.5
20
41.5
Bracket A
ZS-24-A
View A
Bracket D
A
1.6
4.5
15
11.5
4.2
40
55
45
Sensors
20
30
20
7.2
41.5
35
7.5
22
Bracket D
ZS-24-D
View A
Cutting dimensions for panel mounting
25.4
43 or more
47.4
70 or more
36
7.8
+0.5
0
+0.5
0
42.4
40
36
The thickness of the panel is from 1 to 3.2 mm.
181
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 182
Air Line
Maintenance
2-color Display
Liquid Removal
Series ISE70/75/75H
®
Coolant
Metal Body Type
(Die-cast aluminum)
For
General
Fluids
For Air
10 MPa • 15 MPa
1 MPa 2-color
(ISE75)
(ISE75H)
(ISE70)
IP67
digital
2-color Display (green and red)
• Selectable from four patterns
ON
q
w
e
r
OFF
red
green
green
red
red
red
green
green
Easily identifiable abnormal readings
10 mm character height
M12 Connector
• Lead wire with M12 connector (5 m)
• Straight and right-angled connectors
With Bracket
• User-selectable mounting orientation
Functions
• Anti-chattering
• Display calibration
• Zero out
• Key lock
• Unit display switching
(Fixed SI unit in Japan)
For Air
• Withstand pressure: Rated pressure x 3
displa settings of PSI
• Model with initial display
is also available as standard.
• Port size
• Rc1/4, NPT1/4, G1/4 (ISO1179)
ISE75 (10 MPa)
MPa
MPa
OUT1
UP
ISE75H (15 MPa)
MPa
OUT1
DOWN
OUT1
UP
SET
DOWN
UP
SET
Plain
PRESSURE SWITCH
182
For General Fluids
ISE70 (1 MPa)
DOWN
SET
Gray
PRESSURE SWITCH
Orange
PRESSURE SWITCH
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 183
2-color Display
Digital Pressure Switch/For Air
Series ISE70
®
How to Order
02
ISE70
1 MPa
43 M
Piping
02
N02
F02
Rc 1/4
Option 2
NPT 1/4
G1/4 (ISO1179)
None
Nil
With bracket
Output
2
3
Color
1
43
Fixed setting:
NPN open collector 1 output (Pin no. 4) +
PNP open collector 1 output (Pin no. 2)
65
Display unit
4
Connector Pin Assignments
Nil
With unit display switching function
M
Fixed SI unit Note)
P
Pressure unit: PSI (Initial value)
Output -43 (Color: Grey)
DC (+)
2 White
OUT1 (PNP)
Blue
4 Black
Note) Mounting screws
are not included.
Option 1
Note) Fixed unit: MPa
DC (–)
OUT1 (NPN)
Nil
None
S
Lead wire with M12 connector (5 m),
straight
L
right-angled
Output -65 (Color: Black)
1 Brown
2 White
3
Blue
4 Black
DC (+)
Sensors
1 Brown
3
A
NC
DC (–)
OUT1 (PNP)
Optional Part No.
When option parts are required separately, use the following part numbers to place an order.
Option
Part no.
Note
OUT1
UP
Bracket
DO
SE
T
ZS-31-A
WN
Bracket B and the bracket assembly
make up one set.
Note: Mounting screws are not included.
Bracket B
Bracket assembly
Lead wire with M12 connector,
straight
ZS-31-B
right-angled
ZS-31-C
183
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 184
ISE70
Specifications
ISE70
Model
0 to 1 MPa
–0.1 to 1 MPa
Set pressure range
Withstand pressure
1.5 MPa
0.01 MPa
Air, lnert gas, Non-flammable gas
Fluid
12 to 24 VDC, Ripple (p-p) 10% or less (with power supply polarity protection)
Current consumption
Output -43: Fixed setting; NPN open collector 1 output (Pin no. 4) + PNP open collector 1 output (Pin no. 2) Note 1)
Output -65: PNP open collector 1 output (Pin no. 4)
Switch output
80 mA
Max. load current
30 V (with NPN output)
1 V or less (with load current of 80 mA)
Residual voltage
2.5 ms (Response time selections with anti-chattering function: 20 ms, 160 ms, 640 ms, 1000 ms, 2000 ms)
Response time
±0.5% F.S.
Repeatability
Hysteresis
Hysteresis mode
3 digit, 7-segment indicator, 2-color display (red and green) can be interlocked with the switch output, Sampling cycle: 5 times/s
Display
±2% F.S. ± 1 digit or less (at 25°C ± 3°C)
Display accuracy
Indication light
Anti-chattering function, Unit display switching function, Zero out function, Key lock function
Functions
IP67 Note 2)
Enclosure
Environmental
resistance
Fluid temperature range
0 to 50°C (with no freezing or condensation)
Operating: 0 to 50°C, Stored: –10 to 60°C (with no freezing or condensation)
Operating and stored: 35 to 85% RH (with no condensation)
Withstand voltage
50 MΩ or more between live parts and enclosure (at 500 VDC Mega)
980 m/s2 in X, Y, Z directions 3 times each (Non energized)
Impact resistance
(Based on 25°C: Operating
temperature range)
Standard
Wetted material
±2% F.S. or less
Compliant with CE Marking and UL/CSA (UL508) standards
Fitting: C3602 (electroless nickel plated), Sensor port: PBT, Sensor pressure receiving area: silicon, O-ring: NBR
02: Rc1/4, N02: NPT1/4, F02: G1/4 (ISO1179) Note 3)
Port size
Lead wire
Lead wire with M12 4-pin pre-wired connector (5 m)
Mass (Weight)
190 g (excluding the lead wire with M12 4-pin pre-wired connector)
Note 1) The NPN and PNP outputs function for a single set point.
Note 2) A FKM gasket is used for sealing the housing.
Note 3) G1/4: Applicable to ISO1179-1
Fixed setting:
NPN open collector output + PNP open collector output
See the operation manual for information on how to
set and on handling precautions.
(the pressure set point for switching the output signal is common to both outputs.)
Maximum 30 V (NPN only), 80 mA, Residual voltage 1 V or less
Output -43
Output -65
DC (+)
(Brown)
OUT1 (NPN)
Load
(Black)
OUT1 (PNP)
+
–
Load
12 to
24 VDC
Main circuit
Main circuit
DC (+)
(Brown)
N.C.
(White)
OUT1 (PNP)
(Black)
Load
(White)
DC (–)
(Blue)
184
DC (–)
(Blue)
+
–
12 to
24 VDC
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 185
2-color Display
Digital Pressure Switch/For General Fluids
Series ISE75/75H
®
How to Order
10 MPa
ISE75
02
43
M
15 MPa
ISE75H
02
43
M
Piping
02
N02
F02
Option 2
Rc 1/4
NPT 1/4
Nil
G1/4 (ISO1179)
None
With bracket
Output
2
3
Color
1
43
Fixed setting:
NPN open collector 1 output (Pin no. 4) +
65
Display unit
4
Connector Pin Assignments
M
Fixed SI unit Note)
Output -43 (Color: Grey)
P
Pressure unit: PSI (Initial value)
1 Brown
DC (+)
2 White
OUT1 (PNP)
Blue
4 Black
Sensors
Nil
3
A
Option 1
Note) Fixed unit: MPa
Nil
None
S
straight
L
right-angled
DC (–)
OUT1 (NPN)
Output -65 (Color: Black)
1 Brown
2 White
3
Blue
4 Black
DC (+)
NC
DC (–)
OUT1 (PNP)
Optional Part No.
When option parts are required separately, use the following part numbers to place an order.
Option
Part No.
Note
OUT1
UP
Bracket
DO
SE
T
WN
Bracket B and the bracket assembly
make up one set.
ZS-31-A
Bracket B
Bracket assembly
straight
ZS-31-B
right-angled
ZS-31-C
185
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 186
ISE75/75H
Specifications
ISE75
ISE75H
0 to 10 MPa
0 to 15 MPa
Set pressure range
0.4 to 10 MPa
0.5 to 15 MPa
Withstand pressure
30 MPa
Model
45 MPa
0.1 MPa
Fluid that will not corrode stainless steel 430 and stainless steel 630
Fluid
12 to 24 VDC, Ripple (p-p) 10% or less (with power supply polarity protection)
Current consumption
Output -43: Fixed setting; NPN open collector 1 output (Pin no. 4) + PNP open collector 1 output (Pin no. 2) Note 1)
Output -65: PNP open collector 1 output (Pin no. 4)
Switch output
80 mA
Max. load current
30 V (with NPN output)
1 V or less (with load current of 80 mA)
Residual voltage
2.5 ms (Response time selections with anti-chattering function: 20 ms, 160 ms, 640 ms, 1000 ms, 2000 ms)
Response time
±0.5% F.S.
Repeatability
Hysteresis
Hysteresis mode
3 ditit, 7-segment indicator, 2-color display (red and green) can be interlocked with the switch output, Sampling cycle: 5 times/s
Display
±2% F.S. ± 1 digit or less (at 25°C ± 3°C)
Display accuracy
Indication light
Anti-chattering function, Unit display switching function, Zero out function, Key lock function
Functions
IP67 Note 2)
Enclosure
Environmental
resistance
Fluid temperature range
–5 to 80°C (with no freezing or condensation)
Operating: –5 to 50°C, Stored: –10 to 60°C (with no freezing or condensation)
Operating and stored: 35 to 85% RH (with no condensation)
Withstand voltage
50 MΩ or more between live parts and enclosure (at 50 VDC Mega)
980 m/s2 in X, Y, Z directions 3 times each (Non energized)
Impact resistance
(Based on 25°C: Operating
temperature range)
Standard
±3% F.S. or less
Compliant with CE Marking and UL/CSA (UL508) standards
Wetted material
Pressure receiving area: Stainless steel 630, Fittings: Stainless steel 430
02: Rc1/4, N02: NPT1/4, F02: G1/4 (ISO1179) Note 3)
Port size
Lead wire
Lead wire with M12 4-pin pre-wired connector (5 m)
Mass (Weight)
210 g (excluding the lead wire with M12 4-pin pre-wired connector)
Note 1) The NPN and PNP outputs function for a single set point.
Note 2) A FKM gasket is used for sealing the housing.
Note 3) G1/4: Applicable to ISO1179-1
Fixed setting:
NPN open collector output + PNP open collector output
See the operation manual for information on how to
set and on handling precautions.
(the pressure set point for switching the output signal is common to both outputs.)
Maximum 30 V (NPN only), 80 mA, Residual voltage 1 V or less
Output -43
Output -65
DC (+)
(Brown)
OUT1 (NPN)
Load
(Black)
OUT1 (PNP)
+
–
Load
12 to
24 VDC
Main circuit
Main circuit
DC (+)
(Brown)
N.C.
(White)
OUT1 (PNP)
(Black)
Load
(White)
DC (–)
(Blue)
186
DC (–)
(Blue)
+
–
12 to
24 VDC
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 187
2-color Display Digital Pressure Switch
For General Fluids
ISE70/75/75H
Series
Unit Description
LCD display
Indication light (Green)
MPa
Displays the switch operation status.
SET button
OUT1
UP
Use this button to switch the mode
and set the set value.
DOWN
SET
UP button
Use this button to change the mode
or increase the ON/OFF set value. It
also allows you to switch to the peak
value display mode.
PRESSURE SWITCH
Displays the current pressure
condition, set mode and error code.
The display mode can be selected
from four options: fixed green
single-color reading, fixed red
single-color reading, green reading
interlocked with output for switching
to red reading, and red reading
interlocked with output for switching
to green reading.
DOWN button
Use this button to change the mode
or decrease the ON/OFF set value.
It also allows you to switch to the
bottom value display mode.
Functions
Error correction
This function eliminates slight differences in the output values and
allows uniformity in the numbers displayed.
Displayed values of the pressure sensor can be calibrated to within
±5% of their readings.
Take the following corrective solutions when error occurs.
±5% R.D.
0
Error description LCD display
Contents
Solution
Overcurrent
error
A load current
greater than 80 mA
is turned on through
either or both of the
switch outputs.
Shut off the power
supply. After eliminating
the output factor that
caused the excess
supply back on.
Residual
pressure
error
A pressure level greater
than ±7% F.S. has been
applied during zero
adjustment. The switch
will automatically return
to measuring mode in
three seconds, however.
Note that the range of
zero adjustment differs
by ±1 digit due to switchto-switch variations.
Bring the pressure
back to atmospheric
pressure and try
using the zero out
function.
+
Applied pressure
: Factory setting display value
set prior to shipment
: Display calibration range
Note) When the display calibration function is used, the set pressure value
may change ±1 digit.
Peak/Bottom hold function
This function constantly detects and updates the maximum and
minimum pressure values and allows to hold the display value.
Key lock function
This function prevents incorrect operations such as changing the set
value accidentally.
Zero out (Zero ADJ) function
Applied
pressure
error
The measured pressure reading can be adjusted to zero.
More specifically, the factory-set reading can be corrected to within ±7% F.S.
Unit display switching function
Supply pressure
exceeds the maximum
set pressure.
Supply pressure is
below the minimum
set pressure.
Reduce/Increase
supply pressure to
within the set
pressure range.
Internal data error
The reading unit can be selected.
Unit/Reading resolution
ISE70
ISE75/75H
Pa
0.01 MPa
0.1 MPa
kgf/cm2
0.1
1
bar
0.1
1
psi
1
1 (x 10)
A large bore cylinder or ejector consumes a large amount of air in operation and
may experience a temporary drop in the primary pressure. This function prevents
detection of such temporary drops in primary pressure as abnormal pressure.
Internal data error
System error
Internal data error
Shut off the power
supply. Turn the
power supply back
on.
Internal data error
Note) If the switch will not recover to normal even after all of the
above mentioned solutions have been applied, consult SMC for
investigation.
Response time selections: 20 ms, 160 ms, 640 ms, 1000 ms, 2000 ms
187
Sensors
Displayed pressure value
Display calibration function
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 188
ISE70/75/75H
Dimensions
ISE70/ 75/ 75H
34
9
39
MPa
OUT1
70
UP
DOWN
Lead wire with M12
connector (5 m)
straight
20
14.5
SET
15.7
(28.7)
24
(38.2)
Lead wire with M12
connector (5 m)
right-angled
Note) The connector faces down
(toward the piping).
Do not attempt to rotate
the connector, as it is not
rotatable.
Piping port
02: Rc 1/4
N02: NPT 1/4
F02: G1/4 (ISO1179)
Note) Compatible to ISO1179-1.
Color
1
2
With bracket
3
34
9
44.5
MPa
DOWN
1 Brown
DC (+)
2 White
OUT1 (PNP)
3
SET
Blue
4 Black
14.5
90
Connector Pin
Assignments
Output -43
(Color: Grey)
OUT1
UP
4
DC (–)
OUT1 (NPN)
Output -65
(Color: Black)
.5
2-6
1 Brown
18.3
2 White
3
Blue
4 Black
(28.7)
46
60
(38.2)
24
6
Piping port
02: Rc 1/4
N02: NPT 1/4
F02: G1/4 (ISO1179)
Note) Compatible to ISO1179-1.
188
35
DC (+)
NC
DC (–)
OUT1 (PNP)
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 189
Air Line
Maintenance
with Backlight
(For vacuum)
(For positive pressure)
Liquid Removal
Series ZSE5B/ISE5B
Coolant
For use in various fluid applications
Stainless steel diaphragms
• Hydraulic fluid • Silicon oil • Lubricating oil
• Dry air • Carbon dioxide • Argon
• Drainage-containing air • Ammonia • Nitrogen gas
• Freon
Stainless steel 630 is used for the sensor unit and
stainless steel 304 is used for the fitting.
For General Purpose Fluids
Leakage rate: 1 x 10-4 atm cc/s
The use of an electron beam to weld the sensor unit and
fitting enables pressure calibration of various fluids, which
were not previously applicable, such as air containing
moisture, and oil.
Two independent pressure settings
This feature is ideal when a change of vacuum suction
pad size requires two different set pressures, or switching
of positive pressure lines requires confirmation of two
pressures.
Multiple units available with unit switching function
Display units can be easily selected.
Vacuum
mmHg ↔ kPa ↔ PSI ↔ kgf/cm2 ↔ bar
Positive
Pressure
MPa ↔ PSI ↔ kgf/cm2 ↔ bar
Variety of switch output modes
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
P2
P1
n2
(Standard)
Window
comparator
mode
ON
Sensors
Hysteresis
mode
n1
(Inverted)
ON
OFF
OFF
P1
P2
(Standard)
n1
n2
(Inverted)
Exact detection of atmospheric pressure (for vacuum)
Detects restored atmospheric pressure after vacuum
release pressure is applied.
Data storage function
Since a dedicated IC (EEPROM) is used, set data will be
stored for 100,000 hours (approximately 11 years) even
without power.
Panel mounting available
A special adaptor permits panel mounting.
189
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 190
ZSE5B/ISE5B
How to Order
Positive
Pressure
ISE5B
L
Vacuum
ZSE5B
L
Unit specification
02
R 1/4
Nil
T2
NPTF 1/4
M
Fixed SI units Note)
Note) Fixed units
ISE5B: MPa
ZSE5B: kPa
Note) M5 x 0.8 female thread
provided inside piping
Lead wire length
L
3m
26
27
67
Analog output (1 to 5 V)
Panel mount adaptor part no.
(Panel adaptor A + Panel adaptor B + Mounting bracket)
ZS-22-E
Panel adaptor A ………… ZS-22-03
Panel adaptor B ………… ZS-22-02
Mounting bracket ……….. ZS-22-04
ZS-22-D
(With 4 pcs. of M3 tapping screws)
Optional bracket
Panel adaptor A
Panel adaptor B
Mounting bracket
190
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 191
with Backlight
Series
ZSE5B/ISE5B
Specifications
Vacuum
ZSE5B
Model
Positive pressure
Note 1) Equipped with unit switching function [The type without the unit
switching function will have a fixed SI unit (kPa or MPa).]
ZSE: When the value of P1 and P2 are the same, or when P1 > P2
is within 2 digits, the hysteresis will automatically be 2 digits for
the set value of P1.
ISE: When the value of P1 and P2 are the same, or when P1 > P2
is within 3 digits, the hysteresis will automatically be 3 digits for
the set value of P1.
ZSE: Since the hysteresis is 2 digits, separate P1 and P2 by 5 digits
or more when setting.
ISE: Since the hysteresis is 3 digits, separate P1 and P2 by 7 digits
or more when setting.
∗ 1 digit is the minimum pressure display unit. (See the table above.)
Note 3) The analog output type has no overcurrent detection function.
Operating Unit Descriptions
LCD
UP Button
PRESSURE SWITCH
Increases ON/OFF setting value.
Changes to the peak display
mode.
DOWN Button
MPa
RESET
SET
LED LED
() (Green)
Displays OUT1 operation status.
Displays present pressure.
Displays ON/OFF setting value.
Displays error code.
Displays unit.
Decreases ON/OFF setting value.
Use for changing to the bottom
display mode, unit switching or
output mode.
LED (Red)
Displays OUT2 operation status.
Flashes when an error occurs.
RESET Button
Reset the switch by pressing the UP
and Down buttons simultaneously.
Clears when an abnormality occurs.
Clears the display to zero.
SET Button
Changes to the setting mode.
Press and hold for one second or
longer to change to the unit
switching or output mode.
191
Sensors
ISE5B
Set pressure range
–100 to 100 kPa
–0.1 to 1 MPa
1.5 MPa
200 kPa
—
2
kPa
0.01
MPa
—
Note 1)
mmHg
—
10
Minimum display unit
kgf/cm2
0.1
0.02
PSI
1
0.2
bar
0.1
0.02
Indicator light
Illuminates when ON. (OUT1: Green, OUT2: Red)
Response frequency
200 Hz (5 ms)
Hysteresis
Fixed (2 digits)
Fixed (3 digits)
Non-corrosive fluid for stainless steel 304, stainless steel 630
Fluid
±3% F.S. or less
Repeatability
±1% F.S. or less
Supply voltage
NPN open collector 30 V, 80 mA or less PNP open collector 80 mA or less
45 mA or less
Current consumption
Indicator light: Red light blinks, Error code displayed on LCD
Error display
3 1/2 digit LCD (character height 10 mm)
Pressure display
(Overcurrent Note 3)), Excess pressure, Data error, Pressure at zero clear
Self diagnostic function
500 Vp-p, Pulse width 1 µS, Rise time 1 nS
Noise resistance
Withstand voltage
250 VAC 50/60 Hz for 1 min. between external terminals and case
2 MΩ (50 VDC) between external terminals and case
10 to 500 Hz at whichever is smaller, amplitude 1.5 mm or acceleration 98 m/s2, in X, Y, Z directions for 2 hrs. each
980 m/s2 in X, Y, Z directions, 3 times each
Impact resistance
Grommet oil resistant heavy duty cord –26: ø3.4, 0.2 mm2, 3 cores, 3 m –27, –67: ø3.5, 0.14 mm2, 4 cores, 3 m
Lead wire
126 g (with 3 m lead wire)
Weight
02: R 1/4, M5 x 0.8 T2: NPTF 1/4, M5 x 0.8
Port size
IP40
Enclosure
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 192
ZSE5B/ISE5B
Series
Pressure Setting
Setting procedure
Initial
setting
Normal
operation
Pressure
setting
Select a display unit
and output mode.
Display the pressure
operation and perform
the switch operation.
Set the pressure for
switch output.
Initial setting
1. Set Mode
SMC
2. Display Units
SMC
PRESSURE SWITCH
Note)
3. Select OUT1 Output Mode
SMC
PRESSURE SWITCH
4. Select OUT2 Output Mode
SMC
PRESSURE SWITCH
PRESSURE SWITCH
Note)
SET
RESET
RESET
SET
SET
Press the SET button and hold
for one second or longer. “1.3” is
displayed as shown above and
the unit flasher.
Note) “1.3” indicates the micro
computer's program
version.
SET
Press the
SET button.
Select a display unit by pressing the button.
For high pressure:
MPa → PSI → kgf/cm2 → bar
For low pressure:
mmHg → kPa → PSI → kgf/cm2 → bar
SET
RESET
RESET
Press the
SET button.
SET
SET
Setting is completed
when the SET
button is pressed.
Out1 changes between and
by pressing the button.
: Normal output
: Inverted output
Out2 changes between and
by pressing the button.
: Normal output
: Inverted output
(Refer to Table 1 .)
(Refer to Table 1 .)
Unit display changes for the type with
the unit switching function only.
The type without the unit switching
function will have a fixed SI unit (kPa
or MPa).
Table 1 Output mode
ON
YES
•
OFF
[P]
≥
H
H (fixed hysteresis)
= 2 digits (ZSE5B) or 3 digits (ISE5B)
H
ON
NO
OUT1
OFF
Hysteresis mode
P-2
P-1
Pressure →
P-1
•
•
Hysteresis mode
P-2
Pressure →
Output mode
ON
YES
∗ OUT2 is the same.
OFF
[n]
n-2
n-1
Pressure →
≥
H
H (fixed hysteresis)
= 2 digits (ZSE5B) or 3 digits (ISE5B)
H
ON
NO
192
•
OFF
n-1
Pressure →
n-2
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 193
with Backlight
Series
ZSE5B/ISE5B
Pressure Setting
Setting procedure
1. Setting Value Input Mode
2. OUT1 Setting Value (1) Input
PRESSURE SWITCH
PRESSURE SWITCH
PRESSURE SWITCH
SET
mmHg
RESET
RESET
SET
SET
RESET
Press the
SET button.
button: Increases the setting value
button: Decreases the setting value
Press the SET button.
SET
(Refer to Table 2 when using in
vacuum.
PRESSURE SWITCH
SET
PRESSURE SWITCH
SET
RESET
Press the
SET button.
SET
SET
RESET
Press the
SET button.
Setting is completed
when the SET
button is pressed.
SET
Table 2 For use as a vacuum switch
The setting range for the ZSE5 pressure switch is –100 kPa to 100 kPa.
Note that the setting method is different from the conventional digital pressure switch.
<Example> When switched at –50 kPa or higher and
the hysteresis is 10 kPa
• Set P1 at –40 kPa and P2 at –50 kPa.
Sensors
1. Hysteresis mode
P2:
P1:
–50 kPa –40 kPa
Negative
pressure
0
Positive
pressure
Note) Pressure must be P1 > P2, which is the opposite of
conventional switches.
Note) Set the hysteresis at more than 2 digits.
∗ “Digit” is the minimum setting unit for pressure.
1 digit 2 kPa
ON
Standard output
OFF
ON
Inverted output
OFF
Relationship between pressure and switch output
2. Window comparator mode
<Example> When switched at –30 kPa or
higher and –70 kPa or lower
• Set P1 at –70 kPa and P2 at –30 kPa.
Note) Hysteresis is automatically set at 2 digits in case
of the window comparator mode.
P1:
–70 kPa
P2:
–30 kPa
Negative
pressure
ON
-66kPa
–66
kPa
0
Positive
pressure
–34
-34kPa
kPa
Standard output
OFF
ON
OFF
Inverted output
Relationship between pressure and switch output
193
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 194
ZSE5B/ISE5B
Error Correction
Other Functions
• Peak Display Mode
Take the following corrective actions when errors occur.
Displays the peak pressure value (highest
degree of vacuum) when the UP button is pressed
during pressure display. The LCD displays “H”.
Press the UP button again to return to the
previous display.
PRESSURE SWITCH
RESET
Display
SET
• Bottom Display Mode
RESET
SET
Solution
Set data was changed
by accident for an
unknown reason.
Push the UP and
Down buttons to reset
all data.
Out1 load current
is exceeding 80 mA.
Turn off the power and
replace the load
connected to OUT1.
During output ON,
OUT1 without load may
have shorted or is
currently shorting the
power supply, etc.
Confirm that OUT1 is
not shorted, and then
reset the switch.
OUT2 load current
is exceeding 80 mA.
Turn off the power and
replace the load
connected to OUT2.
During output ON,
OUT2 without load may
have shorted or is
currently shorting the
power supply, etc.
Confirm that OUT2 is
not shorted, and then
reset the switch.
Max. operating pressure has
been exceeded for more
than 2 seconds: 1.5 times
the max. operating pressure
for positive pressure, or 0.5
MPa for vacuum.
Reduce the supply
pressure to below the
maximum pressure rating,
and then reset the switch.
Note)
Displays the bottom pressure value (lowest
degree of vacuum) when the DOWN button is
pressed during pressure display. The LCD
displays “L”.
Press the DOWN button again to return to the
previous display.
PRESSURE SWITCH
Contents
Note)
• Reset Function
Simultaneously pressing the UP and DOWN
buttons will reset the switch.
1) Reset will cause the following during normal
operation.
• Clears peak or bottom pressure display, or
resets to zero clear.
2) Reset will cause the following when an error
has occurred.
• Display changes to the condition at the time of
power supply input while retaining the data set
in the setting mode. (The system resets.)
• In case of a data error, the setting mode is
displayed. When the setting is completed, the
display changes to the condition at the time of
power supply input. (The system resets.)
Note) The reset function does not work in the
setting mode.
PRESSURE SWITCH
RESET
SET
Example of Internal Circuits and Wiring
When compared with the
Apply atmospheric
atmospheric pressure, a
pressure, and then
pressure of ±0.07 MPa for reset the switch.
1MPa type, or ±7 kPa for
vacuum and 100 kPa types
is applied at zero clear.
Note) Not available for analog output type.
Construction
Lead wire colors inside [ ] are those prior to conformity with IEC standards.
Brown DC (+)
[Red]
1 to 5 V (±5% F.S.)
Load impedance:
1 kΩ or more
Main circuit
-26
Analog Output Type
LED Green
–
LED Red
Main circuit
Black OUT1
[White]
Load
Max. 80 mA↓
LED Red
White OUT2
[Yellow]
+
12 to 24 VDC
–
Load
Blue DC (–)
[Black]
Brown DC (+)
[Red
Main circuit
Black OUT1
Max. 80 mA
[White]
→
Load
LED Green
White OUT2 Max. 80 mA
[Yellow]
→
Load
LED Red
194
Load
Max. 80mA↓
LED Green
-67
PNP Open Collector
Max. 80 mA
Blue DC (–)
[Black]
12 to 24 VDC
Brown DC (+)
[Red]
-27
NPN Open Collector
Max. 30 V, 80 mA
Residual voltage:
1 V or less
Black OUT(Analog output)
[White]
+
Blue DC (–)
[Black]
Parts list
No.
+
–
12 to 24 VDC
1
2
3
4
5
6
Description
Indicator panel
Body
Seal
Lead wire
Pressure sensor
Fitting
Material
Denatured PPO
PBT
NBR
Vinyl chloride (Vinyl sheath)
Stainless steel 630
Stainless steel 304
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 195
with Backlight
Series
ZSE5B/ISE5B
Specific Product Precautions
Be sure to read before handling.
Wiring
Warning
Others
Caution
1. Withstand voltage
Withstand voltage between the metal fitting and lead wire of the switch is
250 V. Do not apply voltage in excess of 250 V.
1. Panel mounting
Insert the panel adaptor A from the front side of the panel.
↓
Firmly secure the panel adaptor A with the panel adaptors B from the
back side of the panel.
Caution
1. When there is a danger of induction noise being generated in the piping,
ground the piping.
↓
Insert a pressure switch in to the panel adaptor A from the back side
of the panel.
↓
Pressure Source
Secure the switch with a mounting bracket.
Panel adaptor A
Warning
1. Operating fluid
Sections in contact with fluid are made of stainless steel 630 (pressure
sensor) and stainless steel 304 (fitting). Use a fluid that will not corrode
these materials. The corrosion resistance of stainless steel 630 and that
of stainless steel 304 are almost the same. For reference, non-corrosive
fluids and gases for stainless steel 304 are shown below.
Drainage-containing air
Hydraulic fluid (JIS-K2213)
Silicon oil (JIS-K2213)
Lubrication oil (JIS-K6301)
Fluoro carbon
Carbon dioxide
Ammonia
Argon
Gaseous nitrogen
Pressure switch
Mounting bracket
195
Sensors
Dry air
Panel adaptor B
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 196
ZSE5B/ISE5B
Dimensions
Standard type
30
39
4-ø2.7
Depth 6.5
20
Sensor
Welded parts
Fitting
20
30
SMC PRESSURE SWITCH
53.5
RESET
02: R 1/4
T2: NPTF 1/4
5
3000
Lead wire length
8.5
SET
M5 x 0.8 depth 5
12.3
17
28
With bracket
50
40
30
(44)
4-ø4.5
39
30
20
SMC PRESSURE SWITCH
53.5
RESET
Bracket
ZS-22-D
3000
Lead wire length
8.5
SET
12.3
17
28
Panel mounting
Panel adaptor A
ZS-22-03
41.8
40
4.3
36 +0.5
0
36 +0.5
0
40
58.5
36
Mounting
bracket
ZS-22-04
SMC PRESSURE SWITCH
RESET
SET
Panel adaptor B
ZS-22-02
196
(41.6)
Panel thickness: 1 to 3.2 mm
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 197
Compact Manometer
Air Blow
Series PPA
Air Tool
Measures the collision
pressure received by an
air blown workpiece.
Pin point sensing head
Refer to page 58 regarding sensing heads.
Confirmation of
air line supply pressure
Confirmation of
regulator set pressure
Compact and lightweight
Portable type weighing only about 100 g (unit 50 g, battery 50 g) can also be held in
the palm of the hand.
Measurement unit switching for global use
Freely selectable display units and easy unit conversions also make it ideal for the
SI unit transition period.
Backlight for easy viewing in dark locations
Continuous one year operation is possible with two AA batteries (3 V).
The digital display of line
pressure eliminates human
reading errors.
It is also possible to check
pulsation in the supply
pressure using the
peak/bottom display
function.
Regulator settings can be
performed more precisely
than with a dial gauge by
viewing the digital display.
Furthermore, since the unit
is battery operated, power
lines are not necessary.
Related products for
line pressure measurement
Convenient for easy line pressure measurement without
removing piping or stopping supply pressure, etc.
Convenient hand strap for carrying
Keeping practical use in mind, the hand strap is a standard feature.
Zero/span calibration is possible
Offset adjustment with the zero clear function, and span calibration with the trimmer
can be performed.
Peak/Bottom hold function
With pressure being displayed, variations in supply pressure can be grasped instantly with
one-touch switching of the display from peak value to bottom value.
Tube coupler
Pressure can be
supplied or stopped
by inserting or
removing the tube.
MPa
POWER
LIGHT
MPa
POWER
LIGHT
Finger valve
Peak display
Pressure can be
easily applied or
released by
switching the
control knob.
Bottom display
Auto power off function to save battery life
Power turns off automatically if not operated for more than 5 minutes.
Case holder is available
The case holder is provided as an option to allow for situations where portability is not required.
197
Sensors
Long service life of 12 months continuous operation
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 198
PPA
How to Order
PPA10 0
Pressure specification
0
1
2
Option/Case holder
–0.1 to 1 MPa (for high pressure)
–101 to 10 kPa (for vacuum)
–10 to 100 kPa (for low pressure)
Without case
With PPA-B
Nil
B
Unit specification
Nil
B
Fixed SI unit Note)
Note) Fixed units
For vacuum/low pressure: kPa
For high pressure:
MPa
One-touch fitting type
Symbol Applicable tube size
N/A
Nil
One-touch fitting
N/A
04
ø4 (mm)
KJH04-M5
06
ø6 (mm)
KJH06-M5
Applicable tube material
N/A
Nylon
Soft nylon
Polyurethane
Specifications
Model
PPA100 for high pressure
PPA101 for vacuum
PPA102 for low pressure
–0.1 to 1 MPa
–101 to 10 kPa
–10 to 100 kPa
3-digit LCD with backlight
Pressure display
1/100
Pressure display resolution
Note 1)
Minimum
display units
kPa
——
1
1
MPa
0.01
——
——
mmHg
——
5
——
kgf/cm2
0.1
0.01
0.01
inHg
——
0.2
——
PSI
1
0.1
0.1
bar
0.1
0.01
0.01
Error display
Functions
Withstand pressure
Fluid
Power supply
Battery life
Excess pressure, Memory data error, Change battery signal
Peak/Bottom display, Backlight, Auto power OFF
Zero clear, Unit display switching
1.5 MPa
200 kPa
200 kPa
3 V(DC), Type AA dry cell battery x 2 pcs. Note 2)
12 months continuous operation (without back lighting)
Response speed
250 ms
Display accuracy
±2% F.S. or less (Temperature conditions: at 25°C)
Repeatability
±1% F.S. or less (Temperature conditions: at 25°C)
Piping port
Ambient temperature
M5 x 0.8
Ambient humidity
35 to 85% RH (with no condensation)
Impact resistance
100 G in X, Y, Z directions, 3 times each
Enclosure
Weight
IP40 (IEC standard)
Approx. 100 g (Unit 50 g, Batteries 50 g)
Note 1) Equipped with unit switching function [The type without the unit switching function will have a fixed SI unit (kPa or
MPa).]
Note 2) Two pieces of type AA dry cell batteries (manganese R6 or alkaline LR6) are not included.
198
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 199
Compact Manometer
Operating Unit Descriptions
Series
PPA
Operation and Functions
(PPA100 shown. Unit: MPa)
Initial Setting
Be sure to initialize the operating unit set when
using for the first time and after changing
batteries, as the unit will indicate memory data
error.
1. Press and hold the
POWER button for 3
seconds or more.
“P” for peak display
“b” for bottom display
1. The display will show
“Err”. Turn the power
OFF.
2. Press and hold down for 6
seconds or longer. The
unit will be zero cleared.
When this happens,
“CAL” will appear on the
LCD.
LCD
• Present pressure display
• Peak/Bottom value display
• Unit display
MPa
POWER
3. When zero clear is
completed, the unit is
ready for operation.
LIGHT
MPa
In lock mode
POWER
POWER button for 6
seconds or more.
LIGHT
POWER button
LIGHT button
• Power ON/OFF
• Peak mode switching
• Turns on back light
MPa
POWER
LIGHT
3. Release the POWER
button.
MPa
POWER
LIGHT
Press the POWER
button.
• The power comes ON as it is
pressed.
• When pressed and held for 6
seconds or more, the unit is
zero cleared.
MPa
POWER
LIGHT
Power OFF
Press and hold the
POWER button for
3 seconds or more.
• When pressed and held for 3
seconds or more, the power
turns OFF.
• When there is no button
operation for more than 5
minutes, the power turns OFF.
(automatic power OFF
function)
POWER
LIGHT
199
Sensors
Power ON
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 200
PPA
Operation and Functions
(PPA100 shown. Unit: MPa)
Peak/Bottom Display
Unit Display Switching
POWER and LIGHT
buttons for 3
seconds or more.
1. When pressed
continuously for 3
seconds or more, the
unit on the LCD will
flash.
Note) Since this is combined with power OFF
operation, the button should be released
at the point when “P” or “b” is displayed.
Press the POWER button. Do this when pressure is
2. The unit will change.
(See the table below.)
POWER
Peak Display
Displays the maximum
pressure value and “P”
appears on the LCD.
The display will change if
pressure increases
beyond the pressure
value that is being held.
3. The unit is set, and
switching is finished.
kgf
MPa
being displayed.
LIGHT
MPa
POWER
LIGHT
2. Press the LIGHT button.
Unit display changes for
the type with the unit
switching function only.
The type without the unit
switching function will
have a fixed SI unit (kPa
or MPa).
kgf
MPa
POWER
LIGHT
Press the POWER button. Bottom Display
Displays the minimum
pressure value and “b”
appears on the LCD.
The display will change if
pressure falls below the
pressure value that is
being held.
MPa
POWER
LIGHT
(These modes are
convenient for confirming
Press the POWER button. pressure fluctuations.)
3. Press the POWER button.
MPa
bar
POWER
MPa
LIGHT
POWER
High pressure
(PPA100)
MPa → bar
→ PSI → kgf
Vacuum
(PPA101)
kPa → bar → PSI
→ inHg → mmHg
LIGHT
Low pressure
(PPA102)
kPa → bar
→ PSI → kgf
Note) The “inHg” unit cannot be displayed.
Turning On the Backlight
Press the LIGHT button.
Auto Power OFF Function
When the power is turned
ON and there is no button
operation for more than 5
minutes, the power will
turn OFF.
POWER
LIGHT
Note) For canceling this
function, refer to
the functions and
operation of the
lock mode (below).
MPa
POWER
LIGHT
Zero Clear
Press and hold the
POWER button for 6
seconds or more.
Lock Mode (Auto Power OFF Cancel)
Press and hold the
POWER and LIGHT
buttons for 6 seconds
or more.
MPa
POWER
200
LIGHT
The auto power OFF
function is canceled by
activating the lock mode
(auto power OFF
cancel).
When continuously
pressed for 6 seconds or
more, “L” is displayed on
the LCD.
Moreover, when the
power is turned OFF, the
lock mode is released.
It normally lights up while
the button is being
pressed. In the lock
mode, it lights up when
pressed and turns off
when pressed again.
However, the maximum
lighting time is
approximately one
minute.
The zero point displayed
at atmospheric pressure
can be automatically
adjusted. By this means
it is possible to eliminate
a display discrepancy at
atmospheric pressure.
• Turn the power OFF.
MPa
POWER
LIGHT
• Release the supply
pressure to the
atmosphere.
• When continuously
pressed for 6 seconds or
longer, zero clear is
performed and “CAL” is
displayed on the LCD.
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 201
Compact Manometer
Series
PPA
Dimensions
Scale: 70%
Connecting tube port
40
20
One-touch fitting (included)
PPA100
LOCK MODE(AUTO POWER OFF CANCEL)
POWER
LIGHT
BATTERY 1.5Vx2 LR6,R6P
AX
LIGHT
180
110
POWER
X Refer to Note)
MADE IN JAPAN
Body
Span calibration
+
–
–
+
Type AA dry cell batteries (2 pcs.)
Note) Dimension X includes
the One-touch fitting.
ø4
ø6
ø1/4"
123
124
126
(Front)
(Back)
Option/Case holder
Fitting port size
M5 x 0.8
44
Thread depth 5
6.8
9.2
4.5
2
ø4.5
120
)
(R
2-
25
15
SMC
18
5
Sensors
20
29
201
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 202
PPA
Error Correction
Maintenance
Take the following corrective actions when errors occur.
• Span calibration method
Caution
Display
Contents
Entire display
flashes
Solution
Pressure being applied is
above the rating.
Operate within the rated
pressure range.
Memory data has probably been
corrupted in some way.
Perform auto zero
adjustment.
Battery voltage is low.
Replace the batteries.
Do not touch the span calibration trimmer except when performing
span calibration.
1. Perform zero clear at atmospheric pressure.
2. Apply the maximum rated pressure, and calibrate the span while
comparing with a standard pressure gauge.
3. If the display value of the compact manometer is “0” after returning to
atmospheric pressure, then calibration is complete. If the display value is
not "0," calibrate again by repeating step 2.
Compact
manometer
Standard
pressure gauge
Trimmer
Compressor
• Replacing the batteries
When battery voltage becomes low the entire LCD will flash.
When the LCD flashes replace the batteries. Use two AA dry cell
batteries.
Caution
To replace the batteries, turn the power OFF and replace them
within approximately 30 seconds.
When not completed within 30 seconds, “Err” will be displayed. In
that case, perform zero clear once again.
In the event that the display runs out of control, remove the batteries for
one minute or longer, and then perform zero clear again after inserting
the batteries and turning on the power.
Related products useful for line pressure measurement
These products are convenient for measuring line pressure easily without the need to remove piping or stop supply pressure, etc.
Switching between pressurization and atmospheric
release can be easily performed by switching the control
knob.
Pressure can be supplied or stopped by inserting or
removing a tube.
Finger Valve
Tube Coupler
Series VHK
Series KC
Specifications
Applicable tubing
Valve type
2 port valve, 3 port valve
Tubing material
Fluid
Air
Tubing outside diameter
Proof pressure
1.5 MPa
1.0 MPa
Operating vacuum pressure Note 1)
–100 kPa (10 Torr)
0 to 60°C
Applicable tubing material Note 2)
Accessory (option)
Bracket
Note 1) For a vacuum application use a VHK2 (2 way valve).
Note 2) Use caution with soft nylon and polyurethane at the maximum operating
pressure. (For further details, refer to catalog CAT.E501-(B), “Fittings &
Tubing for Pneumatic Piping.”)
ø4, ø6, ø8, ø10, ø12
Specifications
Fluid
Air
1.0 MPa
Proof pressure
3.0 MPa
Ambient and fluid temperature 0 to 60°C
Thread
Mounting
JIS B0203 (taper threads for piping)
Nut
JIS B0211 class 2 (metric fine screw thread)
Thread sealant
With sealant (standard)
Copper-free application
Part C3604BD (electroless nickel plated)
JIS symbols
2 port valve
I
A
P
202
3 port valve
I
A
P R
Main part materials
Body
C3604BD, PBT
Stud
C3604BD (thread)
Chuck spring
SUS304
Guide
C3604BD, POM
Collet release bushing
POM
Valve retainer
POM
Stopper
C3604BD, POM
Seal O-ring
NBR
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 203
Air Line
Maintenance
Air Blow
Air Leakage Tester
Made to Order
Air Leakage
World's first external connection type measuring instrument for air flow rate
IN502-07-A
Measuring air leakage for each line and equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Measuring air flow
Sensors
Easy piping installation at an extra port (3/8 B).
Measuring can be performed for each line or equipment.
Simple operation with measuring time of 5 to 10 minutes.
Wide measuring range from 300 to 3000 l/min (ANR).
Portable: Battery operated and does not require any other power
supply preparation.
The energy saving automatic power shut off function turns power
OFF when not operated for more than 10 minutes.
Other measuring items
1. Ejector
2. Purge air
3. Cooling blow of dies, etc.
Fixed discharge air flow rate measurement
(Cannot be measured while in operation.)
IN502-07-A
Model
Flow rate display range
0 to 9999 l/min (ANR)
l/min (ANR), CFM x 10 -1
Flow rate display unit
Flow rate display resolution
l/min (ANR)
0.1 to 1.0 MPa
1.0 MPa
Pressure display unit
MPa
±15% of reading [300 to 3000 l/min (ANR) ∗]
Flow measuring accuracy
Air
Fluid
Leakage
10 cc/min or less (based on 0°C, 1 atm)
3 VDC, Type AA dry cell battery x 2
Approx. 720 measurements
Battery life
Rc 3/8
Port size
Weight
1.7 kg (without batteries)
∗ The measuring error may be greater than ±15% outside the flow range.
203
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 204
Air Leakage Tester
Unit Descriptions
Pressure supply
BATTERY
Rc 3/8
SET button
Enter and set a pressure level
SET
SELECT
RESET
Type AA dry cell battery x 2
POWER
Display
LIGHT
CLOSE
Nozzle holder
SUPPLY
OPEN
SELECT button
Holders for unused nozzles
Select nozzle size, flow rate display
unit, and measuring method
EXHAUST
AIR LEAK TESTER
Switch valve
HOLDER
HOLDER
Pressure
exhaust
Dimensions
17
220
( 24 )
(15)
120
140
SET
SELECT
POWER
LIGHT
CLOSE
OPEN
5.5
AIR LEAK TESTER
Nozzle
Operation
Connect the extra port downstream from the stop valve to the pressure supply port of the air leakage tester.
<Initial setting>
<Measuring>
1. Select a nozzle size.
Press the SELECT button and hold for 2 seconds or longer.
When the display indicates as shown below, select the size of the
nozzle which is attached to the EXHAUST outlet on the back side,
and press the SET button.
P1
n_1.0
SELECT
SEL
n_1.5
SELECT
SEL
n_2.0
(Nozzle sizes)
ø1.0
SELECT
Complete
F_1
U_2
P2
ø1.5
1000 to 2000 l/min
ø2.0
2000 to 3000 l/min
(Flow rate display unit)
U_1
l/min
U_2
1) Press the SELECT button to confirm the P2 set pressure range.
2) Gradually close the stop valve to reduce the pressure until it is below the
confirmed set range.
3) Press the SET button when the pressure level is below the set range.
300 to 1000 l/min
2. Select a flow rate display unit.
Select a flow rate display unit, and then press the SET button.
U_1
∗∗∗∗
2. Enter the P2 pressure value.
Select a flow display unit, and then press the SET button.
SELECT
F_1
P1
∗∗∗∗
Press the SELECT button and hold for 2 seconds or longer.
SEL
1. Enter the P1 pressure value.
Fully open the stop valve and press the SET button.
CFM
∗∗∗∗
SELECT
P2
∗∗∗∗
The set pressure is displayed while the
SELECT button is pressed.
3. Turn the knob to OPEN.
The P3 pressure will decrease. When the pressure is stabilized,
press the SET button.
P3
∗∗∗∗
4. Calculate the flow.
Based on the entered pressure values, the flow rate is
automatically calculated and displayed.
CAL
U1
∗∗∗∗
Flow display
204
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 205
Non-contact Type Sensor for
Detection of Workpiece Presence
Air Catch Sensor
Series ISA2
Air Purge
Stable detection of
0.01
to
0.5
mm
clearance
Due to the pneumatic bridge circuit and semiconductor
pressure sensor, the non-contact type sensor is hardly
affected by fluctuations in the supply pressure.
Plug connectors (Centralized wiring)
Requires less man hours to wire.
Easy to add and remove manifold stations.
Terminal block box
Sensors
Modular construction
Requires less man hours to wire.
With regulator + 2 port solenoid valve
With 2 port solenoid valve
205
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 206
ISA2
Optimum position is known at a glance.
LED level meter
Above set position
Red
Extraneous
material
Easy-to-operate
W
large dial
Set position
Green
W
Scale provides
guidelines for set
position.
Below set position
Green
W
Minimum operating pressure 30
kPa (ISA2-G)
Energy consumption can be reduced compared with the conventional models (Conventional models: 50 kPa)
Position of supply port: Either right side or left side is available.
2 wiring methods
Variations
Model
Operating
pressure range
Individual
wiring
Output type
Mounting
Number of
manifold stations
Port size
Enclosure
206
ISA2-H
30 to 200 kPa
50 to 200 kPa
Detection distance 0.01 to 0.25 mm
Electrical entry
Centralized
wiring
ISA2-G
0.03 to 0.5 mm
NPN open connector, PNP open collector
Lead wire with connector (Individual wiring)
Terminal block box (Centralized wiring)
DIN rail, Bracket
1 to 6 stations
Rc, NPT, G 1/8
IP66 (IP65 for solenoid valve. Regulator
and pressure gauge are open type.)
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 207
Air Catch Sensor
Series
ISA2
How to Order
Manifold
Without control unit
IISA2 N PL
3 B
With control unit
IISA2 C SL
3 B 1 D
E2
Pressure gauge of regulator Note 1)
Without pressure gauge Note 2)
A∗
embedded
E2 MPa single notation 0.2 Square
pressure gauge
Z2∗ PSI single notation MPa
E4 MPa single notation 0.4
pressure
G2 MPa single notation 0.2 Round
gauge
P2∗ MPa-PSI double notation MPa
G4 MPa single notation 0.4
Control unit
C
V
Electrical entry and supply port position
SR
SL
PR
PL
Note 1) Due to new Japanese weight and
measurement legislation, PSI notation
type cannot be sold or used in Japan.
Note 2) The pressure gauge port is Rc 1/8.
∗ Manufactured upon receipt of order.
Centralized wiring with supply port on the right
Centralized wiring with supply port on the left
Individual wiring with supply port on the right
Individual wiring with supply port on the left
Note) The supply port position is the one when the switch
is viewed from the front.
Throttle/Manual lock of 2 port
solenoid valve
Stations
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 station
2 stations
3 stations
4 stations
5 stations
6 stations
Nil
C
W
M
Without throttle, without manual lock
With throttle, without manual lock
Without throttle, with manual lock
With throttle, with manual lock
Throttle
B
D
Manual lock
Without bracket
With bracket
With mounting
bracket for DIN rail
Note) DIN rail must be
ordered separately.
(Refer to the page
221.)
Electrical entry of 2 port solenoid valve
D : DIN connector D0: DIN connector T : Conduit terminal
DL: DIN connector
(Without connector) TL: Conduit terminal
(With indicator light)
(With indicator light)
Voltage of 2 port
solenoid valve
1
2
3
4
5
6
36
100 VAC
200 VAC
110 VAC
220 VAC
24 VDC
12 VDC
230 VAC
207
Sensors
Sensors
Measuring
Measuring
Instruments
Instruments
Option
Nil
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 208
ISA2
How to Order
For single and double notation type and additional stations
ISA2
Air Catch Sensor
E2 1
G
Detection distance
Electrical entry
0.01 to 0.25 mm
0.03 to 0.5 mm
Nil
Straight
Rc 1/8
NPT 1/8
G 1/8
N
F∗
1
5
Nil
NPN output
PNP output
Individual wiring
G
H
∗ Made to order
Pressure gauge Note 1)
A∗
Right angle
L∗
Centralized wiring
Without pressure gauge Note 2)
embedded
E2 MPa single notation 0.2 Square
pressure gauge
E4 MPa single notation 0.4
pressure
G2 MPa single notation 0.2 Round
gauge
G4 MPa single notation 0.4
Note 1) Due to new Japanese weight and
measurement legislation, PSI notation
type cannot be sold or used in Japan.
Note 2) The pressure gauge port is Rc 1/8.
∗ Manufactured upon receipt of order.
N
Without lead wire
P
Terminal block
box
∗ Manufactured upon receipt
of order.
Ordering Examples
Without control unit
Centralized wiring
Individual wiring
Centralized wiring
air catch sensor
Terminal block box
Centralized wiring/Supply port right
Individual wiring
air catch sensor
Centralized wiring air catch sensor
Terminal block box
ISA2-HE41P
ISA2-GE41N
ISA2-GE41P
3
0
3
PU
L L SET
6
Supply port
Supply port
IN
IN
9
0.2
0.1
0
6
0.3
MPa
0
Right
0.2
MPa
Left
3
0
9
0.1
0.4
0
0.2
6
0.4
0
0.1
0
0.2
6
9
0.3
MPa
0.4
Supply port
PU
L L SET
9
0.3
MPa
3
PU
L L SET
0.1
0
0.2
0.3
MPa
IN
0.4
Right
DIN rail mounting
bracket
Stations
1
6
0.3
Bracket
Stations
0
PU
L L SET
9
0.1
0.4
3
0
PU
L L SET
DIN rail
mounting
bracket
Stations
1
1
2
3
IISA2NSR-1B1 set (1 station manifold part number)
∗ISA2-GE41P1 set (Air catch sensor part number)
IISA2NPL-1D1 set (1 station manifold part number)
∗ISA2-GE41N 1 set (Air catch sensor part number)
IISA2NSR-3D1 set (3 stations manifold part number)
∗ISA2-HE41P 3 sets (Air catch sensor part number)
Prefix the part number of the air catch sensor
with an asterisk (∗).
With control unit
Centralized wiring/Supply port left
Individual wiring/Supply port right
Centralized wiring
air catch sensor
ISA2-HE41P
Terminal block box
Individual wiring
air catch sensor
ISA2-GE41
Regulator
3
0
3
0
PU
L L SET
Supply port
6
IN
9
0.1
0.1
0.15
0.05
0
MPa
0
0.2
6
MPa
0.1
0
0.2
6
MPa
0
PU
LL
0.1
0
0.2
MPa
0.1
0.4
0
0.2
0
PU
LL
9
0.3
3
S ET
6
9
0.3
0.4
3
0
PU
L L SET
9
0.3
0.4
3
PU
L L SET
6
MPa
0.4
0.1
0
0.2
0
PU
LL
9
0.3
3
S ET
6
MPa
Supply port
9
0.3
0.4
S ET
0.1
0
0.2
0.3
MPa
IN
0.4
0.2
Left
Right
Bracket
Stations
3
2
1
IISA2CSL-3B5DLCE21 set (3 stations manifold part number)
∗ISA2-HE41P 3 sets (Air catch sensor part number)
Prefix the part number of the air catch sensor with an
asterisk (∗).
208
Bracket
Stations
1
2
3
IISA2VPR-3B5DLC1 set (3 stations manifold part number)
∗ISA2-GE41 3 sets (Air catch sensor part number)
Prefix the part number of the air catch sensor with an
asterisk (∗).
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 209
Air Catch Sensor
Series
ISA2
Specifications
ISA2-G1
ISA2-G5
ISA2-H1
0.01 to 0.25 mm
ISA2-H5
0.03 to 0.50 mm
Dry air (filtered to 5 µm)
30 to 200 kPa
50 to 200 kPa
ø1.5
ø2.0
5 or less
10 or less
8 or less
15 or less
12 or less
22 or less
12 to 24 VDC, Ripple (p-p) 10% or less (With power polarity protection)
15 mA or less
Supply
pressure
Model
Detection distance
Fluid
Recommended detection nozzle
50 kPa
Consumption
flow rate
100 kPa
l/min (ANR)
200 kPa
Current consumption
Switch Output
NPN
PNP
NPN
PNP
open collector: one output open collector: one output open collector: one output open collector: one output
80 mA
30 VDC (at NPN output)
1.5 V or less (at 80 mA)
Yes
Maximum load current
Maximum load voltage
Residual voltage
Output protection
Repeatability
0.01 mm or less (Detection distance range 0.01 to 0.15 mm, 0.01 mm or less (Detection distance range 0.03 to 0.15 mm,
(Including temperature characteristics)
supply pressure 100 to 200 kPa)
supply pressure 100 to 200 kPa)
Hysteresis Note 1)
0.01 mm or less (Detection distance range 0.01 to 0.15 mm) 0.01 mm or less (Detection distance range 0.03 to 0.15 mm)
LED level meter Note 2) with 1 red, 2 green
(Set value < detection distance: red, Set value = detection distance: green 1, Set value > detection distance: green 1 + green 2)
IP66
Enclosure
Operating: 0 to 60C, Stored: –20 to 70C (No condensation or no freezing)
Operating/Stored: 35 to 85%RH (No condensation)
1000 VAC or more in 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between external terminal and case
Withstand voltage
2 MΩ or more between external terminal and case (measured with 500 VDC megaohm meter)
Insulation voltage
Environmental
Resistance
Indicator light
1.5 mm amplitude in 10 to 500Hz or acceleration of 98 m/s2 without control unit and bracket mounted,
Others 30 m/s2, whichever is smaller for 2 hours in X, Y, Z direction each (De-energized)
Individual wiring type (body only): 253 g, common wiring type (body only): 250 g,
Terminal box: 205 g, lead wire: 278 g, connecting bracket with sealing for additional station: 4 g
Weight
Note 1) Refer to “Relation between Nozzle Diameter and Detection Distance” for hysteresis.
Note 2) Refer to “Setting Procedure” for LED level meter.
Working Principle
P1
S1
Sensor
S3
S2
S4
P2
S1, S2: Fix orifice
S3: Variable orifice (adjusted by setting dial)
S4: Detection nozzle
In a bridge circuit as in the left figure, a detection gap is
applied to the detection nozzle (S4) while the setting dial S3
is adjusted to balance the pressure applied to the pressure
sensor (P1 = P2). The pressure sensor detects the differential
pressure generated when the detection nozzle (S4) is
released. When the work piece comes close to the detection
nozzle, the back pressure P2 increases until it is larger than
P1 (P2 > P1). Then the switch output turns on to notify that
the pressure is below the detection gap.
209
Sensors
Without control unit and bracket mounted: 980 m/s2, Others: 150 m/s2 in X, Y and Z direction, 3 times each (De-energized)
Impact resistance
Port size
Nil: Rc 1/8, N type: NPT 1/8, F type: G 1/8
Lead wire (Individual wiring type)
4-core, oil resistant, cable (0.64 mm2) with M12, 4-pin pre-wired connector
Terminal block box (Centralized wiring type)
Front wiring (Electrical entry ø21)
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 210
ISA2
Circuit and Wiring for 2 Port Solenoid Valve
Main circuit of
switch
DC (+)
OUT
Without indicator light DC circuit
Load
MAX 80 mA
Without display light AC Circuit
1 DC (+)
1 ( )
Rectifying
device
12 to 24 VDC
ZNR
DC ()
ZNR
12 to 24 VDC
SOL.
100 to 200 VAC
SOL.
2 DC ()
PNP open collector output
Main circuit of
switch
DC (+)
Conduit terminal
With indicator light DC circuit
1 DC (+)
MAX 80 mA
OUT
Load
2 ( )
12 to 24 VDC
Conduit terminal
DIN type connector With indicator light AC Circuit
1 ( )
Rectifying
device
ZNR
ZNR
12 to 24 VDC
SOL.
100 to 200 VAC
SOL.
DC ()
LED
indicator 2 ( )
light
2 DC ()
DIN type connector
With indicator light DC circuit
1 DC (+)
ZNR
12 to 24 VDC
SOL.
LED
Refer to catalog and instruction manual of Series VCA for wiring.
Pay attention to the power supply voltage. Use of incorrect power supply will
cause damage to equipment.
2 DC ()
Wiring
Individual wiring
2: NC
Centralized wiring
Terminal block box
1: Brown
3: Blue
4: Black
1
2
3
4
Brown DC (+)
NC
Blue DC ()
Black
OUT
1. Insert the connector of the lead wire with its key groove at the
proper position.
2. Hold the knurl with 2 fingers and rotate it clockwise until finger
tight.
Knurl
3
0
6
9
OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
1
2
3
4
5
DC
()
NC
OUT
6
1. Mount the seal conduit on the terminal block box. For mounting
procedure, refer to the catalog and instruction manual provided
by the manufacturer of the seal conduit.
2. Thread the cable through the seal conduit and arrange wiring
according to the polarity of the terminal block illustrated above.
3. Fasten the seal conduit with a tightening torque not greater
than 5 N⋅m. Do not hold the terminal block box or the switch.
3. Connect the colored wires coming from the cable terminal.
Refer to the circuit diagram and table above to avoid mistakes.
Seal conduit entry (ø21)
210
DC
(+)
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 211
Air Catch Sensor
Series
ISA2
Relation between Nozzle Diameter and Detection Distance
The data in the following charts are characteristics of hysteresis at the detection distance.
In case accuracy is required by the settings, the design should be made so that the hysteresis will stay within the optimum adjustment
range not larger than 0.01 mm.
The smaller the hysteresis, the better the sensitivity. In cases where the hysteresis exceeds 0.01 mm, the air catch sensor should be used
to check the presence of the work piece.
ISA2-G
ISA2-H
Detection nozzle: ø1.0
Detection side piping: ø6 x ø4 tubing 5 m
0.1
0.09
0.1
0.09
Supply pressure
30 kPa
0.07
0.06
0.05
100 kPa
0.04
0.03
Supply pressure
50 kPa
0.08
200 kPa
Hysteresis (mm)
0.08
Hysteresis (mm)
0.07
0.06
100 kPa
0.05
0.04
0.03
200 kPa
0.02
0.02
0.01
0
0.01
0
Optimum adjustment range
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
0.25
0
Detection distance (mm)
0.1
0.09
0.1
0.09
Supply pressure
30 kPa
50 kPa
0.06
0.05
100 kPa
0.04
0.03
Hysteresis (mm)
0.07
200 kPa
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
0.05
0.04
200 kPa
0.03
0.01
0
0
0.06
0.02
0.02
0.01
0
100 kPa
0.07
0.25
0
0.1
0.09
0.1
0.09
Supply pressure
30 kPa
Supply pressure
50 kPa
0.08
0.07
0.06
100 kPa
0.04
0.03
200 kPa
0.02
0.01
0
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
0.25
Hysteresis (mm)
0.08
0.05
0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35 0.4 0.45 0.5
100 kPa
0.07
0.06
0.05
0.04
200 kPa
0.03
0.02
0.01
0
0
0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35 0.4 0.45 0.5
211
Sensors
Hysteresis (mm)
Supply pressure
0.08
0.08
Hysteresis (mm)
0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35 0.4 0.45 0.5
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 212
ISA2
Response Time
Response time changes with detection distance and piping length. It is hardly influenced by the supply pressure and nozzle diameter
(ø1.0 to ø2.0).
While all graphs assume a fixed set distance with changes in the detection distance, the upper charts show responses at various set
values and the lower charts show responses at various piping lengths. If the set distance is equal to the set value, the response becomes
quicker as the set value becomes smaller or the piping length becomes shorter.
ISA2-G
ISA2-H
Supply pressure: 100 kPa
2.5
2
Set value
2
0.05 mm
1.5
Response time (sec)
Response time (sec)
0.1 mm
1
0.5
0.15 mm
Set value
1.5
0.1 mm
1
0.05 mm
0.15 mm
0.3 mm
0.5
0.5 mm
0.25 mm
0
0
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
0.25
0.3
0
0.1
Detection distanceResponse time characteristics
Set distance: 0.15 mm
Detection side piping: ø6 x ø4
3
Piping tubing length
1.5
2.5
10 m
1.2
2
8m
1.5
5m
1
3m
0.5
0.5
Set distance: 0.3 mm
Piping tubing length
10 m
8m
0.9
5m
0.6
3m
0.3
1m
0
0
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.1
0.6
Detection distanceResponse time characteristics
Response time (sec)
Response time (sec)
Detection side piping: ø6 x ø4
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.12 0.14 0.16
1m
0
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
0.25
Piping tubing lengthResponse time
0.3 0.35
Piping tubing lengthResponse time
Nozzle Shape
Figure (1)
Please keep the nozzle shape as illustrated below.
Take every caution against chamfer on the detection surface and/or nozzle hole,
which could affect the characteristics as illustrated in Figure (1).
ø1
ø1.5
Chamfer is not
allowed.
ø2
ø3 or more
212
ø3 or more
2 or more
2 or more
2 or more
Detection
surface
ø3 or more
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 213
Air Catch Sensor
Series
ISA2
Supply Pressure Dependence
The charts illustrate changes in the detection distance with fluctuations in the supply pressure.
ISA2-G
ISA2-H
0.6
0.25 mm
0.3
0.2
0.15 mm
0.1
0.4
0.5 mm
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.15 mm
0.1
0.03 mm
0.01 mm
0
0
0
50
100
150
200
250
0
50
Supply pressure (kPa)
150
0.6
0.3
0.15 mm
0.1
0.5 mm
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.15 mm
0.1
0.03 mm
0.01 mm
0
0
50
100
150
200
0
250
50
150
200
250
0.6
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.15 mm
0.1
0.25 mm
100
0.5 mm
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.15 mm
0.1
0.03 mm
0.01 mm
0
250
0
0
50
100
150
200
250
0
50
100
150
200
250
213
Sensors
0.2
0.25 mm
0
200
0.4
100
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 214
ISA2
Setting Procedure
The detection distance is set with the LED level meter and setting
dial.
Keep the setting dial pulled out while in use. If released, it will
return to its original position and become unable to rotate.
1. For accuracy in setting, apply a clearance gauge to the detection nozzle to replicate the set condition in advance.
2. Confirm that the set pressure is applied. If the setting dial is
fully closed, the LED level meter appears as
.
3. Pull the setting dial and rotate it in the positive direction. The
lights will turn on in the order shown below.
Rotate in the
positive direction.
Red
Pull out
Before pulling out
Green 1
Green 2
4. The sensor output comes on when the lights on the LED level
meter turn on as
. Complete the setting when this condition is observed.
5. Apply the clearance gauge again to confirm that the lights turn
on as
.
Pulled out
Handling and setting of 2 port solenoid valve
Throttle setting for blowing to prevent water and cutting oil
from entering the nozzle.
(Clockwise: Close throttle; Counterclockwise: Open throttle)
∗ The setting is not applicable to valves without throttle.
1. Power off the valve.
2. Rotate the throttle clockwise for adjustment so that the
detection nozzle will not suck up water or cutting oil.
Handling and setting of limit gauge indicator
OPEN arrow
1. Removal of cover
Hook the finger on the front
cover ridge and rotate it in
the direction of the OPEN
arrow until it stops (15).
Then pull out and remove
the cover.
2. Setting the installation needle
The installation needle should be moved by the fingertip.
Set the 2 green installation needles at the maximum and
minimum limits of pressure.
Example
Rotate
clockwise
IN
Maximum 0.24 MPa
Minimum 0.16 MPa
3. Installation of cover
Throttle
Solenoid
3. Power on the valve, then off again.
Confirm that the detection nozzle does not suck up water
or cutting oil.
Note) Do not rotate the throttle more than 4 turns or it will
fall out.
214
After setting the installation needles, locate the OPEN
arrow at the top right position and insert the claws on the
cover into the grooves on the case (indicated by
in the
expanded view of A part). Rotate the cover clockwise until
it stops. Confirm that the cover is firmly secured.
Expanded view
of A part
A
Finger
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 215
Air Catch Sensor
Series
ISA2
Relation between Dial Scale and Detection Distance
Test procedure and conditions
Dial scales when the detection nozzle is under the following conditions;
Supplied pressure: 100 kPa
Piping: ø6 x ø4 tubing, 5 m in length.
Results of measurement Note 1)
Relation between the detection distance and set dial scales Note 2) (Scale numbers)
ISA2-G
ISA2-H
Detection distance
Detection nozzle diameter
Detection distance
ø1.0
ø1.5
ø2.0
0.05 mm
0.3 to 0.7
0.9 to 1.4
0.3 to 0.7
0.10 mm
1.1 to 1.5
2.3 to 2.8
0.15 mm
1.9 to 2.3
3.4 to 4.1
0.20 mm
2.5 to 3.0
0.25 mm
3.0 to 3.5
ø1.0
ø1.5
ø2.0
0.1 mm
1.1 to 1.5
2.4 to 2.8
2.6 to 3.4
2.0 to 2.5
0.2 mm
2.4 to 2.9
4.5 to 5.1
5.4 to 6.4
3.7 to 4.6
0.3 mm
3.0 to 3.5
5.5 to 6.3
7.0 to 8.3
4.4 to 5.5
5.3 to 7.0
0.4 mm
3.3 to 3.8
6.0 to 7.0
7.9 to 9.6
5.2 to 7.0
6.6 to 10.7
0.5 mm
3.5 to 4.0
6.5 to 7.5
8.6 to 10.7
Average variation per scale (Detection distance [mm])
ISA2-G
ISA2-H
Detection distance
ø1.0
ø1.5
ø2.0
0.05 mm
0.010
0.005
0.006
0.10 mm
0.007
0.004
0.15 mm
0.010
0.005
0.20 mm
0.010
0.25 mm
0.010
Detection distance
ø1.0
ø1.5
ø2.0
0.1 mm
0.008
0.004
0.003
0.003
0.2 mm
0.008
0.005
0.004
0.004
0.3 mm
0.025
0.011
0.007
0.005
0.003
0.4 mm
0.046
0.019
0.011
0.007
0.003
0.5 mm
0.050
0.021
0.012
Sensors
Note 1) This data provides reference values as a guide only, this should not be
viewed as a guarantee of our products performance.
Note 2) Set dial scales are as follows;
0.2
Sca
le
3
Between each major scales, it is sub divided into ten
smaller settings (for example, between 2.0 to 3.0—2.1,
2.2, 2.3 etc.), settings are possible at each increment.
A scale
3
0
6
9
215
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 216
ISA2
∗ When the SUP port is on the left, the stations are sequentially
numbered from the side of the terminal block box.
Dimensions: Centralized Wiring Type
With bracket
L1
3
Terminal block box
60
38
L2
38
5
LED level meter
End plate L
End plate R
3
0
3
9
6
81
PU
LL SET
6
0.1
0
0.2
3
9
6
0
PU
LL SET
0.3
MPa
0
0.1
0.4
0
0.2
PU
LL SET
9
0.3
MPa
0.2
0.1
0.4
0
Setting dial
0.3
MPa
0.4
12
ECOPS.qxd
Bracket
5.5
21
12
Pressure gauge
24
L3
6.5
36
24
OUT 3
OUT 2
SUP port
Rc, NPT, G1/8
36
OUT 4
OUT 1
Stations 1∗ n
Stations 1
2
3
4
5
6
L1
106 144 182 220 258 296
L2
— —
38 76 114 152
L3
—
38 76 114 152 190
17
OUT 6
34
63(Max. 65)
DC ()
Right
Left
OUT 5
DC (+)
5
39
19
Terminal block box wiring diagram
Detection port
Rc, NPT, G1/8
M4 x 8
(With HW, SW)
L2
5
For the bracket attachment
position, refer to page 219.
Seal conduit entry
(ø21)
With DIN rail
L1
3
Terminal block box
60
38
38
LED level meter
End plate L
End plate R
0
3
9
6
81
PU
LL SET
6
0.1
MPa
3
9
6
0
PU
LL SET
0.3
0.4
0.1
0
0.2
PU
LL SET
9
0.3
MPa
0.4
0.2
0.1
0
0.3
MPa
0.4
20.5
12
0
0.2
0
Pressure gauge
DIN rail mounting
bracket
5.25
11.2
SUP port
Rc, NPT, G1/8
DIN rail center
L3
L4
OUT 2
OUT 4
Left
OUT 5
Stations
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
17
34
OUT 6
Right
Stations 1∗ n
63(Max. 65)
DC ()
24
L5
OUT 3
OUT 1
39
Terminal block box wiring diagram
9.8
DC (+)
216
18
3
19
Seal conduit entry
(ø21)
Detection port
Rc, NPT, G1/8
1
2
3
4
5
6
106
—
—
120
135.5
144
—
38
162.5
173
182
38
76
200
210.5
220
76
114
237.5
248
258
114
152
275
285.5
296
152
190
312.5
323
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 217
Air Catch Sensor
Series
ISA2
Dimensions: Individual Wiring Type
With bracket
L1
LED level meter
L2
38
3
38
5
Lead wire connector
End plate L
End plate R
0
3
9
6
PU
L L SE T
81
92
3
6
0.1
0
0.2
3
9
6
0
PU
L L SE T
0.3
0.1
0.4
0
0.2
PU
L L SE T
9
0.3
MPa
0.1
0.4
0
0.2
Setting dial
0.3
MPa
0.4
SUP port
Rc, NPT, G 1/8
Bracket
5.5
24
12
21
12
MPa
0
6.5
Pressure gauge
L3
Plug
24
36
36
Left
Right
Stations 1························· n
63(Max. 65)
34
5 17
Stations 1
L1
46
L2
L3
Detection port
Rc, NPT, G 1/8
19
M4 x 8
(With HW, SW)
2
3
4
5
6
84 122 160 198 236
38 76 114 152
38 76 114 152 190
For the bracket attachment
position, refer to page 219.
Sensors
With DIN rail
L1
LED level meter
38
3
38
L2
5
Lead wire connector
End plate L
End plate R
3
92
81
DIN rail
center
3
9
6
PU
L L SET
6
0.1
0
0.2
0.4
3
9
6
0
PU
L L SET
0.3
MPa
0
0.1
0
0.2
PU
L L SET
9
0.3
MPa
0.4
0.1
0
0.2
Setting dial
0.3
MPa
0.4
SUP port
Rc, NPT, G 1/8
20.5
12
18
0
Pressure
gauge
5.25
Plug
DIN rail mounting
bracket
L3
24
11.2
L4
L5
Electriacal entry dimensions
Left
Right angle
9.8
The direction of a right angle
connector cannot be changed.
Right
Stations 1························· n
Stations 1
2
L1
46
84
L2
38
L3
62.5 120
L4
73 135.5
L5
63(Max. 65)
34
17
32.2
41
Straight union
19
3
122
38
76
162.5
173
4
160
76
114
200
210.5
5
6
198
114
152
237.5
248
236
152
190
275
285.5
Detection port
Rc, NPT, G1/8
217
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 218
ISA2
Dimensions: With Control Unit
SUP port on the left
3
3
Throttle needle
SUP port
Rc, NPT, G 1/4
118
143
PU
LL
6
0.1
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.1
0
0
0 MPa 0.2
178
144
SUP port
Rc, NPT, G 1/8
PU
LL
6
64.4
DIN
connector
Manual lock
DIN
connector
25
82
Conduit terminal
97
Conduit terminal
40
10
42
SUP port on the right
97
Conduit terminal
Conduit terminal
82
DIN
connector
DIN connector
0
0
SET
SET
9
162
9
0.1
0.15
128
0.05
0.4
0.3
133
0.3
0.4
64.4
103
0 MPa0.2
42
10
40
SUP port
Rc, NPT, G 1/8
Throttle needle
25
218
SUP port
Rc, NPT, G 1/8
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 219
Air Catch Sensor
Series
ISA2
Bracket Mounting Position
With 2 stations, the bracket is mounted on the second sensor from the left.
Left 1
2
MPa
MPa
Right
1
2
MPa
MPa
1
2
MPa
MPa
With n stations, the bracket is mounted on the first and “n” th sensor from the left.
1
2
n
MPa
MPa
MPa
Addition of Manifold Stations
1. Loosen the screws and remove the 2 mounting brackets on the
front and back side.
2. Disassemble the switch carefully so that the O-ring on the SUP
port will not be detached.
1. Disassembly
Slot for removal
Existing joint brackets
2. Insertion
Recess
Existing joint brackets
Protrusion
Joint brackets (ISA-3-A)
The switch for adding stations
Hook the fingers on the top and
bottom removal grooves to pull out
the plate.
It can be removed by pulling
horizontally.
1. Fit seal for additional station (ISA-7-B) to the recess of the
SUP port of the additional switch.
2. Fit the protrusion of the additional switch into the existing
switch.
3. Mount joint brackets (ISA-3-A) at 2 positions.
Note) Perform temporary tightening of screws.
4. Confirm that the recess of the SUP port of the existing switch
has seal for additional station attached.
5. Fit the protrusion of the existing switch into the recess of the
additional switch.
6. Mount the existing joint bracket.
Note) Perform temporary tightening of screws.
3. Assembly
1. Tighten the joint brackets with the prescribed tightening torque
of 1.2 N⋅m.
2. Arrange pneumatic piping and confirm that there is no air leakage from new joints.
219
Sensors
End plate removal
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Series
Page 220
ISA2
Parts List
End plate R
ISA-6-B
Terminal block box
ISA-11-L
h
ig
ISA-3-A
R
End plate L
ISA-6-A
t
Combination
bracket
Seal for additional station
ISA-7-B
Throttle
Spacer
Regulator
Y20
Terminal block box
ISA-11-L (Centralized wiring/Supply port left)
ISA-11-R (Centralized wiring/Supply port right)
L
ef
t
IN
Spacer
Seal for additional station
End plate L
End plate R
Y20
ISA-7-B
ISA-6-A
ISA-6-B
ISA-7-A
When 2 air catch sen- When a 2 port solenoid
sors are connected or valve is connected to
when a 2 port solenoid the right:
valve is connected to the
left:
Joint bracket
Lead wire with connector (Individual wiring type) Bracket
ISA-3-A
ISA-8-A
ISA-8-B
A pair consists 1 set.
Straight, 5 m
Right angle, 5 m
ISA-4-A
With mounting
screw 2 pcs.
220
DIN rail mounting bracket
ISA-9-A
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 221
Air Catch Sensor
Series
ISA2
DIN Rail
ISA-5-
L
4.5
7.5
35
8
35
5.5
1.25
Part no.
L
ISA-5-1
ISA-5-2
ISA-5-3
ISA-5-4
ISA-5-5
ISA-5-6
ISA-5-7
73.0
135.5
173.0
210.5
248.0
285.5
323.0
Applicable model
Individual wiring type Centralized wiring type
IISA2P-1
IISA2S-1
IISA2S-2
IISA2S-3
IISA2S-4
IISA2S-5
IISA2S-6
IISA2P-2
IISA2P-3
IISA2P-4
IISA2P-5
IISA2P-6
Pressure Gauge for Air Catch Sensor
Square embedded pressure gauge
GC3
4 AS
Notation
specifications
Nil MPa single notation
P PSI single notation
G36
01
4
Maximum
pressure
indication
Notation
specifications
Maximum
pressure
indication
Nil MPa single notation
2
4
MPa-PSI
P Note) double
notation
0.2 MPa
0.4 MPa
2
4
02 E 1
0.2 MPa
0.4 MPa
VCA27A 5 DL S
Thread type
Nil
N
F
Rc
NPT
G
None
Square embedded pressure gauge (With limit indicator)
Round pressure gauge (With limit indicator)
Model
Port size
Fluid
Proof pressure
Set pressure range
Gauge port size Note 1)
Relief pressure
Construction
Weight (kg)
Round Note 2)
Pressure
0.2 MPa Square embedded Note 3)
gauge
AR20
14
Air
1.5 MPa
1.0 MPa
0.02 to 0.2 MPa
18
Set pressure + 0.05 MPa
{at relief flow of 0.1 l/min(ANR)}
5 to 60C (No condensation)
Relieving type
0.29
G36-2-01
GC3-2AS
Note 1) The type with square embedded pressure gauge does not have connection.
Note 2) The “” in the part number of the round pressure gauge indicates the type of
connection threads, no symbol for R and N for NPT. Contact SMC for supply of the
connection thread type NPT and the pressure gauge of PSI unit representation.
Note 3) With an O-ring (1 pc.) and mounting screws (2 pcs.).
When specifying more than one option, enter symbols first in numerical, then
in alphabetical orders.
Note 1) Compatible with thread type NPT. Under the New Measurement Law,
this type is only sold outside Japan. (The SI unit is used inside Japan.)
In all cases, with the exception of NPT, add “-X2025” at the end of the
order number. Example) AR20-02E-1-X2025
Throttle
Nil Without throttle and manual lock
With throttle
S
With manual lock
B
K With manual lock and throttle
Electrical entry
Coil specifications
N
R
Z Note 1)
CE
marked
DIN connector
D
DIN connector (With light)
DL
D0 DIN connector (Without connector)
Conduit terminal
T
Conduit terminal (With light)
TL
Option specification
None
Non-relieving
Flow direction: Right to left
Unit representations on the label and pressure gauge are PSI and F
02
Rc 1/4
02N NPT 1/4
02F
G 1/4
100 VAC
200 VAC
110 VAC
220 VAC
24 VDC
12 VDC
230 VAC
Note 1) The pressure gauge port is Rc 1/8. The pressure gauge
is included in the package (not assembled).
Note 2) Order individually when 0.4 MPa gauge is required.
02 Q
Direct operation poppet
Air, Inert gas
2.0
Al
HNBR
20 to 60
10 to 60 (No freezing)
Dustproof and jetproof (Equivalent to IP65)
Environment with no corrosive or explosive gas
0.2 or less
Free
30/150 or less
Vibration resistance/Impact resistance m/s2 Note 2)
24/12 VDC, 100/110/200/220 VAC (50/60 Hz)
Rated voltage
10% rated voltage
B type
Type of coil insulation
VCA2: 6.5 W
Power consumption DC
Note 1) 50 Hz
Apparent
VCA2: 7.5 VA
AC
power
60 Hz
Valve type
Fluid
Withstand pressure (MPa)
Body material
Seal material
Ambient temperature (°C)
Enclosure
Atmosphere
Valve leakage cm3/min (ANR)
Note 1) Since the AC specifications include a rectifying device, there is no difference
between the apparent power required for starting and holding.
Note 2) Vibration resistance: No malfunction resulted in a one-sweep test in a 10 to
300 Hz range in the axial and right angle directions of the main valve and
armature, for both energized and de-energized states.
Shock resistance: No malfunction resulted in an impact test using a drop impact tester. The test was performed in the axial and right angle directions of
the main valve and armature, for both energized and de-energized states.
221
Sensors
1
2
3
4
5
6
36
4
Port size
Voltage
Option (The shape of pressure gauge) Note 2)
Nil
R 1/8
NPT 1/8
AR 20
E
G Note 1)
Nil
P
Note) For double notation of MPa and PSI, add “-X30” at the end of part number.
Example) G36-P4-01-X30a
Regulator
Nil
Connection
thread
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 222
Air Catch Sensor
Series ISA
Air Purge
Due to the construction of the sensor, fluctuations in the supply pressure do not influence operation. This is a non-contact type sensor for applications requiring confirmation of workpiece presence for machining operations.
For Detection of Workpiece Presence
LED level meter for easy calibration
The LED level meter in conjunction with the
adjustment knob allows for easy and correct
calibrations.
Reliable detection of a 10 µm gap
Above the setting position (Red)
Adjustment knob
Due to the internal air bridge circuit and solid state
pressure sensor, the air catch sensor is not
influenced by supply pressure fluctuations.
Can be mounted on manifolds with up to six
stations
Centralized wiring and piping are possible.
Versatile mounting orientation
Due to the use of a pressure sensor, stable
detection is guaranteed regardless of mounting
orientation.
Proper setting position (Green)
Below the setting position (Green)
Wide detection range
Applicable range: 10 to 300 µm
IP66 enclosure
Dust proof and splash proof
How to Order
Individual/Centralized Wiring
ISA
01
Option
11
15
PNP open collector 1 output
Nil ∗
For DIN rail
B
With bracket
With gauge
G
∗ Order DIN rail separately.
Station 1 to 6
Wiring specification
Nil
Example 1) NPN output, 4 stations, centralized wiring with terminal
block box on left side, with bracket and gauge
ISA11-4L-01BG
Example 2) PNP output, single unit individual wiring, with gauge
ISA15-1-01G
222
L
R
Individual wiring (without terminal block box)
Centralized wiring
(with terminal block box on left side)
Centralized wiring
(with terminal block box on right side)
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 223
Air Catch Sensor
Series
ISA
Specifications
Dry air (filtered through a 5 µm filter)
Fluid
0.05 to 0.2 MPa
Recommended pressure range
0.1 to 0.2 MPa
10 to 300 µm
Detection distance range
Repeatability including
temperature characteristics
±10 µm (0 to 60°C, based on 25°C)
10 µm or less (detection distance 10 to 150 µm)
Hysteresis
Detection nozzle size
ø1.0 standard
Indicator functions
Operation indicator light (illuminates when ON.), Deflection level indicator light
Current consumption
Output
30 mA or less (Output ON, All LED’s ON)
ISA11
NPN open collector 30 V, 80 mA or less
ISA15
PNP open collector 80 mA or less
35 to 85% RH
1000 Vp-p, Pulse width 1 µS, Rize time 1 ns pulse
Noise resistance
Withstand voltage
1000 VAC 50/60 Hz for one minute between external terminals and case
2 MΩ or more (at 500 VDC Mega) between external terminals and case
10 to 500 Hz at whichever is smaller, amplitude 1.5 mm or acceleration 98 m/s2, in X, Y, Z directions, for 2 hours each
980 m/s2 X, Y, Z direction, 3 times for each direction
Impact resistance
Oil resistant chloroethylene cable (ø3.4, 0.2 mm2, 5 m)
Lead wire
250 g (with gauge, 5 m lead wire)
Weight
Rc 1/8
Port size
IP66 (dust proof and splash proof)
Enclosure
16 l/min at 0.10 MPa
Supply pressure
Sensors
Flow consumption
21 l/min at 0.15 MPa
25 l/min at 0.2 MPa
223
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 224
Negative Pressure Detection Valve
Special Order
Product
Liquid Removal
XT-92-65
ø50
Knob for negative
pressure detection setting
36
Specifications
0.15 to 0.8 MPa
5 to 60°C
2.7 mm2 (0.15)
Negative pressure detection
–400 mmHg to–130 mmHg
setting range
(at 0.4 MPa)
30
Weight
102
Min. 105
Bracket hole dimension
Max. 115
8
2
2-M5 x 0.8
4-Rc 1/8
224
0.4 kg
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:28 AM
Page 225
Vacuum Equipment
Vacuum ejector
Multistage ejector
Series
Application
ZH
ZU
ZL112/212
Liquid removal
Liquid removal
Vacuum
Vacuum
Vacuum
Liquid removal
Page
226
228
229
234
235
236
Vacuum Equipment
225
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Page 226
Vacuum Ejector
Box Type (with Built-in Silencer) Body Ported Type
Series ZH
Liquid Removal
Nozzle diameter —— ø0.5, ø0.7, ø1.0, ø1.3, ø1.5, ø1.8, ø2.0
Type ——————— S: Standard
L: Large flow capacity
Compact
and Lightweight
SUP
Composite resin nozzle and
body for compact and
lightweight construction
Nozzle diameter ø0.5 … 28 g
Box type (with built-in silencer)
and body ported type
Two types are available in the series: Box type with
silenced exhaust and body ported type with individual
exhaust.
EXH
Silenced exhaust
One-touch and threaded
connections can be combined.
VAC
Depending on the operating conditions, port
connections can be combined with a choice of
One-touch and threaded connections.
Body can be mounted
and secured.
Mounting holes for securing the body are
provided for body ported type also.
Common exhaust type
Ejector symbol
Mounting
holes
Body ported type
(without silencer)
ZHD
Box type
(built-in silencer)
ZHB
Models/Specifications
Model
ZH05B
ZH07B
ZH10B
ZH13B
ZH05D
ZH07D
ZH10D
ZH13D
ZH15D
ZH18D
ZH20D
Nozzle
diameter
mm
0.5
0.7
1.0
1.3
0.5
0.7
1.0
1.3
1.5
1.8
2.0
Body type
Box type
(with built-in silencer)
Body ported type
(without silencer)
Body ported type
(without silencer)
Maximum
vacuum pressure∗ Maximum suction flow Air consumption
l/min (ANR)
l/min (ANR)
(kPa)
S type
L type
S type
L type
S type/L type
13
8
5
23
20
12
–88
–48
46
34
24
78
70
40
13
8
5
23
20
12
–88
–48
46
34
24
78
70
40
95
75
55
150
110
65
–88
–53
185
135
85
Connection
(One-touch/Threaded)
SUP
VAC
ø6/Rc 1/8
ø6/Rc 1/8
ø8/Rc 1/8
ø10/Rc 1/4
ø6/Rc 1/8
ø6/Rc 1/8
EXH
—
ø6/Rc 1/8
ø6/Rc 1/8
ø6/Rc 1/8 ø8/Rc 1/8
ø8/Rc 1/8 ø10/Rc 1/4 ø10/Rc 1/4
ø10/Rc 1/4
ø12/Rc 3/8 ø12/Rc 3/8
ø12/Rc 3/8
ø12/Rc 3/8 ø16/Rc 1/2 ø16/Rc 1/2
Weight
(g)
28
28
33
66
11
12
16
27
43
55
95
∗ Supply pressure: 0.45MPa.
226
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Page 227
Vacuum Ejector
Box Type (with Built-in Silencer)/Body Ported Type
Series
ZH
How to Order
Note)
Refer to tables
and
below for SUP/VAC/EXH port connection combinations and port sizes.
Box Type
(with Built-in Silencer)
ZH 07 B S
06
06
Body Ported Type
(without Silencer)
ZH 07 D S
01
01
EXH port size Note)
Nozzle diameter
05
07
10
13
15
18
20
Symbol
06
08
10
12
16
01
02
03
04
ø0.5 mm
ø0.7 mm
ø1.0 mm
ø1.3 mm
ø1.5 mm
ø1.8 mm
ø2.0 mm
Maximum vacuum pressure
S
L
Size
ø6
ø8
ø10
ø12
Rc 1/8
Rc 1/4
Rc 3/8
Note)
Type
One-touch
One-touch
One-touch
One-touch
Threaded
Threaded
Threaded
Body ported type
(without silencer)
SUP
One-touch
One-touch
Threaded
One-touch
One-touch
Threaded
VAC
EXH
One-touch
—
Threaded
—
Threaded
—
One-touch One-touch
Threaded One-touch
Threaded Threaded
Table 2. Port sizes
Model
ZH05B
ZH07B
ZH10B
ZH13B
ZH05D
ZH07D
ZH10D
ZH13D
ZH15D
ZH18D
ZH20D
Connection (one-touch/threaded)
SUP
VAC
EXH
ø6/Rc 1/8
ø6/Rc 1/8
ø8/Rc 1/8
ø10/Rc 1/4
ø6/Rc 1/8
ø6/Rc 1/8
—
ø6/Rc 1/8
ø6/Rc 1/8 ø6/Rc 1/8 ø8/Rc 1/8
ø8/Rc 1/8 ø10/Rc 1/4 ø10/Rc 1/4
ø10/Rc 1/4
ø12/Rc 3/8 ø12/Rc 3/8
ø12/Rc 3/8
ø12/Rc 3/8 ø16/Rc 1/2 ø16/Rc 1/2
227
Vacuum Equipment
Box type
(with built-in silencer)
Type
One-touch
One-touch
One-touch
One-touch
One-touch
Threaded
Threaded
Threaded
Threaded
VAC port size Note)
Symbol
Size
Type
One-touch
06
ø6
One-touch
10
ø10
One-touch
12
ø12
One-touch
16
ø16
Threaded
Rc 1/8
01
Threaded
Rc 1/4
02
Threaded
Rc 3/8
03
Threaded
04
Rc 1/2
Table 1. Connection combinations
Body type
Size
ø6
ø8
ø10
ø12
ø16
Rc 1/8
Rc 1/4
Rc 3/8
Rc 1/2
–88 kPa
–48 kPa
SUP port size
Symbol
06
08
10
12
01
02
03
01
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Page 228
In-line Type Vacuum Ejector
Series ZU
Liquid Removal
Space-saving ejector that can be installed in-line with the piping
EXH
Body
Nozzle diameter: ø0.5, ø0.7
Diffuser
VAC
SUP
Type S: High vacuum
One-touch fitting
L: Large flow capacity
One-touch fitting
Vacuum port and supply port are aligned in a straight line to
facilitate piping
Lightweight construction achieved through the use of a resin body
Nozzle diameter ø0.5: 6.5 g
ø0.7: 7.0 g
The white color matches bright operating environments
Built-in One-touch fittings (copper free)
How to Order
ZU 05 S
S
–85 kPa
L
–48 kPa
Nozzle diameter
05
ø0.5 mm
07
ø0.7 mm
Specifications
Air
Fluid
0.7 MPa
Standard supply pressure
0.45 MPa
5 to 60°C
Applicable tube O.D.
SUP port: ø6, VAC port: ø6
Models
Type
Model
ZU05S
ZU07S
Large flow ZU05L
capacity
ZU07L
High
vacuum
Maximum
Maximum
Nozzle
vacuum
suction flow Air consumption Weight
diameter
(g)
l/min (ANR)
ø (mm) pressure∗ (kPa) l/min (ANR)
0.5
–85
7
9.5
6.5
0.7
–85
12
19.0
7.0
0.5
–48
12
9.5
6.5
0.7
–48
21
19.0
7.0
∗ Supply pressure: 0.45 MPa
228
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Page 229
Multistage Ejector
Series ZL112/212
Vacuum
Energy saving, large flow rate,
3-stage diffuser construction
Vacuum pressure
ance
rform
e pe
1-stag
Suction flow rate
increased 250% and air
consumption reduced
20% with 3-stage
diffuser construction
Q1 Q2
Q2
Q1
2-stage
(Versus ø1.3, one-stage model)
Q3
Maximum
suction flow rate Air consumption
l/min (ANR)
l/min (ANR)
Q3
perform
ance
3-stage
performance
250 % suction flow
rate increase
Suction
flow rate
ZL112
ZL212
100
200
63
126
Series ZL212
Diffusers stacked and integrated
Compact size and large flow rate
(twice the flow rate of the ZL112)
Series ZL112
valve option now available (ZL112 only)
Release valve
Release flow rate
adjustment needle
Supply valve
Exhaust port options
One-touch fitting feature
Built-in silencer
Simplifies piping work
(ZL112 only)
Vacuum pressure sensor
With digital vacuum pressure switch
SMC PRESSURE SWITCH
SMC PRESSURE SWITCH
RESET
RESET
SET
SET
Vacuum Equipment
SMC PRESSURE SWITCH
Ported exhaust
UNIT
RESET SET
LCD display/ZSE4
LCD display with
back light/ZSE4B
With vacuum
adapter
With vacuum
pressure gauge
LED display/ZSE4E
Series variations
Series
Vacuum pressure sensor options
Air
Maximum
suction flow rate consumption
l/min (ANR)
l/min (ANR)
ZL112
100
63
ZL212
200
126
Exhaust port
Built-in
silencer
Ported
exhaust
With valve
With
With
supply valve/
release valve supply valve
Digital vacuum pressure switch
ZSE4E
ZSE4B
ZSE4
Vacuum
pressure
gauge
Vacuum
adapter
229
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Series
Page 230
ZL112/212
How to Order
Without valve
With valve
ZL1 12
ZL1 12
K1 5 M Z
E 25
Lead wire length
Nozzle diameter
ø1.2 mm
12
Nil
L
Exhaust specification
Nil
P
Digital vacuum pressure
switch specification
Built-in silencer
Ported exhaust
For E (ZSE4) EB (ZSE4B)
25 NPN output Lead wire length 0.5 (2.9) m
26 Analog output Lead wire length 0.5 (2.9) m
65 PNP output Lead wire length 0.5 (2.9) m
Exhaust port thread specification
(ported exhaust only)
For EE (ZSE4E)
Rc 1/2
G 1/2
1/2-14NPT
1/2-14NPTF
Nil
F
N
T
67 PNP output Lead wire length 0.5 (2.9) m
∗ Not required when none (Nil), vacuum
adapter (GN) or vacuum pressure gauge (G)
is specified for vacuum pressure sensor.
Supply valve/Release valve combination
K1
K2
With supply and release valves
With supply valve
Nil
GN
G
E
EB
EE
Rated voltage
DC specifications
5
24 VDC
6
12 VDC
V
6 VDC
S
5 VDC
R
3 VDC
AC specifications (50/60 Hz)
100 VAC
1
200 VAC
2
110 VAC [115 V]
3
220 VAC [230 V]
4
Electrical entry
G
H
L
LN
LO
M
MN
MO
230
0.5 m
2.9 m
Lead wire length 0.3 m
Grommet
L type plug
Without lead wire
connector
Without connector
M type plug
Without lead wire
connector
Without connector
None
Vacuum adapter Rc 1/8
With vacuum pressure gauge
With digital vacuum pressure switch ZSE4
With digital vacuum pressure switch ZSE4B
With digital vacuum pressure switch ZSE4E
Manual override
Nil
D
Push-turn slotted locking type
Nil
S
Z
U
Without indicator light/surge voltage suppressor
With indicator light/surge voltage suppressor (non-polar type)
Note 1) Type “U” is for 24 or 12 VDC only.
Note 2) Since surge voltage is prevented by a rectifier in the case of AC,
there is no “S” type.
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Page 231
Multistage Ejector
Series
ZL112/212
Series ZL112
Ejector Specifications
Standard type
Model
Nozzle diameter
Maximum suction flow rate
Air consumption
Supply pressure range
With valve
ZL112
ø1.2 mm
100 l/min (ANR)
63 l/min (ANR)
–84 kPa
0.7 MPa
0.2 to 0.5 MPa
0.4 MPa
5 to 50°C
Supply/Release Valve Specifications
SYJ514-
Part number
Type of actuation
N.C.
Fluid
Air
Operating pressure range Internal pilot type
0.2 to 0.5 MPa
Response time (for 0.5 MPa) Note 1)
25 ms or less
5 to 50°C
Manual operation
5 Hz
Non-locking push type, Push-turn slotted locking type
Pilot valve individual exhaust type,
Main valve/pilot valve common exhaust
Pilot exhaust type
Lubrication
Not required
Free
150/30 m/s2
Impact/Vibration resistance Note 2)
Enclosure
Dust proof
Note 1) Based on JIS B8374-1981 dynamic performance test (coil temperature 20°C, at rated voltage, without surge
voltage suppressor)
Note 2) Impact resistance: No malfunction when tested with a drop tester in the axial direction and at a right angle to
the main valve and armature, one time each in both energized and de-energized states.
(initial value)
Vibration resistance: No malfunction when tested with one sweep of 8.3 to 2000 Hz in the axial direction and at
a right angle to the main valve and armature, one time each in both energized and deenergized states. (initial value)
Vacuum Equipment
Adapter
Option Specifications
Vacuum pressure gauge specifications
GZ30S
Part number
Fluid
Pressure range
Scale range (angular)
Accuracy
Ported exhaust
Class
Material
Air
–100 to 100 kPa
230°
± 3% F.S. (full span)
Class 3
0 to 50°C
Case: Polycarbonate/ABS resin
Symbol
Standard type
P
V
231
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Series
Page 232
ZL112/212
Option Specifications
With digital vacuum
pressure switch
(ZSE4)
Digital vacuum pressure switch specifications
Part number
Display
Pressure setting range
Indicator light
(lights up when ON)
Response frequency
Hysteresis
Hysteresis mode
ZSE4-00--X105 ZSE4B-00--X105 ZSE4E-00--X105
LCD
LCD with backlight
LED
–101 to 10 kPa (–760 to 75 mmHg)
200 kPa
200 Hz (5 ms)
Current consumption
Pressure indication
Self diagnostic function
Variable (can be set from 0)
Fixed (3 digits)
Fluid
Repeatability
Operating voltage
OUT1: Green
OUT2: Red
Green
±3% F.S. or less
±1% F.S. or less
12 to 24VDC (ripple ±10% or less )
25 mA or less
45 mA or less
–26, –27: 50 mA or less
–67: 60 mA or less
3 1/2 digits (character height 8 mm)
(Overcurrent Note)), Excess pressure, Data error,
Presence of pressure at zero clear
500 Vp-p, Pulse width: 1 µS, Start up: 1 nS
Noise resistance
Withstand voltage
1000 VAC 50/60 Hz for 1 min. between external terminal block and case
2 MΩ (at 500 VDC) between external terminal block and case
10 to 500 Hz at whichever is smaller, amplitude 1.5 mm or
acceleration 10 G, in X, Y, Z directions for 2 hrs. each
Impact resistance
100 G in X, Y, Z directions, 3 times each
Note) Not available on analog output type.
ZSE4
ZSE4B
ZSE4E
232
-25 (L)
1 output, NPN open collector 30 V, 80 mA or less
-26 (L)
-67 (L)
1 output, PNP open collector 80 mA or less
-26 (L)
-27 (L)
2 outputs, NPN open collector 30 V, 80 mA or less
-67 (L)
2 outputs, PNP open collector 80 mA or less
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Page 233
Multistage Ejector
Series
ZL112/212
How to Order
Standard type
ZL2 12
Nozzle diameter
12
ø1.2 mm
Lead wire length
0.5 m
2.9 m
Nil
L
Exhaust specification
Built-in silencer
Ported exhaust
Nil
P
Digital vacuum pressure switch
specification
For E (ZSE4) EB (ZSE4B)
Nil
GN
G
E
EB
EE
With digital vacuum pressure switch
None
Adaptor Rc 1/8
With digital vacuum pressure switch ZSE4
With digital vacuum pressure switch ZSE4B
With digital vacuum pressure switch ZSE4E
Lead wire length 0.6 (3.0) m
65 PNP output
For EE (ZSE4E)
Lead wire length 0.6 (3.0) m
67 PNP output
∗ Not required when none (Nil), vacuum adapter
(GN) or vacuum pressure gauge (G) is specified
for vacuum pressure sensor.
Ejector Specifications
With adaptor
Ported exhaust
ZL212
ø1.2 mm x 2
200 l/min (ANR)
126 l /min (ANR)
–84 kPa
0.7 MPa
0.2 to 0.5 MPa
0.4 MPa
5 to 50°C
Vacuum Equipment
Model
Nozzle diameter
Maximum suction flow rate
Air consumption
Supply pressure range
Symbol
Standard type
P
V
233
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Page 234
Vacuum Ejector with Check Valve
Special Order
Product
Vacuum
ZM1-K5LZ-E15L-X142
How to Order
ZM
88
1
K 5 LZ
E15 L
X142
Switch type
M5 x 0.8 through hole
Conforms to the
standard product.
(P.E.)
1.5
600
Electrical entry
Conforms to the standard product.
Supply
112
30
ZM∗∗1∗—K5LZ-E15L-X142
24 VDC
Vacuum
With air supply valve/
vacuum release valve
10
V
26
62
74
70
85.4
P
15.5
H
M
S
Vacuum
20
2-ø4.5
Mounting hole
30
Body type
3-Rc 1/8
Nozzle diameter
05
07
10
13
15
V
13
80
103
113
(118)
8
5 (stroke)
0.5 MPa
0.35 MPa (except 05)
0.45 MPa (13, 15 only)
0.5 mm (H type only)
0.7 mm (except S type)
1.3 mm
1.5 mm (S type only)
Consult with SMC for details.
ZM1-K5LZ-E15L-X235
No.1
No.4
No.2
No.3
SET
H
ZM
88
4
1
How to Order
HYS
L
1
K 5 L Z
E15L
X235
3
2
ø14
Connector pin
number
44
24 VDC
With air supply valve/
vacuum release valve
ø3.4
112
Supply
ZM∗∗1∗—K5LZ-E15L-X235
H
M
S
Vacuum
0.5 MPa
0.35 MPa (except 05)
0.45 MPa (13,15 only)
Body type
10
26
30
85.4
74
70
62
M5 x 0.8 through hole
(P.E.)
P
V
500
1.5
Nozzle diameter
15.5
Vacuum
20
30
05
07
10
13
15
0.5 mm (H type only)
1.3 mm
1.5 mm (S type only)
V
3-Rc 1/8
2-ø4.5
Mounting hole
13
8
5 (stroke)
234
80
103
113
(118)
Consult with SMC for details.
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Page 235
Pad with Check Valve
Special Order
Product
Vacuum
Connecting multiple pads to a single ejector is possible. Prevents leakage from pads that are not used for suction of workpieces.
How to Order
INO-3769-2431-U
INO-3769-1964-C
Pad material N: NBR
S: Silicon rubber
U: Urethane rubber
F: Fluoro rubber
GN: Conductive NBR
GS: Conductive silicon
GF: Conductive fluoro rubber
Pad configuration U: Flat
Pad diameter 06: ø6
(for ZP06, 08U)
08: ø8
Vacuum
12
End pin
Y
Pad material
End pin material
NBR
Silicon rubber
Fluoro rubber
Urethane rubber
Fluoro rubber
Conductive NBR
Conductive silicon
Conductive fluoro rubber
(for ZP20 to 32C)
25: ø25
M5 x 0.8
32: ø32
Width across flats 10
M14 x 1
ø1.6
Model
INO-3769-2431-06U
INO-3769-2431-08U
øA
øB
A B Y
6 7 0.8
8 9 1
Width across
flats 19
I
5 5
20
15.5
M6 x 1
Gasket
Width across
flats 7
Buffer stroke 10: 10 mm
20: 20 mm
30: 30 mm
50: 50 mm
Buffer specification J: Without rotation prevention
K: With rotation prevention
Pad material N: NBR
S: Silicon rubber
U: Urethane rubber
F: Fluoro rubber
GN: Conductive NBR
GS: Conductive silicon rubber
Pad configuration C: Plain with rib
Vacuum
12
End pin
Y
20
15.5
M5 x 0.8
Gasket
Width across
flats 7
ø1.6
øA
øB
Pad material
End pin material
NBR
Silicon rubber
Fluoro rubber
Urethane rubber
Fluoro rubber
Conductive NBR
Conductive silicon
Model
INO-3769-2478-06U
INO-3769-2478-08U
A B Y
6 7 0.8
8 9 1
H
Width across
flats 12
G
Gasket
F
Y
C
D
E
Pad material N: NBR
S: Silicon rubber
U: Urethane rubber
F: Fluoro rubber
GN: Conductive NBR
GS: Conductive silicon
GF: Conductive fluoro rubber
Pad configuration U: Flat
(for ZP06, 08U )
08: ø8
Vacuum Equipment
INO-3769-2478-U
ø1.2
øA
øB
10 mm stroke dimensions
A
Model
INO-3769-1964-20C10 20
INO-3769-1964-25C10 25
INO-3769-1964-32C10 32
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Y
23
1.7
14 26.5 42.5 2.5 55 120
50 1.8
28
55.5 120.5
35 14.5 27 43 2
2.3
Dimensions for other strokes
Stroke
20 mm
30 mm
50 mm
G
+10
+20
+40
H
+4
+14
+59
I
0
+25
Add an appropriate value from the 10 mm stroke
dimensions table.
235
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Page 236
Vacuum Ejector for Water
Soluble Coolant Removal
Special Order
Product
Liquid Removal
ø18.5
INO-3971-77-4
21.5
39.5
57.1
124.1
25
6.5
18
Vacuum
13
27
Exhaust
ø25
13
37
52
Supply
2-ø5.5
ø16.5
ø10
ø12
Rc 3/8
Supply pressure Vacuum pressure
0.5 MPa
–300 mmhg
236
Suction flow
320 l/min (ANR)
Flow consumption
320 l/min (ANR)
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Page 237
Industrial Filters
Industrial filter
Series
FG
FN1
Application
Coolant
Air line maintenance, Coolant
Page
238
240
Industrial Filters
237
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Page 238
Industrial Filters
Series FG
Coolant
Standard Industrial Filters
Vessel Type
Series FGD, FGE, FGG
FGD type
Series FGA, FGB, FGC
FGA type
FGE type
FGB type
FGG type
• FGD type: Ideal for low flow filtration
• FGE type: Ideal for medium flow rate
filtration
• FGG type: Ideal for high flow filtration
• Connection: Rc 3/8 to Rc 2
• Number of elements: 1 to 28
• Operating temperature: Maximum 80°C
FGC type
• FGA type: High flow vertical element type
• FGB type: High flow suspended type
• FGC type: High pressure low flow rate
type
• Connection: Flange JIS10K1B to 6B
Flange JIS and ANS1
1/2B to 1B (FGC type)
• Number of elements: 1 to 83
• Operating temperature: Maximum 80°C
Application example
Bag filter
238
Bag Filter Series FGF
• Highly effective for filtration of high
temperature and high viscosity fluids
• Ideal for high flow filtration
• Easy handling of filtered impurities
• Operating pressure: 0.5 MPa
• Operating temperature: 80°C to 120°C
• Connection: Rc 2
• Number of elements: 1, 3, & 5
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Page 239
Series
FG
Filter Elements
Fiber Element
• Nominal filtration
accuracy: 0.5 to 100 µm
• Low cost, disposable
• Material can be selected
depending on the fluid
• Ideal for relatively large
amount of impurities
• Ideal for use as a
prefilter
• Material: • Cotton
• Viscose rayon
• Glass fiber
Paper Element
• Absolute filtration
accuracy: 0.2, 0.4 µm
• Long life due to high
porosity rate and low
pressure loss
• Ideal for filtration of pure
water used for rinsing in
the semi conductor field,
etc.
• All elements inspected
for quality assurance
• 0.2 µm item: Pre-rinsed
with ultra pure water,
germ removal efficiency
of LRV = 7 or more
PP Fiber Element
EXM-X3
For standard washing
accuracy: 5, 10, 20,
50 µm
• Large filtration capacity
and long element life
• Highly economical fiber
element
• For all cleaning solvents
and prefilter for high
accuracy filters
• Material
Filter material:
Polypropylene
Core: Polypropylene
with brass
accuracy: 5 to 105 µm
• High filtration accuracy
with stainless steel mesh
• Pleated type provides 3
times larger filtration
area than cylinder type
• Easy to wash the
element for regeneration
• With excellent
mechanical strength,
thermal resistance, and
chemical resistance
• Wide operating
temperature range
• High filtration accuracy
with sintered fine
powder metal
• Element can be washed
for regeneration
Bag Element
• Ideal for large amount of
impurities
• Easy to handle since all
impurities are captured
inside the bag element
• Exclusive element for
bag filters
HEPO II Element
EJ
• Unwoven cloth element
with high filtration
accuracy of 99% or
more prevents drainage
of fibers or release of
chemical components
• Washing for electronic
parts and precision
machined parts
• Material
Filter material:
Unwoven long
fiber polyester
Core: Polypropylene
Industrial Filters
accuracy: 5, 10, 20 µm
• Pleated type cartridge
provides large filtration
area
• Material:
Filter paper (cotton,
resin impregnated
phenol)
Membrane Element Micromesh Element Sintered Stainless Steel
Bronze Element
239
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Page 240
Low Maintenance Filter
Air Line
Maintenance
Series FN1
Coolant
No more element replacement!
Our unique element construction with back-flushing capability
The element of the filter is constructed of a series of grooved filter plates and
wave washers places one above the other
Element construction
When compressed
Filter plate
Groove
5 µmm, 20 µmm
Wave washer
Gaps between the filter plates and
wave washers filter foreign matter.
When decompressed
Filter plate
Wave washer
Decompressing the element widens
the gap between filter plates and wave
washers. While the gap is widened,
dust and foreign particles caught
between plates can be washed away
by back flushing the element. This
restores the element and enables
repeated use of the element.
The gaps between filter plates are
equally maintained by the wave
washers to allow stable back-flush
operation.
2
types of elements are available according to
the type of dust.
Cylindrical type (5 µm, 20 µm)
Step type (5 µm)
Maximum
240
flow rate: 40 l/min, 80 l/min.
Options
• Reservoir tank: Series FNR
To store the fluid required to back-flush the clogged element.
• Dust removal filter: Series FND
To remove dust and foreign particles from the fluid after
back-flushing the element.
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Page 241
Operating principle
Series
Flow flow
Air flow
Cylinder
Back-flushing
Cylinder
Filtering
FN1
The element compressed by the cylinder filters the fluid.
As the cylinder extends downward, the element is decompressed.
Air pressure forces the fluid in the reservoir out to the filter and back-flushes the element.
Automatic back-flushing
System circuit allows the automatic back-flushing when the element is clogged.
Air
B
Setting up filters in a line and flushing
the fluid alternately allow continuous
operation during back-flushing.
A
Fluid
Fluid direction
when filtering
Fluid direction
when
back-flushing
Back-flushing
Filtering
OUT
IN
Fluid
Fluid
Industrial Filters
Back-flushing
Filtering
DRAIN
Tank for dust
removal filter
241
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Series
Page 242
FN1
How to Order
FN1 1 0 1 N
10
S 020
Pressure gauge
Without pressure gauge (with plug)
Nil
Housing material
1 Stainless steel SUS304
G Note)
0
1 Note)
G46-15-02 (Wetted part: Brass)
Note) Contact SMC for the pressure gauge
specification for stainless steel wetted
parts.
Element type
Cylindrical type
Step type
Filtration
005 5 µm (Cylindrical type, Step type)
020 20 µm (Cylindrical type)
Note) Only 5 µm of filtration
is available.
Element length
250 mm
1
500 mm
2
Element material
S Stainless steel SUS304
Seal material
NBR
N
FPM
V
Port size
Rc 1
10
Specifications
Filter
Model
Element dimension
Fluid
Operating pressure
Flow rate Note2)
Bore size
Material
Element
Material
Construction
Filtration
Differential pressure proof
Weight
FN1111
FN1101
FN1102
FN1112
ø65 x 250 l
ø65 x 500 l
Cleaning solvent, Coolant Note1)
Max. 1.0 MPa
Max. 80C
40 l/min
80 l/min
Rc 1 (IN, OUT, DRAIN)
Case and cover: Stainless steel 304, O-ring: NBR/FPM
Stainless steel 304
Cylindrical type
Step type
Cylindrical type
Step type
5 µm, 20 µm0
5 µm
5 µm, 20 µm
5 µm
13 kg
0.6 MPa
12.5 kg
15 kg
14.5 kg
Note 1) Refer to the fluid compatibility table on page 243 for details.
Note 2) Values under the following conditions:
Fluid: Water; Filtration: 20 µm; Pressure drop: 0.02 MPa or less.
Operating part
Lock
Model
Auto switch
Fluid
Operating pressure
Unlocking pressure
Locking pressure
Locking direction
CDLQB63-D-F
Without auto switch (built-in magnet) Note 1)
Air
0.2 to 1.0 MPa Note 2)
10 to 70C (with no freezing) Note 3)
0.2 MPa or more
0.05 MPa or more
Extension locking
Note 1) Auto switch must be ordered separately. Refer to Series CLQ (Compact Cylinder with Lock) catalog for
details.
Note 2) The minimum operating pressure for the cylinder is 0.1 MPa when the cylinder port and the lock port are
separately piped.
Note 3) The temperature will be 0°C to 60°C when the auto switch is mounted on the cylinder.
242
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Page 243
Series
FN1
Option
Reservoir
FNR100N-10 FNR100V-10 FNR101N-10 FNR101V-10
Model
Tank capacity
Port size
Bowl & Cover
Material
O-ring
Weight
Applicable filter
1.1 l
1.8 l
Rc 1
Stainless steel 304
FPM
NBR
NBR
1.5 kg
FN11
1
(Element 250 mm)
FPM
1.9 kg
FN11
2
(Element 500 mm)
FND100N-10-M149X0
FND100V-10-M149X0
Dust recovery filter
Model
Port size
Bowl & Cover
Material O-ring
Element
Element filtration
Weight
R1
Stainless steel 304
FPM
NBR
Stainless steel 304
149 µm
7.5 kg
Note) Produced upon receipt of order.
Fluid Compatibility (Guide)
Water
Fluid
Potable
water
Seal material
Nitrile rubber
NBR
Fluoro rubber
FPM
Most compatible
Industrial
water
Compatible
Coolant
Distilled
water
Water
soluble
Petroleum
Oil-based
Gas oil
Kerosene
Xylene
Alkali
Ammonium Sodium
hydroxide hydroxide
Not compatible
Note 1) Contact SMC when PTFE is required for seal material.
Note 2) Contact SMC regarding the compatibility of the seal and pressure gauge.
Cylindrical Type and Step Type Elements
1. Cylinder type element (5 µm, 20 µm)
The cylindrical type construction has a smooth peripheral surface
Cylindrical type
Wave washer
Filter plate
Industrial Filters
since the dimension of the filter plate and wave washer is the same.
The use of the entire peripheral surface of the element to collect dust
allows larger filtration area and easy dust separation. For this
reason, this type of element is ideal for filtering the fluids that contain
dust with the same particle size.
If the cylindrical type element is used for fluids containing dust
particles with a great variance in sizes, large-size dust particles can
cover the element's peripheral surface. This can clog the element
prematurely and thus you may no longer use it.
(Especially for soft and sticky foreign matter)
(Example: the cylindrical type is recommended to filter polishing
chips and the step type for cutting chips)
2. Step type element (5 µm)
The step type construction has an uneven (stepped) surface since the
dimension of the filter plate is smaller than that of the wave washer.
When filtering uneven dust particles, larger particles are caught on the
peripheral surface of the wave washers, and smaller particles are
filtered out with filter plates. This construction can extend the element
life and make the effective filtering possible when filtering fluids
containing dust particles with a great variance in sizes.
Select the appropriate element type (cylindrical or step type)
depending on the dust size variance in the fluid.
Step type
Wave washer
Filter plate
243
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Series
Page 244
FN1
Flow Characteristics (Initial Value)
Test fluid: Potable water Liquid temperature: 17 to 20C (room temperature)
Test method: Per SMC test method (sanitary test stand)
Element length 250 mm: FN111-10-S
Element length 500 mm: FN112-10-S
.1
.05
.05
.005
11
12
-1
0S0
05
(5
µm
)
Pressure loss (MPa)
.01
20
S0
0
-1
21
1
FN
)
µm
FN
11
1
.01
-1
0S0
20
FN
11
(2
0
1
Pressure loss (MPa)
-1
0S0
05
(5
µm
)
.1
.005
0
(2
)
µm
1
FN
.001
.001
10
30
50
70
100
10
30
Q (l/min)
50
70
100
Q (l/min)
Filtration Efficiency (Initial Value)
Fluid: Potable water Flow rate: 20l/min Liquid temperature: Room temperature Test dust: AC course Amount of dust: 0.2mg/min
Test method: Per SMC test method (sanitary test stand, HIAC particle counter)
100
-SS02
0
60
40
20
60
40
20
0
0
5 10
20
50
Particle diameter (µm)
244
-10
80
Filtration efficiency (%)
Filtration efficiency (%)
80
m)
0µ
(2
FN
11
01
N
FN
11
01
N10
-S
00
5
100
)
µm
(5
75
20 25
35
65
Particle diameter (µm)
90
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Page 245
Series
FN1
Blocking Characteristics (Repeatability Characteristics)
Fluid: Potable water Supply pressure: 0.2 MPa Flow rate: 20 l/min Test dust: AC course test dust
Test method: Per SMC test method
Filter part no.: FN1101N-10-020
Element: END100-020 (cylindrical type with 20 µm filtration)
Pressure loss (MPa)
0.2
0.1
0.01
0.01
0.001
0
2
4
0
4.5
100%
2
4
4.5
100%
0
2
4
0
4.6
102%
2
4 0
4.4
98%
2
4
4.5
100%
Time it takes to clog the filter (min)
The values in percentage indicate the percentage of times when the time it took to clog the filter for the first time is set to 100%
Introduce a certain concentration of dust and back-flush the filter when the pressure loss reaches 0.2 MPa. Repeat filtering and back flushing process
(up to five times shown in the graphs).
The graphs above show that the initial pressure loss ( P=0.015 MPa) and time it takes to reach the pressure loss of P=0.2 MPa return to the rough
initial value even after repeated back-flushing.
Measurement Circuit
Dust
feeder
Tank
Industrial Filters
Differential
pressure gauge
Flow
meter
Pressure
gauge
T
Measuring
filter
Pump
Upstream side
sampling
Downstream side
sampling
Automatic particle
measuring instrument
245
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Series
Page 246
FN1
Piping Example
Series FN1 Low Maintenance Filter cannot be used alone.
Please follow the component configuration and operation steps illustrated below.
q
(ø6)
Cylinder for element decompression
and compression
y
w
B
A
r
e
OUT
IN
Series FN1
Liquid (Coolant)
(Connections are all 1.)
Series FNR Reservoir
Tank to store liquid for back flushing
(liquid coolant)
Air
Series FND Dust removal filter
Filter to collect foreign matter in
back flushing
(produced upon receipt of order)
Fluid direction
at the time of filtering
Back flushing
fluid direction
t
Dust
DRAIN
Tank for dust
removal filter
Example of connection device
No.
q
w
e
Description
Device
Cylinder driving valve
5-port solenoid valve (Series SY)
Air supply valve
Process valve (Series VNB)
IN side valve
Coolant valve (Ball type)
No.
Description
r
t
y
OUT side valve
Coolant valve (Series VNC)
Device
Drain valve
Coolant valve (Ball type)
Speed controller
Speed controller (Series AS)
Series inside ( ) indicate SMC products. Contact SMC regarding the valves e to t.
Filtration
Fluid replenishment
w Air introduction
valve
e IN side valve
ON
OFF
Open
Close
Open
Close
r OUT side valve
Open
Close
t Drain valve
Open
Close
4
3
246
2
5
Operation description
Step
e IN side valve: Close
Stops fluid supply to the filter.
2
r OUT side valve: Close
Seals the filter and reservoir containing
fluid.
3
w Air supply valve: Open
Supply the fluid in the reservoir to the
filter.
4
q Cylinder driving valve:
Lowers the cylinder to decompress the
element.
5
t Drain valve: Open
1
q Cylinder driving valve:
2
3
4
5
w Air supply valve: Close Stops pressure feed.
t Drain valve: Open
r OUT side valve: Open
e IN side valve: Open
1
1
1
ON
2
4
5
∗ Back flushing
switch
Filtration
Back flushing Fluid replenishment
3
ON
OFF
∗ The M/C stop signal and a signal for element clogging
(differential signal switch) are used to start back flushing.
Numbers in the chart indicate the operation order for
each operation.
At the time of
filtering operation
q Cylinder
valve driving
Back flushing
start
Back flushing
Actuation example
OFF
The fluid in the reservoir passes through
the decompressed element and forces out
to the tank.
Raises the cylinder to compress the
element.
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Page 247
Series
FN1
Caution
1. Cylinder for element decompression and compression
Do not overthrottle the speed controller when adjusting the
cylinder retraction speed (element decompression).
If the element is decompressed too slowly, the back flushing may become ineffective.
2. Reservoir installation
Installation of a reservoir (optional) is recommended to store
fluid for back flushing. If a reservoir is not going to be
installed, make sure to allow piping capacity equivalent to a
size of reservoir between the low maintenance filter and air
supply valve.
3. Air pressure
Set the pressure of the air supply valve to 0.25 to 0.3 MPa.
Increasing the pressure will not improve the back flushing
effect.
Use the same set pressure for the supply pressure of the
lock cylinder. Exceeding this pressure range may increase
the load applied to the filtering plate when the element is
compressed, causing malfunction.
4. Air pressure
Devise the by-pass circuit on the upstream side of IN side
valve to prevent the line pressure during back flushing from
rising and to protect the pump.
5. Maintenance
The filter should be back flushed until the differential pressure reaches 0.1 MPa to avoid a drop in the flow rate due to
the element clogging and to maintain back flushing efficiency.
Time it takes to clog the element varies depending on the
dust condition. Monitor the clogging condition of the element
using a detection switch for differential pressure.
The detection switch for differential pressure is sold separately. Contact SMC for more information.
Since the element of this low maintenance filter provides
rough filtration efficiency (with conventional notch wire level),
it can be used as a pre-filter to extend the life of the check
filter depending on the fluid condition in use.
Installing these low maintenance filters side by side to use
them alternately enables continuous operation during back
flushing. Use an element with 500 mm in length for highly
contaminated fluid. A sufficient flow rate can be ensured by
installing two to three low maintenance filters in a row in
case of the insufficient flow capacity.
Industrial Filters
247
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Series
Page 248
FN1
Construction
r
i
u
y
o
q
t
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
w
e
DRAIN
DRAIN
FN11
2
For element length ø65 x 500 mm
Parts list
No.
Replacement parts
Description
Material
Note
1
Cover
2
Bowl
SCS13
3
Element
Stainless steel
304
ø65 x 250 mm
4
Compact
cylinder with lock
FN11
1
FN11
2
SCS13
No.
Description
5
O-ring
6
Seal
7
O-ring
ø65 x 500 mm
8
Scraper
CDLQB63-30D-F
9
O-ring
Material
NBR
FPM
CDLQB63-50D-F
Replacement parts: Seal kit
248
Model
Order no.
Material
FN11
N
FN11
V
KT-FN11N
NBR
KT-FN11V
FPM
Note
Items t through o
from the above chart.
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Page 249
Series
FN1
Dimensions
∗ Rc 1/4
0°
315°
45°
IN
OUT
B.C
.D2
30
135°
225°
ø42
4-ø11
G46-15-02
Pressure gauge port size Rc 1/4
Note) Use the Pc 1/4 port marked with an asterisk when designing
an air release circuit.
Rc 1/4
Head end cylinder port
108
D (Stroke)
Rc 1/4
Rod end cylinder port
Dustproof cover
(Manual lock release)
Rc 1/8
Unlocking port
OUT
IN
C
(125)
A
B
(ø102)
195
Rc 1
Industrial Filters
DRAIN
(ø270)
Dimensions
(mm)
Model
Bore size (Nominal size B)
FN111
FN112
Rc 1
A
B
C
D
610
(730)
(844)
20
860
(1000)
(1134)
40
249
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Series
Page 250
FN1
Options
Reservoir
Dust removal filter
108
32
70
70
(80)
P.C.
D.22
50
AIR VENT
G1/4
4-ø11 180°
0
90°
135°
(266)
q
(43)
q
45°
270°
225°
(60)
0°
315°
IN
OUT
e
e
B
r
t
A
ø188
w
327
(519)
ø150
w
ø84
OUT
120
2-R1
r
53
IN
DRAIN
G1/4
Dimensions
Model
(mm)
Bore size (Nominal size B)
FNR100 NV -10
FNR101NV -10
Rc 1
Parts list
A
B
No.
194
(257)
332
(385)
1
2
3
Description
Material
Cover
Stainless steel 304
Bowl
Stainless steel 304
V-band
Stainless steel 304
Note
Parts list
No.
1
2
3
Description
Material
Note
Stainless steel 304
No.
Bowl
Stainless steel 304
4
Element
V-band
Stainless steel 304
5
O-ring
Replacement parts
No.
4
250
Replacement parts
Cover
Description
O-ring
Material
Note
NBR
JIS B 2401-1A-P85
FPM
JIS B 2401-4D-P85
Description
Material
Stainless steel 304
Note
EZH710AS-149
NBR
JIS B 2401-1A-P185
FPM
JIS B 2401-4D-P185
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Page 251
Other (CD-ROM)
Application
Model Selection Software Ver. 3.00
Actuator
Actuator
Page
252
257
259
Other
(CD-ROM)
251
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Page 252
Model Selection Software
Ver. 3.00
Actuator
Pneumatic equipment with minimum energy consumption is automatically selected.
Automatic selection of optimum product groups that meet your energy-saving requirements
Highly accurate calculation with dynamic characteristics simulation (within ±10%)
Calculation of shock absorbing capacity and estimation of dew condensation probability
Compliant with ISO6358 flow characteristics standard
Multiple users can simultaneously access to this program from the website.
Newly added functions for Ver. 3.00
Characteristics Calculation of
Branch and Interflow Circuits
Model Selection of General Circuits
Automatically selects the most suitable equipment.
Interactively enter the
specifications and operating conditions required.
When a series is selected,
the software automatically
selects the model number
of the minimal equipment
that meets the requirements and shows the calculation result.
Characteristics Calculation of
Manifold Circuit
Characteristic Calculation of General
Circuits
Use this simulation procedure when the desired
model number is known,
or when verifying the current system.
Make changes to the model number and conditions,
etc., of the model selection
result, and then run a new
simulation.
Shock Absorber Selection
By entering the bumping
and operating conditions,
the optimum shock absorber part number is selected.
A comprehensive number of
products registered in the database
58 cylinder
cylinder series
series
58
16 solenoid
solenoid valve
valve series
series
16
16
flow
control
equipment
series
16 flow control equipment series
Contains both
both Japanese
Japanese and
and English
English versions.
versions.
Contains
252
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Page 253
Model Selection Software Ver. 3.00 can handle branch
and interflow
circuits (single valve and multiple cylinders) or a manifold circuit
(multiple valves and cylinders).
Characteristics Calculation of Branch and Interflow Circuits
Compatible with max. 10
cylinders
1
2
10
Single and double acting cylinders can be
operated at the same time using a single
valve.
Duplicating, adding or deleting a branch
circuit is possible.
Linked to shock absorbing capacity
calculation and shock absorber selection.
Entering individual specifications
The type of solenoid valve, part nos. of piping at interflow, solenoid
valve and silencer as well as operating condition should be entered.
Part nos. of cylinder, flow control equipment, piping components
as well as operating and load conditions should be entered.
Total circuit result
Individual circuit result
Other
(CD-ROM)
Entering general specifications
Characteristics such as full stroke time, warm-up time for piston,
mean velocity and stroke end velocity are outputted.
253
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Page 254
Charactiristics Calculation of a Manifold Circuit
Compatible with max. 20
solenoid valve stations
1
2
3
4
20
Individual SUP/EXH
Specifying the manifold SUP/EXH points is
possible.
Specifying the number of valves that operate
simultaneously is possible.
Linked to shock absorbing capacity
calculation and shock absorber selection.
Entering general specifications
Entering individual specifications
Part nos. of manifold, silencer as well as operating conditions
should be entered.
Part nos. of cylinder, solenoid valve, flow control equipment, piping components as well as operating and load conditions should be entered.
Total circuit result
Individual circuit result
Characteristics such as full stroke time, warm-up time for piston,
mean velocity and stroke end velocity are outputted.
254
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Page 255
Simplified Operation
Limitation of equipment
Setting the specific parameters
Equipment to be selected is limited.
The unit of measurements and the input values that are
most frequently used should be entered.
Help Function
Contains definition of terminologies, explanations of functions, calculation methods, updated version information, detailed explanations of registered products, etc. Press F1 key to display.
Prior to use
Configulation of the functions
Updates
Database of registered equipment
Supplement
Glossary
Dynamic characteristics analysis method
Flow characteristics conform to ISO.
Condensation
Load
Load ratio
Air consumption and required air volume
Shock absorber selection
Specific moment calculation
Other
(CD-ROM)
255
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Page 256
Air Blow
Air Tool
Coolant
Various calculations required for the
pneumatic energy saving improvement are possible. This program contributes to the energy savings of a
pneumatic system from the design stage to analysis of the
present state and simulation of possible improvements.
This energy saving program was developed
to provide a better understanding about the
different states of air (e.g. consumption, flow,
pressure, and humidity) between the air
supply and related equipment within a facility.
Calculation of gas, liquid, and steam
Pressure/Flow rate graph
Conductance search
Simplified input operation
Air Supply
Compressed air cost
Energy conversion
Unit conversion
Terminal
Equipment
Air consumption
Selection of an air-blow system and
calculation of its characteristics
Flow rate and conductance
Composition of conductance
Conductance search
Regulators
and Tanks
Selection of regulator
Selection of booster
Selection of air tank
Charge and discharge
to/from tank
Dryer
Selection of air dryer
Selection of aftercooler
Selection of air filter
Conversion of humidity
and dew points
Drain amount calculation
State of air change
Piping
Pressure drop of main piping
Air pipeline network
Air leakage cost
Coolant pipelines
Supply of “Energy saving program Ver.2-Web service version”
“Energy saving program Ver.2-Web service version” on the Internet is registered on SMC’s web site (http://www.smcworld.com).
It provides both Japanese and English versions.
256
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Page 257
Energy Saving Program
Menu
Pneumatic
basic
calculation
Calculation
for energy
savings at
a plant
Setting of
devices
● Humidity conversion
● Drain volume calculation
● State change of the air
● Flow rate and conductance
● Synthesis of conductance
● Replenishment and
discharge of a tank
● Volume of air consumption
for the devices
● Conductance search
● Cost for air compression
● Power for compressors
● Energy conversion
● Pressure decrease of the
main piping
● Maximum recommended flow
rate for the main piping
● Calculation for a pneumatic
line net
● Loss cost resulting from air
leakage
● Blow nozzle selection for air
● Characteristic calculation
for an air blow nozzle
● Selection of upstream
piping for a blow nozzle
● Characteristic calculation
for the upstream piping
● Selection of a regulator
● Selection of a booster
regulator
● Selection of an air tank
● Selection of an air dryer
● Selection of an aftercooler
● Selection of an air filter
● Calculation of gases, liquids
Other
and saturated steam
calculations
● Coolant circuits
Indicates the added features and improvements in ver. 2.
Selection and characteristic calculation for an air blow system
It is possible to select and calculate the characteristics of different air blow nozzles and upstream piping.
Pressure distribution
can also be calculated.
Easy visual understanding
with the help of graphs
Air consumption of devices
Air consumption calculations for actuators and air blowers are possible.
Cost can be calculated.
Accumulation function
The air consumption of each device can be calculated. The total
volume of air consumption by device and line can be determined, as
well as the total cost.
A total of 88 different actuators are registered.
Complicated calculations no
longer need to be manually
performed.
The program offers quick
calculation results!
Other
(CD-ROM)
Air consumption saving is possible by
setting 2 different pressures.
Complicated calculations such as the volume of air consumption and pressure drop are no longer required.
Calculation results can be acquired by simply inputting user conditions.
Now, the program can calculate and simulate the followings which can not be conducted manually:
• Pressure decrease and flow rate calculation in a pneumatic pressure line net (divert piping and loop piping).
• Pressure change simulation of replenishment and discharge of a tank.
257
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Page 258
Energy Saving Program
Pneumatic line net
Calculation of pressure loss in a compound pipeline networks is possible.
It is possible to successfully work with more complicated
pipeline networks by using this new version.
The network lattice number is increased from 7×4 to 13×8.
Simplified input operation
Simultaneous input is possible when duplicate conditions are entered.
Possible to work with diverted
piping and loop piping
Calculations can be performed on complicated pipeline networks
which cannot be manually calculated.
Possible to work with a variety of pipelines.
Charge and discharge
to/from a tank
Calculation on the charge and discharge
between two tanks has been added.
Calculation of gases, liquids
and saturated steam
It is possible to work with a
variety of gases and fluids by
entering their specific gravity.
Improvement of energy
savings consciousness
258
Cost calculations for air and energy conversions,
CO2 discharge are possible, as a result by
studying these values, energy savings
consciousness can be improved and promoted.
Selection of devices
Selection of the following has
been added: Aftercooler, air filter,
regulator, booster regulator, and
air tank.
Search for the conductance
of registered devices
It is possible to search for the
conductance of devices registered
in this program.
The program can be used
globally because it uses the JIS B
8390 (ISO standard) flow rate
measuring method.
Our flow rate calculation formula
conforms to ISO 6358 and its
accuracy is an improvement over
the existing formula.
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Page 259
Note: CD is available only in the
Japanese version.
For the English version, visit
http://www.smcworld.com.
New CAD Electronic Catalog
Actuator
“SMC Pneumatics CAD System” and “SMC Electronic Catalog II
Search System can be viewed on the same screen.
The location of the stored/saved file can be decided by the user.
Output data format: DXF, MCADAM, DMNDOS, and AutoCAD
Programs available on a CD:
Model Selection Program for Rotary Actuators
Calculation of Moment for Guide Cylinders
The output data is linked
to the complete part
numbers.
CAD data can be downloaded for
the “SMC Electronic Catalog II
Search System”.
Clicking on the buttons can start the program when
the complete part numbers have been programmed.
The following type of specifications are programmed in “SMC Pneumatics CAD System Ver. 2.6”.
1) Specifications for outputting data compatible with the complete part numbers among the main product line. (Pneumatic CAD System)
Data output compatible with the complete part numbers from the main product line. (Pneumatic CAD System)
OS
Windows98/Me/XP/2000/NT4(SP6)
CPU
Pentium 150 or higher is recommended.
Display
800 x 600 pixels or more
Registered products
Determination of part numbers
Main
functions
186 series
The complete part number will be created automatically. (Directly input part no. or search by part no., name, or series.)
Data can be outputted.
Drawing data output according to the complete part numbers in a parametric way.
Able to confirm CAD drawings.
Confirmation of selected drawings (dimensional display, CAD measurement as desired), Selection of
background screen color (White/Black)
OLE compliant
Output CAD drawing in a BMP, EMF, or WMF format.
Able to download CAD drawings.
Output data format
Output sheet can be selected among 6 views.
1) M/CADAM (Ver.3, Helix) direct output
2) DMNDOS, and DXF (equivalent to GX3)
3) Direct output to AutoCAD(up to 2002) screen (Ver. 2.4)
2) Specifications for outputting data from all products. (Electronic Catalog II Search System)
Data output compatible with all the part numbers of the products. (Electronic Catalog II Search System)
OS
Windows98/Me/XP/2000/NT4 (SP6)
CPU
Pentium 150 or higher is recommended.
Display
800 x 600 pixels or more
Registered products
652 series
Can confirm the file contents by searching the registered file from the product's classification.
Two types of file contents
1) Drawing data which contains the multiple graphics in a single file.
2) Drawing data based on the complete part numbers.
Output data format
1) Data output in a DXF format
2) Data output in a DOS (DMNDOS) format
Other
(CD-ROM)
Main
functions
Search by product classiication
Note) Please consult with us for additional data not listed above because it is available in another CD-ROM.
259
Table of Contents
Front matter 1, 2
Recognizing the current state
3
What are approach energy saving measures?
4
Energy Saving Proposals
Proposal
1
Proposal
2
Non-operation
Proposal
3
Air Blow
8, 9, 10
Proposal
4
Air Tools
11
Proposal
5
Air Leakage
Proposal
6
14
Proposal
7
Paint Stirring
15
Proposal
8
Actuators
16, 17
Proposal
9
Vacuum Ejectors
18, 19
Proposal
10
Liquid Removal
20, 21
Proposal
11
22, 23
Proposal
12
Cooling Water
24
Proposal
13
Hydraulic Clamp
25
Proposal
14
26
Table of Contents 1
Front matter 5, 6
7
12, 13
Table of Contents
Front matter 1, 2
Recognizing the current state
3
What are approach energy saving measures?
4
Energy Saving Proposals
Proposal
1
Proposal
2
Non-operation
Proposal
3
Air Blow
8, 9, 10
Proposal
4
Air Tools
11
Proposal
5
Air Leakage
Proposal
6
14
Proposal
7
Paint Stirring
15
Proposal
8
Actuators
16, 17
Proposal
9
Vacuum Ejectors
18, 19
Proposal
10
Liquid Removal
20, 21
Proposal
11
22, 23
Proposal
12
Cooling Water
24
Proposal
13
Hydraulic Clamp
25
Proposal
14
26
Table of Contents 1
Front matter 5, 6
7
12, 13
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Page 260
Safety Instructions
These safety instructions are intended to prevent a hazardous situation and/or
equipment damage. These instructions indicate the level of potential hazard by a
label of "Caution", "Warning" or "Danger". To ensure safety, be sure to observe
ISO 4414 Note 1), JIS B 8370 Note 2) and other safety practices.
Caution :
Operator error could result in injury or equipment damage.
Warning :
Operator error could result in serious injury or loss of life.
Danger :
In extreme conditions, there is a possible result of serious injury or loss of life.
Note 1) ISO 4414: Pneumatic fluid power--General rules relating to systems.
Note 2) JIS B 8370: General Rules for Pneumatic Equipment
Warning
1. The compatibility of the pneumatic equipment is the responsibility of the
person who designs the pneumatic system or decides its specifications.
Since the products specified here are used in various operating conditions, their compatibility for the specific
pneumatic system must be based on specifications or post analysis and/or tests to meet the specific
requirements. The expected performance and safety assurance are the responsibility of the person who has
determined the compatibility of the system. This person should continuously review the suitability of all items
specified, referring to the latest catalog information with a view to giving due consideration to any possibility of
equipment failure when configuring a system.
2. Only trained personnel should operate pneumatically operated machinery and
equipment.
Compressed air can be dangerous if handled incorrectly. Assembly, handling or repair of pneumatic systems
should be performed by trained and experienced operators.
3. Do not service machinery/equipment or attempt to remove components until
safety is confirmed.
1. Inspection and maintenance of machinery/equipment should only be performed once measures to prevent
falling or runaway of the driver objects have been confirmed.
2. When equipment is removed, confirm that safety process as mentioned above. Turn off the supply pressure for
this equipment and exhaust all residual compressed air in the system.
3. Before machinery/equipment is restarted, take measures to prevent quick extension of a cylinder piston rod, etc.
4. Contact SMC if the product will be used in any of the following conditions:
1. Conditions and environments beyond the given specifications, or if product is used outdoors.
2. Installation on equipment in conjunction with atomic energy, railway, air navigation, vehicles, medical
equipment, food and beverages, recreation equipment, emergency stop circuits, clutch and brake circuits in
press applications, or safety equipment.
3. An application which has the possibility of having negative effects on people, property, or animals, requiring
special safety analysis.
4. If the products are used in an interlock circuit, prepare a double interlock style circuit with a mechanical
protection function for the prevention of a breakdown. And, examine the devices periodically if they function
normally or not.
Specific Product Precautions
Be sure to read specific product precautions in each product catalog before handling.
260
ECOPS.qxd
05.9.5 11:29 AM
Page 261
EUROPE
AUSTRIA
SMC Pneumatik GmbH
BELGIUM
SMC Pneumatics N.V./S.A.
BULGARIA
SMC Industrial Automation Bulgaria EOOD
CROATIA
SMC Industrijska automatika d.o.o.
CZECH REPUBLIC
SMC Industrial Automation CZ s.r.o.
DENMARK
SMC Pneumatik A/S
ESTONIA
SMC Pneumatics Estonia OÜ
FINLAND
SMC Pneumatics Finland OY
FRANCE
SMC Pneumatique SA
GERMANY
SMC Pneumatik GmbH
HUNGARY
SMC Hungary Ipari Automatizálási Kft.
IRELAND
SMC Pneumatics (Ireland) Ltd.
ITALY
SMC Italia S.p.A.
LATVIA
SMC Pnuematics Latvia SIA
NETHERLANDS
SMC Pneumatics BV.
NORWAY
SMC Pneumatics Norway A/S
POLAND
SMC Industrial Automation Polska Sp.z.o.o.
ROMANIA
SMC Romania s.r.l.
RUSSIA
SMC Pneumatik LLC.
SLOVAKIA
SMC Priemyselná automatizáciá, s.r.o.
SLOVENIA
SMC INDUSTRIJSKA AVTOMATIKA d.o.o.
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
SMC España, S.A.
SWEDEN
SMC Pneumatics Sweden AB
SWITZERLAND
SMC Pneumatik AG.
UK
SMC Pneumatics (U.K.) Ltd.
ASIA
CHINA
SMC (China) Co., Ltd.
HONG KONG
SMC Pneumatics (Hong Kong) Ltd.
INDIA
SMC Pneumatics (India) Pvt. Ltd.
INDONESIA
PT. SMC Pneumatics Indonesia
MALAYSIA
SMC Pneumatics (S.E.A.) Sdn. Bhd.
PHILIPPINES
SHOKETSU-SMC Corporation
SINGAPORE
SMC Pneumatics (S.E.A.) Pte. Ltd.
SOUTH KOREA
SMC Pneumatics Korea Co., Ltd.
TAIWAN
SMC Pneumatics (Taiwan) Co., Ltd.
THAILAND
SMC Thailand Ltd.
NORTH AMERICA
CANADA
SMC Pneumatics (Canada) Ltd.
MEXICO
SMC Corporation (Mexico) S.A. de C.V.
USA
SMC Corporation of America
SOUTH AMERICA
ARGENTINA
SMC Argentina S.A.
BOLIVIA
SMC Pneumatics Bolivia S.R.L.
BRAZIL
SMC Pneumaticos Do Brazil Ltda.
CHILE
SMC Pneumatics (Chile) S.A.
VENEZUELA
SMC Neumatica Venezuela S.A.
OCEANIA
AUSTRALIA
SMC Pneumatics (Australia) Pty. Ltd.
NEW ZEALAND
SMC Pneumatics (N.Z.) Ltd.
1-16-4 Shimbashi, Minato-ku, Tokyo 105-8659 JAPAN
Tel: 03-3502-2740 Fax: 03-3508-2480
URL http://www.smcworld.com
SMC supports innovations in energy saving
production systems.
As countermeasures for global
warming are coming into effect,
"energy savings" has become a key
theme for corporate reforms.
At the Kyoto Conference on Climate
Change (December 1997), a 6%
reduction of CO2 emissions from the
1990 emission rate was set as a
target to be achieved by 2010. Also,
as amendment of the energy saving
law in Japan suggests, it is predicted
that the trend for energy savings
involving corporations will become
increasingly demanding.
In this climate, SMC will strive for
innovations of production systems
with energy savings in mind. With
cooperation from customers, we will
promote energy saving programs for
pneumatic systems.
© 2005 SMC Corporation All Rights Reserved
Specifications are subject to change without prior notice
and any obligation on the part of the manufacturer.
Proposals for Energy Saving
Pneumatic Systems
SMC'S GLOBAL MANUFACTURING, DISTRIBUTION AND SERVICE NETWORK
Proposals for Energy Saving Pneumatic Systems
CAT.E02-21 B
D-DN
1st printing FR printing JV 120DN Printed in Japan.
This catalog is printed on recycled paper with concern for the global environment.

SMC ECOLOGY PNEUMATICS SYSTEM

Transcription

Similar documents

0.4 ms - SMC ETech

HT-METAL QUICKSTART GUIDE

MODEL ASC-TC612.qxd

smart pac iii

DN100 Reflux Valve

Minutes

OPV installation on Nuova Simonelli Oscar II

VP-1 Leaflet 26/2/01

Renovators Supply, Inc.© www.rensup.com

Sikaflex®-292i FOR LONG LASTING BONDS